Manual 04/2004 Edition

sinumerik
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components

Operator Panels
OP 010 Operator Panel Front OP 010S Operator Panel Front OP 010C Operator Panel Front OP 012 Operator Panel Front TP 012 Operator Panel Front TP 015A Operator Panel Front OP 015 Operator Panel Front OP 015A Operator Panel Front 15”TFT OP (incl.VLR) 15”TFT OP (excl.VLR) Direct Control Key Submodule PCU 20 PCU 50 PCU 70 Distributed Installation (VL) Distributed installation (TCU) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components
Manual

Handheld Units
Handheld Terminal HT 6 Handheld Unit/Distributor Box Mini Handheld Unit 17 18 19

Machine Control Panels
Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 Machine Control Panel OP 032S Pushbutton Panel PP 012 MPI Interface for Customer OP 19” Machine Control Panel 21 22 23 24 25 26

Keyboards
Standard PC Keyboard MF–II CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 27 28 29 30

Storage Devices
Floppy Disk Drive 3.5”
Floppy Disk Drive 3.5” (USB) 31 32 33 34

Heat Dissipation Connection Conditions 04.2004 Edition Appendix

3ls

SINUMERIK Documentation
Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” column. Status code in the “Remarks” column: A . . . . . New documentation. B . . . . . Unrevised reprint with new order no. C . . . . . Revised edition with new status. If factual changes have been made on the page in relation to the same software version, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page. Edition 06.94 02.95 04.95 09.95 03.96 08.97 12.97 12.98 08.99 04.00 10.00 09.01 11.02 06.03 11.03 04.04 Order No. 6FC5 297-0AA50-0BP0 6FC5 297-2AA50-0BP0 6FC5 297-2AA50-0BP1 6FC5 297-3AA01-0BP0 6FC5 297-3AA50-0BP0 6FC5 297-4AA50-0BP0 6FC5 297-4AA50-0BP1 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP0 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP1 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP2 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP0 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP1 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP2 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP3 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP3 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0 Remarks A C C Description of differences C C C C C C C C C C C C

This book is part of the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD) Edition Order No. Remarks 09.04 6FC5 298-7CA00-0BG1 C
Trademarks SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, SINUMERIKr and SIMODRIVEr are trademarks of Siemens. Other product names used in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third parties, could infringe the rights of their owners.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or for service cases. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement. Subject to changes without prior notice

Further information is available on the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol This publication was produced with Interleaf V7. The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including those created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

Siemens AG, 1994–2004. All rights reserved

Order No. 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0 Printed in Germany

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Preface
Notes for the reader
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized on three levels:

S General documentation S User documentation S Manufacturer/service documentation.
For more detailed information on SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC publications and other publications covering all SINUMERIK controls, please contact your local Siemens office.

Hotline

If you have queries regarding the control system, please contact the following hotline: A&D Technical Support Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222 Fax: ++49-(0)180-5050-223 Email: adsupport@siemens.com

If you have queries regarding documentation (suggestions, corrections), please send a fax to the following fax address: Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176 Email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de Fax form: See the feedback page at the end of the document

Internet address for SINUMERIK Quality assurance

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

The products listed in this manual are marketed and sold in accordance with a management system certified by DQS. DQS certifies according to:

S DIN EN ISO 9001:

Quality management

S DIN EN ISO 14001: Environmental management
SINUMERIK 840D powerline
Improved-performance variants

S SINUMERIK 840D powerline and S SINUMERIK 840DE powerline
will be available from 09.2001 onwards. For a list of available powerline modules, please refer to Section 1.1 of the Hardware Description /PHD/.

SINUMERIK 810D powerline

Improved-performance variants

S SINUMERIK 810D powerline and S SINUMERIK 810DE powerline
will be available from 12.2001 onwards. For a list of available powerline modules, please refer to Section 1.1 of the Hardware Description /PHC/.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

v

Preface

04.04

Target readership?

S Configuring engineers S Electricians and fitters S Servicing and operating personnel
The information contained in this manual explains how to install the operator components for the 840D numerical controls and describes how to maintain and service them.

Content of this manual

Safety notices

This manual contains information which you should observe in order to ensure your own personal safety, as well to avoid material damage. Information shown with a warning triangle indicates a risk of personal injury. Explanation of symbols used:

! ! !

Danger Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Warning Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Caution Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.

Caution Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Notice Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

Note Note refers to an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or part of the documentation which is particularly relevant in the current context.

vi

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

Preface

Machine Manufacturer This symbol appears in this documentation whenever the machine manufacturer can influence or modify the described functional behavior. Please observe the information provided by the machine manufacturer.

Warnings and safety information

To safeguard your own personal safety as well as protect the product described and all connected equipment and machines against damage, please read and observe the following warnings and safety information.

!

Warning Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are at hazardous voltage levels. Allowing unqualified persons access to the equipment/system or failure to heed the safety information could result in serious physical injury or substantial property damage. Only properly qualified personnel who have been trained to erect, install, start up or operate the product should be allowed to work on the equipment/system.

Should it be necessary to test or take measurements on live equipment, then the specifications and procedures defined in Accident Prevention Regulation VBG 4.0 must be adhered to, in particular § 8 “Permissible deviations when working on live components”. Suitable electric tools must be used.

!

Warning

S Repairs to equipment supplied by Siemens must always be carried out by
SIEMENS after-sales service personnel or by repair centers authorized by SIEMENS. Parts or components must always be replaced by parts or components specified in the spare parts list.

S Always disconnect the power supply before you open the unit. S EMERGENCY STOP devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE
0113) must remain operative in all operating modes of the automation device. Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP device must not result in any uncontrolled or undefined system restart.

S Wherever faults in the automation device have the potential to cause substantial material damage or even human injury, i.e. they can present a danger, additional external precautions must be taken or devices provided which will guarantee or enforce a safe operating state in the event of a fault (e.g. through independent limit value switches, mech. interlocks, etc.).

!

Caution

S Connecting and signal leads must be installed such that inductive and capacitive interference cannot impair automation functions.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

vii

Preface

04.04

ESDS instructions

Components which can be destroyed by ElectroStatic Discharge Important Handling ESDS boards:

!

S When handling components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge, it must be ensured that personnel, the workstation and packaging are well grounded.

S As a general rule, electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary. Never hold PCBs in such a way that you touch the module pins or printed conductors.

S You may only touch ESDS components if
– – you are continuously grounded via an ESDS bracelet, you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in conjunction with an ESDS floor surface.

S Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS surface, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS transport containers).

S Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television
sets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and the screen).

S Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be charged and are highly insulating, e.g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers.

S Measurements may be taken on the boards only if
– – the measuring equipment is grounded (e.g. via the protective conductor) or in the case of floating measuring instruments, the probe is briefly discharged before a measurement is taken (e.g. through contact with bare control housing).

Proper use

The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog, and only in combination with the equipment and components recommended and approved by SIEMENS (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D/FM-NC).

J

viii

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.5 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Softkey labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 1-21 1-21 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-24 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-26 1-26 1-27 1-28 1-28 1-29 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-36 2-37 2-39 2-40 2-40 2-40 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-47 3-48 3-48 3-48 3-49 3-51 3-52 3-52

OP 010S Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 Operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

OP 010C Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing key covers of short-stroke keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

ix

Contents

04.04

4

OP 012 Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Softkey labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts/accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-53 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-57 4-57 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-64 4-65 5-67 5-68 5-69 5-69 5-70 5-70 5-70 5-71 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-74 5-75 6-77 6-79 6-79 6-81 6-82 6-82 6-82 6-84 6-85 6-86 6-87 6-87 6-89 6-91

5

TP 012 Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling the TP 012 and PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts/accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

TP 015A Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.8 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling TP 015A and PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Softkey labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example when calculating the cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

Contents

7

OP 015 Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.4 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 Operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts/accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-93 7-94 7-95 7-95 7-95 7-96 7-96 7-96 7-97 7-99 7-100 7-100 7-100 8-103 8-104 8-104 8-105 8-106 8-106 8-106 8-108 8-109 8-110 8-111 8-111 8-112 9-113 9-114 9-115 9-116 9-116 9-117 9-117 9-118 9-119 9-120 9-120 9-121 9-123 9-125 9-127 9-131 9-132 9-134

8

OP 015A Operator Panel Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling OP 015A and PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Softkey labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare part replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide, incl. Videolink Receiver . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6 9.4.7 9.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine control panel for turning and milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Videolink transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware interfaces – overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface assignment for operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface assignment for MCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface assignment for videolink transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal status displays (LEDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

xi

.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination with TP 015A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 10 Operator panel front . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 9. Spare parts . .2 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 11. . . . . Machine control panel . . . . . . . . . .04 9. . . . . . Interface assignment for operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . .1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .2 11. . . . . . Combination with OP 012 . . . . . . . . . . .3 10. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . Videolink transmitter . . . . . . .2 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat dissipation . .2 10. . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . without Videolink Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 View . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . .3 9. . .7 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 9. . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface assignments for machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-134 9-135 9-139 9-140 9-140 9-142 9-143 9-147 9-148 9-152 10-153 10-154 10-155 10-156 10-156 10-156 10-157 10-158 10-158 10-158 10-158 10-161 10-162 10-162 10-164 10-169 10-172 10-174 10-178 11-179 11-180 11-182 11-182 11-186 11-188 12-191 12-192 12-193 12-193 12-194 12-195 12-196 12-197 15” TFT Operator Panel. . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. . . . . . . . .2 12. . . Interfaces on left side of casing . .4 10. . . Key layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 10.6 9. . . . . . . . 11. . . .3 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 10. . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .9 Overview . . . . . Operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 04. . . . . . . . Mechanical design . . . . . . . . Mounting bracket on underside of casing . . . . . . . Mounting . Operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces and connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . .2 9. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . 12. . 12 PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable . . . .2 10. . 10. . . . . . . . .2 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 12.5. . . . . 11 Direct Control Key Submodule . . . . .5. .8 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCP . . . . . . . . . . .4 10. . . . . . . Combination with OP 015A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 9. System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine control panel for turning and milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Videolink transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . .3 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces on right side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware interfaces – overview . . . . . . . . 416 mm Wide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii  Siemens AG. . . . . . .8 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts for the machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin assignments . . . . . . Heat dissipation . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.1 14. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . 14 PCU 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . 12-197 12-198 12-199 12-199 13-201 13-201 13-203 13-204 13-204 13-205 13-205 13-205 13-206 13-206 13-207 13-208 13-208 13-212 13-215 13-216 13-217 13-217 13-218 13-220 13-221 13-223 13-223 13-223 13-225 14-229 14-230 14-231 14-231 14-232 14-232 14-233 14-233 14-234 14-234 14-234 14-235 14-236 14-236 14-237 14-238 PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . Interfaces on right side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . .2 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . Expansion boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on installation .8 13. . . . .2 13. Booting . . .5 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 14. . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 View . . . . .2 13. . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 13. . . . . . .3 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .2 14. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. Technical data .3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 13 Assembly with operator panel front and installation . . . . . . . . Preparing for operation . . . . . . . .4 13.1 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. .4 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 13. Start-up . . . . . . . .6 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . .2 13. . . . . . Notes on installation .4 12. . .8. . . . . . . . . . . .4 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts .1 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2. . . . . . . . . . . . Working with PC cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004. . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ports on bottom side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . Casing rear side . .3. . . . . . .2 13. . . . . Mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . Technical data . . . .  Siemens AG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booting . .2 14. . . . Accessories . . . . .2 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and installation . . . . . . Ports on bottom side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for operation . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . Interfaces on left side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Interfaces on left side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces and connections . . . . . . Replacing the hard disk . . Changing the device fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 Contents 12. . . . . . . . Changing the battery . .3 13. . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . Casing rear side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 Edition xiii . . . . . . Working with PC cards . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces and connections . . . . . . . Memory expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . Interfaces on right side of casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 13. . . . . .

. . . . . . Configurations . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . .4 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface assignment for video link receiver . . . .2 15. . . . . . Operator panel interlock . . . .3 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . .6 Overview . . Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU . . . . . . . . . . .5. . .2 17. . . .2 14. . . .1 15. . . . .2 15. . . .Contents 04. . .2 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . .6 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 16. . . . .3 15. . .5 16. . . .3 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Videolink receiver . . . . . . . . . . . .1 17. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . Flat mounting . Expansion boards . . . . . . . . . . xiv  Siemens AG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 16. . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 16. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 15. User interface and interfaces . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 15. . . Distribution box . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . .7 15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Videolink transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System information . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . Description of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Overview and function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 15. . . . . . . 14-238 14-238 14-239 14-239 14-239 15-241 15-243 15-243 15-245 15-246 15-246 15-247 15-248 15-249 15-249 15-249 15-250 15-251 15-251 15-252 15-252 15-253 15-253 15-257 15-259 15-260 15-262 16-265 16-265 16-268 16-269 16-269 16-269 16-270 16-272 16-273 17-275 17-275 17-277 17-277 17-279 17-283 Distributed Installation with Videolink . . . . . . . . 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004. .3 14. .6 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 15. . Technical data . . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) . Videolink receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . Upright mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central mounting on operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . .2 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory expansion . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External floppy disk drive . . . Videolink transmitter . . . . . .04 Edition . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 16.5 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. . .3. . . . . . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware interfaces – overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating and monitoring devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 17. . . . . . . Distributor box for handheld unit . . . 17-283 17-286 17-290 17-294 17-294 17-296 17-297 17-298 17-298 17-302 18-305 18-305 18-307 18-308 18-311 18-312 18-314 18-315 18-317 18-318 18-322 18-325 18-329 19-331 19-331 19-332 19-332 19-333 19-334 19-334 19-335 19-336 19-337 20-339 20-339 20-340 20-340 20-342 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram and sample connection . .2 20. .7 Dimensions and control elements . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Mini Handheld Unit . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 17. . . . . .1 20. . . . . Interface signals of HT 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation . . . . . . . .5 18. . . . Interface signals for handheld unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6FX2006-1BC01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 19. . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . . . . Example signal chart . . . Settings in the HHU . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .1 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  Siemens AG. . . . . . . General . . . .1 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 19. . . . . . . .1 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6FX2006-1BH01) . . . . . . . . . . .2 Brief description . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . . setting interface parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .2 19. . . .3 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 18. . . . . . . .2 18 Distribution box for 3-core enabling cable (Order No. . . . . . . . . . Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation . . .4 17. . . . . . . . .2. . . Display and operating elements at rear . . Control elements on front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 17. Description of control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 18. . Technical data for HHU . . Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . . .1 19. . . . . .04 Edition xv . 20. . . . . . .10 Handheld unit B-MPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the HT 6. . . . . . . . .2 17. . . . . . . Configuring the HHU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 18. . . . . . . . . . Distribution box for 4-core enabling cable (Order No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. . . . . . . . . . .6 19. . . . . . . setting the interface parameters . Operating more than one HHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .04 Contents 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard configuration of the HT 6 (without MCP) . .2 18. .7. . . . . .8 18. . . . . . .2 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C . . . . . . . . Coding of axis selection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 19. HHU control elements and interface . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram of HHU and distributor box . . .6 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . .5 19. . .

4 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and settings . . . . . . .5 21. Connection via PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . Connection via PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . Mounting . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 04. . . . . . .3 22. .6. . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . .4 22. . . . Technical data . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .2 22. . . . . . . . . .4 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 21. . 20-342 20-344 20-345 20-345 20-346 20-348 20-349 21-351 21-351 21-352 21-352 21-353 21-354 21-357 21-358 21-359 21-361 21-362 21-363 21-369 21-369 21-370 21-371 21-374 21-377 22-381 22-381 22-382 22-382 22-383 22-383 22-384 22-385 22-386 22-388 22-389 22-390 22-394 22-394 22-395 22-396 22-399 22-402 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 22. . . . . . xvi  Siemens AG. . . . . . Operating and display elements to rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings via DIP switch S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . .2 22. . .1 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 20. . . .3. . . . . .5 21 Interfaces . . . . . . Configuring the DP slave MCP . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions of the machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . Input/output image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Brief description . .2 22. . . . . .2 21. . . . . . . . . . . . 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. . .1 20. . . . . . .3. . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 22. . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 22. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 22. . . . Functions of the machine control panel . . . . . . . Linking to the basic PLC and user program . . . .5 Brief description . 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the DP slave MCP . . . . . . .1 21.04 Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 21. . . . . . . . . . . .3 20. . . .6. . . .4 20. . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . .3 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 22.1 22. . . Operating elements front face . . . Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 21. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 20. . . . . . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . Control elements and interfaces . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . .5 22. . . connection and settings . . . . . . . . . Operating and display elements to rear . . . . . . . . . . Input/output image . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . .6. Linking to the basic PLC and user program . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . Settings via DIP switch S3 . . . . . . .4 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . .3 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating elements front face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting. . . . . . . . . .

. .18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 23. .1 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PP 012 . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24. . . . . Installation and mounting . . . . . . . .5 24. . . . . Key assignment within matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 24. . . . . . . . Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PP 012 individual wiring . . .18. . . . . . . . . . . . 2004. . Block diagrams . . . . . Inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project-specific components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . Dimension drawing and panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuits and wiring . . . . . . . . . .04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization . . . . . . . . Configurer . .10 24. . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . .3 System description . . . . . . . .2 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 24. . . . . .4 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11. . . . . .18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating elements .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24. . . . . . . . .2 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  Siemens AG. . . . . .2 24. . . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . . . . .11 24. . . . . . .1. . . . . Labeling control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . .1 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 Contents 23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 24. . . . . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.13 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 24. . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . PP 012 expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 24. . Dimension drawings and mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection for handheld units . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 24. .1 24. . . . Operator panel front interface .11. . Individual wiring PCB input/output . . . . . . . . . Interfaces and monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/output interface of individual wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . Rating plates . . . . . . . . . . . Two-channel enabling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 24. . . . . . . . . . Service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 Edition xvii . . .2 24.4 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23. . . . . .18 24. . . . . .5. . . . . . . . .1 23. . .14 24. . . . . .13. . . . . 23-405 23-406 23-407 23-413 23-414 23-415 24-417 24-417 24-417 24-418 24-419 24-420 24-421 24-423 24-425 24-425 24-427 24-434 24-438 24-438 24-439 24-442 24-443 24-444 24-446 24-448 24-448 24-449 24-451 24-456 24-456 24-457 24-460 24-462 24-466 24-468 24-470 24-470 24-472 24-473 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 24. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine control panel settings . . . 27 28 Standard PC Keyboard MF-II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . Slide-in label film .3. . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting. . . . . . . Control elements . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Brief description . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . .6 Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connection and settings of machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . .1 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . .04 25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel . . .3 29. . . . . . . 25. .2 26. . . . . . . . Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . Setting the interface parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 29. . .3. . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . .04 Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . xviii  Siemens AG. . . . . . . . Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 04. . 25-475 25-475 25-480 25-482 26-483 26-483 26-484 26-485 26-485 26-487 26-489 26-490 26-491 26-492 26-494 26-495 26-496 26-497 27-499 28-501 28-501 28-502 28-503 28-503 28-505 28-506 28-507 28-508 29-509 29-509 29-510 29-511 29-511 29-511 29-512 29-514 29-515 30-517 30-517 26 19” Machine Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control elements and interfaces . . .5 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 28.5 29. . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . .1 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 29.4 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . Dimension drawings . . . . . .6 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control elements . . . . . . . . . 2004. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram . Mounting . . . . . . .3 28. . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . .4 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . .1 26. . . Dimension drawings . 26. .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. .3. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts and accessories . . . . . RI suppression measures . . . . . . . . . Software interface . . . . . . . References .2. .2 34. . . . . .5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . .2 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 34. . . . . . . .5 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 32. .4 31 32 Mounting instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . .04. . . . . . . . . 2004. . . . . . . . . dimension drawing and panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1. . . . . Dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . .2. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-581  Siemens AG. . . . . . . . . Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions . . . .3 30. . . . . Hardware interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5” Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . .04 Edition xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding concept . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) . . Handling membrane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . .7 34. . . . . Floppy disk drive (order no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . .1. . . . . . Floppy disk drive (Order No. .4 34. .3 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPI/OPI network rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A B C Abbreviations .4 32. . . . . .3 32. . . . . . . . . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. . . Technical data . . . . . . .1.1. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 34. Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 34. .3 Notes about operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to EN 50178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . .1 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Secondary electrical conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-518 30-519 30-520 31-521 32-525 32-526 32-526 32-526 32-528 32-528 32-529 32-529 32-530 32-532 33-535 34-539 34-539 34-540 34-541 34-542 34-544 34-545 34-547 34-554 34-555 34-555 34-557 34-558 A-561 B-565 3. . . . . . .1. Protective separation acc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 34. . . . . . . . . . . . 33 34 Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . .2 32. . . . .2 32. . . . . . . . . . . 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 32. . 32. . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04 Contents 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport and storage conditions . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin assignment for interfaces . . . . . . .2.

04 Edition .04 Notes xx  Siemens AG.Contents 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 010 operator panel front: order number 6FC 5203-0AF00-0AA1 Features S 19” mounting format. 7 HE (height units) S Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm S Compact mounting depth (e. uppercase characters only) S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S IP65 degree of protection S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see “Distributed Installation with Video Link Receiver”) S External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. control and hotkey keygroups S Softkeys: 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys S Shift key for switching to the second key level (not for switching case.04 Edition 1-21 . Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the scope of delivery. 2004.g.4” slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels (TFT) S Membrane keyboard with alpha. numerical.OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1 1. measured from surface of mounting panel:) S 10. cursor. Combined with a SINUMERIK PCU.1 Overview The SINUMERIK OP 010 operator panel front with 10.  Siemens AG. the SINUMERIK OP 010 can be used to create a low-cost operator panel.4” TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features a 62-key membrane keypad with 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys that has been optimized for programming subroutines. OP 010 with PCU 50: 108 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance.

then increased wear must be assumed Fig.2 Operating and display elements 04. Z on two levels arranged in accordance with programming requirements. + characters and the decimal point.2. 9.2. S The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. 2004..1 View TEMP *) Alpha key group Numerical key group Status LEDs: POWER Softkeys Softkeys Control key group Hotkey group Cursor key group USB front interface Recall Machine area Etc. the -. S The numerical key group contains the digits 0 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 1-22  Siemens AG.2 Operating and display elements 1..=.2 Keyboard Fig.04 1.1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.. . 1-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of different key groups: S The Alpha key group contains the letters A. S The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. S The control key group includes special functions. key Area switchover *) When the TEMP LED is lit.04 Edition ... 1-1 Front view of OP 010 operator panel front 1. /.

04 1.2 1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front Operating and display elements The key functions are summarized in the following list: Key Function corresponds to PC key function: Esc Key Function corresponds to PC key function: End F11 Backspace F12 Tab ––– (only intended for internal keyboard switchover) Ctrl key Space Home Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numerical key group) A.. Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> F10  Siemens AG. 2004. . Z <Shift> A.04 Edition 1-23 .. . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04....04..

g.1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1. S Display cable K2. 1-2 Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 Connection X14 for backlight OP 010 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections Pin assignment See “Connection Conditions” 1-24  Siemens AG. PCU 50 main board Cable clamp for connection to direct control key submodule PCU 50 Keyboard controller I/O USB cable K1 Direct control key interface X11 Interface X12 (reserved) OP 010 Display cable K2 Fig. 2004.3 Interfaces The OP 010 operator panel front provides the following interfaces: Front side USB 1. in addition to the display interface. supply voltages).04 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 Interfaces 04. 1-1).1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use. Note When using standard I/Os. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): S I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals which are used.04 Edition . for the connection of operator panel fronts (e. please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use.

Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 1. Tension jacks 112.  Siemens AG.4.2 Softkey labeling The vertical and horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specific functions.4 1. holes or screw holes are not needed.3). 2004.5* 77.04.75* 112. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.4.25* Setscrews 5 *) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points Fig. 1-3 Mounting panel Sealing area 1. This retaining method also affords degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).4.5* 290 +1 112.5* 56.04 Edition 1-25 .75* 450 +1 77.5 min to 6 max Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front 1.4 Installation 1.1 Installation Preparation for mounting Table 1-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 450 290 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting panel surface 100 + 10 140 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010.

Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer. 2.4).4 Mounting 1. see “Video Link”) is to be used. it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation (Subsection 1.6). Undo the shipping lock for the hard disk. Proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”. Insert the assembled components OP 010 and PCU from the front into the panel cutout (see Fig. For more detailed information. Subsection “Assembling OP 012 and PCU 50”. 2. 1.4. Videolink receiver.5 Nm). 3.4.1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 1-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 – 0. see Section 1. 1-6).. please refer to the relevant PCU chapters and Chapter “Heat Dissipation”.04 Making the labels To make the labels. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 1-26  Siemens AG.4. Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.4 Installation 04.3 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU When a combination of OP 010 and PCU (or video link receiver. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see Fig.). there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn. Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so that the unit is ventilated sufficiently (see diagram “Mounting the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front” in Chapter “OP 012”). To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No. Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU. 1. Proceed as follows: 1.04 Edition . . Slide the labels from the rear of the operator panel front into the slots provided (see Fig. 4.. 1-3). 2004.. Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. otherwise the system will not boot.

04.04

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.5 Technical data

1.5

Technical data
Table 1-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; appr.) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm incl. PCU 50: 100 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 140 mm *) approx. 5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Display 5 V +/– 5% 280 / 380 Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 750 / 1000 Logic/USB (with/ without load) 5.2 V +/–2% 350 / 1000 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front side IP65 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data

Typical, approx. 10 W

Maximum approx. 16 W

Weight Tightening torques, max. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing

Shock stressing

Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation, water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size / resolution MTBF backlight 10.4” / 640 x 480 pixels typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 ... 45 °C (to front) 0 ... 55 °C (to rear) max. 10 K/h 5 ... 80 % max. 0.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 ... 60 °C max. 18 K/h 5 ... 95 %

*) Plus 10 mm clearance

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

1-27

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.6 Spare parts

04.04

1.6
1.6.1

Spare parts
Spare parts list
Spare parts for the OP 010 are as follows (see diagram below):

Component

Order number 6FC5248-0AF00-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF07-0AA0

Remarks

Operator panel front without LCD unit Sealing caps for USB connection Tension jacks Film DIN A4

Set of 10 Set of 6 For slide-in softkey labels Set of 3

Backlight with backlight inverter

LCD unit

Display holder

Front panel

Cap for the USB port

Keyboard controller

Fig. 1-4

Spare parts for the OP 010 operator panel front

1-28

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.6 Spare parts

Slide-in labels 15 26 Part 5 Part 6

41.3

38.7 Part 2

Part 3

19

9.5 8.5 5 41.5 17

Part 1

Center of the key 214.5

Fig. 1-5

Dimensions for DIN A4 blank film

1.6.2

Replacing spare parts
Caution Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger that sensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!

The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in the following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.

Operator panel front

When the front plate is replaced, the existing LCD unit and keyboard controller can be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after the front panel has been changed. Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.

Procedure: 1. Put the OP 010 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casing screws (see figure below).

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

8.8

21.3 9.6

0.6

68

Part 4

8.2

11

21.3 9.6

1-29

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.6 Spare parts

04.04

Width = 483 Top Display support plate
1) 3) 4) 3) 3) 1) 3) 4)

Cable clamp Display cable K2 2) IO/USB cable K1 2)
1) 4)

3)

3)

4) 1) 3) 3) 3) 1) 3) 4)

Mounting slots for PCU lugs Slit for softkey labeling strips OP 010 rear side

2)

Cable shown folded together

3)

Enclosure screws

Fig. 1-6

2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see Fig. 1-7): Backlight (base X14) and I/O USB cable K1. 4. Keep the display plate with the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible.

USB interface

Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 Direct control key Membrane connector for connecting the connection X11 keyboard of the operator panel front

Connection X4 for mouse

Connection X14 for backlighting

Connection X12 (reserved) Fig. 1-7 Changing the operator panel front

Keyboard controller

1-30

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Height = 310

Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller

3)

3)

04.04

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.6 Spare parts

5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface. 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). 7. Loosen the retaining screws from the keyboard controller. 8. Lift USB interface and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install these components in the new operator panel front in reverse order (see note for procedure).

Note – Releasing and connecting the membrane connector are described in the “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membrane connectors”. When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Subsection “Technical data”).

Film labels

The procedure for replacement is described in Section 3.7.

J

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

1-31

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1.6 Spare parts

04.04

Notes

1-32

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

OP 010S Operator Panel Front

2

Validity

The description below applies to the OP 010S operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0)

Features

The operator panel front OP 010S (successor to OP 032S) described in the following is characterized by:

S Mounting dimensions 310 x 330 mm S Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm S Compact mounting depth (example: OP 010S with PCU 50; calculated from
surface of mounting panel: 120 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)

S 10.4” TFT slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels S Mechanical keys:
– – – 8 horizontal soft keys 8 vertical softkeys Four control keys

S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S Degree of protection: IP54 S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”) and the KB 310C keyboard or

S External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

2-33

2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2.1 Operator interface

04.04

2.1

Operator interface
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)

Recall Machine area

USB front interface Softkeys *) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed Fig. 2-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 010S

Fig. 2-1 shows the user interface of the OP 010S:

S The 10.4-inch display S The USB front interface S Eight vertical and eight horizontal softkeys S Four control keys with the following functions:
Key Function corresponds to PC key function: <Shift> F10 Key Function corresponds to PC key function: F9

<Shift> F9

F10

2-34

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Softkeys Etc. key Area switchover

04.04

2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2.2 Interfaces

2.2

Interfaces
The OP 010S operator panel front provides the following interfaces:

Front side

USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 2-1).

Note When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use. Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.

Rear side

Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (Fig. 2-2):

S I/O USB cable K1: All signals which are used, in addition to the display interface, for the connection of operator panel fronts.

S Display cable K2.
PCU 50 main board

PCU 50

I/O USB cable K1

Display cable K2 Fig. 2-2

OP 010S
OP 010S – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections

Pin assignment

See “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions”

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

2-35

2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2.3 Installation

04.04

2.3

Installation
When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU, it is advisable to install the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU on the OP 010S.

2.3.1

Mounting
Table 2-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 285 304 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting panel surface 120 + 10 160 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010S, holes or screw holes are not needed. In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 54 (but only in conjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB interface). Proceed as follows: 1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front.

In the sealing area:

Rz120 1.5min – 6max 13± 1 Pressure points for tension jacks

Tension jacks with setscrews Sealing area 13± 1

112 ± 0.5 112 ± 0.5 56 ± 1

15 ± 1

285 +1

Fig. 2-3

Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front

2-36

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

304 +1

04.04

2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2.3 Installation

2. Fix it in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see Fig. 2-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).

2.3.2

Mounting the PCU

Note The PCU must be mounted as illustrated in the Fig. 13-1 in Chapter “PCU 50”, i.e. any mounting brackets used must be removed.

310 Top Casing cover plate Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller 2) 1) 1) 1) 1) 2)

1)

1)

I/O USB cable K1

Display cable K2 1) 1)

2)

1)

1)

1)

1) 2)

1) Casing screws M3 2) Casing screws M4 for PCU mounting (on the side)

Fig. 2-4

Rear side of operator panel front with arrangement of interfaces and mounting screws

1. Position the PCU at approximate right angles to the OP 010S (see Fig. 2-2). 2. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 010S into the corresponding mating pieces behind the opening in the PCU casing (see Fig. 2-2). Make sure that the connectors lock in and the locks are closed. 3. Swing the PCU onto the OP 010S. 4. Using the four M3 and four M4 screws supplied with the OP 010S, attach the PCU to the side of the OP 010S. Torques M3: 0.8 Nm, M4: 1.8 Nm.

Clearance

There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so that the unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig. 2-5). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters and Chapter “Heat Dissipation”.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

330

2-37

3 310 35±0.3 Installation 04.2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU.3 22±1 297 .5 100 100 Clearance for cables and ventilation 160 10 267 ±0.. 2-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 010S operator panel front with clearances Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical..04 Additional clearance for connection cable (for 840Di) 10±0.04 Edition ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ OP 010S PCU 50 ±0. .). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 330 ±0. Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 2-38  Siemens AG. Videolink receiver. 2004.5 PCU 50 120+3 OP 010S ±0.5 Dimensions in mm Fig.

18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Display 5 V +/–5 % 420 / 600 Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10 % 900 / 1050 Logic/USB (with/ without load) 5. cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data Typical. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1. 18 K/h 5 .04 2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2.4” TFT 640 x 480 pixels typ.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.1 % in 1 min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 .. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE. approx. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 . 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 M3 screws: 0. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 10. 10 W Maximum approx.2 V +/–2 % 350 /1000 III..4 Technical data 2.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. PELV acc. 10 K/h 5 .. app. max..075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2. 55 °C max.. 5.04.04 Edition 2-39 .5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 45 °C (to front) 0 .5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 80 % max. 6 ms.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. 30 ms.4 Technical data Table 2-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data (without PCU) Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ. PCU 70: 165 mm approx. 95 %  Siemens AG. 2004... 16 W Weight Tightening torques.. PCU 50: 120 mm incl. 55 °C (to rear) max. mA./max..) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 330 mm Depth: 45 mm Mounting depth: 35 mm incl.

5.5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . 2-40  Siemens AG. since it is simple and self-explanatory.1 Spare parts Spare parts list Spare parts for the OP 010S are (see diagram below): Component Order number 6FC5248-0AF04-0AA0 Remarks Front panel Sealing caps for USB connection Tension jacks Without LCD unit. 2004.04 2. without USB interface and without keyboard controller Set of 10 Set of 6 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Front panel Backlight with backlight inverter LCD unit Cap for the USB port Display holder with keyboard controller (rear) Fig.5 2.2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2. 2-6 Spare parts for the OP 010S operator panel front 2.5 Spare parts 04.2 Replacing spare parts Caution Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger that sensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)! ! The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in the following.

2. Membrane line from the operator panel front keyboard Connections for the operator panel front keyboard X7 X10 X8 Membrane line from the operator panel front keyboard Connection X12 (reserved) Connection X14 for display and backlighting Connection X4 (reserved) Display cable K2 Direct control key interface X11 I/O USB cable K1 USB membrane line Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Undo the casing screws (see Fig. Display support USB membrane line (see Fig. backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused. in a cutout of the mounting plate. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig. USB interface Fig. Put the OP 010S and the replacement front plate face down on a flat. 4. 2-8) (see note below for procedure).5 Spare parts Front panel When changing the front plate. 2-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side  Siemens AG. the existing USB interface and the display holder (with display.04.04 2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2. 2-4) and remove the casing cover plate. 2-7) will be visible underneath and. 2004.04 Edition 2-41 . 2-7 Keyboard controller 3. X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). the rear side of the USB interface (Fig. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from the sockets X7. soft surface. 2-8). The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 2-7). Procedure: 1.

– J 2-42  Siemens AG. Place the display holder on the replacement front plate. 6. 8.2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. Undo the screws of the display holder and lift it off. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement front plate. Note – Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the “Connection Conditions” Chapter. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order (see note for procedure). When tightening the screws.04 5.04 Edition . observe the torques (refer to the Section “Technical data”). Subsection “Handling membrane connectors”.5 Spare parts 04. 7.

OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3 Validity The description below applies to the OP 010C operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0) Features The OP 010C operator panel front described in the following is characterized by: S 19” mounting format.04 Edition 3-43 . cursor. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 7 HU (height units) S Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm S Compact mounting depth (example: OP 010C with PCU 50. uppercase characters only) S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S Degree of protection IP 54 S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”) S External floppy disk drive can be connected.  Siemens AG. control and hotkey key groups S Softkeys: – – 1 horizontal row of 8 keys with softkey functions 1 vertical row of 8 keys with softkey functions S Shift key for switching to the second key level (not for switching case. calculated from surface of mounting panel: 100 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance) S 10.4” TFT slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels S Mechanical short-stroke keys with alpha. numerical.

2. key Area switchover Hotkeys *) When the TEMP LED is lit. 3-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 010C 3-44  Siemens AG.3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3. Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *) Alpha key group Softkeys Numerical key group Cursor key group Control key group USB front interface Softkeys Recall Machine area Etc.04 3.1 View 04. 2004.1 View The diagram below shows the front view of the OP 010C operator panel front. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 3.04 Edition . then increased wear must be assumed Fig.

04 Edition 3-45 . S The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. the – character and the decimal point.04... 3-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of different key groups: S The Alpha key group contains the letters A... S The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9.. . ..2 Description of the keyboard Fig.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S The control key group includes special functions. Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> F10  Siemens AG. . Z and the blank.. 2004.04 3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3. S The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. The key functions are summarized in the following list: Key Function corresponds to PC key function: Esc Key Function corresponds to PC key function: End F11 Backspace F12 Tab ––– (only intended for internal keyboard switchover) Ctrl key Space Home Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor to the left Enter Cursor to the right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numerical key group) A..2 Description of the keyboard 3. Z <Shift> A.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3.2 Description of the keyboard 04.04 Edition . 2004.04 Key Function corresponds to PC key function: Reserved Key Function corresponds to PC key function: Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 3-46  Siemens AG.

Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use. Rear side See Figs.04 Edition 3-47 . Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 Keyboard controller Direct control key interface X11 Connection for backlighting Interface X12 (reserved) Fig. reserved PCU 50 main board PCU 50 I/O USB cable K1 OP 010C Display cable K2 Fig.04 3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3. 2004. 3-3 OP 010C – connections on the rear of the enclosure: Customer interface  Siemens AG.3 Interfaces The OP 010C operator panel front provides the following interfaces: Front side USB 1. Note When using standard I/Os. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 3-2 and 3-3: S Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU: – I/O USB cable K1: All signals.3 Interfaces 3. 3-1). are used to connect the operator front Display cable K2 – S Interface X11. which in addition to the display interface.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 3-2 OP 010C – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections Pin assignment See “Connection Conditions” Chapter. please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use.04.

it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3. holes or screw holes are not needed.04 Edition . 3.2 Preparation for mounting Table 3-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 483 310 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting panel surface 100 + 10 140 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010C.4. 3. 3-4 Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”.4.4 Installation 04.04 3.4 Installation When combining an OP 010C and PCU. Section “Mounting”.1 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU Width = 483 Top 1) 1) Display support plate Height = 310 1) 1) Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller Display cable K2 2) I/O USB cable K1 2) 1) 2) Mounting slots for PCU lugs Cable shown folded together Operator panel rear with position of Casing screws – the interfaces. 2004. – the mounting slots Fig. 3-48  Siemens AG.

Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so that the unit is sufficiently ventilated (see diagram below). Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see diagram above) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.5* 56. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3.04. Insert the assembled components OP 010C and PCU from the front into the panel cutout.5 Nm).04 Edition 3-49 . please refer to the relevant PCU chapters and Chapter “Heat Dissipation”.  Siemens AG.5 min to 6 max *) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points Fig.4 – 0.4 Installation Tension jacks 112. For more detailed information.75* 112. 3-5 Mounting panel Sealing area (front) Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010C operator panel front 3.4. 2.75* 450 +1 77.25* Setscrews 5 Front side 1.5* 77.5* 290 +1 112.3 Mounting 1. 2004.

Videolink receiver..7 Clearance required for ventilation o PCU rotated through 90 degrees Mounting lugs with without hinged catches Mounting bracket 10 297 100+3 20 Mounting bracket 10 46.1 Dimensions in mm Attaching the PCU 50 to the OP 010C operator panel front (viewed from above) OP 010C Fig.3 .04 Edition 35. Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 3-50  Siemens AG.8 PCU 50 in the end position 333 17. .3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3.04 38. 3-6 Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical.3 100. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 313. Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU.. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.). To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated.4 Installation 04.4 69. 2004.

/max. max.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 55 °C (to rear) max..5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data Typical.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 10. 18 K/h 5 . 80 % max. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 M3 screws: 0.2 V +/–2% 350 / 1000 III. 0. 45 °C (to front) 0 . PELV acc.. 55 °C max. mA.. 10 W Maximum approx. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 .5 Technical data Table 3-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.04 Edition 3-51 . water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. PCU 50: 100 mm incl.. 95 %  Siemens AG. 16 W Weight Tightening torques. approx. PCU 70: 145 mm approx.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 . 2004. 5 kg Tension jack screws: 0. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Display 5 V +/– 5% 280 / 380 Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 750 / 1000 Logic/USB(with/ without load) 5. appr..5 Technical data 3.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.04 3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3..4” TFT 640 x 480 pixels typ. 30 ms. 10 K/h 5 .) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm incl.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.04. 6 ms...

7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys The key covers for the vertical softkeys (short-stroke keys) can be replaced for the product SINUMERIK 840D/810D ManualTurn. Procedure: 1. They are included in the scope of supply.04 Edition . 3-7 Spare parts for the OP 010C operator panel front 3. Lever off the key cover of the short-stroke key 2.3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. Press new key cover onto the frame of the short-stroke key J 3-52  Siemens AG.6 Spare parts Spare parts for the OP 010C are (see diagram below): Component Order number Remarks Key covers for labeling 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Set of 90 ergo-gray 20 red 20 yellow 20 green 20 medium gray Set of 10 Set of 6 Sealing caps for USB connection Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Cap for the USB port Fig.04 3.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys 04.

uppercase characters only) S Integrated mouse S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S IP65 degree of protection S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”) S External floppy disk drive can be connected. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct control keys. 2004. PP031 MC or directly connectable to the I/Os S Shift key for switching to the second key level (not for switching case.1” TFT color display with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) features a 59-key membrane keypad as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. numerical.1 Overview The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front with 12. 7 HE (height units) Features S Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm S Compact mounting depth (example of OP 012 with PCU 50.  Siemens AG.OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4 4. cursor and control key groups S Softkeys/direct control keys: – – – 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions Direct control keys via direct control key submodule (optional). Combined with SINUMERIK PCUs.04 Edition 4-53 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. calculated from surface of mounting panel: 100 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance) S 12. the SINUMERIK OP 012 can be used to create fully featured operator panels with integral mouse. Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the scope of delivery.1” TFT slimline screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels S Membrane keyboard with alpha. Validity The description below applies to the OP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF02-0AA0) S 19” mounting format.

04 Edition .2 View 04. The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 4.04 4. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 4-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 012 Fig.4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. 2004. then increased wear must be assumed Fig.2 View TEMP *) Status LEDs: POWER Softkeys and direct control keys Softkeys and direct control keys Alpha key group Numerical key group Cursor key group Control key group USB front interface Softkeys Recall Machine area Etc. key Area switchover Mouse *) When the TEMP LED is lit. 4-54  Siemens AG.3. 4-1 shows the front view of the OP 012 operator panel front.

2004.04 4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. Z <Shift> A..3 Description of the keyboard Fig. S The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys.04. S The control key group includes special functions. The key functions are summarized in the following list: Key Function corresponds to PC key function: Esc Key Function corresponds to PC key function: End F11 Backspace F12 Tab ––– (only intended for internal keyboard switchover) Ctrl key Space Home Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor to the left Enter Cursor to the right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numerical key group) A... the – character and the decimal point. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. .04 Edition 4-55 . S The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.. 4-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of different key groups: S The ALPHA key group includes the letters A...3 Description of the keyboard 4.. Z and the space character. . S The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9... Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> F10  Siemens AG. .

4-3): Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”.4 Interfaces The OP 012 operator panel front provides the following interfaces: Front side Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1. 4-1). PCU 50 PCU 50 main board Cable clamp for connection to direct control key submodule Keyboard controller I/O USB cable K1 Direct control key interface X11 Interface X12 (reserved) OP 012 Display cable K2 Fig. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Note When using standard I/Os.4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use.1) to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig.4 Interfaces 04. 4-2 Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 Connection X14 for backlight OP 012 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections 4-56  Siemens AG.04 Edition . 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter. which in addition to the display interface. are used to connect the operator front Display cable K2 – S Interface X11.04 4. Rear side See photo below: S Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU: – I/O USB cable K1: All signals. Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.

04.04 Edition 4-57 Height = 310 Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller 3) 3) . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. Place the PCU with the lugs of the bolted-on mounting brackets into themounting slots on the OP 012 as shown by the white arrows in the picture below.6. – – See Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule” for instructions on mounting the direct control key submodule. 4-3 Procedure 1.5 Installation For a combination of an OP 012 and PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”) and possibly a direct control key submodule (refer to the Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”).5. it can be helpful to reduce the 90_ angle between the PCU and OP 012 by tilting the PCU as shown by the black arrow in the picture. Place the OP 012 face down on a flat. To make it easier to insert the lugs. Section “Commissioning / Mounting”) Width = 483 Top Display support plate 1) 3) 4) 3) 3) 1) 3) 4) Cable clamp Display cable K2 2) IO/USB cable K1 2) 1) 4) 3) 3) 4) 1) 3) 3) 3) 1) 3) 4) Mounting slots for PCU lugs Slit for softkey labeling strips OP 012 rear side 2) Cable shown folded together 3) Enclosure screws Fig. we recommend that these are assembled prior to installation in a mounting panel. see Section 4. To install or replace the softkey labeling strips. soft (to avoid scratches) surface.5 Installation 4.04 4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4.1 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU The PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (if this has not already been done) (see Chapter “PCU 50”. 4. 2.  Siemens AG.

4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 012 into the plug connectors behind the opening in the PCU 50 casing (see gray arrows in picture above). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .5 Installation 04. 4-58  Siemens AG. Make sure that the connectors lock in audibly and that the locks (see arrows in next picture) are closed. 4-4 Assembling the PCU 50 and OP 012 3. 4-5 OP 012 Display cable K2 Correct connection of IO/USB and display cables to the PCU 50 4. Swing the PCU 50 to the limit position and fix it using the knurled screws (see next photo. 2004.04 PCU 50 IO/USB cable K1 Display cable K2 OP 012 Fig. PCU 50 IO/USB cable K1 Fig.8 Nm). torque 1.

3 100. 4-6  Siemens AG.4 69. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04.04 Edition 35.1 313.5 Installation 38.1 Dimensions in mm Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (viewed from above) OP 012 Fig.3 4-59 .04 4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. 2004.7 Clearance required for ventilation o PCU rotated through 90 degrees Mounting lugs with without hinged catches Mounting bracket 10 297 PCU 50 in the end position 100+3 20 Mounting bracket 10 46.8 333 17.

4-7 PCU 50 – OP 012 unit in its final assembled state 4. Knurled screws Knurled screw PCU 50 OP 012 Knurled screw Fig. holes or screw holes are not needed.04 The photo below shows the PCU 50 – OP 012 unit in its final assembled state. 2004.4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4.5. 4-60  Siemens AG. This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (however.5 Installation 04.2 Preparing for mounting Table 4-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 450 290 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig.04 Edition . only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and when the protective cap is installed on the USB interface). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 4-8) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) 100 + 10 145 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012.

see Subsection 11.5* 77.4 – 0. Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical.5* 290 +1 112.5 Installation Tension jacks 112. Insert the preassembled OP 012 components (complete with any direct control key submodule. 4-8 Mounting panel Sealing area Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012 operator panel front 4. 2004. Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so that the unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig.25* Setscrews 5 1..5.5* 56.04. please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “Heat Dissipation”.5 min to 6 max *) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points Fig.). 2.5 Nm).75* 112.  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 4-61 . Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU.3 Mounting 1. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see Fig. . 4-8) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0. Videolink receiver. For more detailed information..2.04 4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. 4-6).1) and the PCU into the panel cutout from the front.75* 450 +1 77.

6 Softkey labeling 04. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. see Section 4. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.04 Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. 4-62  Siemens AG. and 5.3).4. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening the screws. 2.4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. Procedure: 1.04 Edition .8). Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front.6 Softkey labeling The two vertical and two horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specific functions. omit steps 3. DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. 4. 5. 2004. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 4. Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 1. 3. If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled. 4-3). Making the labels To make the labels.

55 °C (to rear) max. mA.7 Technical data 4. 6 ms..8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.8 Nm M4 screws: 1. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. PELV acc.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 . 18 K/h 5 . appr. 10 K/h 5 .1” TFT 800 x 600 pixels typ.7 Technical data Table 4-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ. 2004..04 Edition 4-63 .8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2. PCU 70: 145 mm approx. 10 W Maximum approx.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.. 0..) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm incl. 60 °C max.04. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 M3 screws: 0. 30 ms. 80 % max. to EN 50178 Front side IP65 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data Typical. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Display 5 V +/– 5% 280 / 380 Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 750 / 1000 Logic/USB (with/ without load) 5. 5 kg Tension jack screws: 0. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 12..04 4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. PCU 50: 100 mm incl./max. 45 °C (to front) 0 .. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 . 95 %  Siemens AG.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 16 W Weight Tightening torques. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. max. approx.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9..2 V +/–2% 350 / 1200 III..5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.

4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. without mouse.8 Spare parts/accessories 04.8. without keyboard controller. 2004.8 4.04 Edition . 4-9 Spare parts for the OP 012 operator panel front 4-64  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 4.1 Spare parts/accessories Spare parts list Spare parts for the OP 012 are (see diagram below): Component Order number Remarks Front panel 6FC5248-0AF02-0AA0 Without LCD unit. without direct control key submodule USB mouse Direct control key submodule Sealing caps for USB connection DIN A4 film Tension jackset 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF08-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 10 For slide-in softkey labels Set of 6 Backlight with backlight inverter Direct control key submodule LCD unit Display support Keyboard controller Front panel Mouse Cap for the USB port Fig.

Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.04 4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4.6 5 8.8 Spare parts/accessories 229.8.04 Edition 4-65 8. Operator panel front/mouse When changing the front plate.2 Replacing spare parts Caution Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components may be damaged due to static electricity)! The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in the following. since it is simple and self-explanatory. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.39 17 Center of the key 292 63.5 12. the existing mouse. 2004. 4-10 Part 4 10 Dimensions for DIN A4 blank film 4.04.  Siemens AG.8 15 2 Slide–in labels Part 1 Part 2 20.85 Fig.4 Part 3 24.2 9.5 . The following description therefore applies both to the operator panel front and for the mouse. LCD unit and keyboard controller can be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after the front panel has been changed.

USB interface Connection X1 for IO USB cable K1 Mouse Keyboard controller Connection X4 for mouse Direct control key connection X11 Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front Connection X14 for backlighting Connection X12 (reserved) Fig. In addition to the keyboard controller. X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). Lift USB interface. After bending back the two lugs. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from the sockets X7.04 Edition . Put the OP 012 face down on a flat. Install these components in the new operator panel front in reverse order (see note for procedure). When tightening the screws. mouse and keyboard controller off the front plate. soft surface and undo the 12 casing screws (see Fig. Subsection “Handling membrane connectors”. 3. J 4-66  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 9.4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4. Undo the fastening screws from mouse and keyboard controller.8 Spare parts/accessories 04. 2. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see Fig. 4-3).6. The interconnections may remain plugged. 7. 6. 2004. Keep the display plate with the display. 4-11 Changing the operator panel front 5. withdraw the USB interface. 4. Remove the softkey slide-in labels and the cover plate (see Fig. Note – Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the “Connection Conditions” Chapter. the rear sides of mouse and USB interface become visible. 4-11): Backlight (base X14) and IO USB cable K1. – Film labels The front plate is replaced as described in Section 4. observe the torques (refer to the Section “Technical data”). 8.4-3).04 Procedure: 1.

by touching a displayed button.1” TFT technology with resolution of 800 x 600 pixels S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S Front USB interface (Version 1. Note The touch panel TP 012 can be used in conjunction with customer-specific HMI software. 7 HU (height units) S Panel cutout (W x H): 368 x 290 mm S Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in conjunction with PCU 50: 125 mm + 10 mm clearance S Color display (touch screen) incl.  Siemens AG.2) S IP65 degree of protection S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.g.TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5 Validity The description below applies to the TP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF07-0AA0) The TP 012 operator panel front described below is characterized by: Features S Mounting format 400 x 310mm. backlighting in 12.04 Edition 5-67 . 2004. e.: – in a centralized configuration (as described in this chapter) – in a distributed configuration (see “Distributed Installation”) Operation The panel is operated by touching the application-specific functions shown on the touch-sensitive display.

04 Edition . 2004.04 5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 View Status LEDs: POWER TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) Front USB interface for connecting an external keyboard or mouse Fig.1 View 04. 5-1 Front view of TP 012 operator panel 5-68  Siemens AG.5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5.

are used to connect the operator front Display cable K2 PCU 50 I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 TP 012 Fig. 5-1). For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use.04 Edition 5-69 .1) to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. which in addition to the display interface.04. 5-2 TP 012 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections  Siemens AG.2 5. 2004.2. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Note When using standard I/Os.2 Interfaces 5. Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.04 5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5.1 Interfaces Arrangement The TP 012 operator panel front provides the following interfaces: Front side Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1. Rear side See photo below: S Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU: – – I/O USB cable K1: All signals.

04 5. holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (however.5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5.3 Installation 04. 5.04 Edition . It is advisable to connect the units in an assembly panel prior to installation. 5-4) Width (mm) Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 012.3. 5. 5-3 TP 012 rear side Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”. 2004.1 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU Width = 400 Top 2) 1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs 2) Casing screws 1) Test label 1) 2) Height = 310 Rating plate 1) 2) IO/USB cable K1 1) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) 125 + 10 368 290 165 + 10 2) Display cable K2 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Section “Mounting”.3. only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and when the protective cap is installed on the USB interface). 5-70  Siemens AG. the operator unit (TP 012) and the processing unit (PCU) are connected to each other using the piggyback method.2 Preparing for mounting Table 5-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig.3 Installation With a centralized configuration.

Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU.. Clearance The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to ensure that sufficient ventilation is provided (see figure below). please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “Heat Dissipation”.5 Pressure points for tension jacks Tension jacks with setscrews 112 ±0.  Siemens AG.3 Mounting 1. .). Mounting position Permissible mounting position: deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical. For more detailed information.04 5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5.5mm to 6mm Sealing area A1±1 A2 ± 1 112 ± 0. 5-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Locate the touch panel in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see Fig.5 Nm).4 ... 2.3 Installation 1. 5-4 Dimension sheet for installing the TP 012 operator unit 5.. 0. Videolink receiver.04 Edition 5-71 .5 56 ±1 L2 +1 Rz 120 L1 +1 S1± 1 S1± 1 L1 L2 S1 S2 19 A1 A2 16 10 368 290 35 Dimensions in mm In the sealing area Fig.3. 2004. Insert the assembled components TP 012 and PCU 50 from the front into the panel cutout.04.5 S1± 1 S2± 1 112 ± 0.

9 353 10 297 PCU 50 in the end position 125+3 Mounting bracket 36 10 28.04 50. Subsection “Touch screen calibration”.5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5. 5-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 012 operator panel front (as seen from above) Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display.8 *) Bottom: Mounting bracket with hinged catches Fig.3.04 Edition . 2004.3 Installation 04. a screen calibration must be performed. 5-72  Siemens AG.4 55. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.4 Touch screen calibration Whenever a new TP 012 operator panel front is connected. For procedure see Chapter “PCU 50”.6 313.6 TP 012 33 57. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 5.1 Lugs *) Clearance required for ventilation Mounting bracket o PCU rotated through 90 degrees 17. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated.

6 ms..04 5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5. 55 °C (to rear) max. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 M3 screws: 0. 15 W Maximum approx. mA..8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.5 kg Tension jack screws: 0. 18 K/h 5 . 80 % max. 20 W Weight Tightening torques.04 Edition 5-73 . 10 K/h 5 ...1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 .. 2004. 45 °C (to front) 0 . water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. PCU 50: 125 mm incl. max.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 12.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. PCU 70: 170 mm approx...8 Nm M4 screws: 1.2 V +/–2% 350 / 1000 III. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)  Siemens AG.4 Technical data Table 5-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ.. 0. approx. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 400 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 51 mm Mounting depth: 36 mm incl.1” TFT EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 . 5.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Display 5 V +/– 5% 280 / 380 Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 750 / 1000 Logic/USB (with/ without load) 5. appr./max. 95 % 800 x 600 pixels typ.4 Technical data 5.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. 30 ms. 60 °C max.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.. to EN 50178 Front side IP65 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data Typical. PELV acc.04..

5 5.04 5.5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Spare parts/accessories 04. 2004.5. 5-6 Components of TP 012 touch panel 5-74  Siemens AG.1 Spare parts/accessories Spare parts list Spare parts for the TP 012 are (see Fig.04 Edition . 5-6): S SINUMERIK operator panel front without LCD unit for SINUMERIK TP 012 (Front panel + touchscreen) Order No. Housing Display Touchscreen *) Keyboard controller Backlight inverter for backlighting Display support Sealing cap for USB connection *) Front panel *) *) Spare parts Fig. 6FC5248-0AF16-0AA0 Order No. 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Order No. 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 S Sealing caps for USB port (10) S Tension jacksset (6) Note A sealing cap for the USB connection is factory-fitted on all initial orders.

5-3). –  Siemens AG. USB module and keypad controller can re-used.5 Spare parts/accessories 5.5.04. observe the torques (refer to the Section “Technical data”). the display. 5-7): – from the keypad controller: Backlighting (base X14). touch controller. Install the components into the new front panel in the inverse sequence. Procedure: 1. since it is simple and self-explanatory. membrane connector (see note below) the plug-in cable from the touch controller to the touch screen – 3.04 Edition 5-75 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Put the TP 012 face down on a flat. Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. withdraw the USB interface. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. IO USB cable K1. 2004. Subsection “Handling membrane connectors”. Front panel If only the front panel is to be replaced. Remove the screws from the display holder. 4. soft surface and undo the 12 casing screws (see Fig.2 Replacing spare parts Caution Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger that sensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)! ! The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in the following. When tightening the screws. After bending back the two lugs. Keep the display plate with the display. 2.04 5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5. 5. Note – Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the “Connection Conditions” Chapter. 6. Unplug the following connectors (see Fig.

5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5.04 Edition .5 Spare parts/accessories 04. 2004.04 Display support Base X14 backlighting IO USB cable K1 Membrane connector Touch controller USB module Keyboard controller Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 5-7 Changing the operator panel front J 5-76  Siemens AG.

TP 015A Operator Panel Front

6

Validity

The description below applies to the TP 015A operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF08-0AA0)

Features

The main features of the TP 015A operator panel front described below are as follows:

S Color display (touch screen) incl. backlighting in
15” TFT technology with XGA resolution 1024 x 768 pixels

S Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor and control key groups S Softkeys/direct control keys:
– – – 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions The direct control keys can be connected through the direct control key submodule (optional) or directly to the I/O peripherals

S Shift key for switching to the second key level
(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)

S Integrated mouse S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S Degree of protection IP65 (front side) S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP.:
– in a centralized configuration (as described in this chapter) – in a distributed configuration (see “Distributed Installation”)

Note The combination with PCU 50 is described in this documentation as an example. You can proceed in the same way if you wish to operate the TP 015A in conjunction with a PCU 70.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

6-77

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front

04.04

Operation

The TP 015A is operated by means of

S The touch screen can be used to select the application-specific functions,
e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons,

S Softkeys (refer to Section 6.1) S Keys (refer to Section 6.2)

Caution The lifetime of the screen could be significantly reduced if sharp or hard objects come into contact with it.

Scope of delivery

The following is included in the scope of supply with the initial order:

S Operator panel front S 12 tension jacks

6-78

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.2 Description of the keyboard

6.1

View
TEMP *)

Status LEDs: POWER

Softkeys and direct control keys

Softkeys and direct control keys

Alpha key group

Numerical key group Cursor key group

Softkeys

Control key group

USB front interface Recall Machine area Area switchover Etc. key Mouse *) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed Fig. 6-1 Front view, TP 015A operator panel

6.2

Description of the keyboard
Fig. 6-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of different key groups:

S The ALPHA key group includes the letters A, ..., Z and the space character. S The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9, the – character and the
decimal point.

S The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. S The control key group includes special functions. S The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a
tracker ball) and two mouse keys.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

6-79

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.2 Description of the keyboard

04.04

The key functions are summarized in the following list:
Key Function corresponds to PC key function: Esc Key Function corresponds to PC key function: End

F11

Backspace

F12

Tab ––– (only intended for internal keyboard switchover) Ctrl key

Space

Home

Page up

Alt key

Page down

Delete

Cursor up

Insert

Cursor to the left

Enter

Cursor to the right

F9

Cursor down

F10

5 (in numerical key group)

A, ..., Z

<Shift> A, ..., Z

<Shift> F9

<Shift> F10

6-80

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.3 Interfaces

6.3

Interfaces
The TP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Front side

Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 6-1). For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Note When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use. Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.

Rear side

See photo below:

S Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:
– – I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface, are used to connect the operator front Display cable K2

S Interface X11: Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys
For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”.

PCU 50/70 TP 015A

I/O USB cable K1 Keyboard controller

Display cable K2 Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 Fig. 6-2 Interface X12 (reserved)

Direct control key interface X11

TP 015A – connections at the rear of the enclosure: Connections to the PCU

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

6-81

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.4 Installation

04.04

6.4

Installation
For a combination of TP 015A and PCU and possibly a direct control key submodule (refer to Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”), we recommend that these are assembled prior to installation in a mounting panel.

6.4.1

Assembling TP 015A and PCU
Width = 483 Top

3) 1) 1)

3)

Display mounting plate (rear cover plate) Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller

Display cable K2 2)
1)

1) 3) 4)

IO/USB cable K1 2)

3)

1) 3)

Mounting slots for PCU lugs Slit for softkey labeling strips TP 015A rear side

2) 4)

Cable shown folded together Ground terminal

Fig. 6-3

Procedure

Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.

6.4.2

Mounting
Table 6-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 450 335 Dimensions of the mounting hole (refer to the next diagram) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) 132 + 10 172 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks, holes or screw holes are not needed. In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 65 (but only in conjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB interface).

6-82

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Height = 355

04.04

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.4 Installation

Pressure point for tension jacks Sealing area S6 ± 0:5 A1 ± 1
±1

1.5min – 6 max.

A2

140 ± 0:5

L3 ± 1

L3 ± 1

120 ± 0:5

M6/diameter7

Tension jacks with setscrews

L2 ± 1

L5 ± 0:2

160 ± 1

80 ± 1

Rz 120

L1 ± 1 L1 L4 ± 1 L4
+1 +1

In the sealing area Mounting panel

Dimens. L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 A1 A2 S6 in mm 450 335 47 456 160 16 10 4

Fig. 6-4

Dimension drawing for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front

1. Insert the assembled components TP 015A (possibly with direct control key submodule; refer to Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”) and PCU from the front into the appropriate cut-out. 2. Use 12 clips to retain the operator panel front in the appropriate cut-out (refer to Fig. 1-3) and tighten the threaded studs (torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).

Clearance

The clearance to the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure that it is properly ventilated (see diagram below). For more detailed information, refer to the Chapter “PCU 50/70 component” and Chapter “Cooling”.

Mounting position

Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical. Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolink receiver, ...).

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

6-83

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.4 Installation

04.04

Required clearance for cooling PCU 50 swung out by 90° Additional clearance for connecting cable

Lugs

Mounting rail

220 10

297

131+3

PCU 50 in the end position Mounting rail 48.7 ±0.5 62.4 87.8 320.4 74.5 ± 2 29.5 ± 1 Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above)

Fig. 6-5

Screen saver

10.8 ±0.3

Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display, there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced

6.4.3

Touch screen calibration
Whenever a new TP 015A operator panel front is connected, a screen calibration must be performed. For procedure see Chapter “PCU 50”, Subsection “Touch screen calibration“.

6-84

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

359.6

17.3

04.04

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.5 Softkey labeling

6.5

Softkey labeling
User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. When the equipment is supplied, blank labeling strips are already inserted (refer to Fig. 6-3).

When producing your own labeling strips

If new labeling strips are required, you can produces these yourselves. To do this, you will require a film (dimensions, refer to the next diagram, type HP Color LaserJet film C2936A). Please observe the following: – – – – The film is printed from the rear (in the area around the strip) Background color: Medium Basic 701 Film structure at the front Printing the slide-in labels from the front, with HP Color LaserJet printer (+ types 5/5M, 4500/N/DN, 8500/N/DN)

Inserting the strips

Procedure: 1. Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. 2. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig. 6-3). 3. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening the screws. If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 1 and 3.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

6-85

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.6 Technical data

04.04

6.6

Technical data
Table 6-2 Safety Protective class Deg. of prot. acc. to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; appr.) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Depth: 60 mm Mounting depth: 3) incl. PCU 50: incl. PCU 70: approx. 10 kg Tension jacks: 0.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 4.9 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 M2:
1)

Technical data for TP 015A

III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front side IP65 CE Rear side IP00

Display 5 V +/– 5% 500 / 650

Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 900 / 1100

Logic / USB 5.2 V +/–2% 350 / 1500 2)

Typical, approx. 15 W

Maximum approx. 24 W

49 mm 132 mm 172 mm

Weight Tightening torques Screws, max. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing

M3: 0.8 Nm

M4: 1.8 Nm

Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 4.9 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2

Shock stressing

Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation, water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet through self-convection; without a fan not permissible without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Per. change in the rel. air hu. Display Size / resolution MTBF backlight 15 ” TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 ... 45 °C (to front) 0 ... 55 °C (to rear) max. 10 K/h 5 ... 80 % max. 0.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 ... 60 °C max. 18 K/h 5 ... 95 %

1) hand-tight + locking agent 2) incl. 500 mA load on USB front connector and direct control key submodule 3) measured from the mounting panel surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation

6-86

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.7 Spare parts

6.7
6.7.1

Spare parts
Spare parts list
Spare parts for the TP 015A include (refer to Fig. 6-6): Designation Front panel USB mouse Direct control key submodule Caps Tension jack set Mounting bracket Mounting bracket flat 3 films Order number 6FC5248-0AF17-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Comment Without LCD unit, mouse, USB interface and keyboard controller
– –

For USB port (10) 2x9 For PCU or Videolink receiver behind operator panel front For PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet With printable slide-in labels

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0

6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0

Tension jacks Backlight inverter for backlighting

Direct control key submodule *)

Front panel

Protective cover Keyboard controller LCD unit Display support

Cap for the USB port

Mouse

*) optional

Fig. 6-6

Components of the TP 015A operator panel front

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

6-87

2004.04 (50 ) Part 2 5 Part 1 7 16.6 Center of the key 12 25.6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.04 Edition 297 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 6-7 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels 6-88  Siemens AG.7 Spare parts 04.38 8 210 Fig.

 Siemens AG.38 305 6-89 . *) Re-use is also recommended to avoid loss of the control parameters which have already been programmed in.8 15+0.04 Edition 12 8 25. 2004. touch controller.5 16 Fig.8 Part 2 Part 1 Part 4 Center of the key 402 371 38. mouse and USB interface can be re-used.4 –0. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. USB module. keyboard controller *).2 Replacing spare parts Caution Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components may be damaged due to static electricity)! Front panel Display.5 11.7. 6-8 Dimensions for slide-in labels 6.04.04 6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6.4 –0.7 Spare parts Part 3 Slide–in labels 8+0.

Undo the 13 screws in the display support and lift it off. 2004. Undo the 4 internal mouse fixing screws.04 Procedure: 1. When tightening the screws. 2. 8. Dismantling and assembling the mouse and USB interface: S Mouse: – – – Detach the cable clamps. withdraw the USB interface. 5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Disconnect the plug-in connection between the touch controller and the touch screen. observe the torques (refer to the Section “Technical data”). Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the inner screen protective sheeting. Detach the 3 cable support clamps.04 Edition . Place the TP 015A face downwards on a flat. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order. S The mouse cable (in a similar way to the USB interface cable). S USB interface: – After bending back the two lugs. S The USB interface cable: – – Detact the membrane connector by pushing the dark locking lever horizontally towards the USB cable. 7. – USB sealing cap and tension jacks The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory and is therefore not described. S Install the mouse and USB interface into the new front panel.7 Spare parts 04. Undo the 13 housing screws and lift the housing off. soft surface and undo the 4 screws in the cover plate for the keyboard controller connections (see Fig. The replacement front panel is supplied without mouse and USB interface which means that these must be removed from the old panel and installed in the new one: 6. 6-90  Siemens AG. 4. 6-3). Pull both cables out of the cable converter. Disconnect the following terminals on the keyboard controller: S The 3 membrane connectors (for procedure see note below). Subsection “Handling membrane connectors”. 3.6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6. Note – Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the “Connection Conditions” Chapter.

2004.04 6.04 Edition 6-91 .8 6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front Example when calculating the cooling 6.5 * PVtotal [W] Operator panel front PCU V= DT [K] = 28 [m3/h] External temperature Internal temperature Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 6-9 Calculating the cooling for PCU 50 with TP 015A = T1 = 45 degrees = T2 = 55 degrees ––> ∆T = 10 K J  Siemens AG.8 Example when calculating the cooling Calculating the thermal power loss PCU 50 The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit is to be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The required volumetric flow V must be calculated for a temperature difference of: T2 – T1 = ∆T  10K. 109 W) 3.04. Example for heat dissipation with open-circuit ventilation: PCU 50 with TP 015A Calculating the thermal power loss (including internal power supply unit): TP 015A PCU 50 V2 15 W 65 W ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PVtotal = 80 W T1 T2 (max.

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6. 2004.04 Edition .04 Notes 6-92  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8 Example when calculating the cooling 04.

2004. 7 HU (height units) S Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm S Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in conjunction with PCU 50: 130 mm + 10 mm clearance S 15” TFT slimline screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels S Membrane keyboard: – – 8 horizontal softkeys 8 vertical softkeys S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S Degree of protection: IP65 S Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with the component PCU 50 S External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7 Validity The description below applies to the OP 015 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF03–0AA0) Features The OP 015 operator panel front described in the following is characterized by: S 19” mounting format.04 Edition 7-93 .  Siemens AG.

7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7.1 Operator interface Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *) USB front interface Softkeys Machine area Recall Etc. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 7-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 015 Fig.04 Edition Softkeys . then increased wear must be assumed Fig. 2004. 7-1 shows the user interface of the OP 015: S the 15 inch display S the USB front interface S eight vertical and eight horizontal softkeys S four control keys with the following functions: Key Function corresponds to PC key function: <Shift> F10 Key Function corresponds to PC key function: F9 <Shift> F9 F10 7-94  Siemens AG.1 Operator interface 04.04 7. key Area switchover *) When the TEMP LED is lit.

2.2 Interfaces 7. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Interfaces Arrangement The OP 015 operator panel front provides the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.04 7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7.2. 7-1).1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig.2 7. USB interface Data–. 7-2): S I/O USB cable K1: All signals.2 Assignments Table 7-1 Pin 1 2 3 4 Name USB_P5V_fused USB_D0M USB_D0P USB_GND Assignment of the USB front interface (low current USB: 100 mA) Type V B B V Remarks + 5V (fused) for ext. USB channel 0 Ground for external USB interface USB front interface Signal type B: Bidirectional V: Voltage  Siemens AG. 7-7) OP 015 Display cable K2 Fig. 7-2 OP 015 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections 7. which in addition to the display interface. 2004.04 Edition 7-95 . Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.04. USB channel 0 Data+. Note When using standard I/Os. are used to connect the operator front S Display cable K2 PCU 50 main board PCU 50 I/O USB cable K1 Cover plate for keyboard controller (see Fig. please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (Fig.

2 Preparation for mounting Table 7-2 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 450 290 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig.3 Installation 04.04 7. only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and when the protective cap is installed on the USB interface).1 Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50 483 Top 2) 2) 2) 1) 1) Casing cover plate Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller 3) 3) 310 3) Display cable K2 IO/USB cable K1 1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs 2) Casing screws M3 3) Casing screws M4 Fig.3.3 Installation When combining OP 015 and PCU 50. 7.04 Edition .7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7. it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel. This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (however. 7. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. holes or screw holes are not needed.3. 7-96  Siemens AG. 7-3 Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots 1) 2) 2) 2) 1) 3) Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”. 7-4) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) 130 + 10 170 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015. Section “Mounting”.

Insert the assembled components OP 015 and PCU from the front into the panel cutout. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Pressure points for tension jacks Tension jacks with setscrews 112 ±0.3 Installation 1.5 56 ±1 L2 +1 Rz 120 L1 +1 In the sealing area L1 L2 L3 A1 16 A2 10 450 290 81 Fig. 7-5).5 Nm). 7-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015 operator panel front 7. Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so that the unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig.  Siemens AG. Sealing area A1±1 A2 ±1 112 ± 0.04 Edition 7-97 .3.4 – 0. 2.5 L3 ± 1 L3 ± 1 112 ± 0. 7-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0. please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “Heat Dissipation”. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see Fig.3 Mounting 1.04.5min – 6max.04 7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7. For more detailed information. 2004.

).3 A±2 Ü L H T T2 A B Ü K 483 310 130 42 87 23 22 220 All dimensions without the screws protruding Fig.04 267 ± 0.5 297 ± 0.5 Clearance for cables and ventilation Additional clearance for connection cables (for 840Di only) 10 K PCU 90o tilted off T +3 PCU in end position T2 ± 0. .5 . 2004. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated.5 10± 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 Installation 04. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 7-98  Siemens AG. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.04 Edition H± 0. Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU. 7-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP 015 operator panel front B± 1 Operator panel front Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 _ from the vertical. Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display.. Videolink receiver.5 L ± 0..7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7.

8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2. 24 W Weight Tightening torques.. 40 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)  Siemens AG.4 Technical data 7. 60 °C max.04 Edition 7-99 . 0.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet 1024 x 768 pixels typ.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 6 ms.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 .04 7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7. 10 K/h 5 .. 55 °C (to rear) max.) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 52 mm Tension jack screws: 0. / max. 15 W Maximum approx. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 15 ” TFT EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 .. approx. 95 % Display Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 900 / 1050 Logic / USB (with / without load) 5.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.4 Technical data Table 7-3 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ. PELV acc.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 2004. 30 ms.. PCU 50: 130 mm approx. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. max. 7 kg M3 screws: 0..8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. 45 °C (to front) 0 . approx. to EN 50178 Front side IP65 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data 5 V +/– 5% 420 / 600 Typical..2 V +/–2% 350 / 1000 III. mA. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Mounting depth: 42 mm incl. 80 % max. 18 K/h 5 . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases...

7-100  Siemens AG. 6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0 for USB port (10) S Sealing caps S Tension jacksset (6) Front panel Backlight with backlight inverter LCD unit Cap for the USB port Display holder with keyboard controller (rear) Fig. without USB interface and without keyboard controller) Order No. 7-6): S Front panel Order No. 6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0 Order No. 2004.2 Replacing spare parts Caution Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger that sensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)! ! The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in the following.5.04 7. since it is simple and self-explanatory.7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7.5. 7-6 Spare parts for the OP 015 operator panel front 7.1 Spare parts/accessories Spare parts list Spare parts for the OP 015 are (see Fig.5 7.04 Edition . 6FC5248–0AF03–0AA0 (without LCD unit.5 Spare parts/accessories 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

7-7 Keyboard controller 3. in a cutout of the mounting plate. 6. the existing USB interface and the display holder (with display. 7-7) Fig. 7-8. 7-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side 5. Undo the casing screws (see Fig. the rear side of the USB interface (Fig. 7-3) and remove the casing cover plate.04. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from the sockets X7. backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2. see note below for procedure). Put the OP 015 and the replacement front plate face downwards on a flat. Procedure: 1. The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. Connection X11 (reserved) Membrane lines from the operator panel front keyboard IO USB cable K1 Connection X4 (reserved) Connection X14 for display and backlighting USB membrane line Connection X12 (reserved) Display cable K2 X10 X8 X7 Connections for Operator panel front keyboard Fig.04 Edition 7-101 .5 Spare parts/accessories Front panel When changing the front plate. 7-8).  Siemens AG. 4. Undo the screws of the display holder and lift it off. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement front plate. soft surface. 7-7) will be visible underneath and. 2004. Display support Fastening screw M4 USB interface USB membrane line (see Fig. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig.04 7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7. X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).

Note – Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the “Connection Conditions” Chapter. observe the torques (refer to the Section “Technical data”).5 Spare parts/accessories 04. J 7-102  Siemens AG. Subsection “Handling membrane connectors”. 8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order. Place the display holder on the replacement front plate. – When tightening the screws.7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7. 2004.04 7. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .

2004.OP 015A Operator Panel Front 8 Validity The description below applies to the OP 015A operator panel front (order number 6FC5203–0AF05–0AA0) Features The main features of the OP 015A operator panel front described below are as follows: S 19” mounting format. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 8-103 . cursor and control key groups S Softkeys/direct control keys: – – – 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions Direct control keys via direct control key submodule (optional). numerical. PP031 MC or directly connectable to the I/Os S Shift key for switching to the second key level (not for switching case. uppercase characters only) S Integrated mouse S Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature S USB interface at the front S IP65 degree of protection S Mounting: tension jacks at the rear S Can be combined with the component PCU 50  Siemens AG. 8 HU (height units) S Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 321 mm S Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in conjunction with PCU 50: 130 mm ( + 10 mm clearance for ventilation) S 15” TFT slimline screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels S Membrane keyboard with alpha.

the – character and the decimal point.2 Description of the keyboard 04. key Mouse *) When the TEMP LED is lit.. . 8-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of different key groups: S The ALPHA key group includes the letters A.. S The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 8-1 Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front 8. S The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9.04 Edition .04 8. S The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys. then increased wear must be assumed.8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8. Fig. S The control key group includes special functions.1 View TEMP *) Status LEDs: POWER Softkeys and direct control keys Softkeys and direct control keys Alpha key group Numerical key group Cursor key group Control key group Softkeys USB front interface Recall Machine area Area switchover etc. 8-104  Siemens AG. Z and the space character. 2004.2 Description of the keyboard Fig.. The functions of the keys are described in detail in Section “Description of keyboard” of Chapter “Operator Panel Front OP 012”.

1) to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 8-2 Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 Connection of backlighting OP 015A – connections at the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections  Siemens AG. Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.3 Interfaces The OP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1. normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Note When using standard I/Os.04 8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8. Rear side See photo below: S Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU: – I/O USB cable K1: All signals.04. 8-1) For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter. 8-3): Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”. which in addition to the display interface. 2004. PCU 50 PCU 50 main board Cable clamp for connection to direct control key submodule I/O USB cable K1 Keyboard controller Direct control key interface X11 OP 015A interface X12 (reserved) Display cable K2 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. are used to connect the operator front Display cable K2 – S Interface X11.04 Edition 8-105 . please note that their EMC noise immunity is often only designed for office use.3 Interfaces 8.

2004. Section “Mounting”. 8. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 8. This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (however. holes or screw holes are not needed. it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel.2 Preparing for mounting Table 8-1 PCU type used PCU 50 PCU 70 450 321 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig. only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and when the protective cap is installed on the USB interface). 8.4 Installation 04.4 Installation For a combination of OP 015A and PCU and possibly a direct control key submodule (refer to the Chapter “Direct control key submodule”).4. 8-106  Siemens AG.8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8. 8-4) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) 127 + 10 167 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks.04 Edition Height = 355 Cover plate for connections Keyboard controller 3) 3) .1 Assembling OP 015A and PCU 50 Width = 483 top Display support plate 3) 1) 3) 4) 3) 3) 1) 3) 4) 3) Cable clamp Display cable K2 2) 3) 1) 3) 1) 3) 4) IO/USB cable K1 2) 1) 4) 3) 3) 3) Mounting slots for PCU lugs Slit for softkey labeling strips OP 015A rear side 2) Cable shown folded together 3) Enclosure screws Fig. 8-3 Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”.4.

04 8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8. 8-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front  Siemens AG.5 min – 6 max. 2004.5 L3 ± 1 ±1 L3 112± 0.04.5 A1 ± 1 ±1 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 ± 112 0.5 56 ± 1 A2 Sealing area Rz 120 L1+1 In the sealing area Dimensions L1 450 in mm L2 321 L3 51 A1 16 A2 17 S3 24 S4 186 S5 135 S6 5 Mounting panel Fig.5 ± 0.4 Installation S6 ± 0. Pressure points for tension jacks L2 +1 Tension jacks with setscrews 112 ± 0.5 S3± 0.5 S4 S3± 0.04 Edition 8-107 .5 S5± 0.

8-5). please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “Heat Dissipation”.6 80.5 88.4. Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so that the unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig.3 Mounting 1..5 Mounting position 10 Permissible mounting position: deviating by up to 5_ from the vertical.). 2.. For more detailed information. 8-108  Siemens AG. 8-5 313. 2004.04 8.8 OP 015A Fig.8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8. Notice This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU. see Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule” and PCU into the panel cut-out from the front.4 Installation 04. Insert the assembled components OP 015A (possibly with direct control key submodule.5 57. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.7 17.3 *) bottom: mounting bracket with hinged catches Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above) 27. Lugs *) Mounting bracket PCU 50 swung out by 90° Clearance required for ventilation 10 297 PCU 50 in the end position 130 Mounting bracket 42 61. . Videolink receiver.04 Edition 358.5 Nm). Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see Fig.4 .4 – 0. 8-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.

you can have new labels prepared and printed by Rafi or a screenprinting shop. Making the labels If required.04 Edition 8-109 . Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening the screws. Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 8. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn. Inserting the strips Procedure: 1. and 3. 2004. 2.4. 8-7 for dimensions. 3. Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. omit steps 1.04. See Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1).04 8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8.  Siemens AG. 8-3). Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig.5 Softkey labeling The two vertical and two horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specific functions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled.5 Softkey labeling Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 8.

15 W Maximum approx. 55 °C (to rear) max.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 24 W Weight Tightening torques... 95 % Display Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 900 / 1050 Logic / USB (with / without load) 5.2 V +/–2% 350 / 1200 III. PCU 50: 130 mm approx. 18 K/h 5 . 9 kg M3 screws: 0. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) 8-110  Siemens AG.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 10 K/h 5 .8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. to EN 50178 Front side IP65 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data 5 V +/– 5% 420 / 600 Typical... PELV acc. max.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Depth: 52 mm Tension jack screws: 0. / max. 2004. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 15 ” TFT EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . 0.. 80 % max. 45 °C (to front) 0 .. mA. 30 ms.8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8.6 Technical data Table 8-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ. 6 ms.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.6 Technical data 04.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 . 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Mounting depth: 42 mm incl. approx.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2....8 Nm M4 screws: 1. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. approx.04 Edition .. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet 1024 x 768 pixels typ.04 8. 60 °C max. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.

without direct control key submodule – – Front panel 6FC5248–0AF15–0AA0 USB mouse Direct control key submodule Caps Tension jackset Mounting bracket (x 2) 6FC5247–0AF01–0AA0 6FC5247–0AF11–0AA0 6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0 6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0 for USB port (10) 6 jacks for PCU or Videolink receiver behind operator panel front for PCU and videolink transmitter behind operator panel front 6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0 6FC5248–0AF20–3AA0 Front panel Backlight with backlight inverter Direct control key submodule LCD unit Display support Cap for the USB port Fig. without mouse. without keyboard controller.1 Spare parts Spare parts list Spare parts for the OP 015A include (refer to Fig.7 Spare parts 8.04. 8-6): Designation Order number Comment without LCD unit.7 8. 2004. 8-6 Mouse Keyboard controller Spare parts for the OP 015A operator panel front  Siemens AG.04 8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8.7.04 Edition 8-111 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

2004.8 OP 015A Operator Panel 8. 8-7 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels 8. 297 J 8-112  Siemens AG. The replacement of the front panel and the mouse is described in Chapter “Operator Panel Front OP 012” in Section “Spare part replacement”.38 8 210 Fig.04 Edition .2 Spare part replacement Caution Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger that sensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)! ! The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory and is therefore not described.7. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6 Center of the key 12 25.7 Spare parts 04.04 (50 ) 5 Part Part 2 1 7 16.

mouse.04 Edition 9-113 . keys y incl. incl. with mech. with detachable rack 1) . mech. 2004. handwheel and feed override. standard / US layout 1–10 m 1–20 m Flat mounting Upright mounting Mounting of PCU behind operator panel front 5m 10 m 15 m 20 m 6FC5203-0AF50-4AA0 6FC5247-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF01) 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA01) 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF01) 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA01) SINUMERIK operator panel front. mouse.15” TFT Operator Panel. B = 1. videolink transmitter for distributed installation SINUMERIK 810D/840D mounting bracket for mounting PCU and video link transmitter with distributed configuration SINUMERIK 810D/840D mounting bracket Video link cable for connection between display unit and video link transmitter. standard / US layout Variant Turning. keys..  Siemens AG. keys. 416 mm wide.–1XX0: XX is the length code: A = 0. mech. rapid traverse and feed override. Videolink Receiver i l Vid li k R i 6FC5203-0AF50-0AA0 6FC5203-0AF50-1AA0 6FC5203-0AF50-2AA0 6FC5203-0AF50-3AA0 SINUMERIK 810D/840D machine control panel. etc. 416 mm wide Variant Milling. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Videolink Receiver 9 Order number Validity The following description applies to the components: Designation Properties For integrated installation For distributed installation up to 10 m For distributed installation up to 20 m SINUMERIK 15” TFT operator panel 15 front 416 mm wide..

04 Edition . The PCU belonging to the overall system (see Fig. the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced.1 Overview The 15” TFT operator panel (416 mm wide) comprises S an operator panel front with preassembled videolink receiver.e.9 15” TFT Operator Panel.04 9. If other USB devices are used. In the case of turning and milling technologies. operator panel front and MCP using MPI. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. Caution The PCU should not be mounted in the “air flow downwards” position (i. 416 mm wide. Note Where the Windows NT operating system is used. 9-114  Siemens AG.1 Overview 04. USB and videolink transmission technology (see Fig. The operator panel front consists of a 15” display with horizontal and vertical softkeys (in the form of short-stroke keys) with preinstalled videolink receiver. S a machine control panel (MCP) with CNC keyboard (QWERTY) with integrated mouse. the USB interface only supports keyboards and mouse units. the interfaces at the top) to prevent heat accumulation. the displays on the operator panel front are different and a handwheel instead of the second override switch is provided for the turning variant. 9-1) is installed separately from the operator panel (distributed installation). 9-1). The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices. incl. Videolink Receiver 9. Information is transferred between the NC controller and PCU. the MCP keys are labeled differently.

416 mm wide. The PCU transmits the image data using videolink technology and the keyboard data using USB technology. 2004. Note To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted. STOP Power supply The operator panel and PCU must be supplied with 24V.2 System features 9. S Only TFT displays (12” and 15”) are supported S Hardware support for USB only for version 1.2 System features Operator panel The operator panel (see Fig. a data transmission line has been created: S The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU by means of a cable and a videolink transmitter. the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA resolution). 9-8). and S a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard Communication Since the PCU is installed physically separated from the operator panel front (distributed installation).1 and earlier EMERGENCY There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator panel. S The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI. incl. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 9-115 . Videolink Receiver 9. S NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI. This also has to be wired up (see Fig.04. 9-1) consists of S an operator panel front with integrated operator control functions in the form of vertical and horizontal softkeys and a preinstalled videolink receiver.  Siemens AG. As a result. the operator panel front should be switched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24V supply.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel.

3 Description of functions 9. Operator panel front with videolink receiver (behind the operator panel front. Videolink transmitter Videolink with USB X101 X102 (USB-A) X201 X202 15” TFT X203/ 204 1. 416 mm wide. incl. MCP with QWERTY keyboard and machine control panel (MCP) 3. 9-1 Function blocks of SINUMERIK operator panel 15” TFT (width 416 mm) 9-116  Siemens AG.1 Overview of function blocks The entire system is shown in the schematic diagram in Fig. PCU 5. Videolink Receiver 9. X303/304 (2 x USB-A) MCP NC MPI X401 Override X404 (24 V) Override/handwheel 1.9 15” TFT Operator Panel.04 9.3 Description of functions 04. + 2. 9-1.3. QWERTY 5. 1. PCU (2x USB-A) (24 V) X206 X205 USB Machine control panel X301 X302 (USB-B) EMERGENCY STOP MPI 2.04 Edition . not visible in the diagram) 2. Videolink transmitter 4. X103 X104 4. Operator panel front with videolink receiver 3. = operator panel Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. NC unit The subject of this hardware description are the function blocks 1 to 3. 2004.

INSERT. MCP area The MCP features: S 54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific) S Turning: S Milling: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %. HELP.3 Machine control panel for turning and milling 1.3. 23 latched positions) 3. machine ON (22 mm system). PROGRAM MANAGER.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. SELECT and NEXT WINDOW S Integrated mouse 2.3 Description of functions 9. 15” TFT Horizontal and vertical softkeys Inputs: – 1 x Videolink MDR 36 – 1 x USB-B – 1 x 24V power supply. 60 mm – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %. QWERTY keyboard area The QWERTY keyboard features: S MF2 keyboard (without function keys) S Operating area keys: MACHINE.04 Edition 9-117 . incl. ALARM and CUSTOM S Other keys: ALARM CANCEL. 2-channel (small) S 1 x illuminated key. GROUP CHANNEL.3. 23 latched positions) – 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution).04. 23 latched positions) – 1 x rapid traverse override (0 – 100 %. PROGRAM. 2004. IP54 at front / IP00 at rear 9. 3-pin terminal Outputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock – 2 x USB-A S Dimensions: S Bearing edge: S Fastening: S Seal: W x H x D (in mm): 416 x 382 x 65 Top/bottom: 18 mm Right/left: 16 mm Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 To be provided by customer S Degree of protection: Max. Other operator panel components S 1 x EMERGENCY STOP button.2 Operator panel front S Resolution: S Control elements: S Interfaces: XGA (1024x768 pixels).  Siemens AG. Videolink Receiver 9. 416 mm wide. wheel diameter approx. OFFSET.

Videolink transmitter 1 . 20 m S Function: As above. not fitted in standard production) S Outputs: 5.3.4 Videolink transmitter 1... 9-pin – 1 x 24V power supply: terminal (3-pin) – 2 x USB-A – 2 x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces.. .. 10 m S Function: Transmitter module for video transmission S Interfaces: – Inputs: 1 x plug connector (20-pin) with lock 1 x plug connector (26-pin) with lock Outputs: 1 x videolink MDR 36 for 1. IP54 at front. Degree of protection: Max... Dimensions – W x H x D (mm): 416 x 370 x 107 (turning) / 84 (milling) 6. Sub-D.. 15 m (max. 20m) (video data plus USB signals) 1 x USB-A – 2.3 Description of functions 04. 20 m S Interfaces: Outputs – 2 x videolink MDR 36 for 1. 2004. 10 m (max. Seal: To be provided by customer 8.04 Edition ... .04 4.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. IP00 at rear 9.. Videolink Receiver 9. Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 7. Interfaces S Inputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock – 1 x USB-B 2 – 1 x MPI interface.. incl. 20 m) – 2 x USB-A 9-118  Siemens AG. plus ExtremeUSB for 20m and branch for second operator panel front with videolink output for 1 . Videolink transmitter 1 .. 416 mm wide.

USB connection cable between X205 (operator panel front ) and X301 (MCP): 10-pin ribbon cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front)  Siemens AG. 416 mm wide. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0 S 15 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0 Fig. Videolink cable S 5 m: Order No. 9-2 Videolink cable 2.5 Cable 1.3 Description of functions 9.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. Videolink Receiver 9.3. incl. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF0 S 20 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF0 S 10 m: Order No.04 Edition 9-119 . 2004. MPI cable: MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens 3.

.1 Interfaces Hardware interfaces – overview Table 9-1 Overview of hardware interfaces Interface Type Function – Videolink interface (incl.04 9. USB) – USB input (reserved) – 2 x USB output – USB output – 24V power supply – USB input p MCP (QWERTY keyboard) – USB input (reserved – option for X301) – USB output – MPI interface – Optional interface (Input. 26-pin Flat ribbon..9 15” TFT Operator Panel.. 20 m X105 X106 Videolink MDR 36 USB-A 5 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF0 10 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0 15 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF0 20 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0 Flat ribbon 20-pin ribbon. reserved) – Optional interface (Input. 2 x 10-pin Plug connector.4 Interfaces 04. Videolink Receiver 9. Flat ribbon. (Input reserved) – 24V power supply – Videolink (incl. 416 mm wide. 10 m Videolink transmitter 1 . 1 x 4-pin Terminal (3-pin) MDR 36 USB-A Plug connector... 2 x 5-pin g p with l k ith lock USB-B 2 x USB-A SUB-D. 2 x 5-pin with lock terminal (3-pin) Plug connector. 10 m.. 4 pin Plug connector. USB) – USB interface – LVDS input – I/O interface for operator panel front for PC – LVDS output – I/O interface for local operator panel front As for videolink transmitter 1 . plus: – second videolink (incl. 9-pin Plug connector 1 x 4-pin connector. 2 x 13-pin Plug connector. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. incl. 2004. 2 x 10-pin Plug connector.4 9. 2 x 13-pin Operator panel front MCP Videolink transmitter 1 .4.04 Edition . 10-pin Standard Profibus Cable – Videolink transmitter <=> PCU – Videolink transmitter <=> PCU – Display unit <=> Operator panel front – NC <=> Operator panel front LVDS I/O USB MPI Signal types The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the following meanings: I B OC Input Bidirectional Open collector O V Output Power supply 9-120  Siemens AG. USB) – USB interface – Video link transmitter <=> Display unit Designation X201 x202 X203/204 X205 X206 X301 X302 X303/304 X401 X402 X403 X404 X101 X102 X103 X104 X107 X108 Type MDR 36 USB-B 2 x USB-A Plug connector.

4 Interfaces 9.04. Mini D Ribbon (MDR). 12V signal) Ground Operator panel front is present Ground of videolink transmitter.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front X201 (Videolink incl.. 416 mm wide. ..4.04 Edition 9-121 . multiple contact strip (36-pin) Table 9-2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. transmitted to Pin 35 Data OPENLDI Meaning I VI I } Twisted Pair (shielded)  Siemens AG.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 X201 pin assignments Signal name A0M A0P A1M A1P A2M A2P CLK1M CLK1P ENVCC_12V M_12V Shield ––– M (GND) ––– M (GND) M (GND) Shield RX_A / USB_M RX_B / USB_P TX_A TX_B BL_ON_12V M_12V XRESET_HUB M_12V XPAN–PRES XPAN–PRES O I O O I/B I/B V I VI Signal type I I I I I I I I Clock OPENLDI Enabling of LCD power supply (12V level) Reference ground for signals with 12V level Shield for twisted pair cables. USB) Connector designation: X201. Videolink Receiver 9. incl. connected to ground Reserved Reserved (ground) Reserved Reserved (ground) Ground Shield for twisted pair cables Received data A (Extreme USB) / USB data– Received data B (Extreme USB)/USB data+ Transmitted data A (Extreme USB) Transmitted data B (Extreme USB) Backlight On (12V signal) Ground RESET to hub (low active..

2004. type B X202 pin assignments Signal name ––– USB_DM USB_DP USB_GND B V Signal type Meaning Reserved (capacitive connection to ground) Data–. USB channel 0 Ground for external USB interface X203 / 204 (USB interface output) Connector designation: X203 / 204. type A Table 9-4 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 X203 / 204 pin assignments Signal name P5V_3_fused USB_D3M USB_D3P USB_GND ––– USB_D4M USB_D4P USB_GND B V B V VO Signal type VO Meaning +5 V (protected) for external USB interface Data–.04 X202 (USB interface input) Connector designation: Table 9-3 Pin 1 2 3 4 X202. 416 mm wide. . 10 X205 pin assignments Signal name P5V_fused USB_DM USB_DP M (GND) NC B V ––– Signal type VO Meaning +5 V (protected) for external USB interface Data–. incl.54 mm Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA) Table 9-5 Pin 1 2 3 4/5 6. grid 2.. plug connector (2x5-pin). USB channel 4 Ground for external USB interface X205 (QWERTY interface) Connector designation: X205. USB channel 0 Data+. USB channel 0 Ground Not connected 9-122  Siemens AG.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. USB socket connector (2x4-pin). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . Videolink Receiver 9. USB channel 0 Data+. USB socket connector (4-pin).4 Interfaces 04. USB channel 3 Ground for external USB interface +5 V (protected) for external USB interface Data–.. USB channel 4 Data+.. USB channel 3 Data+.

9-1) are connected in parallel and configured as “high powered interfaces” with max. 500 mA.4. 5 m in length.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel.04. for loading customer-specific keyboard tables). permissible ribbon cable length: 1 m. The maximum cable length is 10 m. 9-1). S Interface X301 connects the keyboard to the videolink receiver.3 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard The QWERTY keyboard has a total of five USB interfaces. S The two interfaces X303 and X304 are accessible by means of a two-tier USB-A connector.  Siemens AG. for example.g. 416 mm wide. terminal block (3-pin) X206 pin assignments Signal name P24 M24 Shield V Signal type Meaning 24V potential Ground 24V Shield connection Coding switch S1 Accessible internally only S with “Extreme USB”: both switches set to 1 (factory setting) S without “Extreme USB”: both switches set to 2 9. S The keyboard can be connected to the PCU using interface X302 and a cable of max.4 Interfaces X206 (24 V power supply) Connector designation: Table 9-6 Pin 1 2 3 X206. This cable can be used to form a direct connection to. four of which can be used by the user (see Fig. the PCU (e. ! Caution The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneously because they are connected in parallel. 5 m. S X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5 V. S X301 is used to form the connection to the videolink receiver. max. The integrated mouse is connected to the fifth USB interface (X305).04 Edition 9-123 . 2004. X301 / X302 The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. Videolink Receiver 9. incl. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

9 15” TFT Operator Panel. of 100 mA. 2004. incl. channel 2 Data+. channel 0 Data+.4 Interfaces 04. 9-1).04 Edition . channel 0 Ground X303 / X304 X303 / 304 is a double standard USB-A connector (see Fig. channel 2 Ground Connector designation: X304. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. X303 and X304 are configured as “low powered interfaces” with max. channel 0 Ground 9-124  Siemens AG. 5 V. 416 mm wide. Connector designation: X303. channel 0 Data+. USB-A connector (4-pin) Table 9-10 Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 X304 pin assignments Signal name 2P5 USB_DM3 USB_DP3 M (GND) B V Signal type V Meaning Power supply +5 V for external USB device Data–. USB-B connector (4-pin) Table 9-8 Pin 1 2 3 4 X302 pin assignments Signal name P5 USB_DM0 USB_DP0 M (GND) B V Signal type V Meaning Power supply +5 V Data–. plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock Table 9-7 Pin 1 2 3 4/5 6/7/8 9 10 X301 pin assignments Signal name P5 USB_P USB_M M (GND) NC SDA SCL B V – B I Signal type V Meaning Supply voltage 5 V Data + Data– Ground Not assigned Serial data for EEPROM Clock for EEPROM Connector designation: X302.04 Connector designation: X301. USB-A connector (4-pin) Table 9-9 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 X303 pin assignments Signal name 1P5 USB_DM2 USB_DP2 M (GND) B V Signal type V Meaning Power supply +5 V for external USB device Data–. Videolink Receiver 9.

S With the “turning” version. Connector X11 is used to connect the rotary selector switch for feedrate override (32 graduations).2) X11 / 12 (axis override interface) Depending on the panel variant.4 X401 (MPI) Interface assignment for MCP The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401. S With the “milling” version. These switches are connected to the MCP by means of ribbon cables. 9–pin Sub–D socket Table 9-11 Pin 1/2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X401 pin assignments Signal name NC RS_OPI ORTSAS_OPI M5EXT P5EXT NC XRS_OPI IRTSPG_OPI V – B I Signal type – B O Meaning Not assigned RS-485 data Output Request to Send. The handwheel is directly connected to the NC controller. irrespective of its installation position. 2004.4. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 9-125 . incl.04.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. the operator panel front has one or two axis override switches. 416 mm wide. Videolink Receiver 9. user interface 5V external ground 5V external potential Not assigned RS-485 data In Request to Send PG Baud rate (max.4 Interfaces 9. of 1. X402 / 403 Not available X404 (power supply) See X206 (Subsection 9.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI bus are set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller.  Siemens AG.4. a handwheel is fitted in place of the rotary selector switch. Connector designation: X401. the rotary selector switch for rapid traverse (32 graduations) is connected to X12.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. Videolink Receiver 9. 2 x 5-pin. 2004. plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock Table 9-12 Pin 1/2 3/4 5 X11 pin assignments Signal name NC M (GND) NC Signal type – V – Meaning Not assigned Ground Not assigned Setting of override rotary selector switch 6 7 8 9 10 IN3_4 IN3_3 IN3_2 IN3_1 IN3_0 I Significance 16 Significance 8 Significance 4 Significance 2 Significance 1 Connector designation: X12. with lock Table 9-13 Pin 1/2 3/4 5 X12 pin assignments Signal name NC M (GND) NC Signal type – V – Meaning Not assigned Ground Not assigned Setting of override rotary selector switch 6 7 8 9 10 IN7_4 IN7_3 IN7_2 IN7_1 IN7_0 I Significance 16 Significance 8 Significance 4 Significance 2 Significance 1 9-126  Siemens AG.04 Edition . (optional interface for milling variant) Plug connector. 416 mm wide.4 Interfaces 04. incl.04 Connector designation: X11.

5 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter X101 / X105 (Videolink incl. . Mini D Ribbon (MDR). 416 mm wide. connected to ground Data OPENLDI Meaning I I O O O } Twisted pair (shielded)  Siemens AG.. Videolink Receiver 9. 12V signal) Ground Operator panel front is present Ground Reserved Signal type O O O O O O O O Clock OPENLDI Enabling of LCD power supply (12V level) Ground Shield for twisted pair cables. 2004. incl.04.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 36-pin Table 9-14 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.4 Interfaces 9.4.04 Edition 9-127 . multiple contact strip... USB) Connector designation: X101/105. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 X101/105 pin assignments Signal name A0M A0P A1M A1P A2M A2P CLK1M CLK1P ENVCC_X M (GND) Shield ––– ––– ––– M (GND) Shield TX_A / USB_M TX_B / USB_P RX_A RI_B BL_ON_x M (GND) XRESET_HUB M (GND) XPAN–PRES_x M (GND) V O/B O/B V Ground Shield for twisted pair cables Transmitted data A (Extreme USB) / USB data– Transmitted data B (Extreme USB) / USB data+ Received data A (Extreme USB) Received data B (Extreme USB) Backlight On (12V signal) Ground RESET to downstream hub (low active.

2004. incl. USB channel 0 Ground for external USB interface Note X106 is not available at present. USB channel 0 Data+.3 V LVDS input signal Bit 1 (–) LVDS input signal Bit 1 (+) Ground LVDS input signal Bit 2 (–) LVDS input signal Bit 2 (+) Ground LVDS cycle clock signal (–) LVDS cycle clock signal (+) Ground Reserved 9-128  Siemens AG. plug connector (2x10-pin).9 15” TFT Operator Panel.4 Interfaces 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. USB socket connector (4-pin).04 Edition .04 X102 / X106 (USB downstream) Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA) Connector designation: X102 / X106. grid 2. type A Table 9-15 Pin 1 2 3 4 X102 / X106 pin assignments Signal name USB_P5V_fused USB_D0M USB_D0P USB_GND O V Signal type VO Meaning + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface Data–. 416 mm wide. Videolink Receiver 9.54 mm X103 pin assignments Signal name P5V RXIN0– RXIN0+ P3V3 RXIN1– RXIN1+ GND RXIN2– RXIN2+ GND RXCLKIN– RXCLKIN+ GND ––– I V ––– I V I V I VI Signal type VI Meaning +5V LVDS input signal Bit 0 (–) LVDS input signal Bit 0 (+) +3. X103 (LVDS input from PCU) Connector designation: Table 9-16 Pin 1/2 3 4 5/6 7 8 9/10 11 12 13/14 15 16 17/18 19/20 X103.

04.54 mm X104 pin assignments Signal name GND P12V BL_ON P5V_fused GND P3V3_fused ––– P5V_fused USB_D1M USB_D1P GND LCDSEL0 LCDSEL1 LCDSEL2 LCDSEL3 RESET_N ––– ––– ––– ––– TEMP_ERR ––– ––– ––– ––– ––– ––– O ––– ––– O B V Signal type V VI I VI V VI ––– VI Meaning Ground Power supply for inverter (max..1A) Backlight On (5 V . 12 V = On) + 5 V VCC (fused) Ground + 3. Videolink Receiver 9. with pull-up resistor set to high) (Connection for system loudspeaker) (HD LED) *) (MPI/DP LED) *) (Ethernet LED) *) (Temperature error LED) *) (Watchdog error LED) *) (Watchdog OK LED) *) *) Anode with 1 kΩ in series on mainboard  Siemens AG.04 Edition 9-129 ..04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 2004. plug connector (2-row). incl. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 X104..3 V VCC (fused) Reserved + 5 V VCC (fused) USB data– Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground Display type–Select signal 0 Display type–Select signal 1 Display type–Select signal 2 Display type–Select signal 3 Reset signal (low active. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 416 mm wide.. .4 Interfaces X104 (IO interface for operator panels from PC) Connector designation: Table 9-17 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. grid 2. 1..

. plug connector (2 x 10-pin).3 V VCC (fused) Not connected + 5 V VCC (fused) USB data– Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground Not connected (Temperature error LED.54 mm X108 pin assignments Signal name GND P12V BL_ON P5V_fused GND P3V3_fused NC P5V_fused USB_D1M USB_D1P GND NC TEMP_ERR NC B V ––– O ––– Signal type V VI I VI V VI ––– VI Meaning Ground Power supply for inverter (max. 2004. 416 mm wide..04 Edition .54 mm X107 pin assignments Signal name P5V TXOUT0– TXOUT0+ P3V3 TXOUT1– TXOUT1+ GND TXOUT2– TXOUT2+ GND TXCLKOUT– TXCLKOUT+ GND ––– O V ––– O V O V O VO Signal type VO Meaning +5V LVDS output signal Bit 0 (–) LVDS output signal Bit 0 (+) +3...1 A) Backlight On (5 V .. . ..3 V LVDS output signal Bit 1 (–) LVDS output signal Bit 1 (+) Ground LVDS output signal Bit 2 (–) LVDS output signal Bit 2 (+) Ground LVDS cycle clock signal (–) LVDS cycle clock signal (+) Ground Reserved X108 (IO interface to local operator panel front) Connector designation: Table 9-19 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. incl. 12 V = On) + 5 V VCC (fused) Ground + 3.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. plug connector (2 x 13-pin). grid 2.. 10 11 12 13 14 15. anode with 1 kΩ in series on mother board) Not connected 9-130  Siemens AG. grid 2.04 X107 (LVDS output to operator panel front) Connector designation: Table 9-18 Pin 1/2 3 4 5/6 7 8 9/10 11 12 13/14 15 16 17/18 19/20 X107. 23 24 25/26 X108.4 Interfaces 04. 1.. Videolink Receiver 9.

4 – 8 = OFF S 20 m transmitter variant (2 x Videolink): 1 and 3 = ON 2.3 V supply OK + 5 V supply OK Host OK Link OK Transmitter When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly. 3 times 15” TFT XGA resolution).04 Edition 9-131 . If the setting is incorrect.3 V supply OK + 5 V supply OK Host OK Link OK + 3.6 Internal status displays (LEDs) The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the transmitter: Table 9-20 Designation +3V3 +5V H1 H2 +3V3 +5V H3 H4 Operating status indicators on the transmitter Color Red Red Green Green Red Red Green Green Source On ExtremeUSB module at X21/22/23 ExtremeUSB module at X21/22/23 On ExtremeUSB module at X11/12/13 ExtremeUSB module at X11/12/13 Meaning + 3.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. both green LEDs of the transmitter module (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the videolink transmitter.4 Interfaces Rotary selector switch S1 Factory setting for selection of display type: Setting 9 corresponds to 15” TFT display.  Siemens AG. 416 mm wide. Note All the displays used in a system must be of the same type (e. incl.g.04. the display may be irreparably damaged in a short time. Videolink Receiver 9. 4 – 8 = OFF 9. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. DIL switch S2 S 10 m transmitter variant (1 x Videolink): 1 and 3 = any or not S2 fitted 2.4.

416 mm wide.3 V supply OK + 5 V supply OK USB port OK Link OK Video interface (OpenLDI) active Power o.7 Software interfaces Key layout on the MCP Table 9-22 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to “turning” and “milling”) 00 10 20 30 40 *) 01 11 21 31 02 12 22 32 42 03 13 23 33 43 04 14 24 34 44 50 05 15 25 35 45 *) 06 16 26 36 46 52 07 17 27 37 47 53 08 18 28 38 48 *) 09 19 29 39 49 54 51 *) Low-active keys 9-132  Siemens AG. 2004. incl. 9.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Videolink Receiver 9.k. +5V of power section On the ExtremeUSB module Source Meaning + 3. When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly.4 Interfaces 04. +3.4.04 Edition .04 Receiver The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the receiver: Table 9-21 Designation +3V3 +5V H1 H2 H3 H4 Operating status indicators on the receiver Color Red Red Green Green Green Green ExtremeUSB module OpenLDI receiver +12V. both green LEDs of the transmitter module (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the videolink receiver.3V.

incl.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. D = 8. S Significance with override: A = 1.. E = 16. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Videolink Receiver 9. This function does not exist in the “turning” version.04 Edition 9-133 .04. B = 2. 2004. C = 4.. 416 mm wide. the bits concerned are each set to 1.4 Interfaces Input image on the MCP Table 9-23 Assignment of input words/bytes to the machine control keys (Key 00. . 54 corresponds to the key numbers in Table 9-22) Bit 7 (MSB) Key 40 *) Key 42 Key 46 Key 31 Key 49 Key 22 Key 32 Key 52 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 (LSB) Key 20 Key 11 Key 13 Override1 A Key 21 Key 27 Key 51 Override2 A Input Word 0 Low Word 0 High Word 1 Low Word 1 High Word 2 Low Word 2 High Word 3 Low Word 3 High Key 36 Key 09 Key 45 *) Key 06 Key 47 Key 24 Key 37 Key 53 Key 35 Key 08 *) Key 03 Key 14 Key 28 Key 25 Key 39 Key 54 Key 34 Key 07 Key 05 Override1 E Key 15 Key 26 Key 44 Override2 E Key 30 Key 04 Key 43 Override1 D Key 16 Key 18 Key 12 Override2 D Key 00 Key 02 Key 33 Override1 C Key 17 Key 38 Key 48 Override2 C Key 10 Key 01 Key 23 Override1 B Key 19 Key 29 Key 50 Override2 B *) Low-active keys Remarks: S The “Override2” function only exists in the “milling” version..  Siemens AG.

04 9. 9-3 Front. 416 mm wide. side and rear view of operator panel front 9-134  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Operator panel front Videolink receiver Dimensions in mm Fig.04 Edition . incl.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 2004.5 Mechanical design 04.5.5 Mechanical design 9. Videolink Receiver 9.

9-6)  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5. 9-5 “Milling” MCP Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed drawing see Fig. 416 mm wide.04. Fig. 2004. 9-7 shows the rear view with the connections. Milling MCP Dimensions in mm Fig. Videolink Receiver 9.5 Mechanical design Videolink receiver Keyboard interface Power supply Supporting plate Operator panel front 2x USB-A Fig.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. incl. 9-4 Connection for video link cable Rear perspective of the operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver 9.04 Edition 9-135 . programming switch S3 and the status LEDs.2 MCP The following diagram shows the front and side view of the “milling” MCP.

. H1 H2 H3 H4 Meaning of status LEDs Color Red Red Green Yellow Meaning Hardware faults Temperature error Power OK Operator panel front interface active 9-136  Siemens AG. .. incl.04 Edition X401 É É É É É É É Front panel X302 X303/4 10 . 2004..04 Threaded bolt Welded threaded bolts (see Fig. Threaded bolt M5 M5 Spacer ring 5 23 Fig. Videolink Receiver 9. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. programming switch S3 and the status LEDs H1. 9-5) instead of drilled holes with press-in sleeves are used to secure the operator panel front and the MCP.5 Mechanical design 04. H4 Table 9-24 No. 9-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and MCP X301 S3 87654321 X402 X403 H4 H3 H2 H1 X404 Grounding connection M5 thread Fig. 416 mm wide. 9-7 Rear view of MCP (“milling” and “turning”) showing position of the connections.9 15” TFT Operator Panel.

2004. 9-8 2 1 2 Block diagram of emergency stop button  Siemens AG. incl. Videolink Receiver 9.5 Mechanical design Table 9-25 1 2 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning / value Baud rate Meaning / value on off 1.04. 416 mm wide.04 Edition 9-137 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Mbaud 187.5 kbaud Cyclic transmit time frame on off off off on off 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms Bus address off off off on off off on on on off on off on off on off off off on on off on on on off on off on off on on off 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Interface to MPI customer operator panel Standard hardware Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms EMERGENCY Fig. 9-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button. STOP 1 Fig.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel.

9-6) 9-138  Siemens AG.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. Videolink Receiver 9.04 Turning MCP All of the information given above for the “milling” MCP also applies to the “turning” MCP. Exceptions (see diagram below): – A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch. 9-9 “Turning” MCP Exchangeable key caps Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed drawing see Fig. – The keys are different. Exchangeable keys Dimensions in mm Fig.5 Mechanical design 04. 2004. incl. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 416 mm wide.04 Edition .

04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 416 mm wide.5. 2004. incl. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Mounting bracket 114 PCU 50 Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Retaining screws for videolink transmitter Dimensions in mm Fig. Videolink Receiver 9.6.3 PCU Videolink transmitter The following diagram shows the PCU with the mounted videolink transmitter (see Subsection 9.3 for information on mounting). 9-10 PCU 50 with videolink transmitter  Siemens AG.5 Mechanical design 9.04.04 Edition PCU 50 9-139 .

5 Dimensions in mm  Siemens AG. Videolink Receiver 9. 2004.6 Installation 04.5 Fig.04 Edition 341 .1 Operator panel front The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in the following diagram: 4.04 9.9 15” TFT Operator Panel.6. 416 mm wide. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 9-11 9-140 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 329+1 386+1 395 Panel cutout for operator panel front 6 6.6 Installation Individual components S Operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver S Machine control panel with QWERTY keyboard and MCP S Videolink transmitter 9. incl.

9-12 Cable tie Panel cutouts for cable attachment Cable attachment on rear of operator panel front Notes S In cases where a high degree of noise interference is likely or the distance between the operator panel front and the MCP is relatively large. USB). Interface X203 behind the front and interface X302 behind the machine control panel are then connected to each other.04. 2004. S Videolink receiver: The videolink cable connects interface X201 of the videolink receiver (mounted on the rear of the operator panel front) to interface X101 of the videolink transmitter (mounted on the rear of the PCU). Videolink receiver Operator Panel Front (rear) Videolink cable Fig. Securing in this way also relieves the strain on connectors which do not have strong connector catches (e.g.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the USB ribbon cable connection from the operator panel front (interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installed and secured close to the top side of the metal plate. 9-1) S Machine control panel (MCP): For noise immunity reasons. The ribbon cable does not need to be fitted in this case. it is advisable to purchase USB cables with shielding. The cable is secured at the U-shaped panel cutouts on the rear of the operator panel front using cable ties (see picture below). Videolink Receiver 9.6 Installation Cable connections The operator panel front is connected to the other components by means of cables (see Fig.04 Edition 9-141 . S Connector X302 on the machine control panel (QWERTY keyboard) can also be connected directly to the PCU or a PC using a standard USB cable.  Siemens AG. incl. 416 mm wide. No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in the immediate vicinity.

2 Machine control panel The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in the following diagram: Fig. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. 416 mm wide.5 Dimensions in mm  Siemens AG.04 Edition 349 . For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced 9.9 15” TFT Operator Panel.6.04 Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 7. 9-13 9-142 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 334 +1 384 +1 395 Panel cutout for machine control panel 5. 2004. incl. Videolink Receiver 9.6 Installation 04.5 6. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.

3 Videolink transmitter The videolink transmitter is fitted between the mounting brackets under the PCU (see Fig. except X404 (see Fig.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 416 mm wide. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 4. 2. 9.04 Edition 9-143 .6. 3. Hinge bolt Threaded holes for fastening screws Fig. 9-9) are inserted in the mounting holes of the prepared panel cutout (Fig. 9-7). 9-9) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed when installed.04. 1. Mount the first mounting bracket on the PCU (see picture below). 9-10). 9-7).6 Installation Proceed as follows: 1. 5. The spacer rings (Fig. incl. Secure the operator panel front from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitable circlips. 9-14 Videolink transmitter with connecting cables Caution To prevent damage. 9-7). 9-13). Plug the supplied cables into the connectors of the videolink transmitter.  Siemens AG. 2. Connect the interfaces. Connect X404 to the 24 V power supply (see Fig. Position the operator panel front so that its four threaded bolts (Fig. as shown in the photo below. plug the cable connectors only into the sockets shown in the photo. Attach the ground connection (see Fig. 2004. Videolink Receiver 9.

6 Installation 04. 9-16 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts 6. 9-17). 4. Videolink Receiver 9. Plug the connecting cable into the connectors on the PCU (see picture below).04 Edition . incl. Mount the second mounting bracket after attaching it to the opposite hinge bolt (see Fig.04 Mounting bracket Fig. 5. 2004. 416 mm wide.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 9-15 PCU 50 with mounting brackets 3. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see picture below). Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Fig. 9-14) of the videolink transmitter. 9-144  Siemens AG.

Push the videolink transmitter forwards in the locking mechanism (to the left in Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screws supplied (see Fig.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 9-18 Videolink transmitter. The videolink transmitter is then securely attached to the PCU mounting brackets (see figure below) and can be mounted with the PCU in accordance with requirements. Videolink transmitter Hinge bolts Mounting screw PCU 50 PCU 50 Fig.  Siemens AG. see arrow) until it locks down into place (see picture below). 9-18). 9-17 Hinge of the videolink transmitter before being locked in position PCU 50 7. incl.04.6 Installation Hinge bolts PCU 50 Fig. 9-17.04 Edition 9-145 . locked in position and screwed tight 8. 416 mm wide. 2004. Videolink Receiver 9.

damage is likely. 9-146  Siemens AG. in accordance with step 7. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6 Installation 04. incl. 416 mm wide. 9-17. please release the fastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling it away from the PCU.04 Edition .9 15” TFT Operator Panel. and Fig. 2004. Videolink Receiver 9. 9-19 Videolink transmitter fully mounted to the PCU 50 Caution If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter.04 Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Fig. Otherwise.

without PCU Videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU Videolink. 6.04 Edition 9-147 . 2004. approx 265 x 277 x 35 mm approx.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. MPI. without fan As for operator panel front Internal 0 °C to 55 °C Milling: approx. 416 x 382 x 65mm approx. 24 V terminal connection Front: IP54. LVDS. voltage range 19 – 31 V USB. 65 mm approx. incl.7 Technical data Operator panel front Table 9-26 Technical data for operator panel front approx. 416 x 370 x 107 mm max. Videolink Receiver 9. without fan Front panel: Stainless steel.04.5 kg 15” TFT Vertical and horizontal softkeys (short-stroke keys) Rated voltage 24 V. keyboard and special interface IP00 / mounted on PCU: IP20 0 °C to 55 °C during operation Free convection. USB. 416 x 370 x 84 mm Dimensions (WxHxD) Mounting depth Weight Keys Voltage supply Interfaces Degree of protection Ambient temperature during operation Ventilation Housing Videolink transmitter Table 9-28 Technical data for videolink transmitter approx.7 Technical data 9. without fan Galvanized steel plate Dimensions (WxHxD) Weight Voltage supply Interfaces Degree of protection Ambient temperature Ventilation Housing  Siemens AG. 2. USB. 19 W Videolink. 24 V terminal connection Front: IP54. voltage range 19 – 31 V approx. 416 mm wide. brushed diagonally (grain 240) Rear panel: Galvanized steel plate Internal: 0 °C to 55 °C Dimensions (WxHxD) Weight Display Keys Voltage supply Power consumption Interfaces Degree of protection Ambient temperature during operation Ventilation Housing Machine control panel Table 9-27 Technical data for MCP Turning: approx. 4. rear: IP00 External 0 °C to 45 °C (due to display) Free convection. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. rear: IP00 External: 0 °C to 45 °C (on display) Free convection.2 kg with two brackets.4 kg Mechanical short-stroke keys Rated voltage 24 V.

8 Spare parts 04. Undo the three M3 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver. Rotary knob (detached) Supply terminals Handwheel Grub screw (hexagon socket) O-ring Handwheel spindle Fig. 3.04 Edition .8 Spare parts The following spare part kits are available for the operator panel front 15” TFT (width 416 mm): Table 9-29 Name Handwheel Spare part kits for operator panel front 15” TFT Description Handwheel for machine control panel. 9-20 Removal of handwheel Fastening screws M3 Installation is performed in the reverse order (installation kit is shown on the right-hand side of Fig. 2004. (MLFB) 6FC5247-0AF50-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF50-1AA0 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 3SB2000-1AC01 3SB2908-0AA 3SB2404-0C 3SB3001-0AA71 3SB3400-0A 3SB3400-1D Rotary switch Mouse Switching element Switching element with lamp 1) Submit orders to SIEMENS Amberg Exchange handwheel Remove the handwheel in the following way (see picture below): 1. 9-20).04 9. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 1x23G. 416 mm wide. incl. 2. knob and cover USB mouse for front Button EMERGENCY STOP 1) Holder Switching element Complete Illuminated k Ill i t d key 1) Order No. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect the wiring. grad=32. Slacken the two hexagon-socket screws in the rotary knob and pull the rotary knob off the spindle. T-version Rotary selector switch for feedrate / rapid traverse override.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. Make sure that the O-ring is fitted correctly. Videolink Receiver 9. 9-148  Siemens AG. width 416mm.

Remove the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front side using a wrench (width 14). Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front side using a wrench (width 14). 9-21 Removal of rotary selector switch Fastening nut Install the rotary selector switch in the following way: The installation kit for a rotary selector switch is shown on the left in the following picture. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is applied to the O-ring. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!). Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealing purposes). Videolink Receiver 9. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Unplug the connector at the end of the rotary selector switch cable from the receptacle.  Siemens AG. 2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10). 5. Fastening nut Rotary knob Connecting cable Cap Arrow ring O-ring Fig.04 Edition 9-149 . 4. Pull the complete rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.8 Spare parts Exchange rotary switch Remove the rotary switch in the following way (see picture below): 1. Collet nut Rotary knob Rotary selector switch spindle Scale Cap Fig.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 2004. 6. 3. Remove the rotary selector switch. 2.04. 9-22 Terminal board Installation of rotary selector switch 1. 3. incl. 416 mm wide.

5. 6. 8. 2004. make sure that the arrow point is aligned with “0”. 9-23 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected) Replacement of mouse The following picture shows the mouse prior to removal. 9-24 Mouse prior to removal Fastening screw 9-150  Siemens AG. When doing so. Attach the complete rotary knob to the shaft. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Connecting cable Mouse board Cable connector Clamping frame Fig. 9-22. Fig. Connect the cable in the way shown on the right-hand side of Fig. Videolink Receiver 9. 7. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob using a wrench (width 10). 416 mm wide.8 Spare parts 04.04 Edition . Attach the arrow ring to the rotary knob. Observe the recommended cable folds.04 4. The second rotary selector switch is installed in the same way. incl. Place the cap (cover) on the rotary knob and snap on.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. except that the recommended cable folds shown in the picture below should be used.

9-26 Removed mouse Installation is performed in the reverse order. 416 mm wide. Make sure that the mouse symbol is the correct way up.8 Spare parts Remove in the following way: 1. The following picture shows how the unit should then look. Release the clamp frame. The picture below shows the removed mouse.04 Edition 9-151 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. incl.04 9 15” TFT Operator Panel. Videolink Receiver 9.04. 2. Fig. 3. 2004. Lever the mouse out of the front panel. 9-25 Mouse fastening released 4.  Siemens AG. Unplug the cable connector from the mouse board. Fig. Undo the four M3x6 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.

2004. Videolink Receiver 9. incl.9 Heat dissipation The following correlations apply to heat dissipation at the operator panel front (the surfaces of the front and bottom side are not considered when calculating the convection surface): The heat produced by the operator panel front is generated almost exclusively by the display unit (approx. 9-27 Heat dissipation by means of natural convection J 9-152  Siemens AG.04 9.9 15” TFT Operator Panel. 19W). The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel or aluminum sheet.4 m2 Fig. 1. It is therefore sufficient to apply 20W as the basis for calculation. 416 mm wide. approximately from: Operator panel front T2 T1 A [m2] = Pvtot. T2 = 55 °C Pvtot = 20 W !A = 0.5 mm thick) is calculated. [W] 5 DT [K] MCP Example: T1 = 45 °C.9 Heat dissipation 04.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. referred to a temperature difference T2 – T1 = DT  10 K.

keys.15” TFT Operator Panel. mech. keys. 2004. rapid traverse and feed override. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. without Videolink Receiver 10 Order number Validity Designation The following description applies to the components: Remarks SINUMERIK operator panel front Width 416 mm SINUMERIK machine control panel MCP 416C–M SINUMERIK machine control panel MCP 416C–T With mech. mouse Variant Turning. keys. without integrated Videolink receiver Variant Milling. mech.04 Edition 10-153 . handwheel and feed override. mouse 6FC5203–0AF50–0AA0 6FC5203–0AF50–3AA1 6FC5203–0AF50–4AA1  Siemens AG. 416 mm Wide.

see Chapter “Distributed Installation”.e.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 2004. 416 mm wide.04 10. Note The videolink receiver must be ordered separately. with SINUMERIK 15” TFT operator panel front. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.: 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0 10-154  Siemens AG.1 Overview The operator panel consists of S a 15” TFT operator panel front S a machine control panel (MCP 416C–M or T) with integrated CNC keyboard and mouse The following diagram shows how these components are bedded into a complete.1 Overview 04. 416 mm Wide. 1) Direct installation Videolink transmitter Videolink receiver 1) 15” TFT operator panel front PCU Machine control panel CNC keyboard area Control elements area EMERGENCY STOP Override/handwheel *) IO front interface 26-pin **) LVDS 20-pin Override 1) The videolink receiver must be ordered separately Fig. 10-1 Config.04 Edition . Order No. without integrated videolink receiver Caution The PCU should not be mounted in the “air flow downwards” position (i. distributed system. the interfaces at the top) to prevent heat accumulation. For more information. without Videolink Receiver 10.

STOP Power supply The machine control panel and PCU must be supplied with 24 V DC Note To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted. without Videolink Receiver 10.  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S Only TFT displays are supported.1 and earlier EMERGENCY There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine control panel. the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA resolution).04 Edition 10-155 .2 System features 10. The key labels and displays on the panel front are different for variants “T” (Turning) and “M” (Milling). 416 mm Wide. 10-1) consists of S an operator panel front with 15” display and integrated operator control functions in the form of vertical and horizontal softkeys and S a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard. 2004. the operator panel front should be switched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24 V supply. S Hardware support for USB only for version 1. the “T” variant has a handwheel instead of the second override switch. 10-8).04. S The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI. where the image data are transmitted using videolink technology and the keyboard data using USB technology. In addition.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. This also has to be wired up (see Fig. Communication A data transmission line has been created to allow the PCU to be installed at a distance (distributed installation) from the operator panel: S The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU via transmission path videolink receiver – videolink cable – videolink transmitterng video.2 System features Operator panel The operator panel (Fig. As a result. S NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI.

ALARM and CUSTOM S Other keys: ALARM CANCEL. OFFSET. 29 latched positions) – 1 x rapid traverse override (0 – 100 %. Machine control panel operating elements S 54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific) S Turning: S Milling: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %. 2 x NC contacts (16 mm system) S 1x illuminated key.04 Edition . 29 latched positions) – 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution). PROGRAM MANAGER. Seal: To be provided by customer 10-156  Siemens AG. Sub-D. GROUP CHANNEL. 3. wheel diameter approx.04 10.3 Description 04.3 10. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 23 latched positions) S 1x EMERGENCY STOP button. HELP. not fitted in standard production) S Outputs: 4. Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 5.3.1 Description Operator panel front S Control elements: S Interfaces: S Bearing edge: S Fastening: S Seal: Horizontal and vertical softkeys – I/O interface cable K1 (connector 2 x 13-pin) – Display cable K2 (connector 2 x 10-pin) Top/bottom: 18 mm Right/left: 16 mm Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 To be provided by customer 10. without Videolink Receiver 10. CNC keyboard S MF2 keyboard (without function keys) S Operating area keys: MACHINE. SELECT and NEXT WINDOW S Integrated mouse 2. 9-pin – 1 x 24 V power supply: terminal (3-pin) – 2 x USB-A – 2 x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces.3. 416 mm Wide.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. INSERT. PROGRAM. 60 mm – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %. Interfaces S Inputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock – 1 x USB-B 2 – 1 x MPI interface. machine ON (22 mm system).2 Machine control panel for turning and milling 1. 2004.

2004.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 Cable 1. MPI cable: MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens 2. 416 mm Wide.3 Description 10. Videolink cable see “Distributed Installation”  Siemens AG.3.04 Edition 10-157 . USB connection cable between X205 (video link receiver) and X301 (MCP): 10-pin cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front) 3.04. without Videolink Receiver 10.

2004.g. 1 x 4-pin Terminal (3-pin) Machine control panel Signal types The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the following meanings: I B Input Bidirectional O V Output Power supply 10. For pin assignments of IO/USB and LVDS interfaces. permissible ribbon cable length: 1 m.4 10. 10-1) are connected in parallel and configured as “high powered interfaces” with max. 4 pin Plug connector. 500 mA. for loading customer-specific keyboard tables). 5m. 9-pin Plug connector 1 x 4-pin connector. 10-1).4. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. without Videolink Receiver 10.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. (Input reserved) – 24 V power supply Designation K1 K2 X301 X302 X303 X304 X401 X402 X403 X404 Type Connector 2 x 13-pin Connector 2 x 10-pin Plug connector. 10-158  Siemens AG.4.4 Interfaces 04. 2 x 5-pin g p USB-B USB B USB A USB-A USB-A SUB-D.3 Interface assignments for machine control panel The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front Connecting leads K1 and K2 between operator panel front and videolink receiver (see Fig.04 10. 5 V. see Chapter “Connection Conditions”.04 Edition .1 Interfaces Hardware interfaces – overview Table 10-1 Overview of hardware interfaces Interface Type Operator panel front Function – IO interface cable – Display interface cable – USB input p – USB i input t (reserved – option for X301) – USB output – USB output – MPI interface – Optional interface (Input. 416 mm Wide. IO/USB and LVDS interface 10. This cable can be used to form a direct connection between the keyboard and the PCU (e. X301 / X302 S X301 is used to form the connection between the keyboard and videolink receiver (X205). S X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. reserved) – Optional interface (Input.4. max.

2004.4 Interfaces ! Caution The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneously because they are connected in parallel. Connector designation: X301. USB-A connector (4-pin) Table 10-4 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 X303 pin assignments Signal name 1P5 USB_DM2 USB_DP2 M (GND) B V Signal type V Meaning Power supply +5 V for external USB device Data–. without Videolink Receiver 10.04. Connector designation: X303.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. plug connector (2 x 5-pin) with lock Table 10-2 Pin 1 2 3 4/5 6/7/8 9 10 X301 pin assignments Signal name P5 USB_P USB_M M (GND) NC SDA SCL B V – B I Signal type V Meaning Supply voltage 5 V Data+ Data– Ground Not assigned Serial data for EEPROM Clock for EEPROM Connector designation: X302. 5 V. channel 2 Ground  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 10-159 . 100 mA. USB-B connector (4-pin) Table 10-3 Pin 1 2 3 4 X302 pin assignments Signal name P5 USB_DM0 USB_DP0 M (GND) B V Signal type V Meaning Power supply +5 V Data–. 416 mm Wide. channel 0 Data+. channel 2 Data+. channel 0 Ground X303 / X304 X303 / 304 are used to connect simple USB expansion such as a USB mouse or USB keyboard and are designed as a “low powered interface” with max.

3-pin Phoenix terminal block (see Fig. USB-A connector (4-pin) Table 10-5 Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 X304 pin assignments Signal name 2P5 USB_DM3 USB_DP3 M (GND) B V Signal type V Meaning Power supply +5 V for external USB device Data–. without Videolink Receiver 10.04 Edition .4 Interfaces 04. 10-7) Table 10-7 Pin 1 2 3 Assignments of connector X404 Signal name PE 0V 24V V Signal type Meaning Shield connection Ground Power supply +24 V 10-160  Siemens AG. 9-pin Sub-D socket Table 10-6 Pin 1/2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X401 pin assignments Signal name NC RS_OPI ORTSAS_OPI M5EXT P5EXT NC XRS_OPI IRTSPG_OPI V – B I Signal type – B O Meaning Not assigned RS-485 data Output Request to Send. X402 / 403 Option X404 (power supply) Connector designation: X404.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI bus are set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller. channel 0 Ground X401 (MPI) The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401. 416 mm Wide. of 1.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. user interface 5V external ground 5V external potential Not assigned RS-485 data In Request to Send PG Baud rate (max. Connector designation: X401. 2004. (See Figure 10-7). channel 0 Data+. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Connector designation: X304.

4 Interfaces 10.04. without Videolink Receiver 10.04 Edition 10-161 . 416 mm Wide. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.4 Key layout Table 10-8 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to “turning” and “milling”) 00 10 20 30 40 *) 01 11 21 31 02 12 22 32 42 03 13 23 33 43 04 14 24 34 44 50 05 15 25 35 45 *) 06 16 26 36 46 52 07 17 27 37 47 53 08 18 28 38 48 *) 09 19 29 39 49 54 51 *) Low-active keys  Siemens AG.4.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front.

1 Operator panel front 34 59.04 10. side and rear view of operator panel front without videolink receiver 10-162  Siemens AG. without Videolink Receiver 10. 2004. 10-2 Front.5. 416 mm Wide.5 Mechanical design 04.5 Mechanical design 10.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front.5 IO front interface (26–pin) LVDS (20-pin) Dimensions in mm Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .

04. without Videolink Receiver 10.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Mechanical design Operator panel front 73 Videolink receiver Fig. 10-3 Dimensions in mm Example: Side and rear views of operator panel front with videolink receiver installed (for mounting see Chapter “Distributed Installation”)  Siemens AG.04 Edition 382 10-163 . 416 mm Wide.

04 10. MCP 416C-M 416 370 Dimensions in mm Fig.04 Edition . 10-5 the exchangeable key caps. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. without Videolink Receiver 10.5.5 Mechanical design 04.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 2004. 10-4 MCP 416C-M: Front and side views Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed drawing see Fig. 416 mm Wide.2 Machine control panel Fig. 10-5 Exchangeable key caps 10-164  Siemens AG. 10-4 shows front and side views of the machine control panel “Milling” variant. Fig. 10-6) Exchangeable key caps Fig.

. 2004. without Videolink Receiver 10.04.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 416 mm Wide.5 Mechanical design The MCP 416C-M is shipped with a set of 10 exchangeable key caps (color: light basic) with the following labeling: Table 10-9 Meaning Labeling of exchangeable key caps supplied with MCP Symbol Meaning Symbol Info (7155) (6035) H (7159) Spray gun (7156) Unlock door for workpiece conveyor (7162) Chuck Open/Closed (7158) Change axis (7154) Acknowledgment (7158) Axis 5.04 Edition ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ Threaded bolt M5 M5 Spacer ring Front panel 10 10-165 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.n (7161) Chip conveyor (7160) Welded threaded bolts (see diagram below) are used to mount the operator panel front and machine control panel: 5 23 Fig. 10-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and machine control panel (detail of Fig.. 10-4)  Siemens AG.

2004. H1 H2 H3 H4 Meaning of status LEDs Meaning Hardware faults Temperature error Power OK Operator panel front interface active Color Red Red Green Yellow Table 10-11 No.5 Mechanical design 04. 416 mm Wide.04 The next diagram shows the rear of the machine control panel with the position of terminals and operating and display elements: X302 X301 X303/4 1 2 X401 3 Programming switch S3 87654321 X402 X403 X404 Grounding connection M5 thread Detail X404 (power supply) Status LEDs H4 H3 H2 H1 Fig. without Videolink Receiver 10. Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3 Meaning Setting Default Value 1.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 10-7 Rear of machine control panel (MCP 416C-M and MCP416C-T) The meaning of the status LEDs is as follows: Table 10-10 No.5 Mbaud Cyclic transmit time frame: 100 ms Reception monitoring: 1200 ms 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Baud rate Cycle ON OFF ON OFF ON Bus address ON OFF 6 HW platform OFF Standard hardware 10-166  Siemens AG.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

10-6) 40. 416 mm Wide.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 10-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button. Exceptions (see diagram below): – A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch.04 Edition 10-167 .04. without Videolink Receiver 10. 416 59. – The keys are different. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 10-9 Exchangeable key caps Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed drawing see Fig. 1 Fig.75 370 Dimensions in mm Fig. 2004.2 38.3 2 MCP 416C-T: Front and side views  Siemens AG.5 Mechanical design EMERGENCY STOP Fig. 10-8 2 1 2 Block diagram of emergency stop button MCP 416C-T All information given above for the MCP 416C-M also applies analogously to the MCP 416C-T.

04 The MCP 416C-T is shipped with a set of 30 exchangeable key caps (color: light basic) with the following labeling: Table 10-12 Meaning Labeling of exchangeable key caps supplied with MCP Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Pick-up (7135) Minus (7111) Program control (7141) Tailstock (7143) Teststop_Safety (7149) Tool_monitor_Artis (7136) Workpiece_time (7153) P1 (7055) P2 (7056) P3 (7059) – Chuck_3 (7146) Bar_Feed (7150) Workpiece_changer (7093) Tool_monitor_Leukhardt (7151) Conveyor_belt (7138) Plus (7112) Turret (7092) Chuck_4 (7147) Turret_2 (7095) P1 Spindle (7148) P2 Turret_1 (7094) Workpiece_ counter (7152) Control_switching (7137) Oil_trap (7140) P7 (7067) P3 + P4 (7060) P5 (7063) P6 (7064) P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 (7068) P8 Unlabeled 10-168  Siemens AG. 416 mm Wide.5 Mechanical design 04.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. without Videolink Receiver 10. 2004.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front.

10-10 Panel cutout for operator panel front Mounting  Siemens AG.5 Dimensions in mm 1. not included in scope of delivery). The spacer rings (Fig. 2004. Secure the components from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitable circlips (torque 1.5 Fig.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 10-6) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed when installed (required to afford degree of protection IP54.04 Edition ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 329+1 386+1 395 Proceed as follows to install the operator panel front: 6 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 416 mm Wide. 10-6 and 10-9) into the mounting holes of the prepared panel cut-out (Figs.6 Installation S Operator panel front Individual components S Machine control panel The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in the following diagram: Panel cutout for operator panel front 4. without Videolink Receiver 10. 341 10-169 . 2. 10-10 and 10-11).6 Installation 10.04. Insert the operator panel front and the machine control panel with their four threaded bolts (Figs.8 Nm).

5.04 Edition 349 .10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 4. Panel cutout for machine control panel 5.04 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. except X404 (see Fig.5 Dimensions in mm For noise immunity reasons.5 6. Connect X404 to the 24V power supply (see Fig. No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in the immediate vicinity.  Siemens AG. without Videolink Receiver 10.5 The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in the following diagram: Fig. Make the ground connections (see Fig. 2004. 7. Connect the interfaces.6 Installation 04. 10-7). 10-7). 10-11 Panel cutout for machine control panel 10-170 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 334 +1 384 +1 395 Note The shield must be connected if a shielded cable is used. the USB connection from the videolink receiver (interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installed and secured close to the top side of the metal plate. 416 mm Wide. 10-7).

04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must be activated. there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.04.04 Edition 10-171 . 416 mm Wide. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide /IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI Embedded IM4: Installing HMI Advanced  Siemens AG. 2004.6 Installation Screen saver Caution If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display. without Videolink Receiver 10. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

PELV acc.. 18 K/h 5 . 0. 55 °C (to rear) max. 6 kg Welded studs: M3: 0. 30 ms. mA. approx. 80 % max.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 10 K/h 5 . to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE Rear side IP00 Technical data for operator panel front Operator panel front 5 V +/– 5% 420 / 600 Typical.8 Nm Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 .8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Tension jacks: 0.) Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Tightening torques.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2. 15 W Maximum approx.7 Technical data Table 10-13 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Voltage Current (typ.2 V +/–2% 350 / 1000 III. 55 °C max. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width: 416 mm Height: 382 mm approx. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature) EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 .. without Videolink Receiver 10. 95 % Depth: 59. 24 W Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.7 Technical data 04. 2004.5 mm Display Backlight inverter 12 V +/–10% 900 / 1050 Logic / USB (with / without load) 5. 416 mm Wide.45 Nm / M4: 1 Nm M5: 1..04 10.... dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution MTBF backlight 15” TFT 1024 x 768 pixels typ. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet 10-172  Siemens AG.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front.5 Nm Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.. / max.. 6 ms. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. approx..04 Edition . max.. 45 °C (to front) 0 .

7 Technical data Machine control panel Table 10-14 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption.04 Edition 10-173 ..04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 7 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. 11 ms.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 11 ms. without Videolink Receiver 10. 45 °C (to front) 0 . 416 mm Wide. 55 °C max. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE Rear side IP00 Technical data for MCP 416C–M or –T Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. max..04... 0.. PELV acc.. 80 % max. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width: 416 mm Height: 370 mm Depth MCP–M: 84 mm Depth MCP–T: 100 mm approx.6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 150 m/s2.. 2004..015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 95 %  Siemens AG.81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 150 m/s2. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 24 V DC 2W III.. 55 °C (to rear) max.. 10 K/h 5 . 18 K/h 5 .

3.04 10. see Fig. cap. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect the wiring. T=32. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray Order No. without Videolink Receiver 10. 10-174  Siemens AG. (MLFB) 6FC9320–5DM00 6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0 6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0 6FC5247–0AF01–0AA0 3BS2000–1AC01 3SB2908–0AA 3SB2404–0C 3SB3001–0AA71 3SB3400–0A 3SB3400–1D 6FC5248–0AF12–0AA0 Exchange handwheel Remove the handwheel in the following way (see picture below): 1.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel 04. Remove the washer 4. 2004. button. T=32. Undo the M15 fastening nut. button and pointer USB mouse for front Button Holder Switching element Complete Illuminated Ill i t d keys Key cover (for labeling) Switching element Switching element with lamp 1 set of 90. cap.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front.04 Edition . Grub screw (hexagon-socket) (not visible) M15 fastening nut Handwheel spindle Supply terminals Rotary knob Fig. Slacken the hexagon-socket screw in the rotary knob and pull the rotary knob off the axis. pointer and dial 1x29G. 416 mm Wide. 10-12 Removal of handwheel Seal Installation is performed in the reverse order (for installation kit. Make sure that the seal is fitted correctly. 10-12). T-version 1x23G. 2.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel Table 10-15 Name Handwheel Rotary switch rapid traverse Rotary switch feed Mouse EMERGENCY STOP Spare parts packages for machine control panel Description Handwheel for machine control panel. width 416 mm.

04 Edition 10-175 . 2. 3. 3.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel Exchange rotary switch Remove the rotary switch in the following way (see picture below): 1.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealing purposes). Attach the arrow ring to the rotary knob. 5. Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front side using a wrench (width 14). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 416 mm Wide.04. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!). Remove the fastening nut on the rotary switch axis from the front side using a wrench (width 14). Rotary selector switch spindle Collet nut Cap Fig. Remove the connector at the end of the rotary switch cable from its socket (make a note of connector orientation). 2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10). Remove the rotary selector switch. 6. 2004. 4. 10-14 Installation of rotary selector switch 1. 10-13 Removal of rotary selector switch Install the rotary selector switch in the following way (installation kit in next picture): Fastening nut Rotary knob Cap Connecting cable O-ring Terminal board Fig.  Siemens AG. without Videolink Receiver 10. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is applied to the O-ring. 4. Pull the rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.

Place the cap (cover) on the rotary knob and snap on. 10-15 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected) Replacement of mouse The following picture shows the mouse prior to removal: Connecting cable Mouse board Cable connector Clamping frame Fig. 416 mm Wide.04 5. 0. Fig. make sure that the arrow point is aligned with “0”. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 7.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 2004. The second rotary selector switch is installed in the same way. Attach the complete rotary knob to the shaft. 10-16 Mouse prior to removal Fastening screw 10-176  Siemens AG. 8. 10-14.04 Edition . Connect the cable in the way shown on the right-hand side of Fig.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel 04. Observe the recommended cable folds.5 mm). 6. When doing so. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob using a wrench (width 10) (distance between knob and assembly front approx. without Videolink Receiver 10. except that the recommended cable folds shown in the picture below should be used.

10-17 Mouse fastening released 4. 2004.  Siemens AG.04 10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. without Videolink Receiver 10. Release the clamp frame. 3. Undo the four M3x6 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 10-177 . Lever the mouse out of the front panel. 10-18 Removed mouse Installation is performed in the reverse order. The picture below shows the removed mouse: Fig. 2. Make sure that the mouse symbol is the correct way up. Unplug the cable connector from the mouse board.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel Remove in the following way: 1.04. 416 mm Wide. The following picture shows how the unit should then look: Fig.

04 Edition . approximately from: Operator panel front T2 T1 A [m2] = Pvtot. 1. referred to a temperature difference T2 – T1 = DT  10 K. 19 W).4 m2 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. T2 = 55 °C Pvtot = 20 W !A = 0.9 Heat dissipation The following correlations apply to heat dissipation at the operator panel front (the surfaces of the front and bottom side are not considered when calculating the convection surface): The heat produced by the operator panel front is generated almost exclusively by the display unit (approx.10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front. 2004.9 Heat dissipation 04. The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel or aluminum sheet.5 mm thick) is calculated. It is therefore sufficient to apply 20 W as the basis for calculation. 416 mm Wide.04 10. [W] 5 DT [K] Machine control panel Example: T1 = 45 °C. 10-19 Heat dissipation by means of natural convection J 10-178  Siemens AG. without Videolink Receiver 10.

2. Power is supplied via the operator panel front.2.3). OP 015A (see Subsection 11. The DKM operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The DKM converts the key signals to PROFIBUS DP protocol by means of the ASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1. 2004. The address can be set between 1 and 99 using rotary switches. 11-1 Direct control key submodule complete with coding switches and LEDs Brief description The task of the direct control key submodule (DKM) is to directly transfer the operating signals for the two rows of keys on the sides of an operator panel front to SIMATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware. The Profibus is completely isolated from the DKM/operator panel front by means of an opto-coupler and DC/DC converter.04 Edition 11-179 . In SIMATIC. Two bytes of data are transferred.2.2) or TP 015A (see Subsection 11. 12 Mbaud). The DKM can be combined with operator panel fronts of type OP 012 (see Subsection 11. The signal-tokey assignments are shown in Table 11-1 and Figure 11-3.1).  Siemens AG.Direct Control Key Submodule Validity The following description applies to the components: Designation Direct control key submodule Installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A *) 11 Order number 6FC5247–0AF1 1–0AA0 6FC5247–0AF30–0AA0 *) Installation kit for OP 012 included in the scope of delivery of the direct control key submodule Coding switches: top = ones bottom = tens LEDs Connection for OP12 cable (not visible) Fig.

1 Interfaces 04.g... .5 m. the switching states of the vertical direct control keys can be tapped without intermediate firmware.04 11. . 16 Data P5V_D_fused GND V Type O Remarks Data output. cable length max. plug connector. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. PP031-MC). 0. These signals can be evaluated in the direct control key submodule and in pushbutton panels (e. . 11-2 Direct control key submodule with connections Operator panel connection The ribbon cable from the operator panel front (see e.. 16 + 5 V (fused) Ground 11-180  Siemens AG...g..1 Interfaces The DKM has the following interfaces: PROFIBUS connection Connection for operator panel front Fig. Figure 11-8) is inserted through the cutout in the enclosure (see illustration above).. 16 17 / 18 19 / 20 Assignment of interface X11: 2 x 8 vertical direct control keys Name DT 1.11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.. Direct control key interface X11 on the keyboard controller for the operator panel front: to DIN 41651. Here.. direct control key #1.04 Edition . 2004. Table 11-1 Pin 1.

Note The Profibus cable used should have a connector with a straight outgoing cable. 2004.  Siemens AG.1 Interfaces DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT16 Fig.04.04 Edition 11-181 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 11-3 Assignment of direct control keys on an operator panel front Profibus connection 9-pin connector (see Figure 11-2).04 11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.

Keyboard controller cover plate for OP 015A OP 012 for OP 015A DKM cable Fig.1 Combination with OP 012 The OP 012 outputs the signals from the direct control keys (see Figure 11-3) at connector X11 (see illustration below).2 Mounting 04.2. 11-4 DKM installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A DKM cable for TP 015A 11.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 11-5 OP 012 rear side 11-182  Siemens AG. 2004.11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.04 11. OP 015A and TP 015A require an installation kit (see illustration below) which must be ordered separately (see “Validity” at the start of this chapter). Installation kit Mounting the DKM requires an installation kit appropriate to the operator panel front used (kit for the OP 012 already included with the DKM).2 Mounting The DKM is installed to one side of the PCU on the operator panel front and connected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable. I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 OP 012 Direct control key interface X11 Fig.

Width = 483 Display support plate 3) 3) 3) 1) 3) 1) 4) 4) Cable clamp Display cable K2 2) I/O USB cable K1 2) 1) 4) 3) 3) 4) 1) 3) 3) 3) 1) 3) 4) Mounting slots for PCU lugs Slit for softkey labeling strips OP 012 rear side 2) Cable shown folded together 3) Enclosure screws Fig.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 11-6 2.2 Mounting Preparation 1. Remove the ribbon cable clamp alongside the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration above). 2004. 11-7 Removing the cable clamp from the OP 012  Siemens AG. by inserting a pointed tool in each of the two slits and loosening the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown (see illustration below).04 Edition 11-183 Height = 310 Cover plate for keyboard controller 3) 3) . Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. OP 012 Tilting motion of tool Previous cover plate Rubber rim Cable clamp Fig.04 11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.

upper/lower coding switch: “Ones”/“Tens”). Remove the rubber rim from the edge of the housing cutout (used to secure a pushbutton panel cable) (see Fig. 11-1. 11-184  Siemens AG.04 3. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM (see Fig. 11-8 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012 3. Screw down the new cover tightly using the screws supplied (see illustration below). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. It is no longer needed for assembly. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the ribbon cable supplied with the DKM through the slit in the cover also supplied with the DKM and into socket X11 on the keyboard controller. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate. 4. Section “Mounting”. 2. 5.2 Mounting 04. Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”.11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11. New cover plate Fixing nipple for DKM (1 of 3) OP 012 Cable to DKM Fig. 4. 2004. Assembly 1. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (see illustration below). 11-7).04 Edition .

If the DKM is not connected to PROFIBUS (or in the event of another fault). 11-9 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012 6. 2004. Screw the DKM firmly to the cover using the knurled screws on the side.04.2 Mounting PCU 50 DKM Cable from OP 012 to DKM OP 012 Cover plate Retaining screws Fixing nipple for DKM Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 11-185 . 11-1). 11-10). The illustration below shows the fully assembled unit comprising OP 012. the “bus error” LED lights up (see Fig. 11-10 Installed direct control key submodule 7.04 11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11. PCU 50 and DKM: PCU 50 DKM OP 012 Fig.  Siemens AG. Insert the PROFIBUS plug (with straight outgoing cable) into the socket of the DKM (see Fig. Note The direct control key submodule must be removed first on deinstallation of the PCU.

04 11. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the DKM ribbon cable (Figure 11-4. I/O USB cable K1 Direct control key interface X11 Display cable K2 Direct control key cable Fig. labeled “OP 015A”) into socket X11 on the keyboard controller (see illustration below. observe folding).2 Combination with OP 015A Preparation 1. 2. 11-12 OP 015A: Keyboard controller connections 2. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration below): Cover plate for keyboard controller Fig. 2004.04 Edition .11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.2.2 Mounting 04. 11-186  Siemens AG. 11-11 OP 015A rear side Assembly 1. Screw down the cover plate supplied with the installation kit and labeled “OP 015A” (see Figure 11-4). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.

5.04 Edition 11-187 . 11-14 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 015A 6. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM (see Fig. Screw the DKM firmly to the keyboard controller cover plate using the knurled screws.2 Mounting 3.04.  Siemens AG. 11-13 OP 015A: DKM cable routing 4. Fold the DKM cable as shown in the illustration below: DKM cable I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 Fig. DKM Cable from TP 015A to DKM PCU 50 Keyboard controller cover plate Retaining screws Fixing nipple for direct control key submodule OP 015A Fig. 7. Section “Mounting”. 11-1). Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM.04 11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.

2. DKM interface X11 I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 Fig. Cover plate for keyboard controller Fig. 11-188  Siemens AG.04 11.2 Mounting 04.11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11. 11-15 TP 015A rear side 2. The plate is required for installation. labeled “TP 015A”) into socket X11 on the keyboard controller (see illustration below). Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration below). The cable is ready folded. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 11-16 TP 015A: Keyboard controller connections Assembly 1. 2004. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.04 Edition .3 Combination with TP 015A Preparation 1. Insert the DKM ribbon cable (Figure 11-4.

04.2 Mounting DKM cable I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 Fig.04 Edition 11-189 . 6. turn over the cable as shown in the illustration below: DKM cable I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 Fig. To do this. Screw the DKM onto the fixing nipple with the knurled screws. 4. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM (see Fig. 11-1). Section “Mounting”. Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”. 5. 11-18 TP 015A: Fitting the cover plate 3. 11-17 TP 015A: DKM cable routing 2. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (see illustration below). Tighten the screws in the cover plate.04 11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.  Siemens AG.

04 Cable from TP 015A to DKM PCU 50 DKM Retaining screws TP 015A Fixing nipple for direct control key submodule Fig. 11-19 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the TP 015A J 11-190  Siemens AG.2 Mounting 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11.04 Edition .

OP 015A. max.. It is available in the following variants: Processor clock speed 166 MHz 66 MHz 233 MHz 233 MHz User memory (SDRAM) 16 MB 32 MB 32 MB 32 MB Onboard FLASH memory 8 MB 16 MB 16 MB 16 MB Order number 6FC5210–0DF00 . OP 010S.54 mm) – operator panel front I/O interface for USB data signal/display selection/ LEDs/power supply (26-pin connector.–1AA1 Features S Robust. 64 MB or CompactFlash Card (PCMCIA) with adapter S Screen resolution: S Power supply : S Interfaces: – – – – – – – – – 640 x 480 (VGA). OP 015. up to 1024 x 768 (XGA) 24 V DC COM1 serial RS-232 interface (25-pin Sub-D socket connector) COM2 serial RS-232 interface (9-pin Sub-D socket connector) PS/2 keyboard (6-pin mini-DIN) USB interface (4-pin USB socket connector) MPI/DP interface RS-485 (9-pin female Sub-D). .–0AA0 .. high noise immunity) S Compact construction for space-saving installation S All-around fire protection (to EN60950) S Single-chip PC processor with embedded operating system S Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash) or Flash Card 100/200 type I/II. max.. 2. TP 012 and Trumpf operator panel. OP 010C.PCU 20 12 The PCU 20 component can be used in combination with the operator panel fronts OP 010..–1AA0 .–0AA1 . easy-to-service design (continuous operation.54 mm).. 2.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. – USB interface for operator panel front (internal)  Siemens AG.54 mm) – CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (34-pin connector. 1.5 Mbaud Ethernetport 10/100 Mbaud (8-pin RJ45 socket) Memory card interface (68-pin PC card connector) Floppy disk drive interface (34-pin ribbon cable connector socket) Interfaces to operator panel front: – LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front (20-pin connector.... 2004.. OP 012.04 Edition 12-191 . 2.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Left *) Top *) Bottom *) Right *) *) Orientation based on operation with the 19” operator panel front Fig. 12-2 Top view PCU 20 12-192  Siemens AG.1 View 04. 2004. floppy disk drive (optional) Retaining screws Retaining screws Fixing lugs Interfaces Rating plate Depth: 53 mm (without screws protruding) Fig. 12-1 PCU 20: viewed in perspective Width = 297 Power supply interface Ext.04 12.12 PCU 20 12.04 Edition Fixing lugs Height = 267 .1 View The Figures 12-1 to 12-5 show different views of the PCU 20.

12-3 PCU 20 side view from right with interfaces Table 12-1 Interfaces on right side of housing Name Connection Function Serial interface (RS-232-C) Serial interface (RS-232-C) Mouse connector/keyboard connection External connection for Universal Serial Bus Multi-Point-Interface/Profibus DP connection Connection of an S7 programmable controller Connection for local area network (LAN).2 Interfaces and connections 12.2 Interfaces and connections Note The orientation drawings “top”.04 12 PCU 20 12. 12.1 Interfaces on right side of casing PS/2 mouse COM1/V.2. 2004. “left” etc.24 COM2/RS-232 USB Ethernet MPI/L2-DP Memory card slot Fig.04 Edition Depth = 56 53 12-193 . Pin assignments The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Connection Conditions”. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. “right”. Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”. refer to the mounting position when operated with OP 012 (see Fig. software option Slot for – Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash) or – Flash Card 100/200 type I/II or – CompactFlash Card (PCMCIA) with adapter COM1/RS-232 25-pin sub-D socket COM2/RS-232 9-pin male sub D connector PS/2 mouse/ keyboard USB MPI/DP (RS 485) Ethernet Memory card PS/2 4-pin USB socket 9-pin sub-D socket 8-pin RJ45 socket 68-pin PC card connector  Siemens AG. 12-1 and 12-7) viewed at the rear of the PCU 20/OP 012 combination.04.

2004. 12-5 Rear of PCU 20 housing complete with interfaces 12-194  Siemens AG.2.2 Interfaces and connections 04.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.12 PCU 20 12. 12-4 Interfaces on left side of casing Fastening screw for cover plate of external floppy disk drive port Interfaces for the operator panel front: Shield connection Ground terminal I/O USB interface LVDS interface for TFT display Fig.04 12.2 Interfaces on left side of casing The following interfaces are located on the left-hand casing panel: Interfaces for the operator panel front: CMOS for STN display (OP 010) I/O USB interface LVDS for TFT display Data interface for external floppy disk drive Reset 24 V supply connection Fig.

Table 12-2 Interfaces on the left side of the casing Connection LVDS I/O USB CMOS 24 V Floppy Function LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front I/O interface/USB data CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (X420) 24 V supply connection Data interface (34-pin ribbon cable plug socket) for external floppy disk unit Note Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset.04.3 Mounting bracket on underside of casing Mounting bracket for screwing to the operator panel front Fig.2 Interfaces and connections Interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted: – – – Front interface for connecting the I/O USB cable LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display CMOS interface for connecting an STN display (X420) Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: see Subsection 12. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 12-6 View of PCU 20 from below  Siemens AG.2. 2004.3.04 12 PCU 20 12.1.04 Edition 12-195 . The PCU reboots. 12.

Details can be found in the documentation for the operator panel fronts. 5 m For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter.4 Pin assignments Cable length: max.2 Interfaces and connections 04. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Cable length: max.5 m This interface is on the mother board and cannot therefore be seen from the outside! This interface can only be accessed by opening the casing. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2.5 Mbaud For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter.5 m This interface is accessed through the opening in the base plate.12 PCU 20 12.04 Edition .04 12. 0. Cable length: max. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Cable length: max. The devices may be damaged permanently if the STN display is inadvertently connected to the floppy disk interface! 12-196  Siemens AG. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter. of 200 m at 1. 2004. 0. 30 m For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter.5 m Cable length: max. 0. Caution The STN interface is mechanically identical to the external floppy disk interface which is accessible from the outside. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Serial port COM 1 (X9) Serial port COM2 (X11) PS/2 keyboard/ mouse interface (X6) USB interface (X40) MPI/DP interface (X800) Ethernet/RJ45 interface (X805) Display interface (LVDS) for TFT operator panel front X400) I/O interface for operator panel front (X44) X420: STN interface for operator panel front Cable length: max.

Protect the PCU from dust. by falling down) may result. the PCU 20 is first screwed to the operator panel front and this is then secured to the assembly panel using tension jacks. 12-7 To be avoided Preferred mounting position when operating with the 19” operator panel fronts Permissible installation positions of the PCU 20 with the 19” operator panel front An inclined position of ± 5_ is permitted. It can therefore be integrated without an additional fire protection surround.1 Mounting Assembly with operator panel front and installation The PCU 20 meets the relevant demands placed on a fire protection casing to EN60950. S The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to make sure that sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig. Please note the following during installation: S As far as possible. 2004.04. 12-7).04 Edition Interfaces 12-197 .g. S Do not expose the PCU to direct sunlight. S Install the device such that no danger (e.3 12. Combination with operator panel front When used in combination with the operator panel front (e.04 12 PCU 20 12.g. Vertical mounting is recommended. The procedure is described in this manual in the chapter relating to the individual operator panel front. Permissible mounting positions: *) Clearance for ventilation: 10 mm *) Interfaces Interfaces *) Interfaces Interfaces Interfaces Preferred mounting position when operating with OP 010S Fig. OP 012). humidity and heat.3 Mounting 12. Clearances on the sides. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S Do not cover the vent slots. extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.  Siemens AG. see Chapter “Heat Dissipation”.3.

This does not apply to USB connections. Booting After connection of the power supply. A mains switch is not provided so that the power supply is turned on/turned off by plugging/unplugging the power supply plug (see above). memory card. please make sure that the components are designed for use in industry. etc. the preinstalled system boots automatically and finally shows the start screen. After the operator panel front has been connected. 2.). printer. 12-198  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3. you must connect an operator panel front. 12-4 and 12-5). Caution When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard.04 12.2 Preparing for operation Before you connect the PCU to a power supply. Connecting the power supply Turning on and turning off The PCU 20 is supplied with 24 V DC (see Fig. the device is ready.12 PCU 20 12. mouse. 2004.3 Mounting 04. Otherwise damage may result. 1. 12-3).04 Edition . Insert the interconnecting cables for the operator panel front into the appropriate sockets on the interface side of the PCU 20 (see Fig. Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required can be found in the manual for your I/O device. make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply. Connecting I/O devices Note When connecting I/O devices.

8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2... 18 K/h 5 .04 12 PCU 20 12. 55 °C max. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 .. to EN 50178 IP20 CE Technical data Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.5 Floppy Disk Drive” in this manual. max. J  Siemens AG. 30 ms. PELV acc. For further information on the floppy disk drive.5 Accessories 12. Mains buffering time Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Weight Mechanical ambient conditions (with OP 010) Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0..5 Accessories Floppy disk drive The external floppy disk drive can be connected to the PCU 20.. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Depth 56 24 V DC 60 W 20 ms III. 6 ms. 10 K/h 5 . dusts and oils Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 .4 Technical data Table 12-3 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption. 95 % 12. 55 °C max.04 Edition 12-199 .075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 80 % max. see Section “3. 4 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. The port for the external floppy disk drive is located on the left side panel of the casing (see Fig. 0.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2.. 2004..5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width 297 Height 267 approx. 11-4).04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 % /min Open circuit ventilation not permissible without aggressive gases..

04 Edition .12 PCU 20 12.5 Accessories 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Notes 12-200  Siemens AG. 2004.

. MCI board – incl....... ... 500MHz 128 MB NT 4 0 4. C l 566 MHz NT 4 0 4.. MCI board – incl.0 128 MB 128 MB Pentium III... MCI board – Order number 6FC5 2.10-0DF02-0AA0 .10-0DF22-2AA0 Features S Rugged design (continuous operation.. The SINUMERIK PCU 50 comes supplied with the operating system Windows NT 4..20-0AA20-0AA0 .PCU 50 13 The high-performance SINUMERIK PCU 50 features onboard interfaces for communication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP/MPI.10-0DF22-0AA0 .10-0DF05-0AA0 .20-0AA00-1AA0 .10-0DF01-0AA0 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..20-0AA22-0AA0 .10-0DF20-0AA0 ..0 EmbSys or Windows XP ProEmbSys.. 13.. the Ghost 6 data backup software.10-0DF21-2AA0 . The USB port at the back of the device provides “hot plug and play” functionality for a standard PC keyboard and mouse.. 2004.0 XP 128 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB Other features – incl. 333MHz NT 4..0 XP Celeron. high noise immunity) S Compact construction for space-saving installation S Easy-to-service design S Easy installation with four screws at the rear side of the operator panel front S Mounting position and location to a large degree variable S Processor: See table above  Siemens AG.20-0AA01-1AA0 . C l 1. The HMI-Advanced software can be ordered separately... HMI Advanced incl. MCI board – – incl.2 GHz NT 4 0 4.. and for backing up and restoring data.04 Edition 13-201 .1 Overview Validity The description applies to the following devices: Processor Operating system RAM 128 MB Pentium II P ti II. leaving the integrated slots free for other cards..0 128 MB 128 MB Celeron.

13 PCU 50 13. 1 x RS-232-C (9-pin) PS/2 keyboard interface PS/2 mouse interface MPI/DP (max.1 Overview 04. 512 MB S 10. 1600 x 1200 pixels with Celeron processors 24V DC S Power supply S Interfaces: – – – – – – – – – – – – Parallel interface (LPT1) Serial interfaces: 1 x RS-232-C (25-pin). 13-202  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 12 Mbaud) VGA interface for external monitor Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud 2 slots: 1 x PCI and 1 x shared PCI/ISA PC card slot USB interface (for Windows NT: For standard PC keyboard and mouse) With PCU > 500 MHz: Additional USB interface Interfaces to operator panel front: LVDS interface CMOS interface IO interface Note Where the Windows NT operating system is used.04 S User memory (RAM). If other USB devices are used. 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) with Pentium processors Max. the USB interface only supports keyboards and mouse units. max. Combination with touch panels TP 012 and TP 015A is only possible under Windows XP. 2004. the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.4 GB hard drive S Operating system Windows NT (not touch panels) or Windows XP S Screen resolution: – – Max.04 Edition .

2 View 13. 13-2 Top view of PCU 50  Siemens AG. 2004. 13-1 PCU 50 v 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive installed Right *) Width = 297 Casing cover screws Interface for external floppy disk drive Screws for power supply cover Handle Shipping lock Hard disk drive Rating plate Power supply Depth: 80 mm (without screws protruding) Fig.04.04 13 PCU 50 13. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition Interfaces 13-203 Height = 267 .2 View Top *) *) Orientation relates to operation with OP 012 Fig.

04 Edition Depth = 80 Slot 1 . 25-pin sub D socket connector Serial interface 2 (RS-232).13 PCU 50 13.g.3. 9-pin sub D socket connector VGA interface for external monitor. 13-3 Table 13-1 PCU 50 side view from right with interfaces Interfaces on right side of housing Interface/connection LPT1/Printer COM1/RS-232 COM2 Keyboard Mouse USB PCU 50 v 500 MHz PCU 50 > 500 MHz MPI/DP (RS-485) VGA Ethernet PC cardslot PCI slot PCI/ISA slot Power supply connection 1) Function Parallel interface (e.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 24 V power supply Cover plate for PCI slot connection Cover plate for connection PCI/ISA slot Slot 2 PS/2 mouse LPT1 COM1 VGA PS/2 keyboard COM2 (serial mouse) MPI/DP USB *) Ethernet Cover plate for PC card slot *) Top USB interface only for PCU 50 > 500MHz Fig. Pin assignments 13.04 13. the cover plates in Fig. Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”. printer). 13-204  Siemens AG. 2004.3 Interfaces and connections 04. 13-3 are replaced by the front plates of the boards. 9-pin male sub D connector PS/2 keyboard connection PS/2mouse connector One external USB connection Two external USB connections Windows NT: one connection can be used for a standard PC or mouse Multi-Point Interface/Profibus DP connection Connection of an S7 PLC. 15-pin female sub D connector Connection for local area network (LAN) Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or Flash Card 100/200 Type I/II Slot for expansion boards 1) Slot for expansion boards 1) 24 VDC If expansion boardsare installed. 25-pin sub D socket connector Serial interface 1 (RS-232).3 Interfaces and connections The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Connection Conditions”. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Please refer to the module documentation for more details.

13-5). Ground terminal Fig.3.04.3.04 Edition 13-205 . 14-7).4.4 Casing rear side The two interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted are located behind a rectangular cutout in the rear side of the casing: – – the IO interface for connecting the IO USB cableand the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: See Subsection 13. Note Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset.2 Interfaces on left side of casing Device fan Fig.3 Ports on bottom side of casing There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 2004.1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 13-4 can be used to connect an external floppy disk drive (see Section 13. The PCU reboots.3 Interfaces and connections 13. 13.8 and Fig. 13-5 Bottom side of the PCU 50 13.  Siemens AG.04 13 PCU 50 13. 13-4 Reset pushbutton switch Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pin plug connector) Side view of PCU 50 from left with the port for an external floppy disk drive The connection shown in Fig.3.

04 13.13 PCU 50 13. 2004. Central mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter The illustration below shows the PCU and mounting brackets (standard) correctly positioned before they are screwed together. 13-206  Siemens AG.8 Nm. Standard mounting for assembly of PCU + operator panel front 2. Torque M3: 0. Appropriate mounting brackets are provided for each of the following PCU 50 mounting options: 1. 13-6 PCU 50 with standard mounting brackets M4 M3 Assembly with other components You can find the assembly instructions: S for option 1 in “Mounting” in Chapter “OP 012” S for options 2.4.4 Mounting 04. 3 and 4 in “Mounting PCU with videolink transmitter” in Chapter “Distributed Installation”. Upright mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter 4.1 Mounting Mounting preparation The appropriate mounting brackets must be screwed to the PCU before it is attached to an operator panel front or a videolink transmitter (see Subsection 13. M4: 1.8. Mounting bracket M4 M3 Lugs without hinged catch M3 M4 M3 M4 Lugs with hinged catch Notice: The lugs with hinged catch must point towards the fan end! Fig.4 13.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Flat mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter 3.8 Nm.1 or catalog).

Protect the PCU from severe vibrations / jolts. S Ventilation clearance: – – On fan side: On rear side: 100 mm 10 mm (see Fig. Mounting position The permitted installation positions are shown in Fig. humidity and heat.2 Notes on installation Please note the following during installation: S As far as possible. extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.04 13 PCU 50 13.4. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.  Siemens AG. 13-7) S Do not cover the vent slots. dust. 13-7 Permitted installation positions of the PCU 50 Inclined position: Deviations of ± 5_ relative to the installation positions shown in the illustration are permitted. S Do not expose the PCU to direct sunlight. S Install the device such that no danger (e.g.04 Edition Interfaces Device fan Device fan 13-207 . 13-7: *) Device fan Hard disk Interfaces Interfaces Hard disk Interfaces Hard disk Device fan *) Device fan Interfaces Hard disk Device fan Hard disk Hard disk Interfaces *) 10 mm clearance for ventilation Impermissible mounting position Mounting position for operation with OP 012 Fig. by falling down) may result. S An external fire protection casing is required.4 Mounting 13.04. 2004.

) 2. Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required.. please make sure that the components are designed for use in industry! Connecting I/O devices Caution When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard. Connecting the power supply The PCU 50 is supplied with 24VDC (see Fig.5. the preinstalled system boots automatically and finally shows the start screen (see IM4: Start-up Guide. ! Caution The device should only be connected to a 24VDC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).5 Startup Before you connect the PCU to a power supplyyou must unlock the hard diskand connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front. see below) become operative.5 Startup 04. This does not apply to USB connections. ). make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply. The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage can be caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.2). the device is ready. mouse. etc. After the I/O devices have been connected. printer. 13-3 and Table 13-1. keyboard. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 13..7. Section “Booting the system”). When the system boots.04 Edition . Otherwise damage may result.1 Booting When the power supply is switched on. Note When connecting I/O devices. mouse. Turning on and turning off A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switched on and off at the external power supply.04 13. is to be found in the User’s Manual of your I/O device. 13-208  Siemens AG. 13-3 and Subsection 13. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriate socket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 50 (see Fig. 1.).13 PCU 50 13. the system parameters stored in the BIOS (Basic Input Output System.

BIOS settings The following table contains all adjustable BIOS parameters together with their default values: Table 13-2 Adjustable standard BIOS parameters of the PCU 50 Designation Menu / Parameter Main System Time System Date Disk A: Primary Master Primary Slave Secondary Master Secondary Slave Memory Cache Boot Options Quick Boot Mode SETUP prompt POST Errors Floppy check Summary screen Keyboard Features Num Lock Key Click Keyboard auto-repeat rate Keyboard auto-repeat delay Hardware options PCI MPI/DP On-board Ethernet LAN Remote Boot Cardbus/PCMCIA slot Fan control SafeCard functions ––– Standard setting PCU 50/70 v 500 MHz xx:xx:xx xx/xx/xxxx 1. to the Service menu As a user you will generally select number 1.04 13 PCU 50 13. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. a query will appear on the screen asking whether you wish to go 1. 13-8) to confirm your selection and let the system boot to the chosen menu. Use the Input key (see Fig.04.44 MB. 3 1/2” (connected externally => disable floppy disk check) Depending on hard disk None None None Write back PCU 50/70 > 500 MHz Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Off Disabled 30/s 1/2secs Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled  Siemens AG. to the User main menu or 2.04 Edition 13-209 . 2004.5 Startup Boot manager If you let the system boot automatically.

5 Startup 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.13 PCU 50 13. 2004.04 Edition .04 Menu / Parameter Legacy USB support CRT/LCD selection LCD screensize DSTN contrast PS2 mouse Advanced COM/LPT Internal COM1 Base I/O address Interrupt Internal COM2 Base I/O address Interrupt Internal LPT1 Mode Base I/O address Interrupt PCI Configuration: Option ROM scan Enable master Latency timer PCU 50/70 v 500 MHz Enabled PCU 50/70 > 500 MHz Simultaneous Expand 154 Auto Detect Configuration Enabled 3F8 IRQ4 Enabled 2F8 IRQ3 Enabled EPP 378 IRQ7 PCI Device Slot 1 / 2 Enabled Enabled 0040 h PCI Device Slot 3 / 4 *) ––– Option ROM scan Enable master Latency timer PCI/PnP ISA IRQ Exclusion IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7 IRQ9 IRQ10 IRQ11 PCI IRQ line 1 PCI IRQ line 2 PCI IRQ Line 3 / 4 *) Installed O/S Reset configuration data Floppy disk controller Disabled Disabled 0040 h – – – Available Available Available Available Available Available Reserved 5 Auto-select Auto-select Other No Enabled 13-210  Siemens AG.

After you are prompted to activate BIOS Setup. 2. these must be registered with the system in the BIOS setup.04 13 PCU 50 13. ”Disk A:”  Siemens AG. You can activate this via the operator panel front (Fig.5 Startup Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70 v 500 MHz Primary & Secondary DOS Disabled Disabled PCU 50/70 > 500 MHz Both Local bus IDE adapter Large disk access mode Hard disk pre-delay Memory gap at 15MB Video Adapter Settings Frame Buffer Size AGP Rate Default Primary Video Adaptor Security Supervisor password is User password is Set supervisor password Set user password Password on boot Fixed disk boot sector Diskette access Power APM Power savings Standby timeout SuspendTimeout Hard disk timeout Boot Sequence ––– ––– ––– ––– 8MB 4x AGP Disabled Disabled [Enter] [Enter] Disabled Normal Supervisor Enabled Disabled off off Disabled ––– Hard drive Removable devices CD–ROM Drive ––– IBA 4.04 Edition 13-211 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. e.04. ext. 2004. 3.g. 1.0 22 Slot 0048 *) BIOS lines ” PCI Device Slot 3 / Slot 4” and “PCI IRQ Line 3 / Line 4”: relevant only for PCU 70 Changing BIOS settings After installing or mounting additional components (e. press key <F2>. use the cursor keys for navigating to the desired selection field. Boot the device.g. In the menu. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 13-8) as described below. floppy disk drive).

03.63 SR3 and 5. with the exception of the Boot sequence and the LPT mode (EPP.5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Versions 5. The system will then boot as described above. 13-8 PCU 50: Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front Note Any changes to BIOS settings.64 SR3 of the 3M Touch software are included in the basic software for WinXP up to and including V07. EPC). Boot up the system in service mode. 13-212  Siemens AG. Use <Escape> (<Alarm Cancel> key) to access the “Exit” menu (can also be accessed by continuously pressing the cursor right key). Shift key SHIFT ALARM CANCEL Escape key Input key INPUT press <F2> to enter BIOS setup F2 key Fig. 2004.04 Edition .03 and WinXP V07. combined with PCU 50 with 500 MHz processor > and Windows XP) is connected. 8.2 Touch screen calibration Whenever a new touch panel (TP 012 or TP 015A. 1. 3. Procedure A functioning touch panel system with PCU 50 (see above) is required. you can use the right/left cursor keys to go to other Setup menus. 6. 13.04 4. require you to sign an OEM agreement.5 Startup 04. Press the <Input> key to quit the setup menu. Press the <Input> key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with “Yes”. respectively. Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected).03. Change the setting using the + key (simultaneously press <SHIFT> and <X> keys) or the <–> key (in the numerical key group). Open the calibration menu with “Start” –> “Programs” –> “Touchware” –> “Touchware” (see illustration below). 2.13 PCU 50 13. 7. 5.05 onwards. If required. a calibration must be performed.

04 13 PCU 50 13.04 Edition 13-213 . 4. 13-9 Menu for touchscreen calibration (Touchware version 5. 2004.64 SR3) Note Depending on the software version and setting. Fig. Press the “Calibrate” button.  Siemens AG. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activate the “Start” button (bottom left).63 SR3) or between 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu “Tools” –> “Options” –> “Advanced” –> “Style”. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the screen can include 2. 4 or 5 calibration points. You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.04.5 Startup Note On the TP015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the center point.

04 The following display appears: Fig. You can calibrate the screen again if necessary by pressing “Calibrate”. touch the calibration point indicated by the hand symbol as precisely as possible for as long as the “Hold” prompt is displayed. To test the calibration. 13-10 Calibration screen 5.13 PCU 50 13. 8. When the parameters have been saved. Using the tip of one finger. “Hold” disappears after a few seconds and the hand symbol moves to the next calibration point. 13-214  Siemens AG. Once calibration has been successful. leave the menu by pressing “Done” –> “Close”. 2004.5 Startup 04.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. If you take too long. 13-11 Test menu 7. the action will be aborted with a timeout and you will have to start again. the following menu appears: Fig. 6. move your finger around the screen and watch the cursor. Repeat step 5 until all available points have been calibrated.

if you are inserting slim PC cards (e. Flash Memory Cards). memory extensions and SCSI interfaces can be inserted in checkcard format. SINUMERIK 840D Start-Up Guide Caution – Before you insert the PC card. Otherwise faults can occur. 2. – Handling When inserting the card. 2004.04 Edition 13-215 .04. Before using these cards: Software The “Cardware” software is required for Windows NT. 13-12 PC card interface  Siemens AG. This can be used to operate cardbus cards (32 bit) and PCMCIA cards (16 bit). ETHERNET. Insert the required PCMCIA card or cardbus card. Otherwise the PC card and/or the PCU could be damaged. the card may get stuck in the slot. Cover plate fastening rivets Cover plate PC card slot PC card eject button Fig.5 Startup 13. the PC card nameplate must point towards the back of the PCU.5. ISDN. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. BIOS settings See IAD.3 Working with PC cards The PCU 50 is equipped with a PC card interface. the ejector for cardbus/PC cards must be fully depressed. Open the interface cover by loosening the plastic rivets with a flat-bladed screwdriver (there are two parts). – When you plug it in.04 13 PCU 50 13. proceed as follows (see Fig. Communication boards for MODEM. See catalog for information on ordering. 13-12): 1. you must discharge your body’s static loading by briefly touching a grounded object. Otherwise. Token Ring.g. Remove the cover plate from the guide. FAX MODEM. Only take out the card when data is no longer being transferred (risk of loss of data and system crash). 3. – Before you insert or withdraw cardbus/PC cards. The PC card then cannot be inserted properly.

water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet < 55dB(A) to DIN 45635 Open circuit ventilation not permissible without aggressive gases.1 % /min Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity 1) EN 60721-3-3 3K5 15 W 20 W 30 W 1): 1): 1): max.04 13. 60 °C max. 6 ms.. 45 °C –20 . PC card.13 PCU 50 13. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 Width 297 Height 267 approx...8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2. 2004.15 A maximum 130 W III...5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 55 °C 5 . 30 ms.. 6 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. PELV acc.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Depth 77 24 V DC PCI / ISA slot 2A 0.. to EN 50178 IP20 CE Technical data Shock stressing Noise Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 95 % max.6 A 0.. output expansions (PCI/ISA slots. power consumption 5V 12 V –12 V Power consumption Mains buffering time Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Weight Mechanical ambient conditions (with OP 012) Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. dusts and oils Operation Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 5 .075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 10 K/h 10 .6 Technical data 04. 18 K/h 5 ..1 A typically 40 W 20 ms Total 3A 0..6 Technical data Table 13-3 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Max. 50 °C 5 . USB interface) 13-216  Siemens AG.3 A 0. 80 % Max.. 0.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..

04 13 PCU 50 13. 2004.1 Replacing the hard disk Hard disk holder Ribbon cable for hard disk connection Plug connector for connecting an external floppy disk drive Fig. 13-13 PCU 50  500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive swung out  Siemens AG.04 Edition 13-217 .7 Spare parts 13. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6 V Power supply 24V DC PCU 50 v 500MHz PCU variant PCU 50 v 500 MHz Order number 6FC5247-0AF08-0AA0 6FC5 247-0AF08-0AA1 *) A5E00019079 W79084-E1003-B1 A5E00166828 A5E00100846 PCU 50 > 500 MHz PCU 50 > 500 MHz *) Can also be installed in PCU 50 v 500MHz 13.04.7 Spare parts Spare parts for the PCU 50 are: Spare part Hard disk with mounting plate gp and damper Device fan Backup battery 3.7.

Loosen the four fastening screws of the drive holder 3. 13-14). The hard disk cables. The new drive must be of the same type as the removed one. right unlocked 13. 13-218  Siemens AG. Remove the ribbon cable from the socket.2 Changing the power supply 1. A5E00100846: Unplug the connecting cable connector from the main board (see Fig. Fig. Remove the screws securing the power supply cover to the casing and lift off the cover (see Fig.13 PCU 50 13. 13-13). 4. 13-14 Shipping lock of hard disk drive: left locked. 3. see Fig.04 Edition . 7. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 6. 5. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new power supply. Lock the shipping lock of the hard disk by turning the handle to the “non operating” position (see Fig. Loosen the fastening screws of the hard disk. 13-14 on the left). 13-13). Release the two fastening screws on the casing. Only for power supply No. Lock the shipping lock for the hard disk (see Fig.7 Spare parts 04. 5. 4. Release the shipping lock or else the system will not boot (“operating” position. 2004. may remain connected. push back the two latching lugs on the connector. 13-2). 13-14 on right). To do this. 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. however. 13-16).7. Swing the drive holder open (see Fig.04 The installed hard disk drive is connected via a ribbon cable to the socket in the PCU mother board (see Fig. 2. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new drive. Pull the power supply up and out of the casing. 13-15). 8. Procedure: 1. 2.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Art.04.04 Edition 13-219 . 13-15 Removal/installation of the power supply (Art. A5E00100846  Siemens AG. 2004. 13-16 Removal/installation of the power supply. No. A5E00166828) Power supply cover Fixing screws Fixing screws Power supply Connector for power supply Fig.7 Spare parts *) *) Device fan Power supply cover *) Split rivets for device fan *) *) Retaining screws for the power supply cover Retaining screws for the power supply Power supply Fig.04 13 PCU 50 13. No.

13-18 and Fig. 6. Pull out the two split rivets. 4. Pull the top. 13-26) *) Split rivets for securing the device fan (see also Fig. long card (if inserted) out of the PCI slot (see Fig. note the arrow on the device fan casing). then the hollow rivets (see Figs. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 13-19 and 13-25).04 Edition . proceed as follows: 1. 13-17). 7. 13-19). Installation is in reverse order.7. 13-17 Device fan replacement for PCU 50 v 500 MHz 13-220  Siemens AG. 13-17. Note When installing the device fan. 13-26). 3. 2004.7 Spare parts 04. Split rivets for securing the card guide rail (see also Fig. Remove the card guide rail by taking out the split rivets (Fig. note the direction of flow from the device fan (blower outward. 2.04 13. 13-25) Device fan *) Direction of air flow Fig. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Figure 13-2).13 PCU 50 13. Disconnect the device fan cable from the socket (see Fig. Change the device fan.3 Changing the device fan To change the device fan. 5.

Changing the battery In this case. The battery is located on the main board (see Figs. changing the battery is hardly ever necessary. Battery supply for clock and configuration Battery voltage too low If the battery voltage is too low. Do not throw new or discharged lithium batteries into a fire.4 Changing the battery A backup battery (3. 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Turn off the device. 2004. 13-18. 2. If the backup battery fails to operate or if it is separated from the plug contact. PCU 50 > 500 MHz. the backup battery must be replaced with a new one. Do not force open lithium batteries. Install the new battery and secure it. 13-26) from the socket on the mother board and release the battery clip. see Fig. the BIOS settings of the device are also stored.6 V lithium battery) supplies the hardware clock with power even when the device has been switched off.  Siemens AG. remove the mains cable and release all interconnecting cables.04 13 PCU 50 13. 4. ! Warning Risk of injury and damage. A lithium battery can explode if handled incorrectly. the battery can back up the clock for at least 8. Do not solder the cell body. Plug the battery plug on the mother board. Close the device. risk of pollutant discharge. 13-19): 1. old lithium batteries should be returned to the battery manufacturer/recycler and disposed of as special waste. Remove the battery plug (see also Fig.7 Spare parts 13. see Fig. Pollutants can be discharged if old batteries are not disposed of correctly. 5.04. Thanks to the low power consumption of the clock and the high capacity of the lithium battery. Wherever possible.5 years. In addition to the time. Proceed as follows (PCU 50 v 500 MHz. these data are lost.7. 3. Do not recharge lithium batteries. Lithium batteries should only be ordered from Siemens (Order No. For this reason. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig.04 Edition 13-221 . the current time will be lost and a correct device configuration can no longer be ensured.: W79084-E1003-B1). 13-2). 13-18 and 13-19).

04 Edition .13 PCU 50 13. 2004.7 Spare parts 04. 13-18 Main board PCU 50 v 500 MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery RAM bank 1 RAM bank 0 Connector for processor fan Plug for device fan connection Backup battery Fig.04 RAM bank 0 Base for RAM bank 1 (not assigned) Backup battery Locating hole for board retainer Battery connecting plug Plug for device fan connection Fig. 13-19 Main board PCU 50 > 500 MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery 13-222  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

see Chapter “3.8.2) 13 8 2) 4) ) Expansion boards (see Subsection 13.4.2 Memory expansion Two slots are provided on the mother board (“Banks. see Chapter “3.3) 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-3AA0 PCU 50 v 500 MHz (SO-DIMM PC 100) PCU 50 > 500 MHz (SO-DIMM PC 133) 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA0 6ES7648 2AC20 0CA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0 128MB 256 MB 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7791 0KT00 0XA0 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 (according to AT/PCI specification) Floppy disk device (parallel connection. 13-18 and 13-19) for 144-pin SO DIMMmemory modules.04.1 Mounting bracket The four mounting options for the PCU 50 have already been described in Subsection 13.8 Accessories 13.1. Use these modules to extend the user memory of the PCU to 512MB.04 13 PCU 50 13. 13.8.8.8.1) Memory expansion (see Subsection 13.8 Accessories The following accessories are available for the PCU 50: Table 13-4 Accessories for PCU 50 Component PCU 50 v Component PCU 50 standard 1) flat 2) book 2) central 3) Order number 500 MHz PCU 50 > 500 MHz 6ES7648 2AC10 0CA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 Mounting bracket (see Subsection 13. see Fig.  Siemens AG. Standard memory The basic configuration is a 128/256MB SDRAM module. 13.04 Edition 13-223 .8.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB interface” in this manual) 6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1 ____________________________________________ 1) for PCU or videolink receiver behind operator panel front 2) for PCU + videolink transmitter in control cabinet (see “Distributed Installation”) 3) for PCU + videolink transmitter behind operator panel front (see “Distributed Installation”) 4) see Figures 13-18 and 13-19.5” Floppy Disk Drive” in this manual) Floppy disk device (USB connection. 2004. A special set of mounting brackets is available for each of these mounting options (see table 13-4). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

After expanding the memory. In the Control Panel. Insert the module(s) into the base (Fig. 4.5. Activate the Control Panel by means of “Start” / “Settings” / “Control Panel”. *) For Windows XP: See IM4 (Start-up Guide for HMI Advanced). Section “Booting the system”).4. When doing so. 2. use the Service menu to start the SINUMERIK Desktop.13 PCU 50 13. 3. Proceed as follows: 1. 13-2). This will display a window corresponding to Fig. Close the device. otherwise they may fall out and be damaged. it is advisable to then optimize the use of the computer resources. When booting.04 Edition . 2. System boot Memory optimization (Windows NT *) The memory configuration is detected automatically when the system is booting (see IAM: Start-up Guide. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. pay attention to the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the SO-DIMM module.04 Memory (MByte) 128 128 192 256 256 320 384 512 64 MB module 2 – 1 – – 1 – – 128 MB module – 1 1 2 – – 1 – 256 MB module – – – – 1 1 1 2 Mounting Procedure: 1. Caution Risk of damage! The submodules must be seated firmly in the receptacle. 2004. Modify the values “Initial Size” and “Maximum Size”. Typical recommended values: 13-224  Siemens AG. Press the module downwards. 3. choose “System” / “Performance” / “Virtual Memory” / “Change”. 4. 13-18). These should be the same size and exceed the installed RAM by at least 12 MByte. 13-20. in the Windows interface Control Panel. as described in the “HMI Advanced installation and startup (IM4)” document in Subsection 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. To do this.8 Accessories 04. increase the size of virtual memory (also called the “SWAP file”) to correspond to the memory extension. applying slight pressure until the locking snaps into place.

3 Expansion boards The PCU 50 is designed for use of modules according to the AT/PCI specification (see Fig. It is not recommended to use ISA modules.04 Edition 13-225 . since with future PCUs. the memory extension is not taken into account. In the event of a spare parts and return goods service.04. Note You must sign an OEM agreementbefore you can use PCI/ISA modules.  Siemens AG. 13-25). the memory extension is taken into account. this interface is not installed.8. 13-20 Adjusting the virtual memory Note In the event of a repair and return of equipment. 2004. Activate the “Set” menu button and exit the menu by pressing “OK”.04 13 PCU 50 13. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8 Accessories Memory capacity (MB) 512 Initial Size 550 Maximum Size 550 5. Fig. 13.

2004.68 mm 4.89 ” C18 C1 A31 A1 Fig.19 mm 0.322” 106. 175 mm 6.8” 106.8 Accessories 04.89 ” A31 A1 Fig. Depending on the slot. restrictions may apply with respect to the overall length. Otherwise.04 Edition 8. 13-21 XT module 175 mm 6.92 mm 4.04 The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions.875” Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.13 PCU 50 13. 13-22 AT module 174. malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot be ruled out.201” . The diagrams show cards of the full AT/PCI overall length.2” 121.7 mm 4. contact problems.63 mm 6. 13-23 Short PCI module (5 V) 13-226  Siemens AG.

2004. 13-25 Slots for expansion boards  Siemens AG. For expansion boards PCI slot Cover plates Shared ISA/PCI slot Bus board Device fan Retaining screws for cover plates or external board connections Board retainer Retaining screw for board retainer Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. This should be included in the scope of supply of the longer PCI module.68 mm 4.322” Split rivets for device fan (see also Figure 13-17) 13-227 106.04 Edition 8. 13-24 2/3-length PCI module (5 V) Note To allow longer PCI modules to be guided along the guide rails of ISA modules.19 mm 0.2” .8 Accessories 265 mm 10.04. they must be provided with a so-called extender.48 ” Fig.04 13 PCU 50 13.

04 Edition . 5. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the protruding part of the plastic holder. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. Carefully insert the module into the desired slot. Release the fastening screw to remove the board retainer and remove the plastic support (if fitted) from its slot by pushing it through to the inside (see Figs. 4. 2004. 13-3). Release the fastening screws to be able to remove the corresponding cover plate (see also Fig. 6. firm seat should be ensured.04 Device fan Retaining screw for board retainer Board retainer Battery connector Guide rail for expansion board Plastic support Fig. 7. 13-26 Mounting of an expansion board Mounting Proceed as follows: 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2. 3. Locate the module by inserting a new plastic holder (enclosed) into the appropriate slot of the board retainer until it locates the edge of the module with its groove. Mount the board retainer. 13-2).8 Accessories 04. Screw the connecting plate of the module tight. 8. Close the device.13 PCU 50 13. J 13-228  Siemens AG. 13-25 and 13-26).

512 MB S Hard disk.04 Edition 14-229 .. reference is frequently made to the PCU 50 in the following technical description..0 NT 4 0 4. Intro duction The SINUMERIK component PCU 70 can be installed in two different ways: S Centrally (on the rear panel of a SINUMERIK operator panel front: see relevant operator panel front chapter) S Distributed (in a control cabinet: see Chapter “Distributed Installation”). 12 Mbaud) VGA interface for additional monitor Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud 4 slots: 3x PCI and 1x shared PCI/ISA PC card slot USB interface (for Windows NT: for standard PC keyboard and mouse) – on PCU (1. The description applies to the following devices: Processor Pentium III.2 GHz): Two USB interfaces 2 interfaces to the operator panel front or videolink transmitter: LVDS interface/IO interface 24 V DC  Siemens AG. 500 MHz Celeron. ..–0DF24–0AA0 –0DF24–0AA0 .. 1. easy-to-service design (continuous operation.PCU 70 14 Note The component PCU 70 is based on the PCU 50. For this reason.2 GHz Operating system NT 4 0 4. 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) 1600 x 1200 pixels 1600 x 1200 pixels Order number 6FC5210. 10... All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 1. min. max.24 PS/2 keyboard interface/PS/2 mouse interface MPI/DP (max..0 XP RAM 126 MB 256 MB 256 MB Screen resolution max. 2004. high noise immunity) S Compact construction for space-saving installation S User memory (RAM).2 GHz Celeron.–0DF04–0AA0 –0DF04–0AA0 . The main difference is the increased number of PCI slots and the resulting increase in the overall depth of the device.–0DF24–2AA0 Features S Robust..4 GB (interchangeable) S Power supply S Interfaces: – – – – – – – – – Parallel interface LPT1/2 serial interfaces V.

14 PCU 70 14. 14-2 Top view of PCU 70 (1.1 View 04.2 GHz version) 14-230  Siemens AG.04 Edition Interfaces Height = 267 . 14-1 Perspective view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version) Width = 297 Interface for ext. floppy disk drive Housing cover screws Screws for power supply cover Screws Hard disk module Handle Shipping lock Hard disk module Rating plate for power supply Depth = 122 mm (without screws protruding) Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 View Left Top Right Fig.04 14. 2004.

1 Interfaces and connections Interfaces on right side of casing 24 V power supply Cover plates for PCI slot connections Slot 3 (slave) PS/2 mouse Depth = 122 Cover plate for connection PCI/ISA slot Cover plate for PC card slot Slot 4 (slave) Slot 1 (master/slave) *) On PCU 70 (500 MHz) only one USB interface Slot 2 (master/slave) LPT1 PS/2 keyboard COM1 VGA COM2 (serial mouse) MPI/DP USB *) Ethernet Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.04 14 PCU 70 14. USB port (can be used only for standard PC keyboard or mouse) Two external USB connections Multi-Point Interface / PROFIBUS DP connection. Caution The MCI board of the SINUMERIK 840Di should be fitted in Slot 1 only. printer). see Fig.04. 14-1) from right with interfaces Interfaces on right side of housing Connection LPT1/Printer COM1/RS-232 COM2 Keyboard Mouse PCU (500 MHz) USB PCU (1.2 GHz. 25-pin Sub-D socket connector Serial interface 2 (RS-232).2 Interfaces and connections 14.  Siemens AG.2. the cover plates in Fig. See description of the relevant board. 9-pin Sub-D socket connector VGA interface for external monitor.g.2 14.04 Edition 14-231 . 25-pin Sub-D socket connector Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C).2 GHz) Function Parallel interface (e. 14-3 are replaced by the front plates of the relevant board. 14-3 Table 14-1 Side view of PCU 70 (1. 9-pin male Sub-D connector PS/2 trackballkeyboard connection PS/2 mouse connector One ext. 15-pin Sub-D socket connector Connection for local area network (LAN) Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or 100/200 Type I/II flash card Three slots for expansion boards 1) Slot for expansion board 1) 24 V DC MPI/DP (RS-485) VGA Ethernet PC card slot PCI slot PCI/ISA slot Power supply 1) If expansion boards are installed. Connecting an S7 programmable controller.

Ground terminal Fig. 14-4 can be used to connect an external floppy disk drive (see Section 14.3 Ports on bottom side of casing There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 14-1) with the port for an external floppy disk drive The connection shown in Fig.14 PCU 70 14.2.2 GHz) with ground connection 14-232  Siemens AG. 2004. The PC reboots. 14-5 Bottom side of PCU 70 (1. see Fig. 13-5).6 and Fig.2 Interfaces on left side of casing Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pin plug connector) Device van Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 14.2. Note Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. 14-4 Reset pushbutton switch Side view of PCU 70 from left (1. 14. 14-7).04 Edition .2 GHz.2 Interfaces and connections 04.

14.4 Casing rear side The two interfaces for connecting an operator panel front or.5 Pin assignments The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Connection Conditions”. 2004.04 14 PCU 70 14. Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”. in a distributed configuration.2. Procedure for mounting: see Subsection 14.04 Edition 14-233 .3.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.  Siemens AG.1.2.2 Interfaces and connections 14. a videolink transmitter are behind a rectangular cutout in the rear side of the casing: – – the IO interface for connecting the IO cableand the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. in a control cabinet). Two methods can be used to mount the PCU 70: 1. see relevant operator panel front chapter. make sure that they are positioned correctly (the brackets are not symmetrical).1 Mounting and installation A special set of mounting brackets is required for each mounting method.g. Protect the PCU against severe vibration / shocks.2 Notes on installation Please note the following during installation: S As far as possible. Flat installation for distributed configuration of PCU + videolink transmitter. 14. 14. humidity. Central installation when PCU is mounted on the operator panel front. direct sunlight and heat. For installation instructions see “Distributed Installation”.3. the display could sustain damage within a few seconds. If the settingis incorrect. the display type must be set on the videolink transmitter before the system is first switched on as it is not automatically detected (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”. The hinged catches must point towards the fan end. 14-234  Siemens AG. extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.3 Start-up 04. 2004. “Mounting” section.3. In this case.6). For installation instructions. dust.g.04 14.3 Start-up Caution In a distributed configuration.14 PCU 70 14. These are not supplied with the PCU 70 and must be ordered separately (see Section 14. S Install the device such that no danger (e. the PCU can be installed at a distance of up to 20 m from the operator panel front (e. “Mounting a PCU 50 with videolink transmitter”. S Ventilation clearance: – – Fan end: Elsewhere: 100 mm 10 mm S Do not cover the vent slots. S An external fire protection casing is required. Notice When attaching the mounting brackets. Section “Operating and monitoring devices”). 2. by falling down) may result.04 Edition .

printer.. please make sure that the components are designed for use in industry. 1.04.3 Preparing for operation With a distributed configuration.  Siemens AG.).04 Edition 14-235 . the device is ready. make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply. Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required. Caution When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard. Otherwise damage may result. This does not apply to USB connections. 2004.3 Start-up Mounting position Interfaces Device fan Device fan Interfaces Device fan Hard disk Hard disk Hard disk Interfaces Impermissible mounting position Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. After the I/O devices have been connected.. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriate socket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 70 (see Fig. is to be found in the User’s Manual of your I/O device. Note When connecting I/O devices. 14-3 and Table 14-1).3 before you switch on the power! Connecting I/O devices Before you connect the PCU to a power supplyyou must unlock the hard diskand connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front. mouse.3. ). etc. make sure that you read the warning notice at the beginning of Section 14. 2. keyboard. 14.04 14 PCU 70 14. mouse. 14-6 Preferred mounting positions of PCU 70 Inclined position: Deviations of ± 5_ relative to the installation positions shown in the illustration are permitted. Connecting the power supply The PCU 70 is supplied with 24 V direct voltage.

14. 2004.3. 14-236  Siemens AG.3 Start-up 04.3.14 PCU 70 14. The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage can be caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU. Section “Working with PC cards”.04 Edition .5 Working with PC cards See Chapter “PCU 50”. Turning on and turning off A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switched on and off at the external power supply. Section “Booting”. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 ! Caution The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).4 Booting See Chapter “PCU 50”. 14.

output expansions (PCI/ISA slots. 2004. 0.1 A typically 40 W 20 ms Total 3A 0.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.... 6 ms.. PC card.3 A 0. 80 % max.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2.. 6. cULus Technical data Shock stressing Noise Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. power consumption 5V 12 V –12 V Power consumption Mains buffering time Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Weight Mechanical ambient conditions (with OP 012) Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0..04 Edition 14-237 . 55 °C 5 . 10 K/h 10 . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Depth 122 24 V DC PCI / ISA slot 2A 0. 60 °C max. 45 °C –20 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 14 PCU 70 14. 18 K/h 5 . dusts and oils Operation Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 5 ... water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet < 55 dB(A) to DIN 45635 Open circuit ventilation not permissible without aggressive gases.6 A 0. 30 ms.1 % /min Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity 1) EN 60721–3–3 3K5 15 W 20 W 30 W 1): 1): 1): max.15 A maximum 140 W III. USB interface)  Siemens AG..04.. PELV acc.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.. 50 °C 5 .4 Technical data 14. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width 297 Height 267 approx. 95 % max.. to EN 50178 IP20 CE.4 Technical data Table 14-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Max.5 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.

04 14.5 Spare parts Spare part Hard disk with mounting plate and damper Device fan Backup battery 3.2 GHz) Memory expansion (SDRAM PC 100) 3) PC-100) Expansion boards Mounting bracket 128 MB 256 MB standard 1) flat 2) 6ES7791–0KS00–0XA0 6ES7648–2AC10–0CA0 6ES7791–0KT00–0XA0 6ES7648–2AC20–0CA0 6ES7791 0KT00 0XA0 6ES7648 2AC20 0CA0 (according to AT/PCI specification) 6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0 6FC5248–0AF20–0AA0 ____________________________________________ 1) for PCU + operator panel front assembly 2) for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter 3) see Figures 13-18 and 13-19. For further information.2 GHz (105 W) Order number 6FC5247–0AF08–0AA1 A5E00019079 W79084–E1003–B1 A5E00117073 A5E00188815 Replacing spare parts Information on spare part replacement can be found in the “PCU 50 Components” chapter.5” floppy disk drive. Fig. 14. see Chapter “3.6. 14.14 PCU 70 14. 2004.5 Floppy Disk Drive” in this manual. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6 Accessories Component 3. external 3. 14-4).6 V 500 MHz (85 W) Power supply 24 V DC 1.04 Edition .5” floppy disk drive. USB Order numbers 6FC5 235–0AA05–0AA1 6FC5 235–0AA05–1AA1 PCU 70 (500 MHz) PCU 70 (1. 14-7 shows the external floppy disk drive that can be connected to the drive connection on the left side of the casing (see Fig. 14-7 External floppy disk drive 14-238  Siemens AG.6 Accessories 04.1 External floppy disk drive Fig.

2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 14.04. You can use these modules to extend the user memory of the PCU to 512 MB. system boot See “Memory expansion” in Chapter “PCU 50”. J  Siemens AG.04 Edition 14-239 .7 System information Information on the boot manager and reading out/changing BIOS settings can be found under “System information” in Chapter “PCU 50”. 14. Memory (MB) 128 MB module 256 MB module 128 256 256 384 512 1 2 – 1 – – – 1 1 2 Mounting. Standard memory The basic configuration is a 128/256MB SDRAM module.2 Memory expansion Two slots are provided on the mother board (“Banks”.7 System information 14.04 14 PCU 70 14. see “Changing battery” in the “PCU 50 Components” chapter) for 144-pin SO DIMM memory modules.6.3 Expansion boards See “Expansion boards” in Chapter “PCU 50”.6.

14 PCU 70 14.04 Notes 14-240  Siemens AG. 2004.7 System information 04.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

–1AA0 .–0AA0 ..g... B = 1..–1AA0 . 6FC5247–0AF22–..–0AA0 .....4 2) ..–1CF0 2) Table 15-1 Possible combinations of the various transmitter and receiver types transmitter 6FC5247– 0AF20–0AA0 + + – 6FC5247–0AF21– 0AA0 + + – 6FC5247–0AF22– 1AA0 – – + 6FC5247–0AF22– 2AA0 – – + receiver 6FC5247–0AF20–1AA0 6FC5247–0AF21–1AA0 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0  Siemens AG... The following description applies to the components: Validity Designation Properties Order number Videolink receiver 1 : 1 1) Videolink transmitter Mounting bracket for Videolink receiver Mounting Mo nting bracket for Videolink transmitter 1:2 behind operator panel front (identical to that for PCU) Flat for PCU 50/70 Upright for PCU 50 Central for PCU 50 5m 10 m Videolink cable 20 m 25 m 1) see Fig..–2AA0 . 6FX2002–1VL01–....–3AA0 . 15...–1BA0 2) ..Distributed Installation with Videolink 15 Use With “Distributed Installation with Videolink” in SINUMERIK... 6FC5248–0AF20–.04 Edition 15-241 ..–1AF0 2) ..... ... up to three identical operator panel fronts (see Table 15-2) can be operated at a distance of up to 20 m from the PCU. etc.–1CA0 2) .. 6FX2002 1VL01 6FC5248 0AF20 . control cabinet). This spatial flexibility allows you to install the PCU at less hazardous locations of the system (e. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04... 2004..–1XX0 is the length code: A = 0.–2AA0 .

2004.. TP 012 or TP 015A) Note OP 010 is not supported (owing to STN color display)._0AA1 3 2 Number OP 010S 2 2 Number OP 010C 3 2 Number OP 012 Number TP 012 Number OP 015 Number Number OP 15” OPs 015A 416 mm 3 2 2 2 Number TP 015A 3 2 PCU . 20 m and 25 m S Application-specific fixing sets such as – – – – flat mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet upright mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet central mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter behind operator panel front (not with OP 010S) standard mounting bracket for mounting the receiver on the operator panel front (not required for OP 010S).15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 04. control cabinet) S Simple implementation of a second/third operator panel front with digital screen quality S Additional USB ports for service and I/O devices (keyboard.g. etc.04 Table 15-2 Maximum permitted number of operator panel fronts which can be combined with a PCU in a distributed installation with videolink Number OP 010 from . S Videolinkcable in standard lengths 5 m. 10 m. OP 012. OP 015.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..04 Edition . 15-242  Siemens AG. Operator panels PCU 50 PCU 70 3 2 3 2 3 2 Features S Used for – – Slimline operator consoles with any orientation Closed fan-free operator consoles S Robust due to separate installation of the PCU in protected areas (e.) S Extensive use of software-neutral technology for all operating systems Components SINUMERIK “distributed installation with videolink” comprises a selection of components based on the building block principle – suitable for a wide variety of operator panel fronts: S Videolink transmitter for mounting on a PCU 50/70 – – 1:1 (with one output) or 1:2 (with two outputs) S Videolink receiver for mounting on a TFT operator panel front (OP 010 S/C. mouse. OP 015 A.

15.1 Overview The maximum cable length for the videolinks is 20 m.04 Edition 15-243 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04. 2004.1 Overview 15.1. Caution All of the displays used in a system must have the same resolution since they can be damaged within a few seconds if they are incorrectly set.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.1 Configurations Figs. It is therefore essential to observe the “Caution” note in Subsection 15.1. 15-1 Distributed installation with videolink configuration with up to two operator panel fronts  Siemens AG. 15-1 and 15-2 show the possible configurations for the distributed installation with videolink: Videolink– Videolink transmitter 1:1 Transmitter 1:1 PCU PCU 6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0 Videolinkreceiver Videolink receiver Operator panel front Operator panel front 2 x USB USB USB USB Mounting bracket 6FC5 248–0AF20–0AA0 or 6FC5 248–0AF20–1AA0 required Videolink– Videolink transmitter 1:2 Transmitter 1:2 PCU PCU 6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0 Videolinkreceiver Videolink receiver Operator panel front Operator panel front 2 x USB USB USB USB 6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0 Mounting bracket 6FC5 248–0AF20–0AA0 or 6FC5 248–0AF20–1AA0 required 2 x USB Videolink transmitter Videolinktransmitter Videolinkreceiver Videolink receiver Operator panel front Operator panel front PCU PCU USB Mounting bracket 6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0 required Mounting bracket flat 6FC5248–0AF20–0AA0 Mounting bracket upright 6FC5248–0AF20–1AA0 Fig.4.

They can be mounted in an operator console.e. in a control cabinet).5.1 Overview 04. The associated operator panel front and videolink receiver components which are combined to form a unit are shown on the right.3) must be ordered separately (see below). The two installation options shown bottom left can be used: “flat mounting” and “upright mounting”. Configuration with up to 3 operator panel fronts Fig.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The mounting kits (see Subsection 9.g. 2004. 15-2). i. except an additional operator panel front is directly mounted behind the videolink transmitter (see Fig. A third installation option (not shown here). “central mounting”. This allows up to three operator panel fronts to be operated at a PCU at the same time. 15-2 shows another application option for distributed configuration with videolink: The PCU with the videolink transmitter is mounted behind an additional (central) operator panel front (not intended for OP 010S). the PCU and videolink transmitter components are combined to form a unit.04 Configuration with up to two operator panel fronts In Fig. in a distributed installation (e. They can be mounted physically separated from the operator panel front. 15-2 Configuration with up to three operator panel fronts on one PCU 15-244  Siemens AG. 15-1 (left top and center).04 Edition . PCU PCU Videolink transmitter Videolink 1:1 Operator panel front Operator panel front USB 6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0 Videolink– receiver Videolinkreceiver Operator panel front Operator panel front 2 x USB USB USB Mounting bracket 6FC5 248–0AF20–3AA0 required USB PCU PCU Videolink transmitter Videolink 1:2 Operator panel front Operator panel front USB 6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0 Videolink– receiver Videolinkreceiver Operator panel front 2 x USB USB USB USB Mounting bracket 6FC5248–0AF20–3AA0 required Videolink– receiver Videolinkreceiver 6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0 Operator panel front Operator panel front Mounting bracket 6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0 required 2 x USB USB Fig. is identical to “flat mounting”.

 Siemens AG.4).04.1 Overview Notice If a central operator panel front is used. 15. see Figs. Note To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted. 15-3 View of distributed installation with videolink: Example with two OP 012 operator panel fronts Fig. 15-3 shows the components for distributed installation with videolink: The PCU communicates with two operator panel fronts (here OP 012) by means of – – – videolink transmitters 1:2 mounted on the PCU two videolinkcables and two videolinkreceivers (not visible in the illustration since they are mounted behind the operator panel fronts.1. Power supply Operator panel fronts.2 View Videolink transmitter 1:2 PCU 50 Videolink cable (≤ 20 m) *) see note below Fig. the operator panel front should be switched on at the same time as the PCU via the 24 V DC supply. 2004. it is important to ensure that DIP switch S2 of the videolink transmitter is set to the correct position (see Section 15. 15-4 and 15-19).04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 15-245 . PCU and videolinkreceivers should be supplied with 24 V DC (the videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU).

2004.6) Keyboard interface Power supply Supporting plate Standard mounting bracket (not required for OP 010S) Fig. 15-4) 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ ) 15-246  Siemens AG..1 Videolink receiver 2 x USB-A Videolink receiver Hinged catches (covered) to help attach videolink receiver to operator panel front (see Section 15. 20 m (video data plus USB signals) 1 x 24 V DC power supply S Outputs: – – – – 2 x USB-A 1 x keyboard interface (for USB keyboard) 1 x LVDS interface (not visible in Fig. ..04 Edition . 15-4 Videolink receiver for mounting to OP 010C.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15..04 15. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6) Videolink cable Cable tie (see Section 15. TP 012 or TP 015A Fig.2.2 Description of components 15. OP 015. 15-4 shows the position of the receiver interfaces: S Inputs: – – 1 x videolink for 1. OP 012.2 Description of components 04. OP 015A.

This reduces the outer dimensions and allows the connector to be introduced into conduits with 35 mm diameter or greater.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.2 Description of components 15.  Siemens AG. 6FX2002–1VL01–1CF0 Other lengths require special preparation and have longer delivery times.04. 15-5 Videolink cable The housing can be removed on angular connectors. of 20 m. For technical reasons. Note These high-quality cables should not be shortened or lengthened.04 Edition 15-247 . The minimum diameter for permanently mounted connectors is 42 mm.2.2 Cable The videolink cable is available in four standard lengths: S 5 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1BA0 S 20 m: Order No. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Fig. 2004. 6FX2002–1VL01–1CA0 S 25 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1AF0 S 10 m: Order No. the length is limited to max.

3 Design Videolink transmitter Fig.2.1). It does not require a separate power supply because it is supplied via the interfaces to the PCU. S Outputs: – – – – 2 x videolink for 1. see Subsection 15. 20 m (video data plus USB signals) 2 x USB-A 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr... 15-6 shows a videolink transmitter (mounted on the PCU with the aid of the “flat” mounting bracket.4... operator panel front) 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ “ “ “ “) 2. Videolink transmitter 1:1 S Inputs (not visible in Fig. .04 15.. 15-6 USB-A PCU 50 PCU with videolink transmitter (1:2 variant) and flat mounting bracket Description The videolink transmitter is mounted on the underneath of the PCU between the mounting brackets. Cover plate for covering the opening used to connect a central operator panel front *) IMPORTANT: Please read Subsection 15. 15-6): – – 1 x LVDS interface 1 x IO/USB interface S Outputs: – – – – 1 x videolink for 1.. .1! Mounting bracket (flat) Videolink transmitter Display coding switch S1 *) USB-A Connections for video link cable Fig. 20 m (video data plus USB signals) 1 x USB-A 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr.04 Edition . operator panel front) 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ “ “ “ “) 15-248  Siemens AG. 2004.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. Videolink transmitter 1:2 S Inputs: same as 1.2 Description of components 04. The videolink transmitter is available in two versions: 1.5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. 36-pin 2 x USB-A Plug conn. 2 x 10-pin Plug conn.3 Interfaces 15. “Pin assignments” section.04. 20-pin Flat ribbon. 2 x 10-pin 5m 10 m 20 m 25 m Flat ribbon.. USB) – USB interface – Videolink (incl. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2 x 13-pin Videolink transmitter 1:1 Videolink transmitter 1:2 X105 X106 X201 X203/204 X205 X206 X207 X208 O O I O O I I/O O Socket connector.04 Edition 15-249 . 2 x 5-pin Terminal block.1 Hardware interfaces – overview Table 15-3 Overview of hardware interfaces Interface Type Function – Videolink (incl. 15. USB) – USB interface – LVDS interface – I/O interface for operator panel for PC – LVDS interface for central operator pane front – I/O interface for central operator panel front as for videolink transmitter 1:1 plus: – second videolink (incl. 36-pin USB-A Plug conn. 2 x 13-pin Plug connector. 36-pin USB-A Socket connector. 26-pin Videolink receiver Cable – Vid li k t Video link transmitter itt <=>video link receiver – Videolink transmitter <=> < > PCU Videolink I/O LVDS I/O I/O 15..3.2 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the following meanings: I O B V OC Input Output Bidirectional Supply voltage Open collector Signal types  Siemens AG. 2 x 13-pin Plug conn. USB) – USB interface – Keyboard interface – Power supply – I/O interface for operator panel – LVDS interface Designation X101 X102 X103 X104 X107 X108 I/O O O I I/O O I/O Type Socket connector. 2004.. 2 x 10-pin Plug connector...3.3 Interfaces The standard pin assignments for the interfaces are summarized in “Connection Conditions”. 3-pin Plug conn.

It is important to note that some keyboards already have a hub.e. of one hub is permitted.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.5 m *) _________________________________________________________ 1) Length incl. 5 6.04 Edition . line length: Max. terminal block. USB socket. 3-pin Pin assignment of connector X206 (videolink receiver) Signal name 24 V DC GND PE Signal type VI V ––– Meaning 24 V DC Ground for 24 V DC Protective earth 15-250  Siemens AG.04 X102/X1061 (USB) Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA) Connector designation: type A Max.4). Type A X203/X204 (USB) Mouse. keyboard: 5 m If hub used: 3. 10 X205. supply lead to hub and connected terminal. plug connector. number of hubs: Note It is advisable to use only “self-powered” hubs (i... X205 (USB keyboard interface) Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA) Connector designation: Max. 2 x 4-pin. hubs with their own power supply). printer.3 Interfaces 04. 2x5-pin 0. cable length: X203/X204. 5m 3 15.. X106 is switched off with switch S2 with transmitter 1:2 (see Section 15. . X102 / X106. max. USB socket connector (4-pin). 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. line length: Table 15-4 Pin 1 2 3 4.5 m Pin assignment of connector X205 (USB keyboard interface) Signal name P5V_fused USB_DM USB_DP GND NC B V ––– Signal type VO Meaning + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface USB data – USB data + Ground Not assigned X206 (power supply) Connector designation: Table 15-5 Pin 1 2 3 X206.3.3 Interface assignment for video link receiver Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA) Plug identifier: Max.

S1 must be set to the display type being used as described in the list above.04. the displays could be damaged within a few seconds.  Siemens AG.4 Operating and monitoring devices 15. The selected switch setting only becomes effective when the PCU is (re)started. . 15-7 Rotary switch S1 for setting of display type in delivered status (switch position 0) The values 1. Caution If the settingis incorrect. Before starting operation. All displays used in a system must have the same resolution.1 Videolink transmitter For selecting the display type.4 Operating and monitoring devices 15. 3. F are displayed as dashes due to lack of space. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. Note – – – – On delivery. Rotary selector switch S1 S Setting 0 S Setting 8 S Setting 9 S Setting B Videolink transmitter Display switched off (factory setting) 12” TFT SVGA 800 x 600 pixels 15” TFT XGA 1024 x 768 pixels 10” TFT VGA 640 x 480 pixels USB interface Illustration not to scale! Fig.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. S1 is set to “0”..04 Edition 15-251 ..4. 2004.

When the threshold 75 ± 5 °C is exceeded. central operator panel front active) Keyswitch pos. Temperature monitor 15. the “TEMP” LED on the operator panel front lights up. 1/1 2/2 (default) 1 2 1 2 Fig. 2nd USB interface active) USB signal⇒ X 108 (X 106 not effective. 15-252  Siemens AG.04 DIP switch S2 With the 1:2 configuration. The second USB interface X106 cannot then be used.4 Operating and monitoring devices 04. 15-8 DIP switch S2 for controlling the USB signal The recommended default setting for S2 is 2/2 (central operator panel front).2 Videolink receiver A temperature monitor is integrated in the receiver module. otherwise the keyboard. The default setting is activation of the internal interface X108. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 15.04 Edition X 108 X 106 .3 Operator panel interlock Function The purpose of the operator panel interlock is to prevent operator inputs being made at different panels simultaneously.1. Table 15-6 Function of selector S2 Function USB signal ⇒ X 106 (X 108 not effective.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. 2004.4.4. Notice If a central operator panel front (see Subsection 15. the DIP switch S2 must be set to “X108” (2/2).1) is connected to X107/108. the USB signal must be switched to the selected interfaces (X106 or X108) using S2. Interface X106 can only be used for flat and upright mounting. The LED goes out again when the temperature falls below the threshold 69 ± 5 °C. mouse and USB connector on the operator panel front will not function. The screen display must remain active and is not affected by the interlock.

04.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 15. Subsection 15.5.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU Note S S The tightening torques for all screws are: M3: 0.4.1 when setting S1.2) 15.8 Nm We recommend the following mounting directions for optimum heat dissipation: – – “Device fan upwards” “Device fan to left” (not possible with “upright” mounting. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. it is essential to observe Subsection 15.1). 15-9 Rotary selector switch S1 Threaded holes for fastening screws Videolink transmitter 1:2 with connecting cables  Siemens AG.04 Edition 15-253 . it must be set to 1/1 (X 106) (see Subsection 15.8 Nm / M4: 1.4.5. Caution To prevent damage. With “flat” mounting.1 Flat mounting Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way: 1. 2. Set S1 according to the used display type. PCU + videolink transmitter I/O/USB cable K1 Display cable K2 } ⇒ PCU Hinge bolt USB interface X 102 USB interface X 106 DIP switch S2 Fig. Check switch S2 (if fitted).04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.

Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see illustration below). 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 6.04 Edition . 15-12). 15-9).5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 04. Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Display cable K2 I/O/USB cable K1 Fig.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.04 Connection for central operator panel front PCU 50 “Flat” mounting bracket Fig. 15-11 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts 7. 4. 15-10 PCU with flat mounting brackets 3. Mount one mounting bracket on the PCU first (see Fig. Plug the connecting cable into the socket on the PCU (see illustration below). 15-10). 5. Attach the second mounting bracket after you have positioned it on the video link transmitter hinge pin opposite (see Fig. 15-254  Siemens AG.

Caution If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter. in accordance with step 8. aligned and screwed tight 9. 15-12. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screws supplied (see Fig. 15-12 Hinge of the videolink transmitter prior to alignment on the PCU 8.04 Edition 15-255 .  Siemens AG.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU Videolink transmitter Hinge bearing Hinge bolts Mounting bracket (flat) PCU 50 Fig. Otherwise. The videolink transmitter is then securely attached to the PCU mounting brackets (see figures 15-14 and 15-15) and can be mounted with the PCU in accordance with requirements. 15-13). Slide the videolink transmitter along the angular hinge bearing (to left in Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04. 15-13 Videolink transmitter. and Fig. see arrow) and push it into the position shown in the illustration below. 15-12.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. damage is likely. Videolink transmitter Mounting screw Hinge bolts PCU 50 Fig. 2004. please release the fastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling it away from the PCU.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition PCU 50 . 15-15 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the flat mounting brackets Installation of PCU/transmitter unit With “flat” mounting. Features: S Easily accessible hard disk S Relatively large amount of space required in control cabinet 15-256  Siemens AG. 2004.04 Videolink transmitter Cover plate over connection for central operator panel front PCU 50 Fig. 15-14 PCU/transmitter unit assembled for “flat” mounting 290 Mounting bracket (flat) 114 PCU 50 Retaining screws for the video link transmitter 337 232 Mounting slots for M4 screws Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Device fan 309 Dimensions in mm Fig. 15-1).15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 04. the assembly unit comprising the PCU and videolink transmitter is mounted flat against the control cabinet wall panel (see Fig.

4. Reconnect the two cable ends to the transmitter. 2004. Set the display switch S1 to the used display type.4. 2.3 17.1 when setting S1. Set the switch S2 (if fitted) to 1/1 (X106. 6.04 Edition 15-257 375.04.2 Upright mounting Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way: 1. it is essential to observe Subsection 15. 15-16). Screw the PCU and videolink transmitter together using the “upright” mounting bracket (see Fig. 3.6 360 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 50 85 113 Mounting slots for M4/M5 screws Dimensions in mm 280 Upright mounting bracket for joining the PCU and videolink transmitter together and for mounting to the assembly panel Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Device fan Fig.1). 15-16 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the upright mounting brackets  Siemens AG. Disconnect the two cables from the transmitter. PCU + videolink transmitter Upright mounting bracket for joining the PCU and videolink transmitter together and for attaching to the mounting panel PCU 50 Upright mounting bracket PCU 50 7. 5. Insert the free ends of the ribbon cables in the sockets of the PCU first (see Fig.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 15. see Subsection 15.4.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. 15-11).5. Caution To prevent damage.

10 cm).15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.04 Edition . Features: S Only one mounting position possible: Fan at top S Space required with PCU 50 less than that required for flat mounting S Keep a clearance for hard disk operation (approx. 15-1).04 Installation of PCU/transmitter unit With “upright” mounting. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 04. 15-258  Siemens AG. the rear plate of the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is mounted at an angle of 90 ° to the rear panel (see Fig.

with the following exceptions: PCU + videolink transmitter S Switch S2 (see Subsection 15. 15-17). S The cover plate on the transmitter (see Fig.1) (if fitted) must be set to 2/2 (X108).04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. 30 mm S Not possible with OP 010S. not possible with PCU 70 (too heavy). 289 24.5. 2004.3 Central mounting on operator panel front The components are joined together in the same way as for “upright” mounting.4 Mounting brackets (central) 124 Videolink transmitter PCU 50 Device fan Fig.  Siemens AG.4. Features: S Mounting depth of the operator panel front increased by approx.04 Edition PCU 50 15-259 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is mounted in the usual way directly behind an operator panel front.8 117. 15-14) must be removed prior to mounting.8 PCU 50 338.04. S The assembled PCU/videolink transmitter unit is connected to an operator panel front and secured using the knurled screws of the mounting brackets in the way described under “Installation” in Chapter “Operator Panel Front OP 012”. S The “central” mounting brackets are used (see Fig.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 15. 15-17 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the central mounting brackets to be attached to the operator panel front Dimensions in mm Installation of PCU/transmitter unit With “central” mounting.

15-18 Front. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. the two interface cables for the panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2) must be inserted into the correct sockets on the videolink receiver (visible behind the casing cut-out). see Chapter “OP 012”. Sections “Interfaces” and “Mounting”. For more information.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front 04.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.4 Videolink receiver 86. 36 OP 010S Retaining screws 4 x M3 to secure the receiver support plate to the operator panel front (2 of 4) 265 13. side and rear view of operator panel front OP 010S with screwed-on videolink receiver 15-260  Siemens AG.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front Before the receiver is mounted on the panel front.04 Edition .04 15.8 260 Supporting plate USB cable Videolink cable Dimensions in mm Fig. OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the receiver are screwed together without additional mounting brackets.

rear and side view Cable connections Fig. The mounting brackets are screwed to the receiver.04 Edition OP 012 15-261 . it is recommended to fix the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate using cable ties (see Fig. 15-19). The receiver mounting bracket unit is latched (like a PCU) into the operator panel front by means of the two hinged catches.4 Dimensions in mm Fig. 2. front.04.1). 15-4 shows the outward-bound connections: the dual USB interface. 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0). 15-4). OP 015. OP 012 Hinged catch for latching into operator panel front (1 of 2) 42 Mounting bracket Videolink receiver OP 012 269 Videolink cable USB cable Knurled screw for attaching the mounting bracket to the operator panel front (1 of 4) Mounting bracket 260 338.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front OP 010C. OP 015A. TP 015A Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required to mount the receiver on a panel front of type OP 010C. TP 012.1.  Siemens AG. the keyboard interface and the power supply connection. OP 012. closed shut and secured with the four knurled screws. 15-19 Operator panel front (example OP 012 with bolted-on videolink receiver order no. 15-4) or to the left (in Fig. 1. OP 015A. 2004. OP 012. the videolink interface (cable connected). OP 015.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. TP 012 or TP 015A (see Fig. Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief. 15-4) (see Subsection 15. the ends with the hingetype catches must point to the right (in Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 55 °C max.. 18 K/h 5 . please refer to the corresponding Chapters: “PCU 50” and “PCU 70”.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.–2AA0: 2.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2. “OP 015A”. to EN 50178 IP00/mounted on PCU: IP20 CE/cULus Technical data for videolink transmitter Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. “TP 012” and “TP 015A”..–1AA0: 1..7 Technical data For the technical data of the operator panel fronts.04 15. dusts and oils Operation Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1/–3–2 1K3/2K4 –25 .04 Edition .. 0.7 Technical data 04. 80 % 15-262  Siemens AG. “OP 012”..6 kg Depth: 35 mm Mounting bracket upright: 1. 55 °C max...5 W III.1 % /min Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 5 .. “OP 015”.. PELV acc. 30 ms. Operator panel front PCU 50/70 Videolink transmitter Table 15-7 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Voltage supply Power consumption. “OP 010C”. max.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15. 10 K/h 5 .8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2. For the technical data of the PCUs.. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Height: 277 mm Mounting bracket flat/central: 0. Mechanical data Dimensions Weights Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Width: 265 mm Videolink transmitter: 1.. please refer to the corresponding Chapters: “OP 010S”. 95 % max. 6 ms. without fan not permissible without aggressive gases. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Free convection.2 kg Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 2004.0 kg from the PCU .9 W .

.7 Technical data Videolink receiver Table 15-8 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Voltage supply Power consumption. 6 ms. 80 % max.. 10 K/h 5 .8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 50 m/s2. 2004.04 Edition 15-263 . water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Free convection.. PELV acc.. to EN 50178 IP00 CE/cULus Technical data for videolink receiver Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 30 ms. 55 °C max... max..04. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Depth: 37 mm from the PCU 40 W III. 55 °C (to rear) max. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width: 260 mm Height: 265 mm 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 .. 18 K/h 5 .075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 45 °C (to front) 0 . Mechanical data Dimensions Weights Mechanical ambient conditions Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 .. without fan not permissible without aggressive gases.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 300 m/s2. 0.8 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.04 15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.. 95 % J  Siemens AG.

7 Technical data 04.15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.04 Notes 15-264  Siemens AG.

software version 1.1 Overview The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for distributed installation allows the spatial separation of SINUMERIK OP/TP operator panel fronts and SINUMERIK PCUs and the connection of up to four operator panel fronts to a PCU with one TCU each. To this end the user interface of a PCU 50/70 is copied to several OPs with one TCU each.04 Edition 16-265 .0 Order number 6FC5312-0DA00-0AA0 6FC5253-1CX10-0XA8 Features S Flat OP layout thanks to minimized mounting depth and low power loss S Graphics: Resolution 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 pixels.Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16 16. 16-1 Distributed installation with TCU (example configuration with connection to the SINUMERIK system) Validity The description applies to the following SINUMERIK 810/840D components: Designation Thin Client Unit (TCU) Basic ThinClient PCU software for PCU 50/70 with WinXP Single license on CD ROM CD-ROM 05/04. 16-bit color resolution S Low-vibration installation of the SINUMERIK PCU in the control cabinet  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. PCU 50/70 (+ OP/TP) Ethernet switch USB floppy Ethernet Up to 4 OP/TPs + TCUs SINUMERIK 840D Fig. 2004.

4 and basic PCU software Thin Client. Ports: S 2 x USB 1.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Operation from a passive operator panel can be selectively enabled. Prerequisites S Operator panel fronts OP 010/OP 010C/OP 010S/OP 012/TP 012/ OP 015/OP 015A/TP 015A with TFT display S Operator panel fronts with the same screen resolution S SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70 1.16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16.2 GHz with Windows XP and with basic PCU software WinXP 7.g.6 “Accessories”) S Easy installation and service-friendly layout thanks to the component structure S PCU functionality the same as in a centralized configuration (e. The same operator screen is shown synchronously at all OPs and can be used from all OPs. S The distance between the PCU and the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m). 2004. Design The TCUs are connected to the PCU via Ethernet as Thin Clients in their own subnetwork (via DHCP server on the PCU).1 for connection of mouse and keyboard S Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s 16-266  Siemens AG. Use via a Thin Client is the same as use via an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU.04 S Efficient operator control of larger machines thanks to up to 5 identical operator panels S Signal transmission between PCU and operator panel front via Industrial Ethernet (see Section 16. S The system can be operated from the active operator panel. S Mixed use of operator panel fronts on a TCU or with an integrated TCU and an operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. The screen on the passive operator panel is blacked out. number of PCI slots).1 Overview 04.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16. 2004.04 Edition 16-267 .04. 16-2 X206: 24 V DC power supply View of TCU with the interfaces (Ethernet cable connected and 1 mounting bracket already fitted)  Siemens AG.1 Overview View X203/X204: 2 USB-A ports X207/X208: interfaces for connecting cables K1 and K2 to the operator panel front (covered) Hinged catch for latching into operator panel front (1 of 2) Ethernet cable Cable tie to secure the connector X202: Ethernet interface X201: Compact Flash interface Detail 24 V 0V PE Mounting bracket (1 of 2) Fig.

16-5 Distributed installation with TCU: maximum configuration 16-268  Siemens AG. 2004.04 16. 16-4 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with central operator panel front on the PCU TCU Operator panel front TCU Operator panel front PCU Operator panel front Ethernet Switch TCU Operator panel front TCU Operator panel front Mounting brackets required: for PCU 50/70 and TCU 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (without operator panel front.2 Configurations PCU Ethernet TCU Operator panel front Mounting brackets required: flat for PCU 50/70 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (for mounting in control cabinet) upright for PCU 50 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 ( “ “ “ ) for TCU 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 Fig.2 Configurations 04.16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16. Fig. see Figure 16-3). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . 16-3 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with no central operator panel front on the PCU PCU Operator panel front Ethernet TCU Operator panel front Mounting brackets required: 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (for PCU 50/70 and TCU) Fig.

2 x 4-pin.3 Interfaces 16.04. 50-pin base CompactFlash interface X201 Ethernet interface X202 USB X203/X204 8-pin standard Ethernet socket Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA). Type A Mouse. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the pin assignments for the connections can be taken from the “Connection Conditions” Chapter. of one hub is permitted. It is important to note that some keyboards already have a hub. Plug identifier: Max.04 Edition 16-269 . 3-pin 24 V DC.04 16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16.5 m *) _________________________________________________________ *) Length incl. cable length: X203/X204.1 Overview Table 16-1 Overview of interfaces Function – CompactFlash interface – Ethernet interface – USB interface – 24 V DC power supply – I/O interface *) – LVDS display interface *) Designation X201 X202 X203/204 X206 X207 X208 I/O I/O O O I I/O O Type 50-pin base 8-pin RJ45 socket 2 x USB-A 3-pin terminal block 2 x 13-pin plug connector 2 x 10-pin plug connector *) for connection to an operator panel front 16.3. supply lead to hub and connected terminal. Power supply X206 Terminal block. 2004. printer: 5m If hub used: 3. USB socket.2 Description of interfaces Pin assignments If not stated specifically below.3. max. for detailed view of terminal assignments see Figure 1-1 Operator panel interfaces X207/X208 X207: 26-pin plug connector for the IO/USB cable K1 for connecting the operator panel front X208: 20-pin plg connector for the LVDS display cable K2 for connecting the operator panel front  Siemens AG.3 Interfaces 16.

Sections “Interfaces” and “Mounting”.16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. For more information. 16-6 Ethernet Dimensions in mm Mounted TCU with OP 010S. the two interface cables for the operator panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2. OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the TCU are screwed together without additional mounting brackets.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front Before the two components are assembled. 2004. see illustration below) must be inserted into the correct sockets on the TCU (visible behind the casing cut-out). see Chapter “OP 012”.8 265 13.04 16.4 Retaining screws 4 x M3 to secure the TCU supporting plate to the operator panel front (2 of 4) 260 OP 010S Supporting plate 2 x USB Fig. side and rear view 16-270  Siemens AG. front. 34 OP 010S TCU 84.04 Edition OP 010S .4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front 04.

4 Mounting bracket Dimensions in mm Fig. TP 012 or TP 015A operator panel front (see Fig. 2. 16-2). TP 012. the keyboard interface and the power supply connection.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. the Ethernet interface (cable connected). OP 012. OP 015. Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief. side and rear view Cable connections Fig. TP 015A Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required to mount the TCU on an OP 010S. Latch the TCU mounting bracket unit into the operator panel front by means of the two hinged catches (like a PCU). OP 015A. OP 012. OP 015. 16-2 and “Accessories” subsection). it is recommended to fix the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate using cable ties (see Fig. OP 010C. OP 015A. front.04 Edition OP 012 16-271 . The mounting brackets are screwed to the TCU.  Siemens AG.04 16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16. 16-7 shows the outward-bound connections: the dual USB interface.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front OP 010C. the ends with the hingetype catches (in Figure 16-7) must point to the left. 16-7 Mounted TCU (example: with OP 012). OP 012 40 Hinged catch for latching into operator panel front (1 of 2) Mounting bracket TCU OP 012 269 Power supply connection Ethernet cable 2 x USB Knurled screw for securing the mounting bracket on the operator panel front (1 of 4) 260 338. close it after connecting cables K1 and K2 and secure it with the four knurled screws. 1.

5 Technical data 04. 2004.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 10 K/h 5 . 55 °C max. PELV acc.16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16. 6 ms. to EN 50178 IP20 CE / cULus Technical data for Thin Client Unit Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. without fan not permissible without aggressive gases.. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 Width: 260 mm Height: 265 mm 1.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1/-3-2 1K3/2K4 –25 . 55 °C max. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 ...04 Edition .5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.. 30 ms... 18 K/h 5 . 80 % max. max.5 Technical data Table 16-2 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Voltage supply Power consumption. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Depth: 37 mm 24 V DC 36 W III.. 0.8 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2.04 16. 95 % 16-272  Siemens AG. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Free convection.

6 Accessories Table 16-3 Name Accessories for Thin Client Unit Description Mounting bracket for TCU behind operator panel front Mounting bracket SINUMERIK 810D/840D Flat mounting bracket for PCU 50/70 Upright mounting bracket for PCU 50 Ethernet cable SIMATIC NET. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 16-273 . IE FC TP cable Standard cable for universal use Trailing cable 1 1 1 1 set (x 2) Number Order number 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 6XV1840-2AH10 6XV1840-3AH10 6GK1102-6AA00 Ethernet switch SIMATIC NET Electrical Lean Switch ELS TP 40 for linear network structures SIMATIC NET Electrical Lean Switch ELS TP 80 for star network structures 1 6GK1102-7AA00 J  Siemens AG.6 Accessories 16. 2004.04.04 16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16.

16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16.04 Edition .04 Notes 16-274  Siemens AG.6 Accessories 04. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

17-1 Connection diagram for Handheld Terminal HT 6 Connections The handheld terminal must be connected to the MPI bus as the final node on the MPI bus. since the bus terminators are integral components of this cable. The following components and cables are necessary for connection: Computer unit Other bus devices MPI cable X5 X4 OPI (1. e.1 Overview and function blocks 17 Validity The following description applies to the handheld terminal HT 6 (order number 6FC5403-0AA10-0AA0) Overview The SINUMERIK HT 6 (Handheld Terminal with a 6” display diagonal) is an operation and programming device and can be used in conjunction with the SINUMERIK 810D. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. Note The HT6 cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-. The bus terminating resistors are integrated in the device. 2004.5 Mbaud) for SINUMERIK 840Di Handheld terminal (HT 6) X3 Distributor box. FM 357-2H and 840Di controllers..g. 840D.5 Mbaud) for SINUMERIK 840D MPI (187.. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog References: /Z/ Catalog NCZ  Siemens AG.04 Edition 17-275 .5 kbaud) for SINUMERIK 840D/810D MPI (1. 6FX2006-1BH01 Terminal block – for HT 6 power supply – EMERGENCY STOP wiring for HT 6 – Enabling button wiring for HT 6 HT 6 cable Fig.

HELP.04 Edition .7” diagonal. can be plugged in externally S LCD with – – 5.. variable brightness and contrast 16.-1AA23-1CA0 Note Distributor box 6FX2006-1BF00 cannot be used. Comment . EMERGENCY STOP overriding does not take place automatically (see Section 17. CONTROL PANEL FUNCTION.. 52 characters per line (as configured) S Membrane keyboard with – Machine control key block: RESET..g.. AUTO.4). 2004.-1AA83-1jj0 3-core enabling cable . Function blocks S 80486DX4 microprocessor – – Operating system DR-DOS Clock frequency 100 MHz S Memory: – – – SDRAM 16 MB FLASH 8 MB PC memory card: 8 MB FLASH.-1AA83-1BA0 10 m . .. max. S2.1 Overview and function blocks 04.: 6FX2002... ..17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. Recall (^) – – – – – S Rotary override switch (19 positions with stop) S EMERGENCY STOP button S At the rear of the device: – Enabling buttons (two buttons with two channels each. backlit. the HT 6 cable was unplugged).. 40 m): . U8 (with slide-in labels) Function keys: Operating area (MENU SELECT). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. TEACH.. monochrome (blue) STN.. 38.-1AA23-1jj0 4-core enabling cable Appropriate distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01 6FX2006-1BH01 Examples (available by the meter. . STOP.... 20 m ! Caution An EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if the connection between the HT 6 and the distributor box is interrupted (e. 320*240 pixels (1/4 VGA).. shift key switches to alpha characters) Cursor key block (nine keys) Customer-configurable keys: S1. U1. 12 traversing keys (6+ and 6– with slide-in labels) Horizontal softkey bar with eight keys Number block (12 keys...04 HT 6 cable Order No. ALARM CANCEL. with two positions for Safety Category 3) 17-276  Siemens AG.. START. JOG. 20 lines..

for configuring and labeling by the customer 1) Special keys. 2004.04 Edition 17-277 .04. 17-2 User interface of HT 6 Connecting cable  Siemens AG.2 User interface and interfaces 17. for configuration by the customer 1) See Section 17.2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 17.2 User interface and interfaces – – – – – – – HT 6 cable connection Serial RS-232 interface (COM1) PC memory card interface PS/2 keyboard interface Reset pushbutton switch Belt fastener Two M5 threaded holes for customized bracket. for configuring and labeling by the customer 1) Softkeys Function keys.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.1 User interface Rear side: Two enabling buttons EMERGEN CY STOP Override switch (with fixed stop) Display X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 Traversing keys.7 Fig.

Note Press the enabling button firmly as far as the stop to ensure reliable action. 17-3 Rear of the HT 6 with the interfaces Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 2-channel.g. all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. 17-3.04 Number block The Shift key is used to switch the function of the number block keys between text and numerical mode. EMERGENCY STOP button Press the red button in emergency situations: EMERGENCY STOP S when a person is at risk. please refer to the machine tool manufacturer’s instructions! The rear of the HT 6 complete with the enabling buttons and the interface covers is shown in Fig. 17-278  Siemens AG. Changeover only becomes effective when the Shift key is released. In the case of operations that require enabling (e. RS-232 interface (under the cover) M5 threaded bolts for fixing bracket Interface cover: – PC-MEMORY card interface – MF2 keyboard interface – RESET key (under the cover) Enabling button Belt fastener Connecting cable Fig. only one enabling button has to be operated. 2-position switch (see Section 17. The required character is selected with Shift + character key. 2004. each key is assigned to several alpha characters.2 User interface and interfaces 04. In text mode. As a rule. S when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. manual traversing within a danger zone). when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button.04 Edition . Machine Manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.3).

Contact 1 EMERGENCY STOP button.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.2 NA1.8 Nm is essential to ensure that the bushes are not overloaded. see following Figure.2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04.2 User interface and interfaces M5 threaded bushes for fixing bracket There are two M5 threaded bushes on the rear of the HT 6 for attaching to a fixing bracket supplied by the customer. 16 M5 Fig.1 GND Signal mode RS485 differential signal Not connected Enabling button.1 NA1. compliance with the maximum tightening torque of 1. Contact 2 M (Mext for HT 6) B VI  Siemens AG. 17-4 M5 threaded bushes for fixing bracket 17. 2004. For both threads. Contact 1 EMERGENCY STOP button.2 ZS1.2 Interfaces Connector designation: X101 Connector type: 15-pin high-density Sub-D pin with UNC 4-gland HT 6 cable interface (X101) Table 17-1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Pin assignments on connector X101 Signal name B NC ZS2.1 A NC ZS1. Contact 1 EMERGENCY STOP button. Contact 2 Enabling button.2 NA2. Contact 1 Signal type B 117 RS485 differential signal Not connected Enabling button.04 Edition 17-279 .

cable length: Table 17-2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X201 9-pin Sub-D.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.2 User interface and interfaces 04. the RS-232-C is accessible. S Rotate the cover to the side. 17-280  Siemens AG. Contact 2 Shield EMERGENCY STOP button. S To reassemble. RS232C interface (X201) Connector designation: Connector type: Max.04 Table 17-1 Pin 12 13 14 15 Pin assignments on connector X101 Signal name Ub ZS2. 2004. pin 30 m X201 pin assignments Signal name DCD RxD TxD DTR 1M DSR RTS CTS RI Signal mode Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Ground Data Send Ready Request To Send Clear To Send Ring Indicator Signal type O I O I VO O I O I Signal type B: Bidirectional VI: Voltage Input I: Input O: Output VO: Voltage Output Releasing the RS-232-C cover: S Pull the lug on the cover upwards. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . Contact 2 Signal type VI Installation of connecting cable: S Release the two M3 Torx screws of the connecting cable cover S Remove cover S Plug connecting cable into the socket and attach with the fixing screws S Replace cover and tighten screws again.1 SHIELD NA2.2 Signal mode 24 V (power supply for HT 6) Enabling button. place cover on the HT 6 and latch in place with gentle pressure.

. A25: Address 0....04. 15: Data 0... 2004. . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.2 User interface and interfaces PC memory card interface (X401) Connector designation: Connector type: Table 17-3 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 X401 68-pin PC card connector X401 pin assignments Signal name 1M D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 XCSCARDF A10 XOEP A11 A9 A8 A13 A14 XWEP NC 1P5 VPP A16 A15 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 1M D0 D1 D2 NC 1M VO B VO O VO O B Signal type VO Pin 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Signal name 1M XCARDDET D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 XCSCARDF NC NC NC A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 1P5 VPP A22 A23 A24 A25 NC RESET NC NC XREG NC NC D8 D9 D10 NC 1M VO B O O O VO O O B Signal type VO O Explanation A0. 25 D0. .. ..04 Edition 17-281 .. 15 B: Bidirectional O: Output VO: Voltage Output  Siemens AG....

17-282  Siemens AG.2 User interface and interfaces 04.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. place cover on the HT 6 and latch in place with gentle pressure. PS/2 keyboard interface (X301) for MF2 keyboard Connector designation: Connector type: Table 17-4 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 X301 6-pin mini DIN socket X301 pin assignments Signal name KDATA NC 1M 1P5 KCLK NC Keyboard Data Not connected Ground +5 V (power supply) Keyboard Clock Not connected VO O Signal mode Signal type I Signal type I: Input O: Output VO: Voltage Output Release the interface cover: As described above RESET button The HT 6 can be booted up again using the RESET button. The RESET button is located under the interface cover and can be accessed through an opening using a screwdriver. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Release interface cover: S Unlatch cover by depressing the lug S Hold the cover at the two recesses and pull off S To reassemble.04 Edition . 2004. Release the interface cover: As described above References for further reading The following manuals are available for the handheld terminal (HT 6): References: /BAH/ /IAM IM2/ /PJE/ /IAM/BE1/ Operator’s Guide HT 6 “HT 6 Start-Up” Chapter HMI Embedded Configuring Package HMI Option Package Note The IP 54 degree of protection is only ensured when the interface covers and the RS-232-C covers are closed.

compliance with the following points is essential: S Use a stranded reference potential conductor (of up to 30cm in length and at least 10 mm2 cross-section).2) Distribution box and HT 6 EMC measures To ensure that the drained currents do not become a source of interference in their own right.1. 17. 2004. 6FX2006-1BC01) for 3-core enabling cable (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) Position of interfaces and terminal blocks 100 90 36. ZUSTICO) must be connected to the equipotential bonding terminal. see Subsection 17.5 34 Rating plate X5 Equipotential bonding connection X5 X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 110 120 X4 X4 O26 hole for M25 connector 52 X3 50 Fig.1 Distribution box for 3-core enabling cable (Order No. NAUS2. see Subsection 17. S Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors.2. 6FX2002-1AA83. enabling button circuit.2. 6FX2006-1BH01) for 4-core enabling cable (Order No. NAUS1. S Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are protected against corrosion. 6FX2002-1AA23.04. the unused cores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminals NAUS1. NAUS2.1.3. 17-5 10. S In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores.3 Distribution box The handheld terminal is connected to a distribution box.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. 24 V power supply and an equipotential bonding connection. modules and cables referred to a potential. ZS1. ZS2.04 Edition 17-283 .3.1) Distribution box (Order No.5 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3. The following are suggested for the connections – – Distribution box (Order No. The distribution box has an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting the EMERGENCY STOP circuit.3 Distribution box 17.

The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustration below).g.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.2 Fig.2/2. on the MPI bus.g.3 Distribution box 04. Connection to MPI bus Connecting the EMERGENCY STOP button The distribution box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus terminal X5.2 7 8 9 10 13 X3 1.04 Edition . 17-6 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: Connection to the HT 6 17-284  Siemens AG.1 12 2.04 24 V supply for the HT 6 The 24 V supply is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustration below): Terminal 9 Terminal 10 Ub GND Connecting the HT 6 The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distribution box by means of the HT 6 cable. the requirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with. Note When drilling a hole (e. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal. Terminal 1/2 EMERGENCY STOP contact 1 11 / 12 EMERGENCY STOP contact 2 Input / output Assignments Input / output Connecting the enabling button (three-core) HT 6 EMERGENCY STOP button Enabling button 2 1 5 Cable connector 10 15 9 8 13 3 4 X101 HT 6 cable 6FX2002-1AA83 X4 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01 1 1.1 2.2 2 3 4 5 6 1.1 11 2. 2004. e.1 Ub GND 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

1 A) Not connected EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.1 (24 V..1 NC Enabling button (24 V.2/ZS2. 1A) Signal type I  Siemens AG.2 Signal mode EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 NC NA1.1 MPI_A GND Ub ZS1.1 ZS2. 1 A) Not connected O M (Mext for HT 6) 24 V (power supply for HT 6) Enabling button (24 V.1 NC NA2.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15. . 17 X4 Circular connector for screw connection Interface must comply with IP54 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: X4 pin assignments Signal name NA2..2 (24 V.1 (24 V. 1A) Enabling button (24 V.1 ZS1. 2004. 1 A) EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 ZS1.5 mm2 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: X3 pin assignments for terminal block Signal name NA1.04 Edition 17-285 .2 NC ZS1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 NA1.. 1 A) 24V (power supply for HT 6) M (Mext for HT 6) EMERGENCY STOP button 2. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 X3 Terminal block for 1.04.1 NA1. 1 A) Enabling button (24 V.3 Distribution box Terminal block (X3) Connector designation: Connector type: Table 17-5 Pin 1 2 3. 1 A) EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.1 Ub GND NA2. 1 A) Enabling button (24V.1 NA2.2/ZS2.2 MPI_B ZS2.. 1 A) O O I I O I Signal mode EMERGENCY STOP button (24V.2 (24 V.. 1A) Not connected EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V. 1A) O I I O Signal type I O HT 6 interface (X4) Connector designation: Connector type: Special requirement Table 17-6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. 1 A) Not connected Enabling button (24 V. 1 A) EMERGENCY STOP button 1. .

17.2 Distribution box for 4-core enabling cable (Order No.04 MPI interface (X5) Connector designation: Connector type: Max.3. 17-286  Siemens AG.5 Mbaud Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Pin assignment of connector X5 Signal name MPI_B MPI_A B Signal mode Signal type Connecting the equipotential bonding Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor box and the earth potential.5 34 Rating plate X5 Equipotential bonding connection X4 110 120 X5 X4 X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 O26 hole for M25 connector 52 X3 50 Fig.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. cable length: Table 17-7 Pin 3 8 X5 9-pin sub-D socket connector 200 m at 1. 17-7 10.04 Edition .3 Distribution box 04. 2004. Terminal 9 Terminal 10 Ub GND Connecting the HT 6 The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box by means of the HT 6 cable.5 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks 24 V supply for the HT 6 The 24 V power supply is connected to terminal block X3. 6FX2006-1BH01) Position of interfaces and terminal blocks 100 90 36.

04 Edition 17-287 . The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustration below). 2004. Connection to MPI bus Connecting the EMERGENCY STOP button The distributor box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus terminal X5.2 1. on the MPI bus. the requirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 2 3 4 5 6 1. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal. Terminal 1 2 11 12 EMERGENCY STOP contact 2 EMERGENCY STOP contact 1 Assignment Input Output Input Output Connecting the enabling button (four-core) HT 6 EMERGENCY STOP button Enabling button 2 1 5 Cable connector 10 15 9 8 13 3 4 X101 HT 6 cable 6FX2002-1AA23 X4 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01 1 1.1 Ub GND 2.g. e.1 12 2.2 Fig.g.3 Distribution box Note When drilling a hole (e.1 11 2.04.1 2.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. 17-8 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Connection to the HT 6  Siemens AG.2 7 8 9 10 13 14 X3 1.

2 NC ZS1.2 HR_B Enabling button (24 V. 1 A) Not connected EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.1 NA2.3 Distribution box 04. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X3 Terminal block for 1. 1 A) Not connected Enabling button (24 V.1 ZS2.1 NA1. 1 A) Enabling button (24 V. 1 A) Indicator for plugged in short-circuit plug.2 NA1..5 mm2 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X3 pin assignments for terminal block Signal name NA1.2 ZS2. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 X4 Circular connector for screw connection Interface must comply with IP54 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X4 pin assignments Signal name NA2. 1 A) Not connected Enabling button (24 V.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 1 A) O I O O B O Signal mode EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.04 Terminal block (X3) Connector designation: Connector type: Table 17-8 Terminal 1 2 3. 1 A) EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.2 NC NA1.2 KEY2 Signal mode EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.1 NC ZS1. 1 A) 24V (power supply for HT 6) M (Mext for HT 6) EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V. 1 A) Indicator for plugged in short-circuit plug. 2004.1 ZS2.2 MPI_B ZS2. If so –> 24 V I O O I O Signal type I O HT 6 interface (X4) Connector designation: Connector type: Special requirement: Table 17-9 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7.1 MPI_A GND Ub ZS1. 1 A) Enabling button (24 V.. If so –> 24 V EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V. 1 A) Enabling button (24 V. 1 A) EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V. 1 A) Signal type I B I O I 17-288  Siemens AG. 1 A) Not connected I M (Mext for HT 6) 24 V (power supply for HT 6) Enabling button (24 V. 1 A) Enabling button (24 V.1 Ub GND NA2.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. . 1 A) EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V.2 ZS1.1 KEY2 NA2.

04 Edition 17-289 . cable length: Table 17-10 Pin 3 8 X5 9-pin sub-D socket connector 200 m at 1.3 Distribution box MPI interface (X5) Connector designation: Connector type: Max. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.5 Mbaud Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Pin assignment of connector X5 Signal name MPI_B MPI_A B Signal mode Signal type Connecting the equipotential bonding Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor box and the earth potential.  Siemens AG.04.

see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-Up Guide 810D. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI cable and/or the local segments between repeater and HT 6) must be terminated with connector resistors at the ends of the bus. For further information please refer to the Catalog /IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET Note S The HT 6 already has an installed bus terminating resistor. 17-9 Connecting the HT 6 using a PROFIBUS repeater A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HT 6 distributor box for each branch. S The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2 m.04 17.04 Edition . 2004. Chapter 3.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation Purpose Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 6 during machine operation requires the following: S Release or override of the HT 6 EMERGENCY STOP S Connection of the HT 6 to the OPI/MPI via a PROFIBUS repeater.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S Cable lengths for MPI/OPI. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. 17-290  Siemens AG.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. NCU/ CCU ON MPI/OPI OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Distributor HT 6 Repeater RS-485 OFF ON Distributor Terminating resistor open Terminating resistor closed ON Fig. Repeater RS 485 The repeater can be ordered under Order No.

the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP. Fig. 2004. To ensure a reliable HIGH/LOW signal transition.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation Sample circuit EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP) Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts Keyswitch = ON (EMERGENCY STOP bypass passive) HT 6 plugged in 24 V Signal to PLC 2) M (GND) X3 1 11 12 2 9 P (24 V) 10 M (0 V) Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01 X4 10 1 12 9 HT 6 X4 (distributor): 10 1 12 9 EMERGENCY STOP button Short-circuit connector 1) 2) Keyswitch consisting of S S 2 switching elements 3SB3400-0A and Operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36 (appropriate safety lock as required) Catalog: Switchgear and Systems (NSK) from A&D CD triggers a timer. 17-10 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration shows keyswitch set to “ON” with HT 6 connected) Note Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample circuits.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. If the signal level is still “low” after the monitoring period (approx.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. use a pull-down resistor if necessary.  Siemens AG. 5 min).04 Edition 17-291 .

3) At 24 V.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation 04.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. use a pull-down resistor if necessary. 2004. 5 min). the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP. Fig. Can be routed to the PLC.04 Sample circuit EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP) Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts 24 V Keyswitch = ON (EMERGENCY STOP bypass passive) HT 6 plugged in Signal to PLC 2) Signal KEY2 to PLC 3) M (GND) X3 1 11 12 2 P (24 V) 9 15 10 M (0 V) Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01 X4 10 1 12 9 4 11 HT 6 X4 (distributor): 4 10 1 12 9 11 EMERGENCY STOP button short-circuit connector 1) Keyswitch consisting of 2) S S Two switching elements 3SB3400-0A and Operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36 (appropriate safety lock as required) Catalog: Switchgear and Systems (NSK) from A&D CD triggers a timer. 17-292  Siemens AG.04 Edition . 17-11 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration shows keyswitch set to “ON” with HT 6 connected) Note Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample circuits. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. To ensure a reliable HIGH/LOW signal transition. when short-circuit connector is plugged in. If the signal level is still “low” after the monitoring period (approx.

EMERGENCY STOP). This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP switch from being used inadvertently. HT 6 connection at distributor is active (incl. which opens the EMERGENCY STOP circuit via the relevant PLC outputs and series-connected relays after the changeover period (approx. 5 min) if the keyswitch is not reset to its initial position within this period. This connects the HT 6 supply voltage and the signal to the PLC to the LOW signal level (provide a pull-down resistor if necessary). 1. Sequence of operations Connecting the HT 6 Changeover from short-circuit connector to HT 6 connection is carried out in reverse order. The HT 6 must be removed within the changeover period and the EMERGENCY STOP circuit overridden using a short-circuit connector.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation Sequence of operations Disconnecting the HT 6 Keyswitch is set to “ON” position. 3.  Siemens AG. ! Danger EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive S may not be recognizable as such S may not be accessible.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. 2.04. This HIGH-LOW transition starts a timer in the PLC. Override the EMERGENCY STOP circuits of the HT 6 using the keyswitch.04 Edition 17-293 .

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. – Use of keys U1 to U8 and S1. Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration 17.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.04 Edition .04 17. except for those marked with *.1 Interface signals of HT 6 MCP simulation is available for the HT 6. 17-294  Siemens AG. but are emulated by the software (e.5. – Signals shown in () brackets do not exist. Table 17-11 Byte EBn EB HT 6 interface -> PLC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Function key block (REF) EBn+1 EB 1 TEACH AUTO (MDA) JOG QUIT RESET (WCS/ MCS) Function key block Control panel function U4 U3 Reserved U2 U1 (INC) (REPOS) JOG keys positive direction IBn+2 Reserved (AXSEL1) AXSEL0 JOG6+ JOG5+ JOG4+ JOG3+ JOG2+ JOG1+ JOG keys negative direction IBn+3 IBn+4 IBn+5 EBn+6 EBn 6 Reserved U8 U7 U6 Reserved Reserved JOG6– JOG5– JOG4– Reserved U5 Start key block Reserved (HW1) * Reserved (HW0) * Reserved SF2 Feed override EBn+7 EBn 7 E* D* C* B* A* SF1 START STOP * Step Reserved Reserved JOG3– JOG2– JOG1– Notes: – Only the keys on light gray background are evaluated by the basic PLC program (FC26). MCP simulation of the HT 6 must be parameterized with the function block FB1 as MCP.5 Configuring the HT 6.5 Configuring the HT 6. setting interface parameters Note Interface parameters are configured using the IK Screen Kit.1. Configuring HT 6 Operator Interface IK. to enable the basic PLC program to monitor the HT 6 for failure. Input signals The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program (FB1). 2004.g. – Transfer of the signals to the PLC can be inhibited in the software. – Only the keys on dark gray background are evaluated in FC26 from SW 6. setting interface parameters 04. with a softkey). References: /FBPH/. S2 and their inputs can be customized by the PLC user.

they are initialized on control power-up: S Keyswitch to position 0 S Spindle speed override to 0 S Rapid traverse overlay to 0 The only parameters for FC 26 are “BAGNo” and “ChanNo”. the following signals cannot be influenced by means of MCP emulation. 2004. setting interface parameters Output signals The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program (FB1).  Siemens AG. Table 17-12 Byte QBn QBn+1 PLC –> HT 6 interface Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 WCS/MCS Traversing keys for axis system QBn+2 QBn+3 QBn+4 QBn+5 QBn+6 QBn+7 Notes: – Signals are evaluated by the HT 6 status display.5 Configuring the HT 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. That is why the information that is normally transmitted to the caller via the parameters “FeedHold” and “SpindleHold” has to be calculated by the user. (reserved) AXSEL0 FC 26 exists analogous to PLC functions FC 19 and FC 25.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. It is described in References: /FB/ P3. – The other signals may need to be supplied by the user program.04. Basic PLC Program Machine data that specify the coding of compensation values must be set as follows: S MD 12000: OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 S MD 12020: OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 S MD 12040: OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 S MD 12060: OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 Signals not supported As standard. – Signals on a gray background are supplied by the basic PLC program (FC26).04 Edition 17-295 .

setting interface parameters 04. 17-296  Siemens AG.04 17.5 Configuring the HT 6.03.DBB2=0.04 (for 840D) or SW 03. The default setting is: S MPI address: 14 + Parameterization The parameter settings in FB1 for the handheld programming unit correspond to those of the first MCP: MCPNum:=1 // One HT 6 MCPIn:=P#E0. if HT 6 is configured as the first MCP DB8.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.0 // Status double word MCPStatSend:=P#A8.04 Edition . the FB1 call in DB100 available on the basic program diskette (tool box) must be used.0 // HT 6 output signals MCPStatRec:=P#A12.5.0 // HT 6 input signals MCPOut:=P#A0.DBB64=0. if HT 6 is configured as the second MCP This is not necessary with any of the higher SW versions.04 (for 810D): The following must be set while OB 100 is booting: DB8. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. This call is valid for the first MCP or the HT 6.0 // MCPMPI:=TRUE // MCP1BusAdr:=14 // of basic PLC program (FB1) PLC SW Please note the following when using SW 05. This setting corresponds to the hardware of the HT 6 when supplied. 2004.2 Standard configuration of the HT 6 (without MCP) For the default setting of the HT 6.03.

5 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. 60 °C max. 45 °C max... dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity Display Size Resolution Service life 5. 1. 290 mm Depth: 53 mm 70 mm (incl. 0. override) 500 mA DC 24 V (via HT 6 cable) EMERGENCY STOP/enabling button: 1 A 12 W III. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 Diameter: approx.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2.04 Edition 17-297 . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. to EN 50178 IP54 CE / cULus Technical data approx. PELV acc. 80 % max. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 . 30 ms. max. it is advisable to activate the screen saver function (via display machine data DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME). Power consumption. typ.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..6 Technical data Table 17-13 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Current.. 6 ms. 18 K/h 5 .. 10 K/h 5 .6 Technical data 17. 2004.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. 95 %  Siemens AG.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 .04...7 ” STN 320 x 240 pixels At ambient temperatures of > 40 °C and long periods of non-use.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.

Replacing the front with keyboard Instructions on how to replace spare parts can be found in Subsection 17.7 Spare parts and accessories 04.7 17.7. Fig.04 17. 17-12 Front with keyboard Note The inner protective film on the front face must be pulled off before the new front with keyboard is installed.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17.1 Spare parts and accessories Spare parts The following spare parts are available for the HT 6: Table 17-14 Designation Front with keyboard EMERGENCY STOP and rotary override switch Spare parts for HT 6 Order number 6FC5448-0AA10-0AA0 6FC5447-0AA10-0AA0 Remarks – Kit contains both spare parts ! Warning – Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! – Unintentional machine movements are dangerous! We therefore strongly recommend a function test after spare part replacement. 2004.2 (replacement of labeling strips). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .7. 17-298  Siemens AG.

17-13 HT 6 after housing has been unscrewed and opened 3. Remove the base of the housing by unscrewing the 8 housing screws and open it carefully..019) and pull the switch out downwards.2 [Changing the slide-in labels]. . Order No.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. points 1. 2004. 2. Remove the front with keyboard (see Subsection 17. either manually or with a wrench (supplied by Rafi. One of these screws is located under the connecting cable cover (see picture below). 5. This cover (secured with 2 screws) must therefore be removed beforehand. 4. Undo the connectors on the two cables which are still connecting the housing parts (EMERGENCY STOP and MPI connecting cable) and put the housing base to one side.). 3.04 Edition 17-299 .  Siemens AG.58002. Remove the EMERGENCY STOP switch by unscrewing the threaded ring. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.7.04. Housing base EMERGENCY STOP cable Override cable Cover for connecting cable (rear) MPI connecting cable Housing lid LCD interface cable Fig..7 Spare parts and accessories Removing the EMERGENCY STOP and rotary override switch Caution – Make sure your workstation complies with anti-static (ESD) guidelines! – Wear anti-static overalls! – Protect the display and protective glass against scratches! 1..

Undo the 8 fixing screws in the board. Remove the override switch. 17-300  Siemens AG.04 Rear face of housing lid Positioning pin Flat gasket EMERGENCY STOP switch Threaded ring Fig. 17-14 Dismantled EMERGENCY STOP switch 5.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. Caution: Protect the plug connectors on the rear against damage! 8. 7. backlight inverter connector and LCD ribbon cable from the board (pull the latter carefully out sideways when the clamping frame has been removed.04 Edition . Unscrew the nut securing the rotary override switch (12 mm A/F) and pull the switch out downwards. 17-16).7 Spare parts and accessories 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 17-15 Rear view of housing lid after housing base has been removed Clamping frame of socket Fig. LCD ribbon cable Backlight inverter connector EMERGENCY STOP switch Override connector Override rotary switch (covered) Fig. see Fig. 17-16 Releasing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector (on the OP 012) 6. Pull the board carefully upwards off the housing lid and turn the lid over. 2004.

– Positioning pin must latch into hole in housing. 17-17 Dismantled rotary override switch Fitting the EMERGENCY STOP and rotary override switch Install the unit by following the same procedure in the reverse order.7 Nm. Housing: – Place base on lid. – Torque for fastening nut: 0. making sure that you do not bend the plug connectors. the cable must be pointing towards the edge of the housing and folded so that it remains inside the housing seal. then secure with the clamping frame).04 Edition 17-301 . 2004. Board: – Before installation the backlight inverter cable must be connected and the ribbon cable threaded through the slit in the board.2 (procedure for changing the slide-in labels. but note the following points: Note EMERGENCY STOP switch – Hole in flat gasket must be centered over the positioning pin. – Screw together with a torque of 0. – Connect the cable again (carefully push in the ribbon cable as far as the stop. Front with keyboard: – Install as described in Subsection 17. Rotary override switch: – Make sure that the sealing ring is seated correctly.7. point 6). – Torque for threaded ring: 0. – Tighten the board fastening screws (torque: 0. – Fit the cover to the override knob.8 Nm  Siemens AG.04.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. making sure that seal is correctly seated. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8 Nm. – Push the override knob (in zero position) onto the axis and tighten the screws. – When fitted.8 Nm).7 Spare parts and accessories Sealing ring Fastening nut A/F 12 Fig. – Place the board in position vertically.

40 m for 4-core enabling. right).04 17.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. If the inner face becomes dirty.04 Edition .7. short-circuit connector Connecting cable for distributor 6FX2006-1BC01 Connecting cable for distributor 6FX2006-1BH01 Slide-in labels Accessories for HT 6 Order number 6FX2 006-1BH01 6FX2 002-1AA83-1VV0 6FX2 002-1AA23-1VV0 ––– (included in HT 6 scope of supply) Remarks for 4-core enabling for 3-core enabling. . the traverse and function keys U1. length max.. U8 (see Fig. 17-18. any dirt must be carefully removed using an Isopropanol cleansing agent or a cellulose cloth soaked in Isopropanol. length max.7 Spare parts and accessories 04. 17-302  Siemens AG. 17-2) can be labeled by the customer as required.. Changing the slide-in labels The labeling strips can be replaced after the HT 6 front with keyboard has been disassembled (Fig. Note The deinstalled front with keyboard must be totally protected from soiling.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. otherwise the readability of the display and key labels can be permanently affected. 2004. 40 m for user labeling (see above) Slide-in labels In the case of the HT 6.2 Accessories The following accessories are available for the HT 6: Table 17-15 Designation Distributor incl.

Pull out flat connector carefully vertically. Depress the four clamping lugs and lever off the front with keyboard by inserting e. 2. – Release expansion screw with screwdriver.04. 17-18. plug in the flat connector vertically taking care not to bend the protruding pins in the base and latch the cover in place applying gentle pressure. When replacing the front with keyboard.7 Spare parts and accessories Film labels Cover Knob of rotary override switch Groove for levering off the front and keyboard Clamping lugs (2 of 4) Flat connector Fig. a screwdriver in the grooves in the handhold (Fig. Push in the new labeling strips. Install the override button following the previous steps in reverse order: – Replace with pointer at zero. Labeling the slide-in labels You can also make your own slide-in labels from normal paper (80 g/m2). 6.  Siemens AG. 17-18 Changing the slide-in labels Procedure 1.04 17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. 7. left): – Lever off the cover plate with a flat-ended tool (screwdriver). 2004. right). The dimensions (in mm) can be obtained from Fig.04 Edition 17-303 . 17-18. 3. 5. – Put on the cover. Turn front with keyboard round and pull out labeling films (if fitted). 17-19. 4.g. – Clamp with expanding screw. Deinstall knob for rotary override switch in the zero position (Fig. – Pull knob off the spindle. The crosses indicate the center of the text or symbol. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

2004. 17-19 Dimensional drawing for labeling the slide-in labels J 17-304  Siemens AG.7 Fig.7 Spare parts and accessories 04.04 Edition .04 Slide-in labels for traversing keys Slide-in labels for function keys 14.17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 18-1 Handheld unit 110 Operating and display elements A B C D E F G H I J K EMERGENCY STOP button.04 Edition 18-305 .1 Handheld unit B-MPI 77 18 A SIEMENS A K J B C D I F G 405060 30 70 20 80 90 10 100 0 110 % I 252 H 114 Fig.Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. two-channel Two-line digital display 2 x 16 characters 20 keys freely assignable by user 16 LEDs freely controllable by user Keyswitch with On/Off position Override switch with 12 positions Electronic handwheel Connecting cable. or max.5 m as a coiled cable 2 enabling buttons designed as 2-position. 2-channel switches Magnetic clamp Suspension lug  Siemens AG. 10 m. 2004.

1 Handheld unit B-MPI 04. Changing the labeling strip To change the labeling strip. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 3-core connection of these keys. There is no automatic EMERGENCY STOP overriding. these HHUs can only be operated on the distributor designed for the corresponding mode.04 Edition . S Slide half of the new labeling strip under the old one. S Remove the old labeling strip and slide the new one in to its final position. The labeling strip is located between the PCB and the front of the housing and can be accessed from the right. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S Remove the labeling strip carefully to approx. In the version with 4-core connection of the enable keys. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog References: /Z/ Catalog NCZ S If the connection between the HHU and the distributor box is interrupted (HHU cable pulled out). In this version.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. an emergency stop is triggered. 1. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 4-core connection of these keys. Due to modified connector design. proceed as follows.04 Key symbols The key symbols are on a slide-in label that can be changed as necessary. 2004. monitoring for cross short-circuit in the enable circuit is possible. the connector insert of the connector is arranged coded at an angle of 45_ to avoid destruction of the unit by accidental wrong connection. since the bus terminators are integral components of this cable. 18-306  Siemens AG. HHU variants The handheld unit and the distributor are offered in two wiring versions. 2. Magnetic clamp The magnetic clamp is not intended for permanent fixing of the HHU to the perpendicular sheet metal parts. halfway using flat pliers. ! Caution S The HHU cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-IAF0 (or other lengths).

 Siemens AG.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box 18.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box HHU MPI bus LEDs Keys Digital display Male connector MPI submodule Distributor DIP switch S EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Enabling button Handwheel pulses 24V DC Rotary switch Fig. connector X4. Note S Bus terminating resistors are integral components of the HHU.Enabling wheel button S S S Block diagram of HHU and distributor box Connection to distributor box The HHU is connected to the distributor box.04. S A maximum of two handheld units may be connected per bus segment. S Further HHUs may be connected using repeaters.04 Edition 18-307 . All other signals are transmitted to the PLC via the MPI/OPI bus. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The EMERGENCY STOP button. enabling buttons and handwheel signals are not transmitted to the PLC but decoupled in the distributor box terminal block X3. 2004. 18-2 Key switch Hand. Power supply to the HHU is via the distributor box.

Repeater RS-485 The repeater can be ordered under the number 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation Purpose Trouble-free plugging and unplugging of the HHU during machine operation requires: S activation and deactivation of the power supply to the distributor box.04 Edition .3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation 04. 2004.04 18. S connection of the HHU to the OPI/MPI via PROFIBUS repeater. S release or override of the EMERGENCY STOP switch of the HHU. NCU/ CCU ON MPI/OPI OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Distributor HHU Repeater RS-485 OFF ON Distributor Terminating resistor open Terminating resistor closed ON Fig. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI line and/or the repeater and HHU) must be terminated with terminating resistors at the ends of the bus. S The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2 m. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 18-3 Connecting the HHU via PROFIBUS repeater A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HHU distributor box for each branch. 18-308  Siemens AG. For further information please refer to the Catalog /IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET Note S The HHU already has an installed bus terminating resistor.

3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation A keyswitch with two positions and two contacts must be installed at each HHU connection point. 5 min). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.  Siemens AG. X3 1 11 12 2 9 P (24V) 10 M (0V) Distributor box for HHU M ( G N D ) EMERGENCY STOP terminals HHU X4 Circular connector for connecting the HHU EMERGENCY STOP button 1) Keyswitch consisting of 2 switching elements 3SB3400-0A and operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36 (appropriate safety lock as required) Catalog: Switching devices and systems (NSK) at A&D CD Sample circuit for emergency stop override (illustration shows keyswitch set to “ON” with HHU connected) Fig. the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.04 Edition 18-309 . Sample circuit EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP) Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts 24V Keyswitch = ON (EMERGENCY STOP passive) HHU connected Signal to PLC triggers a monitoring timer. If the signal level is still “low” after the monitoring period (approx. 18-4 Note Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample circuits.04.

3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation 04. This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP button (e. 18-310  Siemens AG. S EMERGENCY STOP terminals to the HHU are short-circuited. S Signal “HHU Stop” = 1 (or “HHU”=0).g. HHU connection at distributor is active (incl. Signal “HHU Stop” = 0 switchover to 1 (end communication). Loosen the HHU connector and unplug it. to ensure that an EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if an attempt is made to activate the HHU while it is not connected. Plug in the HHU connector and tighten the screws The EMERGENCY STOP on the HHU must be released. communication commences with the HHU. ! Danger EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive S may not be recognizable as such S may not be accessible.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. HHU is activated. Set keyswitch to “ON”. The keyswitch is required for reasons of security. S EMERGENCY STOP of HHU is short-circuited. end communication. active.04 Edition . 1. Signal “HHU Stop” = 0. 1. 2004. on the HHU) from being used inadvertently. 2.04 Sequence of operations Connecting the HHU Initial state S Keyswitch is set to “OFF” position. EMERGENCY STOP). HHU connection at distributor is passive. S HHU has no voltage and goes into passive mode. 2. 3. Set keyswitch to “OFF”. passive position. Sequence of operations Disconnecting the HHU Initial state Keyswitch is set to “ON” position.

OFF OFF NCU/ CCU ON MPI/OPI OFF ON OFF MCP Distributor HHU Repeater RS-485 OFF ON Distributor HHU Terminating resistor open Terminating resistor closed ON ON Fig.4 Operating more than one HHU Purpose If more than one HHU is to be connected to a bus segment. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. handheld unit”. For further information please refer to the Catalog /IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET Note S If HHUs are connected to the ends of the bus. S The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2 m.04 Edition 18-311 . OPI address”. please refer to the Description of Functions. see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-Up Guide 810D. 2004.04. a PROFIBUS repeater is recommended for the connection of the HHUs. Chapter “Basic PLC Program” (P3).4 Operating more than one HHU 18. Basic Machine. Part 1. or if the HHU cannot be connected at the end of the bus. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S Cable lengths for MPI/OPI. Chapter 3. For further information about simultaneous operation of several HHUs on one NCU.  Siemens AG. 18-5 Connecting the HHU via repeater Repeater RS 485 The repeater can be ordered under Order No. Section “Configurability of machine control panel. subheading “Switchover of MPI. the repeaters may be omitted since the HHU already contains an installed bus terminating resistor.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.

5 HHU control elements and interface 04. handwheel. if life is at risk.04 Edition . Machine Manufacturer For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP: See machine tool manufacturer’s instructions! Internal circuit of HHU and distributor box with 3-core connection of enabling button EMERGENCY STOP button Handwheel Enabling button HHU X4 Distributor 11 12 2. enabling buttons 3-core 18-312  Siemens AG. NC contact. when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button. 2004. 18-6 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button.1 2.2 B ZS1 ZS2 24V 0V COM EMERGENCY STOP Fig. all drives are brought to a standstill with max. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.5 HHU control elements and interface Description of control elements EMERGENCY STOP button.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. 24V/2A contact load Press the red button in emergency situations: 1. 2. As a rule. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. braking torque.1 1.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 A A B 7 8 9 10 13 X3 1.04 18.

24 V/2 A contact load. Handwheel The electronic handwheel supplies two tracks with rectangular signal.1 2. as well as handwheel signals and power supply are connected to terminal block X3. The signals can be tapped from the distributor box and taken to the NCU connector X121 via the cable distributor. The keys are NO contacts and connected in parallel. A 4-core connection allows cross short-circuit monitoring in the enable circuit.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 A A B B 7 8 9 10 ZS ZS 24V 0V 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.or 4-core. Keyswitch Override switch Keys LED Digital display Connecting cable Interface to distributor box  Siemens AG. 20 keys are transmitted to the PLC and are freely assignable by the user. handwheel. freely controllable via the PLC.1 1. length 3. each with 16 characters controlled via the PLC.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. 2004.1 2. 2-tier digital display. enabling buttons 4-core Enabling button The enabling buttons are designed as 2-position switches and are located at the left and right of the handheld unit. 16 LEDs in the keys.04 Edition 18-313 . Switch with 12 positions is transmitted to the PLC.2 EMERGENCY STOP Fig.5 m or a 10 m connecting cable). Connection 3.2 14 ZS 1. Keyswitch with two positions is transmitted to the PLC. They are two-channel keys.5 HHU control elements and interface Internal circuit of HHU and distributor box with 4-core connection of enabling button EMERGENCY STOP button Handwheel Enabling button HHU X4 Distributor 11 12 2. depending on type. The EMERGENCY STOP button and the enable keys. The HHU is connected to the distributor box via the connecting cable (either a coiled cable with max.1 13 ZS 2.04. The labeling symbols can be changed (unscrew HHU).2 15 Key2 X3 1. 18-7 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button.

Class 3K5 Within 1 minute Protective class max. 2004.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. EMERGENCY STOP button Enabling buttons designed as 2-position switches Electrical handwheel General data Keyswitch Override switch Connecting cable Mechanical data Dimensions Height 252 mm Weight Ambient conditions Temperature ranges Application/operation 0 .. 0.5 m or 10 m long ON/OFF 24 V 250 mA 24 V 24 V 2 tracks 2A 2A 500 mA NC contact 2 parallel NO contacts TTL level Technical data for HHU 1.6 Technical data for HHU Table 18-1 Electrical data Power supply Power consumption approx.. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 60 C Width 114 mm Depth 110 mm 2 positions 12 positions 3..2 kg without connecting cable Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721–3–3.04 18.6 Technical data for HHU 04.1 % IP65 18-314  Siemens AG. 0. 55 C Temperature rate of change within 1 minute max.04 Edition .2 K Transportation/ Storage –20 .

2004.01.01 F / 1. not used via display *) ON OFF S1 4 3 2 ON OFF S1 S2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 S1 4 3 2 1 1 IDLE time 100 ms 4 3 2 1 S2 Bus Address 15 4 Keyswitch pos.7 Settings in the HHU The software version of the HHU is displayed after booting as long as the HHU is not communicating with the PLC.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.7 Settings in the HHU 18. two quadruple DIP switches are provided on the basic module of the HHU. Example: Display on the HHU Displaying the HHU’s software version Waiting for PLC V04. not used 3 2 1 S2 ____________________________ *) from SW V04.5 M DIP switch To set the bus parameters and the IDLE time. 18-8 DIP switches in the HHU  Siemens AG.01 → Bus address of HHU is Fhex (15dec) } *) Display switches → Baud rate of HHU is 1. Note Open the device only if the HHU connector has been previously removed! Switch settings ON OFF Setting for baud rate and bus address via DIP switch 1.5 Mbaud Keyswitch pos.5 M *) → SW version of HHU is V04.5 MBaud } between F and 1.01.04 Edition 18-315 .01 Fig.04. The HHU must be opened for access to the DIP switches.01. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

01.e.3 to “off” before start-up.4 = on and SW version w V04.1.7 Settings in the HHU 04.02 SW V04.01.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.04 Edition .01 As-delivered state (Default) *) If S1.01.5 kbaud 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SW V01.5 kbaud. up to 32 nodes can be supported on the OPI/MPI. Therefore set switch S1. S Bus addresses that are already assigned are preceded by the * character on the display. 2004.5 Mbaud off on on off on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off on on on on off on on on on on on on off off off off on on on on off off off off on on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on on S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 S1 4 on off S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 S2 4 Setting the baud rate and bus address IDLE time *) Baud rate *) Bus address *) 187. 18-316  Siemens AG. S With switch position S1.4 = on and software version w V04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.01.01: Switch has no function Note S The maximum possible transmission rate for SINUMERIK 810D is 187.1 only) via DIP switches (all SW versions) 100 msecs 1.01. i.04 Meaning of DIP switches Table 18-2 Settings on switches S1 and S2 in HHU Meaning via display (SW 4. bus addresses from 0 to 31 can be set.

 Siemens AG.8 Configuring the HHU. 18-9 Sending and receiving seen from the HHU Meaning of GD parameters There are separate GD parameters for sending and receiving. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The parameters need therefore only be set during start-up and when interfaces are changed. The default values can be changed within the permissible value range by means of keys + and -. Selection of the next parameter causes the preceding parameter to be stored in the flash EPROM.8 Configuring the HHU. 18-10 Meaning of GD parameters Note The GD parameters of the HHU and AS315 or PLC block FB1/0B100 must be set identically. The individual parameters are then interside) and T2 rogated via the HHU display and entered via the HHU keyboard. 1 . GD 1 . Send HHU Receive AS 315 (PLC) Fig. The Automatic key selects the next parameter. setting the interface parameters 18.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. the stored values are accepted or the default values (see table) are loaded. 1 Object number GBZ number (global identifier number) GD circle number (global data number) Fig. If interface parameter assignment is not activated after power On.04. setting the interface parameters It is necessary to set the GD parameters for the submodule to communicate via the MPI interface. The setting can be activated in the boot phase (while waiting for the first GD message frame) from the PLC (“Waiting for PLC” status) via the operator interface of the HHU using the key combination Jog (top left out- T2 (top right outside). 2004.04 Edition 18-317 .

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.5 / 1. Receive global identifier number Object number for receive global identifier number Transmit GD circle no. Object number for send global identifier number Display Rec-GD-No: Rec-GBZ-No: Default value 2 1 Value range 1-16 – (fixed) Rec-Obj-No: 1 – (fixed) Send-GD-No: Send-GBZ-No: Send-Obj-No: 2 2 1 – (fixed) – (fixed) – (fixed) In software version 4 and higher Baud rate Bus address Baud rate: Bus address: 1. setting the interface parameters 04. User interface Layout of keys and LEDs T21 T11 T12 T13 T14 T2 T7 T16 T1 T3 T4 T5 T6 T8 T9 T10 T21 T22 T23 T24 T11 T12 T13 T14 T2 T7 T16 T15 a) Standard inscription Fig. P3. 18-11 HHU control keys b) Numbered keys 18-318  Siemens AG.8. PLC module Note The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to the interface in a PLC user program.8 Configuring the HHU. Transmit GI no.5M 0–31 18. please refer to: References: /FB/.1 Interface signals for handheld unit The FC13 “HHUDisp” supports operation of the LCD display.5 M (baud) 15 187. For a detailed description. “Basic PLC Program”.04 Table 18-3 Value range for the GD parameters on the HHU Designation Receive GD circle no.04 Edition .

setting the interface parameters Input image of handheld unit You can tap the signals for the keys.04. feedrate override switch. Byte EB m EB m+1 EB m+2 EB m+3 Bit7 Reserved Reserved Input signals to PLC Bit6 Reserved Reserved Bit5 Reserved Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Reserved Bit 2 Reserved Reserved Bit 1 Reserved Reserved Bit 0 Reserved Reserved Feed start T8 user-assignable key T7 AUTOMATIC T6 NC Stop T5 Spindle stop T4 Feed stop T3 user-assignable key T2 JOG T1 user-assignable key T16 Handwheel T15 user-assignable key T14 user-assignable key T13 user-assignable key T12 user-assignable key T11 NC Start T10 Spindle start T9 EB m +4 Direction key – T24 Rapid traverse override T23 Direction key + T22 user-assignable key T21 EB m+5 Acknowledgment g digital di it l display Keyy switch Rapid traverse/feedrate override switch I D C B A Tx = 1 å key pressed HHU rotary selector switch settings Table 18-4 Setting % EDCBA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 00001 00100 01100 01101 01111 01110 01010 01011 01000 11001 11010 11111 HHU keyswitch  å 0 (horizontal position)  å 1 (vertical position)  Siemens AG. The address range is set by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools.04 Edition 18-319 . keyswitch and acknowledgment of the digital display at the input area. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8 Configuring the HHU.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. Byte No. 2004.

2004.04 Output image of handheld unit The signals for controlling the LEDs. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. L1 L3 L4 L5 L6 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L2 L7 L16 L15 Fig. setting the interface parameters 04.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. display signals and digital display are present at the output area.04 Edition . 18-12 Control keys with integrated LEDs in HHU Byte No. Byte OB m OB m+1 OB m+2 OB m+3 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Output signals to HHU Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1 New data for selected line Selection line L8 L16 L7 L15 L6 L14 L5 L13 L4 L12 L3 L11 L2 L10 L1 L9 Lx = 1 å LED lights up 18-320  Siemens AG. HHU mode.8 Configuring the HHU.

04 Edition 18-321 .04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. 2004. Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Output signals to HHU Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 OB m+4 OB m+5 OB m+6 OB m+7 OB m+8 OB m+9 OB m + 10 OB m +11 OB m + 12 OB m + 13 OB m + 14 OB m + 15 OB m + 16 OB m + 17 OB m + 18 OB m + 19 Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected line Default setting of 2nd character of selected line Default setting of 3rd character of selected line Default setting of 4th character of selected line Default setting of 5th character of selected line Default setting of 6th character of selected line Default setting of 7th character of selected line Default setting of 8th character of selected line Default setting of 9th character of selected line Default setting of 10th character of selected line Default setting of 11th character of selected line Default setting of 12th character of selected line Default setting of 13th character of selected line Default setting of 14th character of selected line Default setting of 15th character of selected line Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected line  Siemens AG. setting the interface parameters Output image of digital display Control of the digital display in the HHU Byte No.8 Configuring the HHU.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

. The display data are coded according to the character set given in the ASCII code table for the digital display via the QBm + 4. Reset request 18-322  Siemens AG. Bit 0 = 1: The 2nd line is selected. 2.04 Note The value of the output byte QBm bit 7 must always be 1! This sets the output mode of the display. Bit 7 This bit is set by the system after the new data has been accepted. Bit 7 = 0: Reset request Bit 7 = 1: Set request Acknowledgment of digital display IBm + 5. Bit 7 This bit is used to request writing in of new data into a line. Acknowledgment digital display IBm + 5. bit 7. 5.19. 3.2 Example signal chart Example signal chart Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines 1. Display The digital display is used as a 2-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits per line. Bit 7 = 0: No new data Bit 7 = 1: New data has been accepted 18. The bit is set by the user program and can be reset on detection of the acknowledgment bit IBm + 5.04 Edition . bit 7. Selecting the line QBm + 1. The decimal point is a separate character. Selecting the line with QBm + 1. The display always starts line by line right-justified with the byte QBm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to QBm + 19. New data for selected line QBm + 1. Bit 0 = 0: The 1st line is selected.8 Configuring the HHU. setting the interface parameters 04. Bit 0 This bit is used to select the line to be written. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. bit 0. Writing new data with QBm + 4...18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. bit 4.19 bytes.. via system. Set request: New data for selected line QBm + 1. 2004.8.

18-13 Signal chart example for writing data into the HHU display ASCII code for digital display Representation of characters on specification of the corresponding bit pattern or hexadecimal format in the bytes QBm + 4. Writing new data 0 1 3.  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. setting the interface parameters Note The request must be reset before a new line is written! 1 1.04.04 Edition 18-323 . Requirement: New data 0 a c d b Upper line Lower line Data for upper line Data for lower line b a c d 4.. The characters from Hex 20 to Hex 7F are default values. 2004. Acknowledgement digital display 1 0 a : PLC user sets signal and waits for acknowledgment b : System sets acknowledgment c : User resets request d : System resets acknowledgement Fig.19. Selecting the line 0 1 2.8 Configuring the HHU.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. setting the interface parameters 04.8 Configuring the HHU. 0 ± 0000 21H 31H 41H 51H 61H 71H A1H B1H C1H D1H E1H F1H 0001 22H 32H 42H 52H 62H 72H A2H B2H C2H D2H E2H F2H 0010 23H 33H 43H 53H 63H 73H A3H B3H C3H D3H E3H F3H 0011 24H 34H 44H 54H 64H 74H A4H B4H C4H D4H E4H F4H 0100 25H 35H 45H 55H 65H 75H A5H B5H C5H D5H E5H F5H 0101 26H 36H 46H 56H 66H 76H A6H B6H C6H D6H E6H F6H 0110 27H 37H 47H 57H 67H 77H A7H B7H C7H D7H E7H F7H 0111 28H 38H 48H 58H 68H 78H A8H B8H C8H D8H E8H F8H 1000 29H 39H 49H 59H 69H 79H A9H B9H C9H D9H E9H F9H 1001 2AH 3AH 4AH 5AH 6AH 7AH AAH BAH CAH DAH EAH FAH 1010 2BH 3BH 4BH 5BH 6BH 7BH ABH BBH CBH DBH EBH FBH 1011 2CH 3CH 4CH 5CH 6CH 7CH ACH BCH CCH DCH ECH FCH 1100 2DH 3DH 4DH 5DH 6DH 7DH ADH BDH CDH DDH EDH FDH 1101 2EH 3EH 4EH 5EH 6EH 7EH AEH BEH CEH DEH EEH FEH 1110 2FH 3FH 4FH 5FH 6FH 7FH AFH BFH CFH DFH EFH FFH 1111 18-324  Siemens AG.04 Table 18-5 0010 20H 0011 30H ASCII coding for HHU display 0100 40H 0101 50H 0110 60H 0111 70H 1010 A0H 1011 B0H 1100 C0H 1101 D0H 1110 E0H 1111 F0H ²Bit 7.4 Bit 3 .18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.04 Edition . 2004.....

04 Edition 18-325 . if possible. Connecting the MPI bus or OPI Connecting the EMERGENCY STOP button Connecting the handwheel Connecting the enabling button Connecting the equipotential bonding Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor box and the earth potential. The distributor box is connected to the relevant interface (e. The first channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3 terminal block. The equipotential bonding conductor should be a stranded cable having a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 and a length of less than < 30 cm. The electronic handwheel can be connected to terminal block X3. The equipotential bonding conductor should be a stranded cable having a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 and a length of less than < 30 cm. depending on the HHU used. The enabling buttons are connected to terminal block X3. The HHU is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box. 2004. The distributor box has an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting the EMERGENCY STOP button. to the MPI bus for FM-NC. The second channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3 terminal block. the requirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with.9 Distributor box for handheld unit The handheld unit is connected to the distributor box. Connecting the 24VDC power supply Installing the distributor box The 24VDC power supply is connected to terminal block X3. The distributor must be designed for 3-core or 4-core connection of the enable keys. HHU and HT 6 are UL-certified for USA and Canada. Manual Distributor box and HHU Versions of the distributor box The distributor box is available both in standard version and in a UL-certified version. Both variants of the distributor box are mechanically installation-compatible and electrically connection-compatible. References: /PHF/ Configuring. Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor box and the earth potential. 840D or to the OPI . terminals 9 and 10. terminals 1 and 2. In conjunction with the UL-certified distributor box. Manual /PHD/ Configuring. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal. The distributor box is designed for installation in the control cabinet or in a separate housing. The equipotential bonding connector is also arranged at the distributor box. terminals 11 and 12. a connection must be made to the cable distributor.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.g.  Siemens AG. When drilling a hole (e. if possible.possible only for 840D) via the X5 MPI bus connection. the handwheel and the 24 V power supply. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. terminals 3 to 6. If the handwheel is to be connected to the NCU. 810D. the enabling buttons.04.g.9 Distributor box for handheld unit 18.

1 (24V. X3/terminals 14/15 exist only in the 4-core connection version of the enable buttons.04 ! Caution The 2nd channel of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit may be connected only if a 2-channel handheld unit is used. 6FX2007-1AC01 or 6FX2007-1AC11 and 6FX2007-1AC02 or 6FX2007-1AC12 and 6FX2007-1AC03 or 6FX2007-1AC13 and 6FX2007-1AE03 or 6FX2007-1AE13 Equipotential bonding connection Position of interfaces and terminal blocks Front view 100 90 Side view 36. 2004. X3 Terminal block for HHU control elements Terminal block designation X3 Terminal block Terminals for 1.5 X111 and X121 exist only in the 3-core connection version of the enable buttons. X111. name EMERGENCY STOP button 1.04 Edition .9 Distributor box for handheld unit 04. bidirec bidirectional O.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2A) EMERGENCY STOP button 1.e. X121 For link to MPC bus.5 mm2 Table 18-6 Pin 1 2 3/4 5/6 7/8 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key.5 34 X111 X5 X121 X4 110 120 X5 X4 X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 O26 hole for M25 connector 52 X3 50 Fig.2 (24V. The distributor box can be used for the MPI or the MPC bus. 18-14 Distributor box for MPI and MPC bus 10. 3-core Signal. output I/O. 2A) Handwheel track A / handwheel track A Handwheel track B / handwheel track B Enable key ZS1 (24V. output 18-326  Siemens AG. 2A) / Enable key ZS2 (24V. 2A) Signal type I. i. input O.

2 / Enable button ZS 1. 1A) EMERGENCY STOP button 2. 2A) / Enable button ZS2. 4-core Signal. 2A) EMERGENCY STOP button 1. output I. name Signal type I. input O.2 (24V. bidirectional O.2 (24V. cable length Special feature X5 9-pin sub-D socket connector 200 m Electrical isolation  Siemens AG.2 Key 2 I.1 (24V. output I/O. input I.1 (24V.1 (24V.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18. input p Table 18-7 Pin 1 2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9 10 11 12 13/14 15 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key. 3-core Signal. 1A) EMERGENCY STOP button 2. 2A) 24V (power supply for HHU) 0V (Mext for HHU) EMERGENCY STOP button 2. name Signal type 24V (power supply for HHU) 0V (Mext for HHU) EMERGENCY STOP button 2. input Not assigned X4 BHG interface Connector designation Connector type Special requirement Signal names X4 Circular connector for screw connection Interface must comply with IP54 EMERGENCY STOP button EMERGENCY STOP button Protective conductor Enabling button Enabling button +24V 0V Handwheel track A Handwheel track A Handwheel track B Handwheel track B MPI bus cables X5 MPI interface Connector designation Connector type Max. input p O. 2004. output EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24V.04 Edition 18-327 . output I. 1A) Enabling button ZS1 (24V. 1A) Enable button ZS 2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 (24V.04.9 Distributor box for handheld unit Table 18-6 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key.1 (24V. 2A) O. 2A) Handwheel track A / handwheel track A Handwheel track B / handwheel track B Enable button ZS1.

the unused cores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminals NAUS1. S Use short potential reference cables of < 30cm and a cross section of 10 mm2.04 Edition .04 Table 18-8 Pin assignment of connector X5 X5 Pin 1/2 3 4 5 Name Not assigned RS_KP RTSAS_KP M (GND) Type Pin 6 Name P5 Not assigned XRS_KP RTSPG_KP Type VO B O VO 7 8 9 B I Signal names RS_KP. XRS_KP differential RS485 data . NAUS2. S In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores. S Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are protected against corrosion. NAUS1.1.C bus from PLC M Ground P5 5V Signal type B VO Bidirectional Voltage Output O I Output Input EMC measures The interference currents are earthed via the shield plates.C bus from PLC RTSAS_KP Request to Send AS . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.9 Distributor box for handheld unit 04. S Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors. 2004. NAUS2.C bus from PLC RTSPG_KP Request to Send PG .2. ZUSTICO) must be connected to the equipotential bonding terminal.2.1. make sure that the path of the interference currents to earth is of low-resistance. To prevent these discharged currents from becoming a source of interference themselves. modules and cables referred to a potential. ZS1. 18-328  Siemens AG. ZS2.

for 3-core ZS circuits. 2004. Order address Euchner GmbH + Co Vertrieb Technik Kohlhammerstr.5. 2-channel. pull to reset. 12-way Rotary button for override stepper switch 073985 057036 071380 075772 075909 077097 073973 For detailed description.. see Prodis. 16 D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen Telephone +49 711 7597-0 Fax +49 711 7597 303 J  Siemens AG. article no.. see below) 075384 078999 075385 079000 075910 Coiled cable 3. for 4-core ZS circuits...10 Spare parts The following spare parts are available: Table 18-9 Designation Spare parts HHU Length Connector Coding Remarks Ident No. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04. 490 700 4 dated 18. permanently attached with chain Terminator.. 1 x unprinted gray-coded with arrow dial 072604 075387 052958 EMERGENCY STOP switch.04 Edition 18-329 ..1BF00 Straight cable 10 m 17 pin 17-pin 0_ 45 _ Terminator. permanently attached with chain Keyswitch Spare key for EMERGENCY STOP switch.10 Spare parts 18..2000..5 m 17 pin 17-pin 0_ 45 _ for 6FX2007-1AB03 . 1 x printed.04 18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.-1AC13 for 6FX2007-1AE13 for 6FX2006-1BC01 . tamper-proof Handwheel (encoder HKD100V100A05) Setting wheel C1702 (operating wheel) Cover for Slide-in plastic strips Override stepper switch. (Euchner Order No. turn to reset with 1 NC contact 17-pin 0_ for 6FX2006-1BC01 .. for 3-core ZS circuits Terminator.-1AC03 for 6FX2007-1AE03 for 6FX2007-1AB13 .1BF00 072764 17-pin 45 _ for 6FX2006-1BH01 078952 Complete Key-operated switch Replacement for old HHUs 6FX2007-1Axx0 Replacement for new HHUs 6FX2007-1Axx1 and the following with ribbon cable for handwheel keyboard Set.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18.04 Notes 18-330  Siemens AG.10 Spare parts 04. 2004.

5 B 88 Fig. F3 Traversing keys.5 m connecting cable  Siemens AG.5 m–3. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.Mini Handheld Unit 19.04 Edition 19-331 . F2.1 20 19 108 A Dimensions and control elements 60 G F I H 216 D I C 83. two-channel Axis selection switch for 5 axes and neutral position Function keys F1. +. 19-1 Mini handheld unit Operating elements A B C D E F G H I Emergency stop button. – Rapid traverse button for rapid traverse with traversing keys or handwheel Handwheel Magnetic clamps for fixing to metal components 1. two-channel Enabling button.

The rapid traverse button is active both for traversing commands issued via the +/– keys and for handwheel signals. Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 2-way switch. 19. Rapid traverse button The rapid traverse button can be used to increase the traversing speed of the axis selected using the axis selection switch. Traversing keys The +.04 19. The handwheel supplies two guide signals with 100 I/U.19 Mini Handheld Unit 19.1 General The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is a small easy-to-handle unit for setting up and operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications. 2. The Mini HHU is intended for connection to 810D and 840D controls. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged. It can also be used with the 840C and FM-NC. It must be pressed to initiate traversing movements.1 Dimensions and control elements 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. when a person is at risk.1.04 Edition .2 Description of control elements EMERGENCY STOP button The EMERGENCY STOP button must be operated in cases of emergency 1. Axis selection switch Function keys The axis selection switch can be used to select up to five axes. Special attention has been paid to ergonomics and logical operating in the design of the housing and the arrangement of the control elements. The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions. 19-332  Siemens AG. Handwheel The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the axis selected using the axis selection switch.1. – traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements at the axis selected using the axis selection switch.

14 mm 2 4 F2 S5 0.04 19 Mini Handheld Unit 19.34 mm 2 0.34 mm 2 0.04 Edition /B B /A A 3 2 19-333 .14 mm 2 2 2 0.14 mm 2 0.14 mm 2 4 0.34 mm 2 0.14 mm 2 7 + S1 0.14 mm 2 3 F1 S4 0.14 mm 2 5 1 0V +5 V G Handwheel Fig.34 mm 2 Enabling button 0–Z–X–Y–4–5 Axis selection +24 V DC + – F1 F2 F3 SM 0V 14 24 –S3 13 23 –A2 1 –A2 1 C 0.14 mm 2 6 –A1 8 8 16 C –A1 0.34 mm 2 6 0.14 mm 2 0.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection 19.14 mm 2 2 S3 0.34 mm 2 0.14 mm 2 5 F3 S6 0.04.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection –X1 1 bn 2 gn 3 ye 4 Emergency stop –S1 12 22 wh 0.14 mm 2 4 5 3 4 bu 0.14 mm 2 6 –B1 SM –B1 Shield 0.14 mm 2 1 – S2 0. 19-2 /B B /A A Circuit diagram and sample connection  Siemens AG.34 mm 2 0.14 mm 2 0. 2004.34 mm 2 0.34 mm 2 –S2 11 EMERGENCY STOP/enable circuit to PLC 5 V DC 21 gr 5 rs 6 bu 7 rd 8 bk 9 vt 10 ye–bn 16 gr–rs 11 rd–bu 12 wh–gn 13 bn–gn 14 wh–ye 15 wh–gr 17 24 gr–bn 18 19 wh–rs rs–bn 20 21 22 23 wh–bu bn–bu wh–rd 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

the FC2 (NCK-PLC interface) that occurs in the basic program must be processed before the FC76. The FC76 contains a standard program for the mini HHU and is valid for use with SINUMERIK 840D/810D. The flange socket is contained in the connection kit. 19-334  Siemens AG.4 Configuration The FC76 module supplied in the toolbox supports configuration of the mini HHU.2(8x0d###BOT_TEXT###60102\bsp_prog\Minibhg. Table 19-1 Coding of axis selection switch Switch position – 0 Z X Y 4 5 Function Connector X1 Pin 8 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 Pin 9 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 Pin 10 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Mini HHU not connected No axis selected Z axis selected X axis selected Y axis selected Axis 4 selected Axis 5 selected 19.19 Mini Handheld Unit 19. For example in Toolbox 5. 2004.x(8x0d###BOT_TEXT###50104\disk1\Bsp_prog\Minibhg.1.zip or Toolbox 6.zip. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. It is located in the toolbox in the BSP_PROG directory in the file Minibhg. There is no need for an additional distributor.zip. To avoid collisions (caused by simultaneous access to one and the same signal).3 Coding of axis selection switch The coding of the axis selection switch is carried out in Gray Code.1 and later only. The program is generally valid and therefore requires several input and output signals when called.04 Edition .1.4 Configuration 04. This module is included in the toolbox in version 5. 19.04 The mini HHU is connected to the PLC or the connector for handwheels via a flange socket. The signals are sent to the NC in parallel (without MPI).

25 mm2 Note The crimping tool suggested should be used: AMP crimping tool No. The pin contacts on the cable must be replaced with the socket contacts contained in the connection kit.5 Connections Connection kit A connection kit that must be ordered separately is required for connection of the mini HHU.12 – 0.5 Connections 19.04 Edition 19-335 . 169475-1 or 90277-1.04.8mm O 39 mm 4 9 15 20 24 1 5 10 16 21 Seal 36. This connection kit contains a 24-way flange socket for installation at the machine and a dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit when the HHU is not connected.04 19 Mini Handheld Unit 19.56 mm2 No. Connection of handwheel signals The 6FX2002-4AA21-1xx0 cable can be used to connect the handwheel signals to the NC. 0. 163088-2 for AWG 24–20. 2004. Sealing ring Casing wall O 3. 19-2).  Siemens AG. 0. 19-3 Dimensions of the flange socket Use the contacts supplied when connecting the cables. 163092-2 for AWG 26–24. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S 20 x AMP crimp socket contact S 6 x AMP crimp socket contact No.6 mm View of connection side Fig.20 – 0. Connection in accordance with circuit diagram (see Fig.

4. 0. 5 and neutral position Positive traverse direction Negative traverse direction Rapid traverse for jog keys and handwheel 3 x: F1.2 K Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3.1 % IP65 19-336  Siemens AG.5 m.5 m. 60 C Height 250 mm Width 110 mm Depth 90 mm Ergonomically designed housing made from polyamide 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 0. 90 mA RS-422 24 V 24 V 2A 2A NC contact NO contact 1 x: floating 1 x: floating two-channel two-channel NO contact NC contact. 55 C Temperature rate of change Transportation/Storage –20 .. Z. Weight Ambient conditions Temperature ranges Application/operation 0 .. 0. 2004. Connector with pin contacts Yes 24 V 5V approx.6 Technical data Table 19-2 Technical data for mini HHU Control elements Enabling button EMERGENCY STOP button Axis selection switch Jog key + Jog key – Jog key Function keys Handwheel Electrical data Operating voltage for switching signals Operating voltage for handwheel Power consumption 5 V Handwheel signals EMERGENCY STOP button Enabling button General data Housing Mounting Connecting cable CE conformity Mechanical data Dimensions Approx.. F3 100 I/U Approx. touch-oriented arrangement of control elements 2 magnetic clamps Coiled cable 1.6 Technical data 04. Y.8 kg without connecting cable within 1 minute max.04 Edition .19 Mini Handheld Unit 19.04 19. turn to release 5 axes: X.. Class 3K5 Within 1 minute Protective class Connection kit Flange socket Dummy 24-pin with socket contacts and dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit max. extendable to 3. F2.

7 Spare parts 19. label and switching element Enable key. document “Current position measurement” for detailed description. connection end preassembled Flange-mounting socket-outlet.12–0. Current No. 1009 010 1009 219 1009 221 1009 933 1009 227 1009 081 1009 084 1009 046 S S Set of crimp contact sockets.25 mm2. consisting of 10 x 0. A/B push-pull.56 mm2 1009 222 1009 223 Tool T S S S Ejector for crimp socket and pin contacts Assembly tools for EMERGENY STOP button Pressure-cap remover for enable key 0080811 1009 224 1009 217 See PRODOK. for servo handwheel. 6 positions. 5 V DC.12-0. without dial Rotary selector switch.1999 Order address R&D Steuerungstechnik GmbH + Co KG Service Department Hocksteiner Weg 87–95 D–41189 Mönchengladbach Telephone +49 (0) 2166-5506-34 Fax +49 (0) 2166-5506-55 J  Siemens AG. 2004.7 Spare parts The following spare parts are available: Table 19-3 Spare parts for mini HHU Designation Servo handwheel.56 mm2 Set of crimp contact pins. coiled. complete Set of control knobs. 30 x 0. complete with seals and contacts Jumper connector.04 19 Mini Handheld Unit 19. with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts Crimp contacts Ident No.20-0.04. without dial EMERGENCY STOP button.12. 1999/019 Dated: 13. 30 x 0. complete with keyset. rotary selector switch and enable key Connection cable.25 mm2.20–0.04 Edition 19-337 . wired on connector. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. consisting of 10 x 0.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.7 Spare parts 04.19 Mini Handheld Unit 19.04 Edition .04 Notes 19-338  Siemens AG. 2004.

2004.04 Edition 20-339 .Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20 Order number Validity This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels: Type Key type mechanical MCP 483C 6FC5203–0AF22–0AA0 20. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.  Siemens AG. All keys are designed with replaceable caps for machine–specific adaptations.1 Brief description The machine control panel permits user–friendly control of machine functions. grinding and special machines. The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special clamping elements supplied with the panel. Clear key covers can be used as an alternative. The covers can be freely inscribed using laser. Design Operating elements S Operating modes and function keys – – 50 keys with LEDs Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override (key covers for direction keys for turning machines supplied separately packaged) Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys – S Spindle control with spindle override (rotary switch with 16 positions) S Feed control with feed override (rotary switch with 23 positions) S Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys) S S S S Design turning Emergency stop button (2 NC contacts) Ports: MPI interface Expansion slots: 2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Key type: Mechanical keys Key cap covers for the Turning version are supplied separately packaged (see “Spare parts and accessories”). It is suitable for machine–level operation of milling. turning.

machine functions Customer-definable keys (T1 to T15) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) Spindle control with override switch Feed control with override switch Keyswitch (four positions) Overview operating elements S 64 inputs (50 keys.04 Edition . assigned to the keys) Description of control elements EMERGENCY STOP button (A) Press the red button in emergency situations: 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. 2. two rotary selector switches. keyswitch with four positions) S 48 outputs (LEDs.2 Control elements and interfaces 04. if life is at risk.1 Control elements and interfaces Control elements on front Front view Position of control elements A Fig.04 20. 20-340  Siemens AG.2.2 20. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged. 20-1 B C D I F G H I J Machine control panel (milling version) Designation of operating elements A: B: C: D: E: F: G: H: I: J: Emergency stop button Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Reset button Program control Operating modes.

2004. Machine Manufacturer For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP: Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer! Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button 2 Emergency stop button 2 (4) 1 Push-on connection 1 (3) 3 4 2 Attach cable to button 1 EMERGENCY STOP machine control Connection numbering: Defaults. 20-2 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Mounting slots for control devices Warning The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).  Siemens AG. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20.04.2 Control elements and interfaces An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner.04 Edition 20-341 . in brackets: Optional Fig. 20-1) must not be chipped out.

.. 20-3 Interfaces. Position of interfaces Overview of interfaces S X10: Power supply interface Phoenix terminal block: 3-pin. straight S X30: Interface for rotary switch feed override Plug connector. 20-3. 2004.2 Display and operating elements at rear Operating and display elements (see diagram below) are located to the rear of the panel: S3 DIP switch Diagnostic LEDs 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. a red LED lights up.04 Edition . LED2 (H2): Temperature monitor: If a temperature of 60°C (+/–3°C) is exceeded.2 Control elements and interfaces 04.4 Sets e. baud rate. LED3 (H3): Voltage monitoring responded LED4 (H4): During data transfer via the operator panel interface a yellow LED flashes.3) S S S S LED1 (H1): Hardware test running.3.04 20.2.4 Operator panel interface (MPI) X20 Slot for 2 additional control devices (16 mm) 3 2 1 Shield M24 P24 Fig..3 Interfaces The location of the interfaces is shown in Fig. operating and display elements on rear of MCP 483C 20. addresses and protocol (see Subsection 20. Customer grounding terminal Switch S3 EMERGENCY STOP button Power supply interface X10 LED1.g. 2 x 5-pin. with lock 20-342  Siemens AG. A red LED lights up to indicate a fault.2. straight S X20: Operator panel interface (MPI) Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip.

2004. with lock References: /PHF/.5 Mbaud (MPI connection) X20 pin assignments for machine control panel X20 Pin 1/2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name Not assigned RS_OPI ORTSAS_OPI M5EXT P5EXT Not assigned XRS_OPI IRTSPG_OPI Type – B O V V – B I Meaning – Differential RS485 data Out Request to Send AS (not connected) 5 V external ground 5 V external potential – Differential RS485 data In Request to Send PG Signal type B Bidirectional O Output V Voltage I Input  Siemens AG.04 Edition 20-343 . straight Power supply interface Connector designation: Connector type: Table 20-1 Pin 1 2 3 X10 pin assignments Name P24 M24 SHIELD Meaning Type V (Supply voltage) 24 V potential Ground 24V Shield connection Operator panel front interface (MPI) Connector designation: Connector type: Max.04 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. cable length: Table 20-2 X20 9-pin Sub-D socket 200 m at 1. NCU 571-573 Manual X10 3-pin Phoenix terminal block. 2 x 5-pin. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04. NCU 570 Manual /PHD/.2 Control elements and interfaces S X31: Interface for rotary switch spindle override Plug connector.

4 95.2 18.1 32.04 20.20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. connection and settings 04.3 164.5mm –6mm Mounting frame 37 A 103.6 132.9 Rz 120 1.6 114.1 155 20.04 Edition . 20-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483C Mounting frame 20-344  Siemens AG.3 Mounting. connection and settings Dimension drawing 482. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 Mounting. 2004.7 37 A–A 2:1 Surface quality to DIN ISO 2768-L Tension jacks 9 jacks 1) Mounting slots for control devices Fig.6 45.9 1) 95.8 A 132.

04 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. 60 _ off vertical.04. 20. The MPI connector is plugged into X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see Fig.2 Connections The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machine control panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig.8 Nm. 20-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483C Mounting position Max. The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using an MPI bus cable via the PCU interface (MPI/DP).1 Mounting The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tightening torque 0.04 Edition 20-345 .3. For mounting positions greater than 60 _ a fan must additionally be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 _C. see also dimension drawing 20-4). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Tension jack fastening 450+1 135+1 Fig.3. 20-3) and fixed with two locking screws.3 Mounting. Connecting the 24 V power supply Connecting the MPI connection (X20)  Siemens AG. 20-3). connection and settings 20. The equipotential bonding conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw. 2004.

04 20. connection and settings 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 kbaud Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms on The following default setting (840D) is suggested: Table 20-4 8 off 7 off 6 on Default settings S3 5 4 3 2 1 on Meaning Baud rate: 1. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. 20-3): Table 20-3 8 7 6 S3 jumpering on machine control panel 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value Baud rate on off off on on off off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on off off on off off Transmission cycle time 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms Bus address 15 14 on 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Interface to MPI customer operator panel standard hardware 1.3 Settings The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel to be adjusted.20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. 2004.5 Mbaud 187.3 Mounting.04 Edition .3.5 Mbaud / Transmission cycle time: 100 ms / bus address: 6 / serial hardware on off on off Settings for transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least every 500 msecs. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3. 20-346  Siemens AG.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Machine control panel Send (PLC) Receive Fig.1 – 2. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 3.1.1 – 1.1 2.2.1 5.1 – 3.2.04.1.1 1.1. connection and settings Settings for receive cycle time The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals.1 MPI address 0.1.1 1.2.1.2.1 4.1 – 4.3 Mounting.1.04 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. Table 20-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machine control panel Preset GD parameters Receive – Transmit Reserved 5.1 2.04 Edition 20-347 .1.1.2...2. Bus address Interface parameters for communication via global data Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via the MPI interface.1.2.1 – 4. The receive monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3).1 3. 20-6 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel  Siemens AG.1 1..1 – 1. .2.1 – 1. Other addresses can be selected.2.1 – 5.2.1 – 3. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings using DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table.1 – 2. but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program. the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration must be activated.1. The bus address for 840D must be set to “6”.1 Reserved 4.1 – 5.2.1.

95 % 20-348  Siemens AG..4 Technical data Table 20-6 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption.. 0... 2004. 45 _C (to front) 0 .4 Technical data 04.04 20.6 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. 10 K/h 5 . 55 _C max.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19.04 Edition . 55 _C (to rear) max. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 ..6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2.. PELV acc.. to EN 50178 Keyswitch: IP54 CE Rear: IP00 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 483C Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 . 11 ms. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.. 18 K/h 5 . 1.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. max..20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. 80 % max. 11 ms. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 24 V DC 5W Front: IP54 III. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 77 mm Mounting depth: 45 mm approx.. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 150 m/s2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

knob. rotary switch and mouse can be found in section “15” TFT operator panel. T=32. rotary switch 1x 23G. 2004. tension jack set for supplementary components with 2.5 Spare parts and accessories 20.5 mm profile. cap. Accessories Table 20-8 Name Key cover (for labeling) Key cover (for labeling) Key covers for turning Accessories for machine control panel MCP 483C Description 1 set of 90.04 20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray 1 set of 90. knob. dials for spindle and rapid traverse SINUMERIK 810D/840D. dials for feed and rapid traverse SINUMERIK 810D/840D.5 Spare parts and accessories Spare parts Table 20-7 Name Spare part kits for machine control panel MCP 483C Description Actuating element 16 mm Emergency Stop mushroom-head pushbutton (red) EMERGENCY STOP button Switching element with one contact.04. 1NO contact Switching element with one contact. pointer. rotary switch 1x 16G. override feed / rapid traverse.04 Edition 20-349 . 1 NC contact Holder for 2 switching elements Keyswitch Set of keys Rotary switch spindle Keyswitch with key Set of keys MSTT SINUMERIK 810D/840D. cap. length 20 mm Number 1 Order number 3SB20 00-1AC01 1 2 1 1 10 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 6 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0 Rotary switch feed 6 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 Set of tension jacks 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Replacing spare parts Instructions on how to replace the handwheel. width 416 mm. T=24. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. clear supplied separately packaged with MCP Number 1 1 Order number 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF21-0AA0 J  Siemens AG. override spindle / rapid traverse. without videolink receiver”. pointer.

20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20. 2004.04 Notes 20-350  Siemens AG.04 Edition .5 Spare parts and accessories 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

turning.04 Edition 21-351 .Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21 Order number Validity This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels: Type Key type Film MCP 483 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1 21. Design Operating elements S Operating mode and function keys: – – – 50 keys with LEDs Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys S Spindle control with rotary override switch (16 positions) S Feed control with rotary override switch (23 positions) S Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys) S Emergency-off pushbutton (2 NC contacts) Interfaces: S MPI interface / PROFIBUS DP S For 6 control devices when connected via PROFIBUS DP S For 16 direct control keys for OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connected via PROFIBUS DP S For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max.1 Brief description The machine control panel MCP 483 permits user-friendly operation of the machine functions. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The fifty keys and two control device slots have user-labeled slide-in strips for adapting to specific machines. cable length: 5 m) Expansion slots: S 2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Key type: S Membrane keys  Siemens AG. A DIN-A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the scope of delivery. 2004. The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special tension jacks supplied with the panel. grinding and special machines. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling.

2 Control elements and interfaces 04. Machine Manufacturer For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP: Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer! 21-352  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2.04 21. 2.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner. if life is at risk. 2004. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.2 21.1 Control elements and interfaces Operating elements front face Position of operating elements A Fig. 21-1 B C D E F G H I J Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 483 (milling version) Designation of operating elements A: B: C: D: E: F: G: H: I: J: Emergency stop button Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Reset button Program control Operating modes. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it.04 Edition . machine functions Customer-definable keys (T1 to T15) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) Spindle control with override switch Feed control with override switch Keyswitch (four positions) EMERGENCY STOP button Press the red button in emergency situations: 1.

21-3 X50 S3 Rear of the MCP 483 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces  Siemens AG.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.04.. X54 Fig. 21-2 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Mounting slots for control devices Warning The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..2 Control elements and interfaces Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button 2 Emergency stop button 2 (4) 1 Push-on connection 1 (3) 3 4 2 Attach cable to button 1 EMERGENCY STOP machine control Connection numbering: Defaults.04 Edition 21-353 .2.. . 21-1) must not be chipped out..2 Operating and display elements to rear The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 483 are located on the COM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration below): COM board Equipotential bonding X30 X31 X10 H1. H5 X20 X60 X61 S1 X70 COM board X51.. in brackets: Optional Fig. 21.. but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!). 2004.

see Fig. 2004.. addresses and protocol S3 DIP switch Diagnostic LEDs 1.04 Jumper S1 Setting the handwheel signal type – S1 open: TTL interface – S1 closed: Differential interface Sets e. lights up red – lights up green flashes yellow flashes green Diagnostics Initialization error – Logic voltages on board OK Data transfer in progress Ready for communication Communication in progress Channel interference or not yet ready (default after Power On) Monitoring of Hardware – (reserved) Voltage Operator panel interface H5 PROFIBUS lights up green lights up red 21. H5 Effect: LED..21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. 21-3.5 Table 21-1 No. baud rate..04 Edition .. For position of interfaces..2.3 Interfaces The MCP 483 communicates via the COM board (see above).g.. H1 H2 H3 H4 Meaning of diagnostic LEDs H1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. Position of interfaces Overview of interfaces S X10: Power supply interface 3-pin Phoenix terminal block S X20: Operator panel interface (MPI/PROFIBUS) 9-pin Sub-D socket connector S X30: Interface for connecting rotary feed override switch (23 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock S X31: Interface for connecting rotary spindle override switch (16 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock S X50: Interface to 4-way keyswitch 1 x 6-pin plug connector S X51-X54: Interface for additional control devices (buttons with 24 V lamps) each 1 x 4-pin plug connector S X60/X61: Connection for 2 handwheels (TTL/DTTL) each 15-pin Sub-D socket 21-354  Siemens AG.2 Control elements and interfaces 04..

HWi_B HWi_XB N. Meaning Type V Supply voltage 5 V Ground Handwheel pulses track A Handwheel pulses track A (negated) Not assigned Handwheel pulses track B Handwheel pulses track B (negated) Not assigned Supply voltage 5V Not assigned Ground Not assigned I – V – V – I – *) i = 1: X60.04.2 Control elements and interfaces S X70: Connection of direct keys (16 digital inputs... PV5 N. X61 15-pin Sub D socket V O *) KT-OUT1/2/3: X53.. i = 2: X61  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Interfaces for 2 handwheels Connector designation: Connector type: Table 21-4 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 – 15 Pin assignment for connectors X60/X61 *) Name PV5 M (GND) HWi_A *) HWi_XA N. . X54 4-pin plug connector Pin assignment for connectors X51/X52 *) Name KT-IN1/4 *) KT-IN2/5 KT-IN3/6 M (GND) Meaning Type Customer key 1/4 Customer key 2/5 Customer key 3/6 Ground KT-IN4/5/6: X52 V O *) KT-IN1/2/3: X51. 2004.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.C.C.C.04 Edition 21-355 . M (GND) N. opto-decoupled) 2 x 10-pin plug connector S Equipotential bonding The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw Interfaces for additional control devices Connector designation: Connector type: Table 21-2 Pin 1 2 3 4 X51. Table 21-3 Pin 1 2 3 4 Pin assignment for connectors X53/X54 *) Name KT-OUT1/4 *) KT-OUT2/5 KT-OUT3/6 M24 Meaning Type Customer key 1/4 lamp Customer key 2/5 lamp Customer key 3/6 lamp Ground 24V KT-OUT4/5/6: X54 X60.C.

18 19.. ..04 Interface for direct control keys Connector designation: Connector type: Table 21-5 Pin i = 1. straight Meaning Type V (Supply voltage) 24 V potential Ground 24 V Shield connection 21-356  Siemens AG.54 mm grid Pin assignment for connector X70 Name DT_i P5V_TACO M_TACO Meaning Type I V Direct control key i P5 keyboard controller M keyboard controller Power supply interface Connector designation: Connector type: Table 21-6 Pin 1 2 3 X10 pin assignments Name P24 M24 SHIELD X10 3-pin Phoenix terminal block.2 Control elements and interfaces 04. 2.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.04 Edition .. 20 X70 2 x 10-pin plug connector. 16 17. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

6 Rz 120 164.2 18.4 95.1 32.6 114. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 Mounting and settings 21.04 Edition 21-357 .3 Mounting and settings Dimension drawing 482.8 Nm Mounting frame Dimensions in mm Fig.1 155 20.6 45.04.8 132.7 37 A 95.9 132.9 In the sealing area Mounting frame 1. 2004.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. 21-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483  Siemens AG.5mm –6mm 37 A A–A 2:1 Tension jacks (x 9) Tightening torque 0.

60 ° off vertical.3 Mounting and settings 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. see also dimension drawing 21-4).04 Edition . For mounting positions greater than 60 ° a fan must additionally be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 °C.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.8 Nm. Tension jack fastening 135+1 450+1 Fig. 21-358  Siemens AG.3.04 21. 21-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483 Mounting position Max. 2004.1 Mounting The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tightening torque 0.

5 kbaud Transmission cycle time – – – on off off off – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms MPI address – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms on – off – on – – on off on on – off – on off on off on – – on on off on on on – off off off – on off on off on off on off on – – on off on on – off – on on off on on off on – – on on on off on on on on –  Siemens AG.3. the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7: Table 21-8 1 2 3 MPI parameters 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value Data transfer rate on – off – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10: Table 21-7 1 – – 2 – – 3 – – Connection type 4 – – 5 – – 6 – – 7 – – 8 – – 9 10 Meaning / value Choosing the connection type on on PROFIBUS DP off off MPI Connection type: MPI For connection type MPI.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 21-359 .04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. 2004.5 Mbaud 187.3 Mounting and settings 21.

the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 7. The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. i.04 Connection type: PROFIBUS DP For connection type PROFIBUS DP.5 Mbaud Transmission cycle time: 100 ms. 2004.04 Edition . the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7.) 125 126 on off off on off on on off : : : on off off on on on on on – on on on on on on – Hardware code The code for the standard hardware is set with switch 8: Table 21-10 1 – 2 – 3 – Hardware code 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 off 9 – 10 – Meaning / value Standard hardware Default settings The default setting for DIP switch S3 is: S S S S Data transfer rate: 1.3 Mounting and settings 04.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. 21-360  Siemens AG. 21-3) are used to set the connection type. reception monitoring 1200 ms Bus address: 6 Connection type: MPI Default setting 4 5 6 7 8 off 9 off 10 off Meaning / value Standard hardware Table 21-11 1 2 3 on off on off on on off Note Switches 9 and 10 on DIP switch S3 (see Fig.e. PROFIBUS DP If PROFIBUS DP is chosen. the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 7: Table 21-9 1 2 3 PROFIBUS address 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value PROFIBUS address off off off off off off off off : off off off off : off off off off : off off off off : – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 0 1 2 3 : (etc. the transfer protocol and the interface used: – – MPI If MPI is selected.

9 W Total 16 W Front: IP65 III.6 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.4 Technical data Table 21-12 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.04. 45 °C (to front) 0 . 60 °C max. 10 K/h 5 . water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 70 mm Mounting depth: 38 mm approx.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.. 11 ms...015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19.81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 150 m/s2. to EN 50178 Keyswitch: IP54 CE Rear side: IP00 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 483 Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 80 % max... PELV acc. 1.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Board 7W 24 V DC Lamps 6 x 1. 18 K/h 5 . 55 °C (to rear) max. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2...2 W Handwheels 2 x 0. max..4 Technical data 21. 11 ms.04 Edition 21-361 . 0. 95 %  Siemens AG.. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 .

5 Spare parts and accessories Spare parts Table 21-13 Name Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483 Description Actuating element 16 mm Emergency Stop mushroom-head pushbutton (red) EMERGENCY STOP button Switching element with one contact. pointer. T=24. knob. Table 21-14 Name Slide-in labels Cable set for additional control devices Cable for handwheel connection *) Direct control key/ handwheel connection Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 483 Description SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-in labels (3 A4 films) SINUMERIK 810D/840D Cable set for additional control devices SINUMERIK 810D/840D. cap. override spindle / rapid traverse. 1 NC contact Holder for 2 switching elements Keyswitch Sets of keys Rotary spindle override switch Rotary feed override switch Set of tension jacks Keyswitch with key Set of keys (10 sets) for machine control panel SINUMERIK 810D/840D.04 21. rotary switch 1x 23G.5 mm profile. T=32. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Spare parts and accessories 04. knob. Cable for handwheel connection Max.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. dials for feed and rapid traverse Set of tension jacks (x 9) for supplementary components with 2. 2004. rotary switch 1x 16G. length 20 mm Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 set Order number 3SB2000-1AC01 3SB2404-0B 3SB2404-0C 3SB2908-0AA 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA 0 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA 0 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA 0 1 1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA 0 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA 0 Replacing spare parts Accessories Instructions on how to replace the rotary switch can be found in section “15 inch TFT operator panel. 1NO contact Switching element with one contact.04 Edition . dials for spindle and rapid traverse SINUMERIK 810D/840D. cap. without videolink receiver”. cable length: 5 m Direct control key/handwheel connection option for 6FC5203-0AF221AA1/-0AF23-1AA0 Number 1 set Order number 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA 1 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA 0 1 set 1 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx 0 1 6FC5252-0AF00-0AA 0 *) See illustration below 21-362  Siemens AG. override feed / rapid traverse. pointer. 416 mm wide.

18 0.18 0.5 Spare parts and accessories Dimensions in mm Pin 1 Length according to length code *) " 100 100 ± 50 3 30 5 2 1 100 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 11 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.: 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 (Item No.04 Edition 21-363 .18 0. B = 1. etc.5. A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available: Order No. insulated 5 Ring-end connector. 21-7 Machine control panel MCP 483 The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant.18 0.18 0.18 0. approved system cable length: 5 m Connecting cable for handwheel Order no. A printable blank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0 (xx is the length code: A = 0. insulated *) Flexible cable 0. You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels Fig.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.18 1P5 1M A_HW XA_HW B_HW XB_HW 1P5 1M Shield GN GE OR RT BL VI BR SW GN YE OG RD BU VT BN BK 4 Shield Housing Explanation: 1 Signal connector 2 Signal cable Fig.04. 2004. A5E00179123)  Siemens AG. 21-6 3 4 Pin-end connector.75 mm3 Max.18 0.) 21.

21-10) S Template_MCP483. 2004.04 Edition .21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. Template_T_MCP483. see Fig.doc (defaults for milling – standard shipped file. 21-364  Siemens AG.doc. A5E00205579. see Fig.doc (blank template for film: Item No.doc (defaults for turning. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.doc Key symbols as Word file.5 Spare parts and accessories 04. Preparing slide-in labels The software on the DOCONCD includes three files for the blank films: S Template_M_MCP483. 21-11) S Symbols. 21-8 Blank film for MCP 483 Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on the film supplied or how to create your own individual film. 21-9) S Template_T_MCP483. strip lettering as jpg file (see Table 21-15) Files Template_M_MCP483.doc include a table function showing the corresponding keyboard positions.doc and Template_MCP483. see Fig.04 Fig.

21-9 Template_M_MCP483. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Spare parts and accessories One example of the three MCP files (milling and turning) is given below: Part 1 X Y Z Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 – – + + Part 5 Part 5 Part 6 Fig.04 Edition 21-365 . 2004.doc for the “Turning” version Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 5 Part 6  Siemens AG.doc for the “Milling” version Part 1 +Y +X +C –Z –C –X +Z –Y Fig.04.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. 21-10 Template_T_MCP483.

Designer. A5E00205579) Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied and pasted into the corresponding table field. Draw the symbol in the center of this square. S Drawing in an image editing program (e. with fill color white and an invisible border line. The strip “Part5” is included twice so that it is available optionally as either a 1-color or 3-color strip. 21-11 Template_MCP483. Freehand. CorelDraw): – – – Draw a 15 x 15 mm square. 100 x 100 pixels) with fill color white.04 Edition .doc). 21-366  Siemens AG.doc). Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Symbols. The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels.5 Spare parts and accessories 04.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.g. Photoshop. Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word document (Symbols.g. Paint): – – – Create a square area (e.doc (blank template for film: Item No. Picture Publisher. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Place the symbol in the center of this square.g. 2004.04 Fig. Part 5 Part 5 Part 6 Creating your own symbols S Printing in a vector program (e.

 Siemens AG.48 cm Height 1. 21-12 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 483 Note The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer.04.06 cm Part 5 Height 1.48 cm 1: Width 1.04 Edition 21-367 . height 0. To make the labels easier to slide in.48 cm 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 Height 1.5 mm.3 cm 5: Width 0. The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge.3 cm 4: Width 0.5 Spare parts and accessories Dimension drawings The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 483: Narrow label: width 23 cm. they should be rounded by about 1.6 cm Height 1. It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels on film.48 cm 4 1 5 1 4 3 Fig. height 0.06 cm Height 1. HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used.9 cm 2: Width 1 cm 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 Part 6 3: Width 3.48 cm Narrow label: width 24.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.48 cm Height 1.34 cm.48 cm Part 5 Height 1. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

2004.doc contains the following key symbols: Table 21-15 File Symbols.04 The file Symbols. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.doc 7001 7013 7025 7124 7002 7014 7026 +C +X –Y +Z –X +Y –Z –C 7125 7003 7015 7027 7126 7004 7016 Z 7028 7127 7005 7017 7029 7128 100% 7006 7018 7030 7129 7007 7019 7031 7130 7008 7020 – + 7032 7131 7009 7021 7033 7132 7010 Y 7022 7120 X 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 21-368  Siemens AG.04 Edition .5 Spare parts and accessories 04.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.

the GSD file must be installed. S Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional) Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. S Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 “HW config”.04.1 Prerequisites The following components are needed to add a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: S SIMATIC STEP 7 S GSD file for DP slave MCP S Graphics files for DP slave MCP SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later: S SIMATIC STEP 7 as from Version 5.GSD version 1. To do this. please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files.04 Edition 21-369 .6.0 or later A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. 2004. in “HW config” use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2. Before installing the GSD file.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 21. Service Pack 1 GSD file The GSD file for the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later: S SI008109.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP This chapter describes: S Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project. The DP slave MCP is displayed in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the “HW config” hardware catalog in the following path: S Profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help.  Siemens AG. For each DP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DP slave can be found in the hardware catalog. 21.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.

The absolute value for a handwheel that is not connected is always 0. The starting value for the sensor counter in the handwheel is 0. The absolute values are transferred in big endian format. 21.04 Graphics files The graphics files belonging to the GSD file: S SI8109_N. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: S Standard S Handwheel S Additional I/Os Standard The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs: S Input data: 8 bytes S Output data: 8 bytes The input/output data is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel: The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 483 is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel: – – Machine control panel (MCP).04 Edition . They are automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed.BMP S SI8109_S.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. Additional I/Os The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs: S Direct control keys S Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6) S Rotary switch with the following distribution: 21-370  Siemens AG. 2004.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04. They must be located in the same directory as the GSD file.BMP are used to display the DP slave MCP in the “HW config” station window.6. MPI 19” machine control panel Handwheel The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel: S Input data: 2 x 2 bytes Absolute value handwheel 1 Low byte Absolute value handwheel 2 High byte For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit absolute value relative to the starting value. The data for both handwheels is always transferred.

handwheel. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functions required... Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots HW config – [SINUMERIK840D (configuration) –– PROFIBUS MCP] Station Edit Insert Target System View Tools Window Help (0) 810D/840D 2 PLC 317–2DP 2AJ10 X1 MPI X2 DP IM360 3 4 S7 FM NCU PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1) 1 Profile: Standard I/O NC/RC MOTION CONTROL SINUMERIK MCP Universal module standard standard. 21-13.. handwheel..12 Fig.04 Edition 21-371 . Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration (see Fig. handwheel. The hardware configuration comprises the following modules: S SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP S SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard. Set the PROFIBUS address 3....7 ––> standard.04. ex (9) SINUME 2 PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1) Slot 1 2 3 DP identification 55 2IO 192 Order number/designation I address O address Com. page 21-13: 1) 2.9 standard.. handwheel. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04... extended Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. (see Fig. Rotary switch 2. 21-13 Configuration with DP slave MCP  Siemens AG. 0. always 0 Low byte Customer LEDs High byte 21. exten 8. exten 258. 21-13 by way of example. extended standard.6.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP S Input data: 5 bytes Direct control keys (OP 012) Low byte Customer keys 1. Rotary switch High byte S Output data: 2 bytes Reserved.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Fig.7 8. extended 0.. 21-13. handwheel. page 21-13: 2) 4.. handwheel standard. 2004.261 ––> standard.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.

The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: – PROFIBUS address – – Data transfer rate Profile Dialog box Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: Parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: “Properties.” Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK 21-372  Siemens AG. the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: When you release the left mouse button. PROFIBUS parameters Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration. The DP slave MCP can be found at: S Profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button.04 Preconditions: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: – – You have created the S7 project You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capable SINUMERIK controller Adding a DP slave MCP To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration. and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. the “Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP” dialog box is displayed.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system.04 Edition . Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it.. 2004.. it changes to a cursor with a plus sign.

The modules are listed in the hardware catalog under the DP slave MCP. The following modules are available: S S S S S Universal module (not applicable) standard standard.2.3.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCP PROFIBUS address 2. handwheel. handwheel standard. There is no automatic adjustment! The following data must match: 1. 2004.04 Edition 21-373 . Machine control panel MCP 483 PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3) Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. extended standard.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Note The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module(DIP switch S3) (see Subsection 21. Page 21-359). handwheel The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Handwheel” functions: S Input data: 12 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Absolute value Handwheel 1 (2 bytes) Absolute value Handwheel 2 (2 bytes) High byte S Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes)  Siemens AG. extended Module: standard The module transfers the data for the “Standard” function: S Input data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) S Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Module: standard.

Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte S Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) High byte Module: standard.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04. extended The module transfers the data for the “Standard”.6. Rotary switch (1 byte) 2. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the “Properties – DP slave” dialog box. “Handwheel” and “Additional I/Os” functions: S Input data: 17 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Absolute value Handwheel 1 (2 bytes) Absolute value Handwheel 2 (2 bytes) Customized keys (1 byte) Direct key (OP 012) (2 bytes) 1. the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. 2004.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program This section describes how to link the DP slave MCP S to the basic PLC program for transferring standard I/O data to the VDI interface S to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to a module failure 21-374  Siemens AG.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.04 Edition . extended The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Additional I/Os” functions: S Input data: 13 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Direct control Customer keys keys (OP (1 byte) 012) (2 bytes) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) 2. handwheel.04 Module: standard. 21. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte S Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) High byte Setting the I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP.

.  Siemens AG. parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition to the 1st MCP: MCP2In: MCP2Out: POINTER POINTER // Address of input signals // Address of output signals The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs: MCP1Stop: MCP2Stop: MCP1NotSend: MCP2NotSend: BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL // Transfer of the relevant operating component: // FALSE = start.. TRUE = stop // Send and receive operation of the relevant // operating component: // FALSE = send and receive is active // TRUE = only receive is active Note Parameter: MCPNum Up to and including version 7.. the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. (where x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. Function block FB1 The communication parameters of the MCP are designated as MCPx.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the communication parameters for function block FB1. This is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility. parameter MCPNum should always be set to 0.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Note “Handwheel” function The “Handwheel” function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program.04 Edition 21-375 . To synchronize several MCPs.. 2004. only the following parameters are relevant: MCPNum: MCP1In: MCP1Out: INT POINTER POINTER // See below: Note // Address of input signals // Address of output signals The MCP2. To operate a machine control panel MCP 483 as a DP slave. Basic PLC program In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basic PLC program. “Additional I/Os” function Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.04.1 of the basic PLC program. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSend These parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

no significance // MCP/HT 6 operated on “extended” MPI bus // Preset. no significance // Preset.. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring machine control panel signals to the VDI interface can be found in: /FB1/ Description of Functions.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. no significance // Preset. 21-376  Siemens AG.0 := P#A 0.0 := 0 := S5T#700MS := S5T#200MS := FALSE := FALSE := FALSE := FALSE // Number of active MCPs // Address of input data (8 bytes) // Address of output data (8 bytes) // Preset. FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. please refer to: /FB1/ Description of Functions.0 := P#A 0. Example The following example shows the communication parameter settings for function block FB 1 for a machine control panel: MCPNum MCP1In MCP1Out MCP1StatSend MCP1StatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP1Timeout MCP1Cycl MCPMPI MCP1Stop MCP1NotSend MCPSDB210 := 0 := P#E 0..04 References For a detailed description of the basic PLC program or of function block FB 1. the basic PLC program does not check for module failure... no significance PLC user program If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP. no significance // Preset.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: S PLC operating system S PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected. 2004. Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC Program Chapter: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program.. the PLC defaults to STOP. no significance // Preset. Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC Program Chapter: FC 19: MCP_IFM . no significance // Preset.21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.. no significance // Preset. It is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters.0 := P#A 0. Chapter: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 . version M (milling) S FC 25: Machine control panel MCP 483. Chapter: FC 25: MCP_IFT . version T (turning) Note Function blocks FC 19. startup section VDI interface parameter assignment The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface: S FC 19: Machine control panel MCP 483.

21-14 shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine control panel together with their internal designation.6. with x = 0.04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Arrangement: Keys and LEDs S Key: Sxy = Key number xy S LED: LEDxy = LED number xy Fig.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure: S OB 82: Diagnostic interrupt S OB 86: Rack failure Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data.04 Edition 21-377 . LED09 LED01 LED02 LED17 LED18 LED19 S09 S01 S02 S17 S18 S19 LED32 LED33 LED34 S32 S33 S34 LED Key S10 S03 S04 S20 S21 S22 S35 S36 S37 S11 S05 S06 S23 S24 S25 S38 S39 S40 S12 S07 S08 S26 S27 S28 S41 S42 S43 S13 S14 S15 S16 S29 S30 S31 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 Fig. the user (machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm. the following alarm is tripped by the basic PLC program: S Alarm “40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure”. 21. Note In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI. 1 If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave. 2004. 21-14 Designation of keys and LEDs  Siemens AG. the LED designations are not shown in full.04. For the sake of clarity. The key and the LED have the same number.5 Input/output image A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit.

21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . 2004.04 Input image Table 21-16 Input image Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP: Signals from machine control panel (keys) Byte EB n+0 D EB n+1 REPOS S01 EB n+2 Keyswitch Position 0 RESET S13 REF S02 Keyswitch Position 2 Keyswitch Position 1 Direction keys R15 S46 EB n+5 R2 S33 EB n+6 T9 S25 EB n+7 T1 S17 T2 S18 T3 S19 T10 S26 T11 S27 R3 S34 R5 S36 R13 S44 R14 S45 var: INC S03 Spindle start S48 Single block S14 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Mode A JOG S09 TEACH S10 MDA S11 AUTO S12 Bit1 Bit0 Spindle override C B Machine functions 10000 INC S08 *Spindle stop S47 1000 INC S07 Feed start S50 100 INC S06 *Feed stop S49 Feed override E Keyswitch Position 3 D C B A 10 INC S05 NC Start S16 1 INC S04 *NC Stop S15 EB n+3 EB n+4 Axis selection R1 S32 R4 S35 R7 S38 R10 S41 Axis selection R12 S43 R11 S42 R9 S40 R8 S39 R6 S37 Freely assignable customer keys T12 S28 T13 S29 T14 S30 T15 S31 not used Freely assignable customer keys T4 S20 T5 S21 T6 S22 T7 S23 T8 S24 Signals marked with * are inverse signals. 21-378  Siemens AG.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04.

04 21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Output image Table 21-17 Output image Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP: Signals to machine control panel (LEDs) Byte AB n+0 1000 INC LED07 AB n+1 Feed start LED50 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Mode 1 INC LED04 NC Stop LED15 REPOS LED01 JOG LED09 TEACH LED10 MDA LED11 AUTO LED12 Bit1 Bit0 Machine function 100 INC LED06 Feed stop LED49 10 INC LED05 NC Start LED16 Machine function REF LED02 Single block LED14 var: INC LED03 Spindle start LED48 10000 INC LED08 Spindle stop LED47 AB n+2 R13 LED44 AB n+3 R3 LED34 AB n+4 T9 LED25 AB n+5 T1 LED17 AB n+6 AB n+7 not used not used T2 LED18 not used not used T10 LED26 R5 LED36 R1 LED32 Axis selection R4 LED35 R7 LED38 R10 LED41 Axis selection R12 LED43 R11 LED42 R9 LED40 R8 LED39 R6 LED37 R15 LED46 Axis selection T14 LED30 T15 LED31 R2 LED33 Freely assignable customer keys T11 LED27 T12 LED28 T13 LED29 Freely assignable customer keys T3 LED19 not used not used T4 LED20 not used not used T5 LED21 not used not used T6 LED22 not used not used T7 LED23 RESET LED13 not used T8 LED24 R14 LED45 not used J  Siemens AG.04 Edition 21-379 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.04.

21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21.04 Edition . 2004.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Notes 21-380  Siemens AG.

04 Edition 22-381 . grinding and special machines. The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special tension jacks supplied with the panel. cable length: 5 m) Expansion slots: S 6 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) S 1 slot for EMERGENCY STOP key or override rotary switch (up to d 22 cm) Key type: S Membrane keys  Siemens AG. Design Operating elements S Operating mode and function keys: – – – 49 keys Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override Default key assignment includes 16 freely assignable customer keys S Feed control with rotary override switch (23 positions) S Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys) Interfaces: S MPI interface / PROFIBUS DP S For 6 control devices S For 16 direct control keys for OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connected via PROFIBUS DP S For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. The 49 keys are equipped with user-labeled slide-in strips for adapting to specific machines. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Brief description The machine control panel MCP 310 permits user-friendly operation of the machine functions. turning. A DIN-A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the scope of supply.Machine Control Panel MCP 310 Validity This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels: Type Key type Film 22 Order number MCP 310 6FC5203-0AF23-1AA0 22. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling.

22-1 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 310 EMERGENCY STOP button Mounting slots for control devices If an EMERGENCY STOP button is added: see description in “Machine control panel MCP 483”. 2004. 22-1) must not be chipped out.04 22.04 Edition .2 Control elements and interfaces 04. “Control elements and interfaces” Warning The openings for mounting control devices (footnote in Fig.2. do not chip out: Risk of damage to panel! Fig.22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.1 Control elements and interfaces Operating elements front face Position of operating elements Operating modes and machine functions 16 customer keys Spindle control Location for EMERGENCY STOP button or spindle override switch Key switch Program control Location for 16 mm control units *) Feed control with override switch *) Drill openings to required width. 22-382  Siemens AG. but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).2 22. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

22-2.2 Operating and display elements to rear The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 310 are located on the COM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration below). COM board X30 X31 X10 H1.2. “Control elements and interfaces” 22. see Fig. .3 Interfaces The MCP 310 communicates via the COM board (see above). For position of interfaces..2 Control elements and interfaces 22.04 Edition 22-383 .. “Interfaces” Position of interfaces Interface description  Siemens AG.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. See “Machine control panel MCP 483”. 22-2 X50 S3 Keyswitch Rear of the MCP 310 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces Description of rear control and display elements See “Machine control panel MCP 483”.2. H5 X20 X60 X61 S1 X70 COM board COM board Equipotential bonding X51 54 Fig..04. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

2 15. 2004.8 Nm Dimensions in mm Fig.65 73.65 109.9 A 109.3 Rz 120 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 22-3 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 310 22-384  Siemens AG.25 Mounting frame Tension jacks (x 6) Tightening torque 0.04 22.3 Mounting and settings Dimension drawing 310 33 31.9 A–A 2:1 109.3 175 20.22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.5mm – 6mm Mounting frame 104.25 A 78.3 Mounting and settings 04.04 Edition .

8 Nm.04 Edition +1 155 22-385 .  Siemens AG. see also dimension drawing 22-3). 60 ° off vertical.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. Tension jack fastening 285+1 Fig.1 Mounting The machine control panel is attached by means of 6 tension jacks (tightening torque 0. For mounting positions greater than 60 ° a fan must additionally be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 °C. 2004.3.04. 22-4 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 310 Mounting position Max.3 Mounting and settings 22. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7: Table 22-2 1 2 3 MPI parameters 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value Data transfer rate on – off – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1.04 22.3 Mounting and settings 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3.04 Edition . 2004.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10: Table 22-1 1 – – 2 – – 3 – – Connection type 4 – – 5 – – 6 – – 7 – – 8 – – 9 10 Meaning / value Choosing the connection type on on PROFIBUS DP off off MPI Connection type: MPI For connection type MPI.5 kbaud Transmission cycle time – – – on off off off – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms MPI address – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms on – off – on – – on off on on – off – on off on off on – – on on off on on on – off off off – on off on off on off on off on – – on off on on – off – on on off on on off on – – on on on off on on on on – 22-386  Siemens AG.5 Mbaud 187.

PROFIBUS DP If PROFIBUS DP is chosen.04 Edition 22-387 . the transfer protocol and the interface used: – – MPI If MPI is selected.3 Mounting and settings Connection type: PROFIBUS DP For connection type PROFIBUS DP.) 125 126 on off off on off on on off : : : on off off on on on on on – on on on on on on – Hardware code The code for the standard hardware is set with switch 8: Table 22-4 1 – 2 – 3 – Hardware code 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 off 9 – 10 – Meaning / value Standard hardware Default setting The default setting for DIP switch S3 is: S S S S Data transfer rate: 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.e. i. the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 7: Table 22-3 1 2 3 PROFIBUS address 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value PROFIBUS address off off off off off off off off : off off off off : off off off off : off off off off : – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 0 1 2 3 : (etc. reception monitoring 1200 ms Bus address: 6 Connection type: MPI Standard setting 3 4 5 6 7 8 off 9 off 10 off Meaning / value Standard hardware Table 22-5 1 2 on off on off on on off Note Switches 9 and 10 on DIP switch S3 (see Figure 21-3) are used to set the connection type.  Siemens AG.04.5 Mbaud Transmission cycle time: 100 ms. the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7. The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off). 2004.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 7.

2 W Handwheels 2 x 0..9 W Total 16 W Front: IP65 III. 55°C (to rear) max.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19. PELV acc.. 10 K/h 5 . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Board 7W 24 V DC Lamps 6 x 1..4 Technical data Table 22-6 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption. 60°C max..04 22. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0..4 Technical data 04.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 .81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60068-2-27 150 m/s2.5 mm Mounting depth: 33 mm approx.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 80 % max. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 ..6 m/s2 3M6 according to EN 60068-2-6 150 m/s2.. 95 % 22-388  Siemens AG. 11 ms. 0. 18 K/h 5 . 11 ms. max.22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.2 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3... 2004. to EN 50178 Keyswitch: IP54 CE Rear: IP00 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 310 Vibration stressing Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 18 shocks 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 64. 1.04 Edition . 45°C (to front) 0 .

Table 22-8 Name Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 310 Description Actuating element 16 mm Emergency Stop mushroom-head pushbutton (red) Number 1 Order number 3SB2000-1AC01 EMERGENCY STOP button Switching element with one contact. T=32.04. “Spare parts and accessories”  Siemens AG. pointer. 1NO contact Switching element with one contact.04 Edition 22-389 .5 mm profile. dials for spindle and rapid traverse SINUMERIK 810D/840D. 2004. cap. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 Spare parts and accessories Spare parts Table 22-7 Name Keyswitch Sets of keys Rotary spindle override switch Rotary feed override switch Set of tension jacks Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 310 Description Keyswitch with key Set of keys (10 sets) for machine control panel SINUMERIK 810D/840D. pointer. knob. Cable for handwheel connection Max. knob. without videolink receiver”. override feed / rapid traverse. length 20 mm Number 1 1 set Order number 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 1 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0 1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Replacing spare parts Accessories Instructions on how to replace the rotary switch can be found in section “15 inch TFT operator panel. width 416 mm. rotary switch 1x 23G.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. cap.5 Spare parts and accessories 22. 1 NC contact Holder for 2 switching elements 1 1 1 1 set 3SB2404-0B 3SB2404-0C 3SB2908-0AA 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 Slide-in labels Cable set for additional control devices Cable for handwheel connection *) Direct control key/ handwheel connection SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-in labels (3 A4 films) SINUMERIK 810D/840D Cable set for additional control devices SINUMERIK 810D/840D. dials for feed and rapid traverse Set of tension jacks (x 9) for supplementary components with 2. T=24. override spindle / rapid traverse. cable length: 5 m Direct control key/handwheel connection option for 6FC5203-0AF221AA1/-0AF23-1AA0 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 1 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0 1 6FC5252-0AF00-0AA0 *) See illustration in “MCP 483”. rotary switch 1x 16G.

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. 22-6 Blank film for MCP 310 Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on the film supplied or how to create your own individual film: Preparing slide-in labels The software on the DOCONCD includes three files for the blank films: S Template_M_MCP310. see Fig.04 Edition . You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently.: 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 (Item No.5 Spare parts and accessories 04. 22-8) 22-390  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. A5E00205580.04 22. A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available: Order No. A printable blank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. 22-7) S Template_MCP310.doc (blank template for film: Item No. 2004.5.1 Membrane keyboard: labeling the slide-in labels Fig.doc (defaults for milling – standard shipped file. 22-5 Machine control panel MCP 310 The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant. A5E00179115) Fig. see Fig.

doc (according to labeling plan/template: Item No. The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. 2004. A5E00205580) Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied and pasted into the corresponding table field.doc include a table function showing the corresponding keyboard positions.04. 22-7 Template_M_MCP310.doc and Template_MCP310.  Siemens AG.04 Edition 22-391 .5 Spare parts and accessories S Symbols. strip lettering as jpg file (see Table 22-9) Files Template_M_MCP310.doc Key symbols as Word file.doc for the “Milling” version Fig. One example each for the MCP (milling) and the template is given below: Fig. 22-8 Template_MCP310. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

48 cm Height 1. 22-9 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 310 Note The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. Dimension drawings The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 310: Narrow strip: width 23 cm.48 cm Height 1. S Drawing in an image editing program (e. Place the symbol in the center of this square.48 cm Height 1. height 0.g.doc).04 Creating your own symbols S Printing in a vector program (e. Width: 3. Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Symbols.5 Spare parts and accessories 04.08 cm Height 1.5 mm. Width: 0.48 cm 1. Designer.doc). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge. Width: 1. Picture Publisher. Photoshop.9 cm 2.g. Freehand. with fill color white and an invisible border line.48 cm Height 1. To make the labels easier to slide in.04 Edition .48 cm Height 1. Paint) – – – Create a square area (e. It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels on film. Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word document (Symbols. 100 x 100 pixels) with fill color white. 2004. they should be rounded by about 1. 22-392  Siemens AG.22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.05 cm Fig. Draw the symbol in the center of this square.g.4 cm 3.48 cm Height 1. Corel-Draw): – – – Draw a 15 x 15 mm square. HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used.

04.5 Spare parts and accessories The file Symbols. 2004.doc contains the following key symbols: Table 22-9 File Symbols.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.doc 7001 7013 7025 7124 7002 7014 7026 +C +X –Y +Z –X +Y –Z –C 7125 7003 7015 7027 7126 7004 7016 Z 7028 7127 7005 7017 7029 7128 100% 7006 7018 7030 7129 7007 7019 7031 7130 7008 7020 – + 7032 7131 7009 7021 7033 7132 7010 Y 7022 7120 X 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123  Siemens AG.04 Edition 22-393 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP This section describes: S Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project S Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 “HW config” S Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional) Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP.6.2.GSD version 1. Before installing the GSD file. please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files. 22-394  Siemens AG. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help. 2004.04 22. The DP slave MCP is displayed in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the “HW config” hardware catalog in the following path: S Profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed. in “HW config” use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04.04 Edition . To do this. Service Pack 1 GSD file The GSD file for the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later: S SI008109.22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.0 or later A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For each DP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DP slave can be found in the hardware catalog. the GSD file must be installed. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Prerequisites The following components are needed to add a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: S SIMATIC STEP 7 S GSD file for DP slave MCP S Graphics files for DP slave MCP SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later: S SIMATIC STEP 7 as from Version 5.

04 Edition 22-395 . They are automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed.2 Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: S Standard S Handwheel S Additional I/Os Standard The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs: S Input data: 8 bytes S Output data: 8 bytes The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 310 is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel OP 032S.04 22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Graphics files The graphics files belonging to the GSD file: S SI8109_N.BMP are used to display the DP slave MCP in the “HW config” station window. The absolute values are transferred in big endian format. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. The data for both handwheels is always transferred.BMP S SI8109_S.04. Additional I/Os The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs: S Direct control keys S Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6) S Rotary switch with the following distribution:  Siemens AG. Handwheel The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel: S Input data: 2 x 2 bytes Absolute value handwheel 1 Absolute value handwheel 2 Low byte High byte For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit absolute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensor counter in the handwheel is 0. The absolute value for a handwheel that is not connected is always 0. 22.6. They must be located in the same directory as the GSD file.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. exten 258. 22-10.. 2004.22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22. page 22-10: 1) 2. 22-10 Configuration with DP slave MCP 22-396  Siemens AG. The hardware configuration comprises the following modules: S SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP S SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard. page 22-10: 2) 4.. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration. handwheel.. (see Fig.. 22-10. 22-10 by way of example.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Fig.261 ––> standard.04 S Input data: 5 bytes Direct control keys (OP 012) Low byte Customer keys 1. Rotary switch 2... handwheel. 3. extended 0..6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 04.04 Edition .12 Fig.7 ––> standard. extended Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Rotary switch High byte S Output data: 2 bytes Reserved. HW config – [SINUMERIK840D (configuration) –– PROFIBUS MCP] Station Edit Insert Target System View Tools Window Help (0) 810D/840D 2 PLC 317–2DP 2AJ10 X1 MPI X2 DP IM360 3 4 S7 FM NCU PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1) 1 Profile: Standard I/O NC/RC MOTION CONTROL SINUMERIK MCP Universal module standard standard. ex (9) SINUME 2 PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1) Slot 1 2 3 DP identification 55 2IO 192 Order number/designation I address O address Com. handwheel standard.7 8. always 0 Low byte Customer LEDs High byte 22.9 standard. 0.. Set the PROFIBUS address.... (see Fig. handwheel. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots.. handwheel. handwheel. extended standard. exten 8. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functions required.6.

04.04

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

Preconditions: S7 project

The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: – – You have created the S7 project You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capable SINUMERIK controller

Adding a DP slave MCP

To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at:

S Profile: Standard
PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration.

Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a cursor with a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration.

PROFIBUS parameters

Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the “Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP” dialog box is displayed. The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: – PROFIBUS address – – Data transfer rate Profile

Dialog box

Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: Parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: “Properties...” Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

22-397

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

04.04

Note The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (see Subsection 22.3.2, Page 22-386). There is no automatic adjustment! The following data must match: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCP PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel MCP 310 PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3)

Adding a module

The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The modules are listed in the hardware catalog under the DP slave MCP. The following modules are available:

S S S S S

Universal module (not applicable) Standard Standard, handwheel Standard, extended Standard, handwheel, extended

Module: standard The module transfers the data for the “Standard” function:

S Input data: 8 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes)

S Output data: 8 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes)

Module: standard, handwheel The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Handwheel” functions:

S Input data: 12 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Absolute value Handwheel 1 (2 bytes) Absolute value Handwheel 2 (2 bytes) High byte

S Output data: 8 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes)

22-398

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

Module: standard, extended The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Additional I/Os” functions:

S Input data: 13 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Direct control Customer keys keys (OP (1 byte) 012) (2 bytes) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) 2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte

S Output data: 10 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) High byte

Module: standard, handwheel, extended The module transfers the data for the “Standard”, “Handwheel” and “Additional I/Os” functions:

S Input data: 17 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Customer keys (1 byte) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) 2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte Absolute value Handwheel 1 (2 bytes) Absolute value Handwheel 2 (2 bytes) Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes)

S Output data: 10 bytes
Standard data (8 bytes) Low byte Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) High byte

Setting the I/O addresses

If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the “Properties – DP slave” dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here.

22.6.4

Linking to the basic PLC and user program
This subsection describes how to link the DP slave MCP

S to the basic PLC program for transferring standard I/O data to the VDI interface

S to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to
a module failure

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

22-399

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

04.04

Note “Handwheel” function The “Handwheel” function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program. “Additional I/Os” function Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.

Basic PLC program

In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basic PLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the communication parameters for function block FB1. Function block FB1 The communication parameters of the MCP are designated as MCPx... (where x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. This is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility. To operate a machine control panel MCP 310 as a DP slave, only the following parameters are relevant:
MCPNum: MCP1In: MCP1Out: INT POINTER POINTER // See below: Note // Address of input signals // Address of output signals

The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition to the 1st MCP:
MCP2In: MCP2Out: POINTER POINTER // Address of input signals // Address of output signals

The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs:
MCP1Stop: MCP2Stop: MCP1NotSend: MCP2NotSend: BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL // Transfer of the relevant operating component: // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop // Send and receive operation of the relevant // operating component: // FALSE = send and receive is active // TRUE = only receive is active

Note Parameter: MCPNum Up to and including version 7.1 of the basic PLC program, parameter MCPNum should always be set to 0. Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSend These parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP.

22-400

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

References For a detailed description of the basic PLC program or of function block FB 1, please refer to: /FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC Program Chapter: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section

VDI interface parameter assignment

The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface:

S FC 24: Machine control panel MCP 310, version M (milling)
Note Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. It is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring machine control panel signals to the VDI interface can be found in: /FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC Program Chapter: FC 19: MCP_IFM ... Chapter: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ... Chapter: FC 25: MCP_IFT ...

Example

The following example shows the communication parameter settings for function block FB 1 for a machine control panel:
MCPNum MCP1In MCP1Out MCP1StatSend MCP1StatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP1Timeout MCP1Cycl MCPMPI MCP1Stop MCP1NotSend MCPSDB210 := 0 := P#E 0.0 := P#A 0.0 := P#A 0.0 := P#A 0.0 := 0 := S5T#700MS := S5T#200MS := FALSE := FALSE := FALSE := FALSE // Number of active MCPs // Address of input data (8 bytes) // Address of output data (8 bytes) // Preset; no significance // Preset; no significance // Preset; no significance // Preset; no significance // Preset; no significance // MCP/HT 6 operated on “extended” MPI bus // Preset; no significance // Preset; no significance // Preset; no significance

PLC user program

If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave:

S PLC operating system S PROFIBUS controller
If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

22-401

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

04.04

Customized response

The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure:

S OB 82: Diagnostic interrupt S OB 86: Rack failure
Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data.

Note In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI, the following alarm is tripped by the basic PLC program:

S Alarm “40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure”; with x = 0, 1
If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user (machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm.

22.6.5

Input/output image
A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LED have the same number.

Arrangement: keys and LEDs

S Key: Sxy = Key number xy S LED: LEDxy = LED number xy
Figure 22-11 shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine control panel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LED designations are not shown in full.
LED09 LED01 LED02 LED03 LED21 LED22 LED23 S09 S01 S02 S03 S21 S22 S23 LED36 LED37 LED38 S36 S37 S38

LED Key

S10

S11

S12

S04

S24

S25

S26

S39

S40

S41

S13

S14

S15

S05

S27

S28

S29

S42

S43

S44

S16

S17

S18

S06

S30

S31

S32

S45

S46

S47

S19

S20

S07

S33

S34

S35

S48

S49

S50

Fig. 22-11 Designation of keys and LEDs

22-402

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

Input image
Table 22-10 Input image

Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP:

Signals from machine control panel (keys) Byte EB n+0 *NC Stop S19 EB n+1 NC Start S20 EB n+2 Feed Feed Start S35 EB n+3 RESET S17 *Feed Stop S34 Keyswitch Position 2 Direction keys + S50 EB n+5 Free K. T16 S18 EB n+6 T9 S29 EB n+7 T1 S21 T2 S22 T3 S23 – S48 Opt. K. KT5 X52.3 6 S47 5 S46 Rapid traverse S49 KT4 X52.2 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Mode SP + S38 Single block S16 Keyswitch Position 3 JOG S09 MDA S10 Machine function REF S02 REP S01 TEACH S11 AUTO S13 Bit1 Bit0

Spindle override SP– S36 SP 100% S37 Spindle SP right S39 *SP Stop S40 Mach. fu. INC VAR S03 Keyswitch Position 1 SP left S41 Keyswitch Position 0

Machine function INC1000 S07 INC100 S06 Feed override INC10 S05 INC1 S04

E

D

C Optional customer keys

B

A

EB n+4

KT3 X52.1

KT2 X51.3

KT1 X51.2

KT0 X51.1

Axis selection 4 S45 WCS/MCS S33 Z S44 Y S43 X S42

Freely assignable customer keys T10 S30 T11 S31 T12 S32

Freely assignable customer keys T13 S12 T14 S14 T15 S15

Freely assignable customer keys T4 S24 T5 S25 T6 S26 T7 S27 T8 S28

Signals marked with * are inverse signals.

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

22-403

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

04.04

Output image
Table 22-11 Output image

Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP:

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs) Byte AB n+0 *NC Stop LED19 AB n+1 NC Start LED20 AB n+2 Start LED35 AB n+3 AB n+4 + LED50 AB n+5 Free K. T16 LED18 AB n+6 T9 LED29 AB n+7 T1 LED21 T2 LED22 T3 LED23 not used Feed *Stop LED34 not used Direction keys – LED48 Opt.K. KT5 6 LED47 5 LED46 Rapid traverse LED49 KT4 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Mode SP + LED38 Single block LED16 not used JOG LED09 MDA LED10 Machine functions REF LED02 REP LED01 TEACH LED11 AUTO LED13 Bit1 Bit0

Spindle override SP– LED36 SP 100% LED37

Spindle SP right LED39 *SP Stop LED40 Mach. fu. var: INC LED03 not used SP left LED41 not used

Machine functions 1000 INC LED07 not used 100 INC LED06 not used 10 INC LED05 not used 1 INC LED04 not used

not used

Optional customer keys KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0

Axis selection 4 LED45 WCS/MCS LED33 Z LED44 Y LED43 X LED42

Freely assignable customer keys T10 LED30 T11 LED31 T12 LED32

Freely assignable customer keys T13 LED12 T14 LED14 T15 LED15

Freely assignable customer keys T4 LED24 T5 LED25 T6 LED26 T7 LED27 T8 LED28

J

22-404

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Machine Control Panel OP 032S

23

Validity

The following description applies to the component: Machine control panel OP 032S Order No. 6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0

Features

S Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably) S Feedrate override switch S Options for installing optional user keys,
EMERGENCY STOP or a second override switch

S 10 free 24 V inputs
6 free 24 V/250 mA outputs

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

23-405

23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.1 Control elements

04.04

23.1

Control elements
Key 1 LED 1 Key 10 LED 10 Recess for dial (EMERGENCY STOP, override switch)

Key 11 LED 11 Operator Supplemen tary control elements (EMERGEN CY STOP or override switch) Feed Override switch

Key 41 LED 41

Supplementary control elements (6 buttons, 1 keyswitch) Fig. 23-1

Key 50 LED 50

Front view of machine control panel, overview and location of control elements

Control elements when supplied

When supplied, the following control elements are provided on the machine control panel:

S Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably) S Feed override switch
Making the openings with a drilling tool
The openings for the supplementary control elements are embossed on the rear side of the machine control panel. The diameter for the horizontal cutouts is 16.2 to 16.4 mm. The diameter for the EMERGENCY STOP button is 22.2 to 22.4 mm. Recommendation: Drill the openings from the rear as follows:

S Clamp the machine control panel for machining on the rear (use suitable
drilling support)

S Switch the chip extractor on or cover the electrical parts to prevent chips
from falling on them

Note Before drilling the opening, metal chips must be removed from the drills.

S Use the appropriate drill to drill the desired openings (openings are centered)

23-406

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.2 Interfaces

Making the cutouts by knocking out

The cutouts should be knocked out only if the control elements used cover the broken edges on the front panel (no sharp broken edges).

23.2

Interfaces
Table 23-1 Example showing connection of additional override switch Pin X31 pin 4 X31 pin 3 X32 pin 2 X32 pin 1 X31 pin 2 X31 pin 1 Meaning Ground = C Significance 22 = 4 Significance 24 = 16 Significance 23 = 8 Significance 21 = 2 Significance 20 = 1 Switch/wiring C N.C. NC 4 N.C. 16 N.C. 8 N.C. 2 N.C. NC 1 Underside of override switch

1)

22.4

X20 130.7 125.6 LED:
3)

DIL switch
8 1
" 4 321

4)

Plug connector 1 x 6–pin 3) 2

57 40
24/0V

X10

9
9

56.5 34.5

16.3 0 259.98 228.92 177.8 147.45 117.1 233 208.15 86.75 56.4

10.4

2
26.05 0

0 2)

1) Location intended for EMERGENCY STOP or second override switch (22 mm) Prepared for 22mm emergency stop mounting geometry Recommended design: Recommended design: SIEMENS 3SB3000-1HA20 Contact 3SB3400-0A 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact 2) Location for seven control devices (16 mm) Fig. 23-2 Rear view of machine control panel with dimensional data

Module variants: 3) 571241.9001.01 4) 571241.9001.00

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

23-407

2004.08 Table 23-2 Pin 1 2 3 X10 pin assignments Name P24 M24 SHIELD Meaning Type V (Supply voltage) 24V potential Ground 24V Shield connection Note The power supply interface should be wired in accordance with the labeling on the module. 23-408  Siemens AG. jumpering LED: 4 3 2 1 X10 Pi n 4 1 4 1 Pi n 4 1 4 1 Inputs Display: Power supply interface Protective earth For module variants see Fig.2 Interfaces 04.04 Edition . 23-2 Fig.5/3-ST-5. 23-3 LED 1. 2: Not used LED 3 (green): POWER (24 V supply) LED 4 (orange): SEND status (flashes in normal operation) Rear view of the machine control panel with overview and location of interfaces Power supply interface (X10) Connector designation: Connector type: Recommended type: X10 3-pin Phoenix terminal block Phoenix CombiCon Order no. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. MVSTBR 2.04 Operator panel front interface (MPI) X20 Outputs DIL switch ON 8 " 1 S3 Plug connector 1 x 6-pin DIL switch (8-way).23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.

5 kBaud data transmission rate X20 pin assignments Signal. external Not assigned XRS_BTSS. Out Request To Send AS M5EXT. 2004. supply voltage V.  Siemens AG. name – – I/O. supply voltage – I/O.04. straight 200 m 1. RS485 data IRTSPG_BTSS. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The function of the inputs/outputs is defined in the PLC user program. The following inputs/outputs via X31 to X36 and their use are examples. external P5EXT.04 23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.04 Edition 23-409 . RS485 data X20 9-pin sub-D socket connector.2 Interfaces OPI interface (X20) Connector designation: Connector type: Max. bidirectional Signal type ORTSAS_BTSS. output V. bidirectional O. In Request To Send PG Note The inputs/outputs implemented via X31 to X36 can be used as desired. 5V potential.5 MBaud/187. bidirectional I/O. cable length: Special features: Table 23-3 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not assigned Not assigned RS_BTSS. 5V ground.

The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed.2 Interfaces 04. The bus address must be set to the value 6. 2004.04 Edition .5 Mbaud off 187. The MCP receives message frames from the PLC at cyclic intervals and responds to them at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3. The following default settings are suggested: Table 23-5 8 7 6 Default settings S3 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning 1.23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel to be adjusted. Any other setting will be ignored by the software.5 kbaud Transmission cycle time 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms Bus address 15 14 on 13 12 11 10 off 9 8 7 6 on off off 5 4 3 2 1 0 Interface to MPI customer operator panel standard hardware Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms Meaning / value off on on off off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on off on Settings for the transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the MCP at least every 500 msecs.5 Mbaud 100 ms 6 Standard hardware Settings for the receive cycle time Bus address Standard setting off off on on off on off Baud rate: Transmission cycle time: on Bus address: 23-410  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3.04 Assignments (S3) The following settings are possible with this DIP switch (8-way): Table 23-4 8 7 6 S3 jumpering on machine control panel 5 4 3 2 1 Baud rate on 1.

04 23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23. user key 1 KT-IN 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. X32. user key 2 KT-IN 2. 2004. 6 (X32) Ground User key 2 (X31).04. name X31 X32 KT-IN 3. user key 6 M5. 5 (X32) View from connector side of Dubox connector (socket) X31 2 3 X32 2 3 1 Pin 4 1 4 Plug connector Machine control panel OP 032S (rear panel) 1) Color of line.04 Edition 23-411 .. red – pin 1 in cable set  Siemens AG. inputs) Connector designation: Connector type: X31. 4) These LEDs display the following: LED 1. user key 3 M5. 4 (X32) rd1) User key 3 (X31). ground I.2 Interfaces Display (LED 1 . user key 5 KT-IN 5. user key 4 KT-IN 4.. 24 V supply SEND. User key 1 (X31). LED 2: LED 3: LED 4: Not used POWER. I inputs Signal type 1 2 3 4 KT-IN 0. X32 4-pin plug connector Connector: Berg type Dubox Table 23-6 Pin X31 and X32 assignments Signal. status change on protocol transmission Interfaces for optional user keys (X31. ground Note: The inputs switch to ground (active low).

user lamp 2 KT-OUT 2. Keyswitch input 0 SS 1. X34 4-pin plug connector Connector: Berg type Dubox Table 23-7 Pin X33 and X34 assignments Signal. X36 4-pin plug connector Connector: Berg type Dubox Table 23-8 Pin X35 and X36 assignments Signal. Keyswitch input 1 M5.2 Interfaces 04.04 Edition . 5 (X36) 23-412  Siemens AG. 6 (X36) Pin 1 Ground 24 V User lamp 2 (X35). 24V ground Note: The outputs are designed for 24V/250mA. user lamp 3 M24. Other control elements can also be connected to these inputs. inputs Signal type 1 2 3/4 SS 0. Keyswitch input 3 M5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Keyswitch input 2 SS 3. O outputs Signal type 1 2 3 4 KT-OUT 0.23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23. inputs) Connector designation: Connector type: X33. ground I. User lamp 1 (X35). user lamp 6 M24. 24V ground O. 2004. 4 (X36) User lamp 3 (X35). name X33 X34 SS 2. user lamp 4 KT-OUT 4. X36. X34. outputs) Connector designation: Connector type: X35. user lamp 1 KT-OUT 1. X33 Pin 1 Position 1 Key switch Position 4 X34 Pin 1 Ground Interfaces for optional user lamps (X35. user lamp 5 KT-OUT 5.04 Interfaces for optional keyswitches (X33. name X35 X36 KT-OUT 3. ground Note: The inputs switch to ground (active low).

23-4 Dimension drawing of machine control panel M4 158 153 145.8 154.5 7 0.04 Edition 23-413 .4 x 153 mm Installation from the rear is necessary for user keys.7 0 136.6 48.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout 5 175 169 162. 60 degrees to the perpendicular Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: W x H = 301.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout 23.9 49. etc. 6mm2 Fig.5 6 0 0 13.04.4 19. min.5 11.5 1) 38 0 5 6.04 23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.5 125.7 1) 260 30.5 309.7 10 4. Fig.4 1) DIN ISO 1101 Permissible mounting position of the operator panel plane max.4 277. 23-5 Panel cutout of machine control panel  Siemens AG.4 295.5 273 279.5 12.4 1) Protective-conductor terminal M5. 2004.6 2 24 42. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

45 °C (to front) 0 .81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 150 m/s2.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19.. 80 % max. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 24 V DC 10..6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 150 m/s2. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 56 mm Mounting depth: 12 mm approx.04 Edition .23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.04 23. 10 K/h 5 . PELV acc.3 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.. 2004. 11 ms..4 Technical data 04.8 W III. 0. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 .1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 ... 11 ms... 95 % 23-414  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. max. 55 °C (to rear) max.. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE Rear side IP00 Technical data for machine control panel OP 032S Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 55 °C max..5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 1. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 18 K/h 5 .4 Technical data Table 23-9 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption.

04 Edition 23-415 . 2 dials. spacer. Recommended type for keys and keyswitch: Rafix 16.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Schlegel QUARTRON Sources: Schlegel (http://schlegel-ekontakt.04 23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23. – CBS 1/1x1GG (16/15°) switch – – Spindle override 50–120% dial Rapid traverse override 0–100% dial. 60 x 500 mm cables Order No. 2004. The second override switch must be connected via X31-X32.de). J  Siemens AG.5 Spare parts and accessories 23. RAFI (http://www.rafi. 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 S 6 keys with lamps + 1 keyswitch The keys and keyswitch are connected via X31-X34 (input signals). The lamps are connected to X35 and X36 (output signals). Lumotast 25. cover.de) S Key cover (with label) 90 ergo-gray 20 red 20 yellow 20 green 20 medium gray 6FC5148-0AA13-0AA0 S Key cover (clear.5 Spare parts and accessories Supplementary control elements The following control elements can be added: S EMERGENCY STOP – – Operator control element: 3SB3000-1HA20 Switching element (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) 3SB3400-0A S Cable set for additional control devices for interfaces X31-X36 A maximum of 6 cables are needed per MCP. with sticker) S Mounting screws (100) S Additional override switch 6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0 6FC3988-7BJ10 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 Override switch with wing cap.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23.5 Spare parts and accessories 04.04 Edition . 2004.04 Notes 23-416  Siemens AG.

Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24 24. 840D. 24-1 Pushbutton panel PP 012 in example configuration Programming device Applications Machine control panel for machine tools in conjunction with the control systems 810D.04 Edition 24-417 . S7-AS300 or MCU Keyboard controller NC CPU COM COM MPI OPI/MPI PLC PCB distributor Pushbutton panel PP 012/H PCB PCB input/out Direct put PCB-PP 031R Keys basic module Connection For 840D Connection for CPU 3XY or MCU Individual wiring interface HT6 HHU PP 012 expansion Fig.1 24. 840D.  Siemens AG. 2004.1. S7-300 and FM-NC. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 System description Introduction Operator panel Control systems 810D.

2004. 24V input voltage 24-418  Siemens AG.EXT). The basic module can be equipped with a handheld unit connection and/or additional inputs/outputs as options. PG interface COM interface Inputs/outputs in the control system Lower supply Carries the signals from the COM interface of the operator panel to the PP 012.1. scanning up to 14 individual keys or 120 keys in a matrix. 60 inputs and 26 outputs are assigned functions by the PP 012. DIP switches allow you to select a parameter set from three possible variants (see Tables 24-46 to 24-48).1 System description 04. COM connection S Selector switch for speed/rapid traverse and feedrate override S Handheld unit connection with jumpering pushbutton S 16 inputs for direct keys S PCB_IO as an option. The interface is not supplied with an external 5V potential (P5. The transmission is word by word.c. Handheld programming devices require an external 24 V power supply for operation.04 Structure The PP 012 consists of S the basic module S the distributor S the direct keys S the frontplate. control of a maximum of 16 lamps 24. S 10 control devices can be installed. board is connected to the control system via the MPI interface. depending on the current requirements S 4-stage mode selector switch S A programming device can be connected to the front panel. Communication Flexibility The p.2 Interfaces and monitoring MPI/OPI interface The PP 012 is connected to the appropriate control system via the MPI/OPI interface. Data and control signals correspond to the OPI.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.

Inputs for custom-made wiring EMERGENCY STOP chain When actuated. Lamps Emergency stop and operating mode selector switch  Siemens AG. The Emergency Stop button can be jumpered on the handheld unit by pressing S11 when the handheld unit is plugged/removed. as well as protect the product in hazardous situations. S14 and S15 are connected to the control system via the MPI/OPI. 2004.04 Edition 24-419 . they have isolated contacts (common root) for custom-made wiring.04. Are also connected to the control system via MPI/OPI and have isolated contacts for custom-made wiring. Note To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e. they can also be controlled from external non-isolated contacts. The lamps HS1 to HS4. The EMERGENCY STOP chain is also active when the handheld units are removed.) expires (see Figs.3 Operator panel front interface The printed circuit board distributor has three isolated inputs.g. This is necessary to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP chain from being interrupted. the EMERGENCY STOP chain will ensure your own personal safety.1 System description Monitoring PP 012 has monitoring LEDs for service and start-up: S Voltage monitoring (POWER ON > 4.1. In addition. HS14 and HS15 are connected to the control system via MPI/OPI. HS7 to HS10. Alternatively. Actuating elements The actuating elements S1 to S4. jamming). 24-7 and 24-17). the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min. S7 to S10.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.7 V) S Temperature monitoring (enabled > 60 °C. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. disabled < 55 3 °C) S OPI LED flashes during data transfer S Bus request Repeater Segment 1 S Bus request Repeater Segment 2 24.

four of them optional (key matrix option) S 14 isolated inputs for scanning individual keys/switches S Key matrix option – up to 120 keys can be scanned S Short-circuit-proof 24V output for external keys S Matrix keys momentary-contact Function blocks PCB direct keys S 16 isolated inputs for scanning the direct keys from the operator panel.2 Function blocks 04.2 Function blocks Function blocks PP 012 S Interface/CPU/monitoring S Distributor with repeater S Handheld unit connection XS12 S I/O connection X20. one of them an Emergency Stop button S13 and a jumper button S11 S Max. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. X21 S Direct control key connection X19 S Interconnecting cable COM X26 S 4-stage mode selector switch WS1 S Feed override WS2 S Speed/rapid traverse override WS3 S Max.04 Edition . 24-420  Siemens AG. S17.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 2004.04 24. 12 control devices. node address) S Power supply Function blocks PCB input/output S 16 isolated outputs for controlling lamps. S18 (baud rate. 10 pilot lamps that can be controlled either from PLC or externally S Inputs for configuring global data (GD) (DIP switches) S Isolated operator panel front interface X15 with additional programming device interface X16 S DIP switches for generating S16.

3 S16. D15 2P24 60 16 X18.. 24-2 X27 GND F1 1P24 1M24 D0 .04 Edition Block S14 Block S10 Block S15 P24 32 44 31 43 .2 49 50 52 GND GND Block diagrams VCC GND X13 OPI Filter Repeater S18.1 S18.1 VCC GND GND 16 Authorization Conn– ection to OP 3 2 X8 Filter X12 Power on GND Interface MPI 10 Test connector 1 Torque C zahl/ 4 16 Rapid traverse Override 8 1) 2 WS3 1 2 3 4 9 7 8 6 10 5 GND Mode groups 9 WS1 13 10 15 11 5 6 7 8 X13 1 2 PG X25 PG 2P24 X14 51 52 50 Block S1/HS1 GND Block diagram of PP 012 Blocks S2/HS2 Blocks S3/HS3 Blocks S4/HS4 Blocks S7/HS7 Blocks S8/HS8 Blocks S9/HS9 30 3 HS1 X16 1M24 X15 78 4 18 3221 17 12 11 10 9 1 2 X2 3 4 GND Blocks S10/HS10 Blocks S14/HS14 Blocks S15/HS15 Emergency stop S13 M24 X18.3 04.4 1) X11 4 4 Feed X1 X6 C 4 16 Override 8 WS2 2 1 S18.. 2004.I/O (option) Direct key COM X19 WS4 1 X21 X20 X26 key–operated switch GND SB VCC GND 24.2 =1 X17 PCB distributor 3P24 3M24 3P24 Switches GD project 59 61 60 58 57 GND 9 10 11 X22 1 2 3 4 3M24 GND 12 26 27 28 29 14 16 Handwheel 16 Jumper 11 Block S1 8 6 13 2 4 3 8 15 7 17 16 S1 S2 Emergency Stop circuit1 Block S3 Emergency Stop circuit2 X23 S11 X23 Block S7 Block S8 Block S9 Block S4 GND Block S2 7 5 4 1 GND 21 14 22 13 3 2 10 6 1 14 12 9 HHU/HT 6 5 M24 X5 2 GND 2P24 4 X10 X1 3 1 3 21 2P24 X4 7 Br1 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 10 X24 4 3 2 1 XS12 X11 6 5 4 2 3 1 7 11 12 5 1 6 10 9 2 X3 3 8 4 X6 3 21 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.04 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 Block diagrams 24-421 Customer–Specific Wiring PCB HHU (+) With distributor II only (–) 8 9 6  Siemens AG.

2004.04 Edition 04.5A 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.HS18) 6 R10 2 Block F7 Block F6 5 4 F7 F6 E14 E63 E62 E61 E30 E24 WDR1 E12 F1 10A 1 Block F5 HS19 HS18 HS17 HS16 Memory GND 6 7 8 1 F5 X46 3 D(15:0) Block F4 2 F4 Block F3 Block F2 5 F3 X30 F2 1 Block F1 17 18 F1 F2 10A P24_5 P24 24-422 Fig.1 M24 (even) PB W12 X43 3 W10 W9 1 16 19 20 W11 2 14 5 W7 W6 W5 (PB) Block (HS28. Option Key Matrix VCC 4 GND 2 2 3 2 3 4 X19 . 24-3 I<0.HS23) X47 W8 W4 W2 E55 E54 E53 Block E54 Block E55 Block F10 HS23 HS22 HS21 HS20 7 F10 8 X41 Block F9 F9 F8 X46 X45 1 3 2 4 1 2 3 4  Siemens AG.7A 3 Fig.04 X40 3 4 M (GND)ext. 24-4 M24 X44 2 Block diagram of PCB direct keys PP 012 Block E53 Block (HS20.HS27) 7 8 X42 Block F16 15 6 F16 Block F15 13 F15 Block F14 7 8 F14 X41 12 1 Block E19 E19 Lock with 6 W3 Block F13 Block F12 11 5 F13 F12 10 Block F11 Block diagram of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 9 Authorization keyswitch 4 F11 X20 8 1 Block F8 E52 E23 E22 E21 OUT_EN GND VCC X21 5 6 7 W1 4 Block E52 Block E23 Block E22 Block E21 Block E14 Block E63 Block E62 Block E61 Block E30 Block E24 Block E12 X47 3 Output power switch 24V / 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.HS31) X42 HS31 HS30 HS29 HS28 HS27 HS26 HS25 HS24 Block (HS24.........3 Block diagrams R9 R8 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 M24 R1 M24 Block (HS16.

04. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.4 Operating elements 24. lights green when controller operating voltage > 4. Machine Manufacturer For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP: See machine tool manufacturer’s instructions! Power S Displays power supply.04 Edition 24-423 .7 V  Siemens AG.4 Operating elements Position of control elements LOGO S1 HS1 S2 HS2 S3 HS3 S4 HS4 S14 HS14 80 70 60 0 90 100 110 120 Power S11 XS12 S7 HS7 S8 HS8 S9 HS9 S10 HS10 S15 HS15 1 0 2 3 40 6070 80 20 10 90 100 6 110 2 120 0 A Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. if life is at risk. 2. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Applies to drives: An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner. 24-5 B C D I K F G H I Position of control elements Overview of control elements A: S13 EMERGENCY STOP button B: WS1 Selector switch C: S11 Jumper button D: XS12 Connection for handheld units E: X16 Programming device connection F: X26 COM connection G: Control devices for variable fitting H: WS2 Feed override I: WS3 Speed/rapid traverse override K: Key-operated authorization switch (on request) EMERGENCY STOP key Press the red button in emergency situations: 1. 2004.

24-424  Siemens AG. S For function and contacts. S Pushbutton S11 (designed as a jumper button) is provided with a sealing cap. control devices can be installed as per Table 24-52. 24-2. the keyswitch should be used according to Guideline 89/392/EEC.g. S7 to S10. S14 and S15. Fig. 4 stages.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. S To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e. see Block Diagram. Variably fitted actuating elements S In slots S1 to S4.00 04. 24-7 and 24-17).4 Operating elements 10. 2004. jamming). This prevents the pushbutton from being locked easily.04 Edition . 60° switching angle S Centrally mounted with front ring S Keyswitch variant CG4-1A251-600 * FS1 V750D/2J Can be changed by the customer to the knob-operated switch variant FS1 S Key can be removed in all positions Notice When used as a mode selector switch. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.) expires (see Figs.04 Selector switch S 2-way. the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a monitoring time (approximately 5min.

2004.. 4.4: H 1: Not used H 2: Overtemperature H 3: Power On H 4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission F: X15: G: X30: Operator Panel Interface Socket: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector. X10..1 Interfaces Overview The letters refer to Fig. A: S13: Emergency stop B: WS1: Selector switch C: X1 to X4. X22 and X24: Input/output interface of individual wiring D: X8: 24 V power supply E: LED basic modules H 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S17.. Connection PCB_IO single contacts/lamps Notice Using the key-operated authorization switch assigns inputs X47:1 .  Siemens AG.5. X11. X43: N: X44: X45 . X6. X47: Connection PCB_IO keyboard matrix/lamps 24 V power supply..5 24.. straight Direct control key connection H: S16.10.04 Edition 24-425 .00 04.. 24-6..5 Interfaces 24.. It cannot be used in this case to scan keys on the extension panel at X47.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. S18: DIP switches see Table 24-42 K: Connection for equipotential bonding connector via screw connection M5 L: LED distributor: H1: Bus segment 1 H2: Bus segment 2 M: X40 .

1 X18.04 Position of interfaces O I B F L H3 WS1 S13 S11 X15 X12 X13 X23 X5 XS12 X16 X24 X22 X4 C K Basic module X26 X40 X41 X10 X44 X2 X45 X30 Direct control keys X6 G D I X8 H1 H2 H4 H X18. 24-6 Device rear side 24-426  Siemens AG.5 Interfaces 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.2 S18 S16 S17 X17 Fig.04 Edition N C M (GND) PCB_IO X46 X42 X43 X11 X1 C X3 X47 . 2004.

04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ OE_S13.2 PP 012 individual wiring  Siemens AG. 4 x NC contacts Switching element: NC contact 3SB3400-0E Signal Type I/O Signal name Function Table 24-1 Pin 1 2 Selector switch interface WS1 24. 2004. 4 3 Function ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á 11 ER ES 15 10 13 9 Mode ⇑ BZ_WS EB VK I/O Reference signal Mode 2 1 Notice When PLC signals are linked with signals of the individual wiring. 24-427 .10.5 Interfaces Signal type O I I/O V Outputs Inputs Bi-directional signals Voltage Nottaster S13 Button designation: S13 Button type: Mushroom turn-to-set button 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3000-1HA20 and 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B (internal use) max.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.x BZ_S13. Simultaneously opening and closing the contacts of a key within the actuating travel is not possible. note that the signal change of the individual contacts may take place at different moments.x NC contact S13.x Switch designation: WS1 Switch type: CG4-1 A251-600 ΣFS1 V750 D/2J (keyswitch) Table 24-2 Pin Selector switch interface Signal Type Signal name Keyswitch pos.00 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.x EMERGENCY STOP Reference potential S13.5.

08 Connector X3 Type Signal name NC contact S7 NC contact S8 NC contact S9 Function ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ OE_S10 NC contact S10 10 5 6 7 8 9 BZOE_S7-10 S_S7 S_S8 S_S9 Reference potential NC contacts S7-10 NO contact S7 NO contact S8 NO contact S9 I/O S_S10 NO contact S10 BZS_S7-10 Reference potential NO contacts S7-10 +24 V potential 11 12 2P24 V  Siemens AG.2 – direction Pilot lamp HS14 S_S14.5 Interfaces 04.1 – direction NO contact S14.2 HS 14 I/O I Connector X2: Pilot lamps HS7 to HS10 Connector type: Table 24-4 Pin 1 2 3 4 Signal HS 7 HS 8 HS 9 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.08 Connector X2 Type Signal name Function ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Pilot lamp HS7 Pilot lamp HS8 Pilot lamp HS9 I All inputs “High” active HS10 Pilot lamp HS10 Connector X3: Contacts S7 to S10 Connector type: Table 24-5 Pin 1 2 3 4 Signal OE_S7 OE_S8 OE_S9 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.1 S_S14. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5/12-G-5.04 Edition .5/4-G-5. 2004.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.5/4-G-5.08 Connector X1 Type Signal name Function Connector X2 Connector X3 24-428 ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ BZ_S14 Reference potential NO contact S14 NO contact S14.04 Connector X1 Connector X1: Connector type: Table 24-3 Pin 1 2 3 4 Signal – directionpilot lamp HS14 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.

08 Connector X4 Type Signal name Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Connection XS12 pin Function Connector X6  Siemens AG.2 Ground 24 V V EMERGENCY_STOP 2.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á I 11 BZ_KEY 1M24 Reference potential KEY0.2 + direction Pilot lamp HS15 S_S15.5 Interfaces Connector X4 Connector X4: Connector type: Table 24-6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal KEY 0 KEY 1 KEY 2 Euchner terminal 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.04.2 *) *) Two-channel Connector X6: Direction +.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.5/12-G-5.2 HS 15 I/O I 24-429 .5/4-G-5.1 + direction NO contact S15. 2004.08 Connector X6 Type Signal name Function Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ BZ_S15 Reference potential NO contact S15 NO contact S15.2 S11 12 7 8 9 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 2.. Pilot lamp HS15 Connector type: Table 24-7 Pin 1 2 3 4 Signal 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.1 *) ZS2/ZS2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 AUFR_RICHT ZUST_TA EMERGENCY STOP circuit 2 1 Direction call S11 S11 I/O 1P24 6 (via S11) 5 X24:2 10 11 ZS1/ZS1.1 S_S15..1 *) Enabling button 14 6 12 ZSCommon/ZS2.

.08  Siemens AG. S4 NC contact S1 NC contact S2 Signal name All inputs “High” active Function 24-430 Connectors X10/X11 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.5/4-G-5.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Connector X22 Connector type: Connector X22: Table 24-9 Pin 4 3 2 1 XHR_B HR_B XHR_A HR_A Signal Connector X22 Á ÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Connector type X11: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.2 BZS_S1.2 NO contact S1.04 Edition 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.. pilot lamps HS1 to HS6 Connector type X10: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..1 NO contact S2 NO contact S3 NO contact S4 NC contact S3 NC contact S4 Reference potential NO contact S1 .08 Table 24-8 Male connector X10 X11 Pin 12 10 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Connectors X10/X11 HS 1 HS 2 HS 3 HS 4 S_S1.08 Handwheel Type O Handwheel track B negated Handwheel track B Handwheel track A Signal name Handwheel track A negated 04.2 S_S1. S6 Reference potential NC contact S1 . 2004.04 .2 Reference potential NO contact S1.5/4-G-5.1 S_S2 S_S3 S_S4 OE_S3 OE_S4 BZS_S1-S6 BZOE_S1-4 OE_S1 OE_S2 Signal Type I/O I/O I Pilot lamp HS1 Pilot lamp HS2 Pilot lamp HS3 Pilot lamp HS4 NO contact S1.5 Interfaces Connector X10 / X11: Contacts S1 to S6.

2 *) NC contact S11 3 EMERGENCY_STO P 1.5 Mbaud Operator panel front interface (MPI) X15 Signal NC NC RS Type Signal name Not assigned Not assigned RS-485 data I/O O V ORTSAS Output Request to Send. 2004.5/3-G-5.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.04. cable length: Table 24-11 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 200 m at 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 4 S11 X4:9 S11 *) Two-channel Connector X8: Connector type: Power supply 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5 Interfaces Connector X24 Connector X24: Connector type: Table 24-10 Pin 1 2 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Connector X15: Connector type: Operator panel front interface (MPI) 9-pin Sub-D socket connector.5/4-G-5. screw locking UNC4/40 Notice Use MPI bus connector 6FX2003-0AA02! Max.08 For pin assignment See “Connection Conditions” chapter. user interface 5 V external ground GND_EXT VCC_EXT NC 5 V external potential Not assigned RS-485 data XRS IRTSPG I/O In Request to Send PG 24-431 .1 EMERGENCY_STO P 1.08 Connector X24 Signal 2P24 Type V Signal name + 24 V Function Power supply interface X8 Operator panel front interface (MPI) X15  Siemens AG.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ OE_S11/ ZS2.

line length: Table 24-13 Pin Handheld device interface XS12 Euchner flange connector RC-17S1NM2H3PW Coding Y (315°) 50 m Handheld unit interface XS12 Type yp Signal name g Emergency Stop NC contact 2. 2004. user interface 5 V external ground Not assigned RS-485 data GND_EXT N. screw locking UNC4/40 5m Connector X16 Signal NC Type Signal name Not assigned Serial interface RS-232-C (COM) X26 Handheld device interface XS12 24-432 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 3M24 RS V Reference potential 24 V RS-485 data I/O O V ORTSAS Output Request to Send. line length: Table 24-12 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Programming device (PG) interface 9-pin Sub-D socket connector. cable length: Serial interface RS-232-C (COM) 9-pin Sub-D. External terminals with a separate 5 V power supply cannot be operated (fiber-optic technology).04 Programming device interface (PD) X16 Connector X16 Connector type: Max. pin. 6/7 8 9 XRS IRTSPG I/O In Request to Send PG The power supply potential P24 is not provided by PP 012.2 Enabling button Call enable key Handwheel B Handwheel A Enabling function HR_B HR_A Handwheel  Siemens AG.1 ZS2.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. straight.5 Interfaces 04. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions” Connector: Connector type: Max. An external 24 V power voltage supply enables handheld programming devices 702 and 705 to be connected.1 MPI_A 3M24 3P24 Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EMERGENCY STOP MPI I/O V Ground 24 V + 24 V Power supply ZS1.04 Edition . screw locking UNC4/40 25 m For pin assignment: See “Connection Conditions” chapter.C. Connector X26: Connector type: Max.1 RS-485 data Function Signal g Enabling function EMERGENCY_STOP 2.

2-row with lock Printed circuit board Direct keys Signal F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 Type Signal name Direct key 1 Direct key 2 Direct key 3 Direct key 4 Direct key 5 Direct key 6 Direct key 7 Direct key 8 Direct key 9 I 10 11 F10 F11 Direct key 10 Direct key 11 12 13 14 15 16 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Direct key 12 Direct key 13 Direct key 14 Direct key 15 Direct key 16 17/18 19/20 P5_TAC M_TAC 5 V keyboard controller V Ground of keyboard controller The direct key module serves to connect the 16 direct keys of the operator panel./enable key Handwheel B negated Table 24-13 Handheld unit interface XS12 Pin Signal Type Signal name Enabling function Function Connector X30: Connector type: Table 24-14 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Printed circuit board “Direct keys” Ribbon cable connector plug connector with protective shroud 20-pin.1 KEY2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition Á ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 9 EMERGENCY_STOP 1.2 MPI_B ZS2.2 EMERGENCY_STOP 1. 24-433 .2 HR_XB Handwheel A negated N.1 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.C.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.2 RS-485 data EMERGENCY STOP MPI I/O Enabling button Enabling function Handwheel Not assigned/enabling function Handwheel HR_XA ZS1.3 EMERGENCY STOP 10 11 I Jumper short-circuit connector 12 13 14 15 16 17 EMERGENCY_STOP 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1. 2004.1 Key scanning No.5 Interfaces Printed circuit board direct keys X30  Siemens AG.04.

04 24.81 Printed circuit board input/output X40 Signal P24_5 M24 Type V I Signal name 24 V potential Ground 24 V Connector X41 Connector X42 24-434 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á E55/W8 N.81 Printed circuit board input/output X41 Signal Type Signal name ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ E52/W1 E53/W2 E54/W4 E55/W8 HS24 HS25 HS26 HS27 Input key 52/matrix row 1 Input key 53/matrix row 2 Input key 54/matrix row 4 Input key 55/matrix row 8 I Connection of lamp HS24 Connection of lamp HS25 Connection of lamp HS26 Connection of lamp HS27 O Connector type: Table 24-17 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8-pin.81 Printed circuit board input/output X42 Signal W3 W5 W6 W7 Type Signal name Matrix row 3 Matrix row 5 Matrix row 6 Matrix row 7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ I HS28 HS29 HS30 HS31 Connection of lamp HS28 Connection of lamp HS29 Connection of lamp HS30 Connection of lamp HS31 O  Siemens AG.5/8-G-3.C.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. Input key 55/matrix row 8 Not assigned – Connector type: Table 24-16 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8-pin.04 Edition .3 Individual wiring PCB input/output Connector type: Table 24-15 Pin 1 2 3 4 Connector X40 4-pin. Combicon base casing MC 1.5 Interfaces 04. Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.5.5/8-G-3. Combicon base casing MC 1. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

81 Printed circuit board input/output X45 Signal P24_5 M24 Type V Signal name 24 V potential Ground 24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ E12/R1 E24/R2 Input key 12/matrix line 1 Input key 24/matrix line 2 I Connector type: Table 24-21 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8-pin.5/8-G-3.5/4-G-3. 2004.08 Printed circuit board input/output X44 Signal Shield M24 P24 Type I Signal name Ground ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Ground 24 V V 24 V potential Connector type: Table 24-20 Pin 1 2 3 4 4-pin. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5/4-G-3. Combicon base casing MC 1. Combicon base casing MC 1.5/3-G-5.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ W10 W11 Matrix row 10 Matrix row 11 I W12 Matrix row 12 Connector type: Table 24-19 Pin 1 2 3 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.04. Combicon base casing MC 1.81 Printed circuit board input/output X46 Signal E30/R3 E61/R4 E62/R5 E63/R6 HS16 HS17 HS18 HS19 Type Signal name Input key 30/matrix line 3 Input key 61/matrix line 4 Input key 62/matrix line 5 Input key 63/matrix line 6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á I Connection of lamp HS16 Connection of lamp HS17 Connection of lamp HS18 Connection of lamp HS19 O 24-435 .81 Printed circuit board input/output X43 Signal W9 Type Signal name Matrix row 9 Connector X44 Connector X45 Connector X46  Siemens AG.5 Interfaces Connector X43 Connector type: Table 24-18 Pin 1 2 3 4 4-pin.

Combicon base casing MC 1.81 Printed circuit board input/output X47 Signal E14/R7 E21/R8 E22/R9 Type Signal name Input key 14/matrix line 7 Input key 21/matrix line 8 Input key 22/matrix line 9 24-436 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ I E23/R10 HS20 HS21 HS22 HS23 Input key 23/matrix line 10 Connection of lamp HS20 Connection of lamp HS21 Connection of lamp HS22 Connection of lamp HS23 O  Siemens AG.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5/8-G-3.04 Connector X47 Connector type: Table 24-22 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8-pin.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 2004.5 Interfaces 04.

81 FRONT-MC 1.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ X40..35 MCC-MT 0..5/8-ST-3..0 Screw 1.5 Crimp Crimp 0.5 15 Crimp Crimp 0 2 to 0.81 Housing Socket connector contact MCC 1/8-STZ-3.5 15 Screw 1.0 Connection COMBICON connector part Grid 5.5 Spring force 1.08 Screw 2.35 0.5. X42.0.2..35 MCC MT 0 5 1 0 MCC-MT 0.08 1779990 24-437 . 2004.5/8-ST-3.81 Housing Socket connector contact MC 1. X43 X45 X41.5  Siemens AG. X44 MSTBA 2.. X46 X47 Connector PCB-IO MC 1 5/4 ST 3 81 1..5 Spring force 1.5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.0.5 Screw 1.81 FRONT-MC 1.81 FK-MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.5 Interfaces Connector parts for I/O module Table 24-23 Connector PCB-IO Connector parts for I/O module Signal MINI-COMBICON connector part Grid 3.1.5 to 1.5/4-ST-3.2.2 to 0.2 0 35 Crimp 0.1.35 Crimp 0..0 MCC 1/4-STZ-3.81 MCC-MT 0 2 0 35 0.5/4-ST-3.5/3-G-5. X46. 1803594 1850686 1851067 1852192 1859988 1859991 1803633 1850725 1851106 1852231 1859988 1859991 Phoenix Article No.81 FK-MCP 1 5/4 ST 3 81 FK MCP 1.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.5/8-ST-3..81 Connection Phoenix Article No.81 1/8 STZ 3 81 MCC-MT 0.5 to 1.04.0 05 10 Screw 1. X40 X43.

04 Edition . an interlock of hazardous motions must be implemented via the PLC with S11 and a time monitor activated simultaneously.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. non-latching S Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the EMERGENCY STOP jumpering function S Interruption in power supply for handheld unit connection. then “EMERGENCY STOP” must be generated by the PLC. 2004. When S11 is utilized for the “EMERGENCY STOP” jumpering function. stops dangerous movements reliably.6. “Terminator connected” corresponds to “High” on input KEY2. and. If the signaling contact on S11:31/32 is not properly closed again on expiry of the monitoring time (approximately 5 minutes). two-channel variant. in addition to Fig.1 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits See Fig.6 Connection for handheld units Whether a terminator or a handheld unit is connected can be determined by querying word 0 bit 2. 24-7.2. 24-438  Siemens AG. 24. when released or pushed down. ! Warning It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed to DIN EN 602041-1.6 Connection for handheld units 04. Subsection 9. when S11 is actuated. Terminator Properties of jumper button S11 S Interlocking of axis motion via the PLC S Interlocking of the enable key S Jumpering of EMERGENCY STOP contacts on the handheld unit S Manipulation-proof: Sealing cap prevents accidental actuation of key S Jumper button.5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8. KEY 2.04 24. 24-7 EMERGENCY STOP circuits The EMERGENCY STOP circuit is a two-channel configuration with the following layout: S For circuit 1: NC contacts S13→X4:6→X5:12→XS12:12→EMERGENCY STOP handheld unit→XS12:1→X5:1→X4:7 S For circuit 2: NC contacts S13→X24:4→X5:9→XS12:9→EMERGENCY STOP handheld unit→XS12:10→X5:10→X24:3.

Note Only 2-channel handheld units can be connected. the power supply for the handheld units connected at XS12:4 is interrupted via contact S11:31/32→X23:8 and X5:4 when S11 is actuated. the PLC must interrupt the EMERGENCY STOP circuit. Validity The two-channel enable function applies to order nos. S The interlock between S11 and the enable key must be implemented in the PLC. S In addition. 6FC5203-0AF25-1AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF27-1AA0-Z  Siemens AG. Contact S11:43/44 jumpers via X23:5/6 the EMERGENCY STOP contact XS12:9/10 of the handheld unit in circuit 2. the EMERGENCY STOP contacts of the handheld unit can be jumpered via S11.04. S It is scanned via XS12:5→X5:5→X4:10 and XS12:14→X5:14→X4:11. 24-7 and the terminal assignments in Table 24-24 (see below).2 Two-channel enabling function The circuit is illustrated in Fig. 24.04 24.04 Edition 24-439 . The time monitoring function in the PLC serves to detect malfunctions in pushbutton S11: If contact S11:31/32 does not close properly within the specified time frame. 2004.6. – – Contact S11:13/14 jumpers via X23:1/2 the EMERGENCY STOP contact XS12:1/12 of the handheld unit in circuit 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. The contact is scanned via circuit X23:8X23:8→X4:8→X4:1→optocoupler KEY0 →Word 0.14). Bit 0 of the PLC input image (see Section 24. Enable circuit The two-channel variant of the enable function is used for PP 012: S The enable key is called up with: X4:12→X5:17→XS12:16 and X24:2→X5:6 →XS12:6.6 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 Connection for handheld units To avoid interruption of the EMERGENCY STOP circuits on changeover between the handheld unit and the terminator at XS12.

the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig.04 Edition . If the signal level is still “low” or “open” when the monitoring time has expired (approximately 5 min. Fig.).24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 24-7 Connection for handheld unit ZS (two-channel) 24-440  Siemens AG. 2004.6 Connection for handheld units 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 PP 012H 2P24 M24 M (GND) S13 M (GND) Emergency stop X25 PG interface X16 P5 X13 Filter OPI X15 Repeater 3M24 3P24 1 2 3 4 X22 PCB dis– tributor II 1 2 3 4 2P24 X23 7 5 4 1 Jumper S11 32 44 21 14 31 43 22 13 13 2 4 3M24 3 8 1 2 15 3 7 16 4 17 11 10 6 1 14 12 9 5 13 2 4 3 8 15 7 17 16 11 10 6 1 14 12 9 5 HHU/HT 6 13 X23 8 6 3 2 M24 2P24 EMERGENCY STOP Circuit 2 4 3 X24 2 1 9 6 8 X4 7 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 10 X5 Br5 *) EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 6 Enabling button Customer–Specific Wiring 1 12 9 10 6 14 5 16 7 15 8 17 11 4 3 2 Br1 14 16 5 XS12 Handheld unit Type B-MPI 6FX2007-1AE13 HHU MPI Power supply Emergency stop 1 12 9 10 Enabling button Handwheel 6 14 5 16 4 3 2 13 Handheld terminal HT 6 6FC5403-0AA10-0AA0 HT6 MPI Emergency stop Enabling button Power supply 11 4 1 12 9 10 Terminator (component PP 012H) Terminator 3P24 *) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer. 24-17).

6 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 Connection for handheld units Table 24-24 PIN 1 Terminal assignments XS12 → handheld unit (two-channel) PP 012H HHU(MPI) EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 KEY2 EMERGENCY_STO P 2. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 MPI_B ZS2.04.1 HR_XA ZS1.2 HR_B HR_A ZS1.2 EMERGENCY_STO P 1.1 ZS2.04 Edition Á ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ BR1 BR3 BR2 BR3 BR1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á 24-441 .1 MPI_A HT6 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.04 24.1 – ZS1.2 MPI_B ZS2.2 HR_XB EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 KEY2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 HR_XB 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17  Siemens AG.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.2 – BR2 Termin– ator EMERGENCY_STO P 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 HRB HRA EMERGENCY_STO P 1.1 MPI_A 3M24 3P24 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 M (GND) P24 ZS1.1 KEY2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 MPI_A M (GND) P24 ZS1.2 MPI_B ZS2.2 – – EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 HR_XA ZS1.

5 451+1 132.6 155 444 Fig.6 155 Fig.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions 04.2 482. Operator panel front A Tension jacks 1.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions Dimension drawing 482.04 24.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 2004. 24-8 Dimension drawing of PP 012 Panel cutout 1.8 103. 70 50 The required panel cutout is 451.3 34.5 Nm  Siemens AG. torque 0.5 to 6 132. 24-9 Panel cutout for PP 012 24-442 ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Identification of anode connection: Insert the LED into the key with the + polarity on the correct side.6+1 Cutout symmetrical with operator panel front 34.04 Edition .5 155.6 mm.5 B 105 A-A 35 A B-B Max.2 123.5 to 6 thick Mounting background B 137.0 x 137. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

8 Installation and mounting Mounting preparations The PP 012 (for dimensions.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. (For function see Figs. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. a keyswitch CG4-1A251-600 * FS1 V750D/2J should be used in accordance with EC Directive 89/392/EEC. ! Danger The 24 V DC power supply must always be grounded and designed as Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) – protection by function low voltage with safe isolation! Connecting the MPI connection The PP 012 is connected to the 840D or S7-300 control by means of an MPI bus line. Only IP54 can be achieved for the complete pushbutton panel.  Siemens AG. see Fig. 24-17 to 24-21) Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded! Note To use the actuating element WS1 as an operating mode selector switch. The equipotential bonding conductor is fastened using an M5 screw and must be linked with the central ground standard part. due to the installation of a keyswitch. 24-9 ) is secured by means of tension jacks (supplied with panel) to the rear of the frontplate.04 Edition 24-443 . 24-6 ) at connector X8 to the rear of the machine control panel. 2004. If necessary. 6FC5 248-0AF13-0AA0). Connecting individual wiring Emergency stop. the tension jacks (9 items) can be supplied as a spare part (Order No.8 Installation and mounting 24. the frame profile complies with degree of protection IP65 when all 9 tension jacks are fastened. however. Connecting the 24 V power supply The 24 V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. Due to the surrounding seal located on the rear side. The MPI connector is plugged into X15 on the rear of the PP 012 and secured with a screw.04. selector switch and single contacts are connected according to the required custom-made links.

5 must be printed 10 180 64.4 85 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 or chamfered 1. 2004. S7 to S10. 24-10 Control panel (example) Corners rounded R1.5 7 7 1 146 Dimensions for labeling the slide–in user labels (variable switching elements S1 to S4. S15) (Designation field.5 16 1 0 80 slide–in labels (S11.9 Labeling control elements 04.4 47 16 23.8 14 0 1 19 56. Window area bordering Cutting edge bordering 5 must not be printed Dimensions for labeling the slide–in user labels 5 110 85.5 55.5 76.5x45 degrees Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels The following drawing is intended purely as an example. 24-11 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels 24-444  Siemens AG.04 24.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. XS12) 19 0 Dimensions for labeling 14. WS1) 113 38 21.04 Edition . multiple slide-in labels can also be arranged.9 Labeling control elements Device front 80 70 90 100 110 120 Power WS1 PG interface COM 60 0 WS3 20 10 6 2 0 40 6070 WS2 80 90 100 110 120 Free layout of labeling areas thanks to the use of slide–in user labels Fig. S14.

04.9 Labeling control elements Labeling device rear side S11 2P24 *HR–B HR–B *HR–A HR–A 4 HS7 2 1 1 X44 3 X45 WS1 S11 4 1 X46 1 Board IN– / OUTPUT S3 HS3 S9 HS9 Option S15 S4 HS4 S10 HS10 S15 HS15 S7–AS300(2) S7–AS300 840 D 4321 S18 4321 S16 4 3 21 S17 On Off S2 HS2 S8 HS8 S14 HS14 S15 HS15 WS3 WS2 8 X47 S1 HS1 S7 HS7 2P24 8 HS8 HS9 HS10 S2 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 8 1 X43 S1 S7 S8 S9 S10 S7 S8 S9 S10 S1 S1 S2 S3 S4 S3 S4 HS14 S14 S14 1.04 Edition X30 Option 1 X43 4 1 X42 8 1 X41 24-445 .6AT HW-FAULT >ϑ BUSRequest Fig. 24-12 Labeling on rear of device  Siemens AG. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.

2004.2 Fig. 24-13 PP 012 expansion S Order code 6FC5 247-0AA43-1AA0 S Can be equipped with max.6 A–A Center Operator control element 70 25. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 12 control devices.04 24.6 10 21 42.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. grid 33 mm S Labeling with exchangeable text labels 24-446  Siemens AG.10 PP 012 expansion 04.04 Edition 38 95 . diameter 22 mm.5 26.10 PP 012 expansion Front view with section A 64 33 A 482.

3 34.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.5 451+1 482. torque 0.6+1 132. 2004.5 or chamfered 1.5 to 6 thick Operator panel front Tension jacks A-A 1.5 95 B 34.5 132.2 35 A B-B Max.1 Cutting edge bordering must be printed Window area bordering 20 13 112 145 178 0 46 79 Slide-in direction Dimensions for labeling the slide–in user labels (variable switching elements S1 to S6) 208 must not be printed 23.5 to 6 A B 77.1 1 20 112 178 235 145 13 79 Slide-in direction Fig.8 . 24-15 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels (PP 012 extension)  Siemens AG. Dimensions for labeling the slide-in user labels (variable switching elements S7 to S12) 1 Corners rounded R1.04. 24-14 Panel cutout for PP 012 extension Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels The following drawing is intended purely as an example.04 Edition 46 0 24-447 .8 16.5 Nm Fig.2 123.8 103. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8 16.5 x 45 degrees 1 23. multiple slide-in labels can also be arranged.10 PP 012 expansion Panel cutout Mounting background 1.6 155.

04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ 7 contacts 6 contacts 5 contacts 4 contacts 3 contacts 2 contacts 1 contact 0 contacts ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á 1 No 14 No 10 contacts .11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 04. 2004.04 24.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 24. Optional key matrix 8 inputs W3. W10. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. W6.1 Inputs/outputs Inputs Table 24-25 Inputs (possible combinations) With authorization key-operated switch Design Key matrix (option) Switch/ independent single contacts Without authorization key-operated switch Design Key matrix (option) Switch/ independent single contacts 14 contacts 11 contacts 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 keys 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 7 keys 12 keys 14 keys 24 keys 36 keys 48 keys 60 keys 72 keys 12 keys 14 keys 24 keys 36 keys 48 keys 60 keys 72 keys 84 keys 96 keys 10 contacts 9 contacts 8 contacts 7 contacts 6 contacts 5 contacts 4 contacts 3 contacts 2 contacts 1 contact 0 contacts 10 11 12 13 108 keys 120 keys Functions of keys in the matrix: + non-latching keys + single key actuation + no switch function Outputs 16 outputs for driving lamps.11. W11. W5. W9. W12 for matrix 4 outputs A28 to A31 for controlling lamps 24-448  Siemens AG. four of which are optional. W7.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.

2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04.04 Edition 24-449 .11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 24.2 Key assignment within matrix Table 24-26 Key assignment within matrix Key value Wn Wn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 W8/ E55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 W4/ E54 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 W2/ E53 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 W1/ E52 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 E19/ PB 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Rn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 E12 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E24 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E30 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Matrix row Rn E61 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 E62 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 E63 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 E14 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 E21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 E22 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 E23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0  Siemens AG.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.11.

. 24-16 Matrix scan sequence 24-450  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 04.04 Edition . Rn n ≤ 10 *) Number of active blocks =1? Yes Save the active block Rn Scan inputs W1.. 2004.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. W2. W8 Save the active block Wn Scan parity bit E19 No Parity “OK” ? Yes Save RnWn Bounce suppression function No Output of key RnWn *) n = number of matrix blocks Fig. W4.04 Matrix keyboard scan Scan input R1 .

3 X4/5 Reference potential of inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2.04.12 Circuits and wiring 24. PLC function Table 24-28 Potential Use of the connections Connecting X3/11. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 24-17 Button S11 with PLC function 24-451 .. If the signal level is still “low” or “open” when the monitoring time has expired (approximately 5 min.12 Circuits and wiring There are various possible applications for connecting the key inputs KEY0 to KEY2: 1.. no external use. Enable key connection according to Fig. 2004. Use of button S11 with PLC function without jumpering For the required jumper assignment and their meaning. Table 24-27 Br1 — X Custom-made wiring Br5 — X Custom-made wiring Use of connections Button S11 with PLC function  Siemens AG.04 Edition Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Use of the connections X4:1. HS14 and HS15 Controlling the inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2 Inputs KEY0 to KEY2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 2P24 KEY0. Fig..12 X24/1 Application Control of inputs HS1 to HS4. the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 2 M24 X4/1 . S11 2P24 X5 2P24 2P24 X24 M24 1) X4 4321 9 6 5 10 7 4 12 11 8 1 Br1 Br52) 2 3 X3 11 12 External contacts 1) S11 connection with single–channel variant only 2) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer. 24-7).2.3 as isolated inputs. please refer to the Tables below. The reference potential is at X4:4 here. Use as isolated inputs with reference potential at X4/5 3. HS7 to HS10.).04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 2.. 24-7.

12 Circuits and wiring 04.04 Edition .04 Ext. HS10 Block Sn HSn 2P24 1M24 X3 X1. 24-18 External control of signaling lamps in keys HSn Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button 1 EMERGENCY STOP key 2 1 1 1 3 To PLC 2 2 2 4 Optional EMERGENCY STOP machine control Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 24-19 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit 24-452  Siemens AG. X11 11 12 External contact Fig. X6. 2004. X2.. control of pilot lamps HS1 .24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.

04 Edition 24-453 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.04. 24-21 Direct control key connection  Siemens AG. 24-20 Connection WS3 spindle speed override spindle speed/rapid traverse Connecting direct control keys X30 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 F16 F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 PCB direct keys PP 012 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + 5 V +10 % – Fig. 2004.1 rd WS3 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 C 4 16 rd 8 2 1 X18.12 Circuits and wiring Connecting spindle override WS3 X18.2 Fig.

10 SM1.1 SM1.11 SM1.12 W11 W10 W9 W8 W7 W6 W5 W4 W3 W2 W1 HS31 HS30 HS29 HS28 SM1.11 SMn.7 SM1.2 SM1.10 SM2.1 SM2.9 SMn.5 SM1. W8 only as an alternative to the key matrix.4 SM2.7 SMn.6 SMn.10 SMn.12 Fig.12 Lamps SM2.5 Key matrix (option) Rows n=3 to 10 Block SMn Lamps W8 Single contacts Connecting expansion panel .7 SM2.5 SM2.8 SM1.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.8 SM2. X43 Not assigned W4 W2 W1 HS27 HS26 HS25 HS24 *) assigned when the key–operated authorization switch is used SE7 SE8 SE9 SE10 R10*) R9*) R8*) R7*) HS23 HS22 HS21 HS20 X43 SE3 SE4 SE5 SE6 PCB expansion card 12E/12A X41 X46 R6 R5 R4 R3 P24_5 X47 HS19 HS18 HS17 HS16 M24 SE1 SE2 X42 X45 X40 X44 M24 P24 R2 R1 Row n=1 Block SM1 Block SM2 Row n=2 P24_5 M24 W12 SM1. 24-22 Connecting the extension panel to PCB expansion card 12E/12A 24-454  Siemens AG. X42. W4.3 SMn. W2. the corresponding individual contacts SM1.9 SM2.04 Edition SM2.04 SE11 SE12 SE13 SE14 W1.2 Inputs R1 to R10 When these are connected.3 SM2.4 SM1.4 SMn. 2004.3 SMn.9 SM1.2 SMn.1 SMn.6 SMn.11 SM2.6 SM2.12 Circuits and wiring 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.8 SMn.

3 SM1.5 SM1.6 SM1.04 Edition Inputs PLC 24-455 Block SM1 . X42 (W8) E55 nc = not connected nc nc nc nc (W9) (W10) (W11) X43 (W12) (W8) P24_5 M24 From central lower supply M24 P24 PP 012 extension X44 1 3 2 X40 PB E19 (even) PCB expansion card 12E/12A Fig.12 Circuits and wiring Wiring example X45 Individual keys SE7* SE8* SE9* SE10* P24_5 * Not usable switch is used M24 authorization switch is used R10 * R9 * E23* E22* E21* E14* E63 E62 E61 E30 E24 X47 X46 X45 R8 * R7 * R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 (W1) SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 SE5 SE6 SM1.2 SM1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04.4 SM1.7 SM1. 24-23 Wiring example eleven single keys and seven matrix keys  Siemens AG.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.1 E12 E52 (W2) (W3) (W4) (W5) (W6) (W7) E53 E54 SEW8 X41. 2004.

dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Operation 2 – 9 Hz: 3 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 10 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 100 m/s2...1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –40 . 70 °C max.13 Technical data 04. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 10 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 100 m/s2.... PELV acc. 2004.13 Technical data 24. 18 K/h 5 . 10 K/h 5 .. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE / cULus Rear side IP10A Technical data for PP 012 Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.13.04 Edition . 55 °C (to rear) max. 95 % 24-456  Siemens AG. 45 °C (to front) 0 .. 11 ms 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 175 mm Mounting depth: 105 mm approx. max. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 80 % max.04 24.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24... 3 kg Shipping (in packaging) 2 – 9 Hz: 3. 11 ms 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 24 V DC 20 W III.1 PP 012 Table 24-29 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption. 0..

S14.04. rated operating current at 5 V Volume resistance Imin 1 mA < 20 mΩ 1.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Rated insulation voltage Rated operating current Ue Ie Ie 50 V 2A 50 V Rated operating current at 24 V 2A Min. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. S15 (NC contact or NO contact) Table 24-30 NO contacts S1 to S4.13. S14.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. S7 to S10.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring Button contact maker Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4. S15 AC DC Selector switch EMERGENCY STOP key  Siemens AG.1 le 8A Switching capacity 10 le 8A Max. operating current for reference potential Contacts with floating outputs WS1/9–11. 2004. 15. S11.22 A AC-12 AC-15 DC-12 DC-13 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á 10 A 3A 1 mA ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 24-457 . S7 to S10.3 A 0. see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 ÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á >2A 10 A 6A 0. 13. rated operating current at 5V For further parameters.13 Technical data 24. Table 24-31 Selector switch Load AC Ue 300 V 10 A DC 300 V Rated operating voltage Switching capacity resistive inductive resistive inductive Switching capacity at 24 V Rated values for arc-free switching at 24 V Contacts with floating outputs S13 Table 24-32 EMERGENCY STOP button Utilization category (EN 60947–5–1) AC Ue le le le le lmin 24 V 10 A 6A DC 24 V Rated operating voltage Switching capacity Min.

depending on the lamp load Rated voltage Upper voltage limit 30.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.2 V DC Lower voltage limit 18. 2004.04 Inputs X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2 Table 24-33 State Rated value Signal level Inputs X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2: Voltage switched 24 V Current switched Printed circuit board input/output (option) 24-458 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á H signal +15 V to +30 V 0 V or open Min. X11 Table 24-34 State Inputs HS1 to HS4. 600 mA) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Pilot lamp ON +18 V to +30 V open Pilot lamp OFF Cable length Rated value Max.5 mA (at 30 V) Rated value Signal level 3 L signal –3 V to +5 V In a group of Cable length max. X6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. F1 to F16 Voltage switched Rated value Signal level 5V Current switched ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á H signal +5 V or open Rated value Signal level 16 L signal –3 V to +1 V < 11 mA In a group of Cable length Max 0.6 m AWG 28 X44 Table 24-36 Inputs X44 Voltage supply Total current Max.5 VDC Fuse  Siemens AG. X2. 9. HS7 to HS10. 10 m AWG 20–16 X30 Table 24-35 State Input X30 direct keys. 50 m AWG 20–16 X1.13 Technical data 04. 4 mA (at 15 V) Max. HS15 Voltage switched Rated value Signal level 24 V Current switched 50 mA (making current max. = 5 A. HS14.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á 24 V DC 2 x 10 A .

X46. X45. 2004. AWG 16 Max. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04.6 mA (at 15 V) Max. X46. E61 to E63. X42. X45:1 Table 24-39 State Output total current Outputs P24_5 Voltage switched Current switched Max. W1 to W12 Table 24-37 State Rated value Signal level H signal Inputs Voltage switched +24 V Current switched Lamp outputs Outputs P24_5  Siemens AG.5 A/output < 25 µA Rated value Signal level 16 L signal Open In a group of Cable length Starting total current Max. 50 m. E30. E52 to E55. AWG 16 X41.13 Technical data Inputs X41. X42. 5 A X40:1.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á +15 V to +30 V 0 V or open Min. X47: HS16 to HS31 Table 24-38 State Rated value Signal level H signal Lamp outputs Voltage switched +24 V Current switched ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á +20 V to +30 V Max. 0. 3. 700 mA ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Rated value +24 V 24-459 . X47: E12. E21 to E24. E14. X43. 50m. X43. 8 mA (at 30 V) Rated value Signal level L signal –3 V to +5 V In a group of Common root Cable length Max.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.

2 closed = Low active S14. S10. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04..14 PLC interface 04.2 S7.04 24. S18.14 Table 24-40 Inputs Word 0 Low PLC interface Input signals Bit 7 Bit 6 Mode Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 GD project Bit 2 Bit 1 Isolated inputs Bit 0 WS1/4 ER + direction WS1/3 ES I/O WS1/2 EB – direction WS1/1 VK E12/R1 *) DIP S16/1 S4 X4/3 KEY2 S3 X4/2 KEY1 S2 X4/1 KEY0 S1 Word 1 Low Word 1 High Word 2 Low Word 2 High Word 3 Low Word 3 High *) All bits identified with DIP-S16/1 are simultaneously switched when S16/1 is actuated. High active signals Low active signals 24-460  Siemens AG.2 open = High active S15 Ex/HSx I/O high active via a plug-on card supplied as an option . 2004. S4..04 Edition ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ Legend: Í Í Í Í Í Í Í Í Í ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ Í S15 E14/R7 Key switch 0 I/O Word 0 High Variable keys S14 GD project Version activation GD project E23/R10 key switch 3 GD project E22/R9 Key switch 2 I/O E21/R8 Key switch 1 DIP S18/3 E19/PB (parity) High (reserve) *) DIP S16/1 DIP S18/4 Emergency stop Variable keys *) DIP S16/1 F8 E30/R3 S13 F7 GD project F6 F16 E55/W8 E63/R6 F15 I/O F14 E53/W2 E61/R4 E54/W4 I/O E62/R5 Í Í Í ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Í Í Í Í Í ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Í Í S10 S9 S8 S7 Direct key E24/R2 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 Direct key F13 E52/W1 I F12 D F11 C Feed override F10 B F9 A Spindle speed/rapid traverse D C B A S1. S18... High active/Low active settable via S18.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.

2004.14 PLC interface Table 24-41 Outputs Word 0 Low Lo Word 0 High Word 1 Low Lo Word 1 High Word 2 Low Lo Word 2 High Word 3 Low Lo Word 3 High Output signals (see Table 24-40 for legend) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Pilot lamps HS8 HS7 HS15 HS14 HS4 HS3 HS2 HS10 HS1 HS9 HS16 HS24 Not assigned Pilot lamps I/O HS23 HS31 HS22 HS30 HS21 HS29 HS20 HS28 HS19 HS27 HS18 I/O HS17 HS25 Option Key matrix on I/O HS26 Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Notice When the mode is switched over.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.10.e. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.00 04. all safety-relevant signals are linked such that they are only possible if switch WS1 has a defined position.  Siemens AG. “Low” can be output briefly for all signals on selector switch SW1! I..04 Edition 24-461 .

Cycle time 50 ms cycl. S18 on PP 012 S16 2 1 4 3 S18 2 1 Baud rate: 1. S17.15 Initialization 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.15 Initialization Jumpering The following settings are possible with the switches DIP S16. Cycle time 100 ms cycl.04 24.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 2004.5 kbaud MPI not applicable 200 ms cycl. S17. Cycle time Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: Bus address: off on on off off on Set of parameters Set of parameters Set of parameters on Hardware reset “ON” off Hardware reset “OFF” on off X Pushbutton panel – factory setting: NC function Pushbutton panel NO function Reserve GD project 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 Meaning off on on on off on on off off on off on off on off off off off off off off off off off on on on off off on off off 24-462  Siemens AG.04 Edition .5 Mbaud OPI Baud rate: 187. S18: Table 24-42 S17 4 on off on on on off off on off off on on on on on on on off on on off on on on off off on off on off on off on off on on on off off on off off 3 2 1 4 3 Assignments of S16.

5 kbaud Trans.5 Mbaud Trans. This cycle time is set on S17 DIP switches 2 and 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.  Siemens AG.5 kbaud Trans. Trans cycle time 100 ms Bus address 6 Parameter set 2 Requirement: A global data table created using HISTEP Table 24-45 Setting for S7-300 with two machine control panels Application: Connecting two PP 012s to an S7-300 S17 4 off 3 2 1 4 3 S16 2 1 4 3 S18 2 1 Meaning off on off on on off on off on X off 187. The PLC expects a message frame from the PP 012 at least every 500 msecs.04.15 Initialization DIP switch settings Table 24-43 Default setting for 840D Application: Connecting the PP 012 to an 840D S17 4 X 3 2 1 4 3 S16 2 1 4 3 S18 2 1 Meaning off on off on on off off off off X off 187. The PP 012 sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. Trans cycle time 100 ms Bus address 6 Parameter set 1 Requirement: None.5 kbaud/1.04 Edition 24-463 . 2004.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. Trans cycle time 100 ms Bus address 6 Parameter set 3 Requirement: A global data table created using HISTEP Settings for the transmission cycle time The load on the PLC by the PP 012 can thus be adapted. can be directly connected to the MPI/OPI of the 840D Table 24-44 Default setting for S7-300 Application: Connecting the PP 012 to an S7-300 S17 4 off 3 2 1 4 3 S16 2 1 4 3 S18 2 1 Meaning off on off on on off on off off X off 187.

Note Make sure that a data width of eight bytes is always assigned for the input and output image! If two PP 012s are to be connected to an S7-300 CPU. The GD identification is generated by the compiler.1 PP 012 is receiver GD 1.1 PP 012 is transmitter This assignment corresponds to set of parameters 2 as per Table 24-46. The switchover does not take effect until after the PP 012 power is switched on.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. set of parameters 3 must be set. Transmit data Receive data Table 24-46 Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 Parameter set Designation Receive GD circuit no. The communication link to the PP 012 must be parameterized as follows: Table 24-47 Global data for set of parameters 2 ebf/s7-300:: >>ab60:8 eb60:8 ebf/PP 012:: eb0:8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á GD 1.04 Edition .1 GD 1. set of parameters 2 is selected and a global data table is created using HISTEP.1.2. Transmit GI no. and the following global data table must be created using HISTEP. GD 1.1 >>ab0:8 GD identification The specifications “ab60” and “eb60” for S7 are only examples.04 Communication parameters The switchover of the sets of parameters (GD identifications) for communication between control system and PP 012 is implemented via DIP switch S16/1 or S18/3.  Siemens AG. the signals can also be transferred to other locations.2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Receive GI no.15 Initialization 04. Internal assignments Object number for transmit GI When the PP 012 is operated in conjunction with an S7-300 CPU. Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 Parameter set 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 = PP 012→ controller = controller → PP 012 Global data table 24-464 ÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Object number for receive GI Send GD circuit no.1. 2004.

1 GD 2.1.2.1. Danger The transmission path (MPI/OPI) from PP 012 to the central controller must be monitored by the user.1 GD 2.04 Edition ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á GD 1. 24-465 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2. 2004.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.15 Initialization Table 24-48 Global data for set of parameters 3 ebf/s7-300:: >>ab60:8 eb60:8 ebf/PP 012:: eb0:8 ebf/PP 012_2:: !  Siemens AG.04.1 GD 1.1 >>ab0:8 >>ab120:8 eb118:8 eb0:8 >>ab0:8 GD identification Further GD communications can be configured in the following lines.

The user can reset bit 31 and provide it with a watchdog. see the Table below: Table 24-49 Bit Status information Status: Description of error From send CPU + + + + From receive CPU + + + + 0 1 2 3 Area length error in sender Block cannot be found in sender I/O access error in sender GD packet lost – by sender – in transit – by receiver Syntax error in GD packet GD object missing from GD packet Wrong assignment of GD object length in sender and receiver Address range length error in sender GD package cannot be found in receiver I/O access error in receiver Timeout in receiver Restart of receiver Reserved Receive new data 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12–30 31 + + + + + + + + + + + References: / / SIMATIC S 7. 2004.04 Edition .24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. bit 31. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. If a communication error occurs.04 24.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012 Your program can read the information of the GD package status from the operands you assign the corresponding GDS identification in the global data table in the STEP 7 tool “Communication Configuration”. 24-466  Siemens AG.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012 04. the operating system writes error information to these operands (described in the Table below). a double word (32 bit) is provided. For the status information of the communication. You can then use this information to create conditional program branches as a response to the communication errors. User Manual Note Monitoring of the MPI link between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 can be implemented with the global data bit. If this bit is not set again within the predefined time interval. a fault in the line is the cause. For the contents of the double word.

1 GD 1.1 Example as314//cpu1: md120 md130 4 >>ab120:8 md140 4 eb118:8 4 >>eb0:8 1 ab0:8 pp012_1//cpu1:  Siemens AG.04 Edition 24-467 .2. 2004.04.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24.1 SR 1.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012 Table 24-50 GD identifier GST GDS 1.2 GD 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 GDS 1.2 SR1.1.

Screw the cap nut tight (max. Refit the button holder and cap in reverse order Note Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. Screw off the dummy plug 2.17 Service information Lamp replacement for illuminated keys. Lever out the button holder using lamp remover LZ5 3. Prize the button cap off forwards with a screwdriver 2. Changing the lamps on pilot lamps 1.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Please note the position of the anti-rotation element 5. 24-10) 2. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube 4. 2004. Refit the cap and the label holder Notice When using LEDs.8 Nm) Insert slide-in labels 1.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. Press the contact maker onto the base and install the lamp if necessary 3. make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity (see Fig. Use the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube to change the lamp 3. Align the texts in the window Note Slide in the labels when the PP 012 operator panel front is not yet installed. torque 0.04 24. 24-468  Siemens AG. It can be obtained from the Schlegel company. Insert the pushbutton through the front plate and screw on the cap nut with several turns 4. Remove the protective film from the label slot 3. Screw the cap nut tight. Slide in the labels (with print facing the operator side) 4.17 Service information 04. 24-8: Dimension drawing of PP 012) ! Mounting additional control elements 1. Create the slide-in labels (see Fig. Prize the cap and the label holder off forwards with a screwdriver 2. illuminated switches 1.

8 Nm). 6. remove the defective contact maker from the fixture and press the new contact maker down into the fixture. 2004.  Siemens AG. observe the position of the locking lose. Loosen the cap nut on the pushbutton until the contact maker has almost been reached.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. Turn the pushbutton approx. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of the fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed).17 Service information Changing a contact maker 1. 5. torque 0. 4. Screw the cap nut tight (max.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Change the contact element. Insert the pushbutton into the opening and screw on the cap nut partially. 20° to the right or left. When doing so. 7. Press the pushbutton down until it rests on the contact maker. 3. remove it from the contact maker and remove the cap nut. 2.04 Edition 24-469 .

and jumper button socket 17-pin with repeater function and distributor box. 2*Kl. the components included are clearly identified by a list of optional extras. 2004.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. button caps 2*GR. downwards compatibility cannot always be assumed! Table 24-51 Delivery variants Pushbutton panel PP 012 PP 012 basic unit EMERGENCY STOP with 2 NC contacts + 1 NO contact. cover plate for 2nd override.1 Configurer Note When replacing the existing PP 031 devices with variants of the PP 012. two-channel enabling function 6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 5 – 1 A A 0 PP 012/S Special variant based on PP 012. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. with blank special film for slide-in labels with dimensional drawing. programming device and RS-232-C interfaces. keyswitch. 8 illuminated keys with incandescent lamps.04 24. 17-pin. 2*GB.18 Configuration 24. plus handheld device connection socket. feedrate override. 2*RT. two-channel enabling function 6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 7 – 1 A A 0 – Z 1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality. the components included are clearly identified by a list of optional extras 6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 6 – 0 A A 0 – Z PP 012H/S Special variant based on PP 012H.18. PCB direct control keys with ribbon cable 1) 6 F C 5 20 3 – 0 A F 2 X – X A A 0 6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 4 – 0 A A 0 PP 012H Same as basic device. 24-470  Siemens AG. 2* dummy plugs BVR22. observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1. “Pushbuttons/Colors” section.18 Configuration 04.04 Edition .

1 printing drawing A5E00122711A-A1 7 – 0 A A 0 Extensions for project-specific variants Slide-in labels as per customer layout Set of light emitting diodes (ultra-bright) Knob FS1 for WS1 Actuator and contact maker 1) according to Table 24-52 at customer request at customer request Key-operated authorization switch PCB_input/output with key matrix 1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality.  Siemens AG. 1 dummy plug.04.04 Edition 24-471 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. set of key caps. 2 sealing caps. “Pushbuttons / Colors” section.18 Configuration Extensions to the PP 012 (can be ordered and installed by the customer separately) Override switch. 2004.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1. 5 films. 16-level speed “+/–” keys raised PCB expansion card 12E/12A Extension panel with 12 slots 2x NC contacts for Emergency Stop buttons 6 6 6 6 3 6 F C 5 F C 5 F C 5 F C 5 S B 3 F C 5 2 2 2 2 4 2 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 0 0 4 7 – – – – – – 0 0 0 0 0 0 A A 3 A A 4 A A 4 A A 4 E A A 2 4 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 0 0 0 1 A A 1 A A 0 A A 0 A A 0 Spare parts kit PP 031-MC 5 covers. 1 illuminated key contact maker. 5 incandescent lamps with base.

S10 1 NC contact (internal).) S14. 2 NO contacts ext. 2 NO contact + 1 NC contact (external) For S1 1 NC contact (internal).5K28UB (blue) Butt Mounting location S1 . Section “Pushbuttons/Colors”.. For S1 1 NC contact (internal).... All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5K28UW (white) L5.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. S15 1 NC contact (int. 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact (external) For S14.).5K28UY (yellow) L5.5K28UW (white) L5.5K28UR (red) L5. S10 S14. S7.5K28UG (green) L5.).S10 1 NC contact (internal). 2 NO contacts (external) Lamp externally controllable For S1 1 NC contact (internal).) For S2.. S4 S7 . 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.. 2 NO contacts (ext.04 24. NC contact EMERp GENCY STOP Note When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality.... S15 1 NC contact int.S4. S15 Application ÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Pilot lamp Lamp I/RF reset Illuminated keys with fixture for T5.18 Configuration 04. 2 NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.5K28UY (yellow) L5.5K28UG (green) L5. S7..S10 1 NC contact (int. 2 NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext..5K Pushbutton 28 mm ∅ RXJT-GB (yellow) RXJT-GN (green) RXJT-RT (red) RXJT-BL (blue) RXJT-KL (transparent glass) Keyswitch Switching angle 900 2 positions keys..S4.5K28UR (red) L5..) Raised keys 6FC5 247-0AA41-0AA0 2 RTAO pushbuttons with plunger elongation Replaceable text insert strips BVR22 Knob FS1 2 AT2 Special design Designation field Dummy plug Selector switch Speed/ rapid traverse override Emergency stop S14 and S15 with base unit WS1 WS3 Re-equipping to knob-operated switch Connection to PCB PP 031R 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 Switching element: 2 g NC contacts 3SB3400-0E S13 Expans.5K/30 or spot LED L5. S15 1 NC contact (internal). glass) RXJN-WS (white) Pushbutton 28 mm ∅ RXJT-GB (yellow) RXJT-GN (green) RXJT-RT (red) RXJT-BL (blue) RXJT-KL (transparent glass) RXJT-GSW (black) Lampholder AL5 with incandescent lamp T5. 2 NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext. 24-472  Siemens AG.. 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact (external) For S14. observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1. 2004.04 Edition .2 Project-specific components Table 24-52 Function Control elements that can be retrofitted by the user Upper part Holder switching eleactuator/accessories ment/pilot lamp Lamp nipple 28 mm ∅ RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (transp.) For S1.S4.) For S.5K28UB (blue) Button contact maker AT2 S11 1 NC contact (internal). removable in both positions Safety lock cylinder 28 mm ∅ RXJSSA 15 E Illuminated key contactor ATL2 with incandescent lamp T5.18..5K/30 or spot LED L5.. S7..

18 Configuration 24.04.04 Edition 24-473 . 2004.04 24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. please quote all data on the rating plate to the local SIEMENS office responsible for your equipment.18. J  Siemens AG.3 Rating plates One of the following rating plates is attached to the components and modules: Components Example: A5E00112382 A/B F2 L3 6FC5 203-0AF24-0AA0 PP012 Place of manufacture Date of manufacture ID number Product version Order number Component name Key: F2 L3 A5E00112382 A/B/C/D 6FC5203-0AF24-0AA0 PP 012 Printed circuit boards Example: A5E00017606 A1 L2 F2 Key: A5E00017606 A1 L2 F2 ID number Product version Date of manufacture Place of manufacture In case of technical queries or service.

04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.18 Configuration 04.04 Notes 24-474  Siemens AG.24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24. 2004.

5 MPI connection Equipotential bonding terminal X10 O S3 N " 207.MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25 Validity The following description applies to the MPI Interface (order number 6FC5203-0AE00-0AA0) A customer operator panel can be connected via the MPI interface.3 Holes 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 64 digital inputs and 64 digital outputs with CMOS level (5) are available on the module for this purpose. 25-1 Front view of the MPI interface for customer operator panel  Siemens AG.6 7. 2004.04 Edition 25-475 . 25. S For mounting positions greater than 60 ° a fan must additionally be installed to keep the environmental conditions constantly below 55 °C.7 3.1 Interfaces Position of interfaces 289.2 Fig. 75 ° off vertical permissible.4 64. The mounting position is subject to the following restrictions: Brief description Installation S Mounting positions max.7 X20 X211 X221 X231 H3 H1 LEDs H4 H2 92.

25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25.5 kBaud data transmission rate X20 pin assignments for MPI X20 Pin 1/2 3 4 5 Name Not assigned RS_OPI RTSAS_BTSS 2M Type Pin 6 Name 2P5 Not assigned XRS_OPI RTSPG_BTSS Type VO B O VO 7 8 9 B I Signal names RS_BTSS. straight 200 m 1.1 Interfaces 04. 10 mm2) must not exceed 30 cm. XRS_BTSS RTSPG_BTSS RTSAS_BTSS 2M 2P5 Signal type B O VO I Bi-directional Output Voltage Output Input Differential RS485 data-OPI Request to Send PG OPI Request to Send AS OPI Ground signal. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Voltage Input shield connection 24 V potential 24 V ground MPI interface Connector designation: Connector type: Max.04 Edition .5 MBaud/187. isolated 25-476  Siemens AG. straight Type VI Signal names SHIELD P24 M24 Signal type VI Note The maximum length of the equipotential bonding connection (stranded cable. 2004.04 Power supply interface Connector designation: Connector type: Table 25-1 X10 pin assignments X10 Pin 1 2 3 Name SHIELD M24 P24 X10 3-pin Phoenix terminal block. cable length: Special features: Table 25-2 X20 9-pin Sub-D socket connector. isolated +5 V.

X221 (2 x 32-pin) X231 (2 x 10-pin) Ribbon cable connector DIN 41651 0. X231) can be loaded with a maximum current of 0. cable length: Potential pins: X211. This value stands for the total of all currents flowing over these interfaces. S The maximum current per output is limited to 5 mA.04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Interfaces Digital inputs/ outputs with C-MOS level (5V) Connector designation: Connector type: Max. X221.04 Edition 25-477 .04 25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25. S 64 outputs may drive a maximum current of 200 mA. 2004.5 m The inputs/outputs (interfaces X211.2 A via the internal 5 V power supply of the MPI interface module. X221 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Name OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT 10 OUT 11 OUT 12 OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 15 M (GND) IN 0 IN 8 IN 1 IN 9 IN 2 IN 10 IN 3 IN 11 IN 4 M (GND) IN 5 IN 12 IN 6 IN 13 IN 7 I V I V O Type Pin 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Name IN 14 P5 IN 15 IN 16 IN 24 IN 17 IN 25 IN 18 IN 26 IN 19 IN 27 IN 20 M (GND) IN 21 IN 28 IN 22 IN 29 IN 23 IN 30 P5 IN 31 Not assigned M (GND) OUT 16 OUT 17 OUT 18 OUT 19 OUT 20 OUT 21 OUT 22 OUT 23 Not assigned O V V I V I I V I Type I V  Siemens AG.

1 Interfaces 04. 25-478  Siemens AG. The outputs are not short-circuit-proof.04 Edition .25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Applying a higher voltage to the inputs will destroy them.04 X211 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Name Not assigned OUT 47 OUT 46 OUT 45 OUT 44 OUT 43 OUT 42 OUT 41 OUT 40 M (GND) Not assigned IN 63 P5 IN 62 IN 55 IN 61 IN 54 IN 60 IN 53 M (GND) IN 52 IN 59 IN 51 IN 58 IN 50 IN 57 IN 49 IN 56 IN 48 IN 47 P5 IN 46 V I I V I I V V O Type Pin 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Name IN 39 IN 45 IN 38 IN 44 IN 37 M (GND) IN 36 IN 43 IN 35 IN 42 IN 34 IN 41 IN 33 IN 40 IN 32 M (GND) OUT 39 OUT 38 OUT 37 OUT 36 OUT 35 OUT 34 OUT 33 OUT 32 OUT 31 OUT 30 OUT 29 OUT 28 OUT 27 OUT 26 OUT 25 OUT 24 O V I V I Type Note The inputs/outputs are assigned CMOS level (5 V). 2004.

H4: H3: POWER: 24V supply H1: Not used H4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission H2: Not used  Siemens AG. IN 0 to 63: 5 V ––> Status FALSE read from PLC 0 V ––> Status TRUE read from PLC LEDs LED H1. IN 0 – IN 63: CMOS inputs with 5V level Note OUT 0 to OUT 47: are switched over at cyclic intervals between 5 V and 0 V level after POWER ON. OUT 48 to OUT 63: are set to 5 V level after POWER ON (connection and triggering of relay possible). 63 P5 M Signal type O I V Output Input Voltage Outputs Inputs 5 V power supply 0V Signal Description OUT 0 – OUT 63: Output signals with C-MOS level 5V max.04 Edition 25-479 . 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. these outputs can be triggered via the PLC..04 25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25.1 Interfaces X231 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9/10 Name OUT 48 OUT 49 OUT 50 OUT 51 OUT 52 OUT 53 OUT 54 OUT 55 M (GND) V O Type Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19/20 Name OUT 56 OUT 57 OUT 58 OUT 59 OUT 60 OUT 61 OUT 62 OUT 63 P5 V O Type Signal names OUT 0 .04.. After booting of the control. 5mA.. these outputs can be triggered via the PLC.. .63 IN 0 . After booting of the control.

default settings of S3 for 810D 3 on 4 off 5 on 6 on 7 off 8 on Meaning: – Baud rate: 187. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 kbaud – Transmission cycle time: 100 ms – Bus address: 6 – MPI interface to customer operator panel 25-480  Siemens AG.25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25.04 Edition . 25-1): Assignments of S3 on MPI interface for customer operator panel 6 5 4 3 2 1 Baud rate on off 1.2 Settings 04.5 kbaud Transmission cycle time off on off on off off 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms Bus address Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms Meaning Jumpering Table 25-3 8 7 on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on on off on on off off on on off off on off off 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPI interface to customer operator panel standard hardware The following default settings are suggested: Table 25-4 1 on 2 off MPI interface for customer operator panel.5 Mbaud – Transmission cycle time: 100 ms – Bus address: 6 – MPI interface to customer operator panel Table 25-4 1 off 2 off MPI interface for customer operator panel. 2004.5 Mbaud 187.04 25.2 Settings The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. default settings of S3 for 840D 3 on 4 off 5 on 6 on 7 off 8 on Meaning: – Baud rate: 1.

The receipt monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.04 25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25.2 Settings Settings for transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the interface module at least every 500 msecs. The S3 switches (2 and 3) are used to set this cycle time. Settings for receipt cycle time The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. If no key is pressed. the load on the PLC caused by the interface module can be adjusted. In this way. but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program.  Siemens AG. Other addresses can be selected. the interface module sends message frames to the PLC at cyclic intervals.04. Bus address The bus address for 840D must be set to “6”.04 Edition 25-481 .

6 ms.. 5 W III. 60 °C max. PELV acc.075 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 9. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 Width: 293 mm Height: 92 mm Depth: 15 mm 24 V DC Max. 0. 30 ms..04 Edition .. 55 °C max. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 80 % max. 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.. 2004.3 Technical data 04.. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721-3-3 3K5 0 ..3 Technical data Table 25-5 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.04 25.25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25. 10 K/h 5 .1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 . to EN 50178 IP00 CE / cULus Technical data of MPI interface for customer operator panel approx.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 50 m/s2.5 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3.. 18 K/h 5 .. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 95 % J 25-482  Siemens AG.8 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 300 m/s2.

19” Machine Control Panel 26 Properties Order number Validity The following description applies to the machine control panels: Designation 19” machine control panel 19” machine control panel. 26-1 View (example: machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0. membrane Machine control panel (MCP) Key variant.04 Edition 26-483 . mounted with tension jacks 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0 26. screw mounted 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 Membrane variant. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. milling version)  Siemens AG.5 MBd Baud rate for SINUMERIK FM-NC: 187. no electrical isolation) S Voltage monitor S Temperature monitor S Watch dog timer S Isolated operator panel front interface (MPI) Baud rate for SINUMERIK 840D/810D: 1.1 Function blocks S Microcontroller S Program memory S Data memory S 64 inputs/48 outputs (5 V. screw mounted Membrane variant.5 kbaud Fig. 2004.

04 Edition .04 26. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. temperature. watchdog Program memory Data memory 5V 24 V 1P5 5V DC/DC converter Terminal block P24 Fig.2 Block diagram LEDs 48 outputs Keyboard 64 inputs Isolated MPI X20 Controller Serial I/O controller 9 5 6 1 9-pin Sub-D socket connector 2P5 X10 Monitoring: voltage. 26-2 Block diagram of machine control panel 26-484  Siemens AG.2 Block diagram 04.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26. 2004.

1 Control elements and interfaces Control elements Front view Position of control elements T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3 X T4 [.04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.  Siemens AG.] 10 1 T7 100 T10 1000 10000 T13 T14 T15 R13 T11 T12 T8 T9 T5 T6 R4 +C R5 R6 –Z R7 +Z R8 R9 –C –X R10 –Y R11 R14 R12 WCS MCS R15 % % Fig.3 26. 26-4 Machine control panel for turning machine (T version) The machine control panel operates on 5 VDC.3. 26-3 Machine control panel for milling machine (M-version) Designation of operating elements A: EMERGENCY STOP key B: Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm) C: Reset button D: Program control E: Operating modes.] 10 1 T7 100 T10 1000 10000 T13 T14 T15 T11 T12 T8 T9 T5 T6 R4 Y R5 Z R6 4 R7 5 R8 6 R9 7 8 R10 R13 9 R11 R14 R12 WCS MCS R15 % % – + A B C D I F G H I J Fig. machine functions F: User keys (T1 to T15) G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) H: Spindle control I: Feed control J: Keyswitch (four positions) T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3 +Y +X T4 [. 2004.04.3 Control elements and interfaces 26.04 Edition 26-485 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

04 Overview operating elements S 64 inputs (30 keys. 26-5 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Mounting slots for control devices Warning The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. life is at risk. if 1. assigned to the keys) All keys are scanned individually. i. all keys can be pressed simultaneously. 26-4) must not be chipped out. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. keyswitch with four positions) S 48 outputs (LEDs.3 Control elements and interfaces 04. Description of control elements EMERGENCY STOP button (A) Press the red button in emergency situations. Machine Manufacturer For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP: Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer! Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button 2 Emergency stop button 4 1 Terminal 3 3 4 2 Connect cable to button 1 EMERGENCY STOP machine control Fig.04 Edition . 2004. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged. but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!). 26-486  Siemens AG. An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner.e.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26. 2 rotary selector switches. 2.

26-6 Operator panel front interface (MPI) X20 Switch S3 EMERGENCY STOP key Position of interfaces on rear side of machine control panel Overview interfaces S X20: Operator panel front interface (MPI) Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip...3 Control elements and interfaces 26.4 1 2 3 4 X20 ON ” S3 3 4 1 2 X10 Power supply interface X10 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 26-487 . straight S S3: DIL switch (8-way) For setting of baud rate see: Section 26.. NCU 570 Manual /PHD/. 2004.. straight S X10: Power supply interface Phoenix terminal block: 3-pin.2 Interfaces Position of interfaces Rear view of machine control panel Connection for equipotential bonding conductor LED1. NCU 571-573 Manual S LEDs 1.3.4 “Jumpering” References: /PHF/.04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.4: LED1: Not used LED2: Not used LED3: POWER: 24 V supply LED4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission  Siemens AG.04.

isolated Power supply interface Connector designation: Connector type: Table 26-2 Pin 1 2 3 X10 pin assignments Name P24 M24 SHIELD X10 3-pin Phoenix terminal block Meaning Type V (Supply voltage) 24 V potential Ground 24 V Shield connection 26-488  Siemens AG. cable length: Special features: Table 26-1 X20 9-pin Sub-D socket connector.04 Operator panel front interface (MPI) Connector designation: Connector type: Max. straight 200 m 1.04 Edition .5 kBaud data transmission rate X20 pin assignments for machine control panel X20 Pin 1/2 3 4 5 Name Not assigned RS_OPI RTSAS_BTSS 2M Type Pin 6 Name 2P5 Not assigned XRS_OPI RTSPG_BTSS Type VO B O VO 7 8 9 B I Signal names RS_BTSS. isolated +5 V.3 Control elements and interfaces 04. XRS_BTSS RTSPG_BTSS RTSAS_BTSS 2M 2P5 Signal type B O VO I Bi-directional Output Voltage Output Input Differential RS485 data-OPI Request to Send PG OPI Request to Send AS OPI Ground signal.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 MBaud/187.

DIN 125 washer (plain) Mounting position max.04.6 125 0 8.3.04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26. 2004.8 +0.  Siemens AG.1) Dimension drawing of machine control panel (version 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 / 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0) Fig.04 Edition ÉÉÉÉÇÇ ÇÉ Ç ÇÇÇ ÇÉ 26-489 ÉÉÉÉÉÇ É ÇÇ Ç ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉ 2) Detail M4 welding stud without flange .2 4) 8. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 155 146. 26-7 Note For mounting positions greater than 60 ° a fan must additionally be installed to keep the environmental conditions of the machine control panel constantly below 55 °C.4 473. connection and settings of machine control panel Dimension drawing 4.5 4) Front installation Mounting level Rear installation 42 3) Front 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Required clearance M4 retaining screw.8 0 241.4 Mounting. 75 ° to the vertical (see note) M5 grounding connector Installation locations for control devices (see Figure 26-3 and warning in Subsection 26. connection and settings of machine control panel 26.6 482.2 357.8 5) 500 1) > 60 46.4 Mounting.

7+0.7 –0.2 0 7. 2004.6 0.5 1. connection and settings of machine control panel 04. Screw fastening Panel cutout for operator panel front 3) 137.4.2 0.04 26. 26-8 348.1 464.5 0 Panel cutout of machine control panel 116.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.5 4. Locking elements are recommended in order to avoid damage to the surface.2 232.2 1.0/100 2) 1) Recommended for rear mounting only 2) DIN ISO 1101 3) Distance when mounting the machine control panel and operator panel: w18 Fig.5 .4"0.8 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.4 0.4 Mounting.3 or M4 R1.2 Dimensions in mm Panel cutout for machine control panels 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 and 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0 26-490  Siemens AG.5 457.51) 7.04 Edition +0.1 Mounting The machine control panels 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 are attached using 10 M4 x 10 screws.7–0.2 129.

The equipotential bonding conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 Connections The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machine control panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig.04. 26-6) and fixed with a screw. The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using an MPI bus cable via the interface (X4) or the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The MPI connector is plugged into X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see Fig.2 155 Cutout symmetrical panel symmetrical to operator panel 137.8 103. connection and settings of machine control panel Tension jack fastening Installation surface 1. 2004. Operator panel Clip 1.5 Nm Fig.4.2 123.4 Mounting.04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.04 Edition 26-491 .5 to 6 thick The machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0 is attached using tension jacks (see Fig.3 34.6 max. 26-9 Panel cutout for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0 26.6 + 1 35 482. torque 0.5 155. 26-6).5 34.5 to 6 132.5 451+1 132. Connecting the 24V power supply Connecting the MPI connection (X20)  Siemens AG. 26-9).

connection and settings of machine control panel 04. 26-492  Siemens AG. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed.4 Mounting.4.5 Mbaud off 187.5 kbaud off on on off off off Transmission cycle time 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms Bus address 15 14 on 13 12 11 10 off 9 8 7 6 on off off 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPI interface to customer operator panel Standard hardware Reception monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms Meaning / value Jumpering on on off on off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on on off on off off on off on The following default settings are suggested: Table 26-4 8 7 6 Default settings S3 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning 1. 2004.04 Edition . This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel to be adjusted. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 26.3 Machine control panel settings The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 26-6): Table 26-3 8 7 6 S3 jumpering on machine control panel 5 4 3 2 1 Baud rate on 1.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.5 Mbaud 100 ms 6 Standard hardware off off on on off on off Baud rate: Transmission cycle time: on Bus address: Settings for transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least every 500 msecs.

4 Mounting.04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.  Siemens AG. Any other setting will be ignored by the software. connection and settings of machine control panel Settings for receipt cycle time The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3). Bus address The bus address must be set to the value 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 26-493 . 2004.04.

5 Setting the interface parameters Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via the MPI interface.2.1 1.1 3. Machine control panel 1. Machine control panel 2. Machine control panel 4. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Machine control panel Send AS 314 (PLC) Receive Fig..1.1 – 4.1 2.1.1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 – 2.5 Setting the interface parameters 04.1.2.1:1 – 4.2.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.1.2. Machine control panel 2.2.1 – 1. the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration must be activated.1 3.1 1. Machine control panel 5.1. Table 26-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machine control panel Sequence for configuring purposes Preset GD parameters Receive Transmit Reserved 5.1.1 – 3. 2004..1 – 2. Machine control panel 5. .1.1 – 5.1 4.1 MPI address 0.1. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings using DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table.2.1 Reserved 4.1 – 3.1 5. 26-10 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel 26-494  Siemens AG.2.1 2.2. Machine control panel 3.04 26.2.1 – 5.1.2.04 Edition .1 1. Machine control panel 4.1 – 1.. Machine control panel 3.2. Machine control panel 1. Machine control panel 1.1 – 1.

. 0. 55 °C (mech) max.. 10 K/h 5 . 2004. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE / cULus Rear side IP00 Technical data for machine control panel Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.04 Edition 26-495 . dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. to SN 47030..5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 150 m/s2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 45 °C (to front) 0 . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 24 V DC 5W III. 80 % max.6 Technical data Table 26-6 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 11 ms. acc.. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Basic color of casing Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 88.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19. 60 °C (membrane) –25 .. Color code: 614 Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.6 Technical data 26. 11 ms.04. max.04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26... 95 %  Siemens AG....81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 150 m/s2.5 kg Anthracite.5 mm Mounting depth: 46. PELV acc. 55 °C (to rear) max.5 mm approx. 0...1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 . 18 K/h 5 . Part 2.

04 26. 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0: Table 26-10 Key set for machine control panels above Number 10 Description Set of keys for keyswitch consisting of 10 x set of 3 577 213 Order number 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 26-496  Siemens AG. 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0 Order number 6FC5248-0AF22-0AA0 Number 3 Description 3 A4 films.04 Edition . 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 the following sets of key cover labels are available: Table 26-7 Key caps for machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 Order number 6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0 Number 16 90 20 20 20 20 Description Transparent. 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0: Table 26-9 Rotary switch for machine control panel Number 2 Description One rotary switch each for axis and spindle override with rotary knobs and covers Order number 6FC5247-0AA21-0AA0 Set of keys The following key sets are available for machine control panel numbers 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0. 2004. membrane keys for labeling with laser printer Rotary switch for machine control panel The following rotary switches are available for machine control panel numbers 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.7 Spare parts 04.7 Spare parts Key covers and slide-in labels For machine control panel no. with stickers ergo-gray red green yellow mid-gray 6FC5148-0AA13-0AA0 The following slide-in labels are available for machine control panel numbers 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0: Table 26-8 Slide-in labels for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

05 15.7.05 46. A4 format for laser printers with clear window for LEDs. no lines or text J  Siemens AG. 26-11 can be ordered under the number 6FC5 248-0AF22-0AA0 and printed with user-specific labels.5 35 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 14 11 1) 14 14 2) 115 15 190 1) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0. 2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.. 2) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0 Fig.8 15..04 26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.05 15.7 Spare parts 26.05 15.04.5 15.05 15.05 15. 2004. .1 Slide-in label film The slide-in label film shown in Fig. 26-11 Slide-in labels for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0.32 32 Distance from side margin 5 15.04 Edition 26-497 .

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .04 Notes 26-498  Siemens AG. 2004.26 19” Machine Control Panel 26.7 Spare parts 04.

04 Edition 27-499 . ACPI function only with USB cable (T26139-Y3812-V1) S Operating systems: Windows 3. depending on the cable used Power On function only with PS/2 cable. This professional keyboard has a striking. depending on the connecting cable. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. For greater ease of use it includes five additional function keys for one-stroke launch of applications. S26381-K340-V110) incl. 104/105 key layout S System compatibility: PS/2 and USB S Interface: PS/2 or USB. up to 6 characters assignable to one key Features S MF-II compatible. 27-1 View of standard PC keyboard MF-II Brief description The standard PC keyboard MF-II combines USB and PST technologies. not intended for permanent use. S Compact design with low profile. Only for use in installation and servicing  Siemens AG.11/95/NT/XP S Restricted suitability for industrial use.Standard PC Keyboard MF-II 27 Order number 6FC5203-0AC01-0AA0 Validity This description applies to the following components: Component SINUMERIK 810D/840D/840C Standard PC keyboard (MF-II) incl. The detachable trackball rest offers ergonomic operation and can simply be removed if space is at a premium. modern design and useful extra features. 2m PS/2 cable (KBPC PX/US. These features make the standard PC keyboard MF-II the ideal choice for professional use. 2004. detachable trackball rest Fig. ergonomic keys.

.04 Technical data Table 27-1 Input voltage Power consumption Degree of protection to DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529) Humidity classification in accordance with DIN EN 60721–3–3 Permissible ambient temperature Weight Width Dimensions Without trackball rest With trackball rest 472 mm 472 mm IEC 60959. UL 1950 ISO 9241–4/EN 29241–4 CE certification in accordance with EU Directives 89/336/EEC (EN 55022/B) EN 55024 EN 61000–3–2 EN 61000–3–3 Technical data for the standard PC keyboard MF-II + 5V DC Max. 1 kg Height 36 mm 36 mm Depth 175 mm 248 mm Operation 15 ... All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3 W IP20 Class 3K5 condensation and icing excluded. 2004.27 Standard PC Keyboard MF-II 04.. Low air temperature 0 °C Storage and transportation –20 . 50 °C Approx. 0. 32 °C Product security Ergonomics Electromagnetic compatibility J 27-500  Siemens AG.04 Edition .

1  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Fig. 28-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 483C Design S Keys – 78 mechanical keys in standard/US QUERTY layout S Keygroups – – – – Alpha keygroup with special characters Numerical keygroup with special characters Cursor keygroup NC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of operating area S Connections – USB 1. It is supplied with a USB cable (1.1 Brief description The CNC full keyboard KB 483C is an operating component of the CNCs SINUMERIK 810D. It is fitted with short-stroke keys. the key caps cannot be transposed.CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28 Key type mechanical Order number 6FC5203-0AF20-0AA0 Validity The following description applies to the component: Designation CNC full keyboard KB 483C 28.e. The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified.5 m) and tension jacks for mounting. 2004. i. 840Di and 840D.04 Edition 28-501 .

2 10. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 483C 28-502  Siemens AG. 28-2 PE connection screw terminal Front. 2004.2 Dimension drawings 482.28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28.5 X302 Dimensions in mm Fig.5 447.04 28.2 Dimension drawings 04.5 " 0.2 " 0.04 Edition .8 132.6 USB cable included in the scope of supply Cable clamp PE connection M5 screw terminal 20.5 110.

The keyboard does not support Suspend mode or a Remote Wakeup function. When a key is actuated. the appropriate code is read from the table and sent to the PCU. 1.04 Edition 28-503 .04 28.04.3 28. 28-1 The key codes assigned to the relevant node in the matrix are stored in the keyboard table. Keyboard level Key function on standard PC keyboard q w e r t y u i o p a s d f g h j k l z x c SHIFT Shift key USB code 14 1a 08 15 17 1c 18 0c 12 13 04 16 07 09 0a 0b 0d 0e 0f 1d 1b 06 q w e r t y u i o p a s d f g h j k l z x c Q W I R T Y U I O M A S D F G H J K L Z X C  Siemens AG.1 Control elements and interfaces Control elements see Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Keyboard level Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard q w e r t y u i o p a s d f g h j k l z x c No shift key Shift key USB code 14 1a 08 15 17 1c 18 0c 12 13 04 16 07 09 0a 0b 0d 0e 0f 1d 1b 06 Labeling 2.3 28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C Control elements and interfaces 28. 2004.3. no key code is transmitted when the Shift key alone is pressed. Key assignments Keyboard codes Note In contrast to standard USB keyboards.

/ = + BACKSPACE DEL INSERT INPUT TAB ALARM CANCEL HELP CHANNEL MACHINE PROGRAM MANAGER PROGRAM V B N M (GND) ” ~ Shift key BACKSPACE Shift DEL Shift INSERT Shift RETURN TAB LEFT SHIFT 35 2a 4c 49 28 2b 28-504  Siemens AG.04 1. 2004.28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28.3 Control elements and interfaces 04. . Keyboard level Key function on standard PC keyboard v b n m ” None { } | < : ~ ! @ # $ % ^& & * ( ) SHIFT SHIFT Shift key USB code 19 05 11 10 34 35 2f 30 31 36 33 35 1e 1f 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2d > ? 37 38 v b n m ’ * [ ] \ . . Blank space 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 – . Blank space 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 –(NB) . Keyboard level Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard v b n m ’ * [ ] \ . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . / = + BACKSPACE DEL INSERT RETURN TAB RIGHT ESC F12 F11 Shift F11 7 (NB) No shift key 1 (NB) 59 SHIFT No shift key SHIFT No shift key y Shift key USB code 19 05 11 10 34 25 2f 30 31 36 33 2c 1e 1f 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 56 37 38 2e 57 2a 4c 49 28 2b 29 45 44 44 5F Not assigned { } | < : +/– ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ > ? Not assigned ~ BACKSPACE DEL INSERT INPUT TAB Labeling 2.

5 m in length (recommended: 1.5 m) is supported.3.2 Interfaces The interface (see Fig. the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of supplying a 500 mA current. Keyboard level Key function on standard PC keyboard Shift key USB code ALARM OFFSET CUSTOM NEXT WINDOW END PAGE UP PAGE DOWN SELECT CURSOR UP CURSOR DOWN CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR LEFT CTRL ALT SHIFT Shift Home Shift END SHIFT 4a 4d 4b 4e Shift Cursor up Shift Cursor down Shift Cursor right Shift Cursor left SHIFT 52 51 4f 50 Cursor left Control Alt No USB key code is transferred if the SHIFT key is pressed on its own 28. A standard USB cable of max. 28-2) is designed as a ”high powered interface” (5 V/500 mA). Connector designation: Connector type: X302 USB-B connector.3 28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C Control elements and interfaces 1.04 28. 2004. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions”  Siemens AG. 4-pin USB upstream port X 302 For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” chapter.04 Edition 28-505 . Keyboard level Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard 9 (NB) 3 (NB) Shift F12 Home END Page up Page Down 5 (NB) Cursor up Cursor down Cursor right No shift key No shift key SHIFT Shift key USB code 61 5b 45 4a 4d 4b 4e 5d 52 51 4f 50 CONTROL ALT Not assigned NEXT WINDOW END PAGE UP PAGE DOWN Not assigned CURSOR UP CURSOR DOWN CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR LEFT Not assigned g Labeling 2.04. As a result. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

04 28. 28-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 483C (plate thickness 1.5 . 28-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 483C 28-506  Siemens AG.6.5+1 Detail: Mounting of tension jacks Torque: 0. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28.4 Mounting 04.8 Nm Mounting frame Dimensions in mm Fig. 2004.0 mm) Dimension drawing for mounting Rear view with tension jacks rear view with tension jacks 112.04 Edition .4 Mounting Panel cutout 450+1 Dimensions in mm Fig.

04 28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28. 2004.04. length 20 mm Order number 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0  Siemens AG.5 Spare parts and accessories Mounting position Mounting position max. 60 _ to the vertical Front Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 28-507 .5 mm profile. 28-5 Mounting position 28.5 Spare parts and accessories Set of tension jacks Table 28-1 Set of tension jacks for CNC full keyboard KB 483C Number Set of 9 Description Tension jack set for supplementary components with 2.

) Power consumption. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Medium Basic 701 Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0. 1. 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz ± 2.28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28. 95 % J 28-508  Siemens AG.. 1 kHz / 0. 11 ms.. Pantone Yellow Light Basic 700... 80 % AM. 5 kHz 10 V.2 mm 4.4 W ” Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV 10 V/m.5 kV. 11 ms... water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . 45 °C (to front) 0 ..6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 150 m/s2... 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Width: 483 mm Height: 133 mm Depth: p Mounting depth: approx. PELV acc..15 – 80 MHz III..04 28.3 kg 5 m (recommended: 1. 2004. 80 % max. 80% AM. 18 K/h 5 . 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. / current (typ. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Max.6 Technical data 04. to EN 50178 / CE Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00 Sealing to cabicabi net: IP65 Technical data for CNC full keyboard KB 483C Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. max.. 55 °C max. 5/50 ns.75.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19. distance from PCU Basic color of casing Key colors Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Anthracite 614 Pastel Turquoise RAL 6034. dusts and oils Shipping (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 .81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 150 m/s2. . 0.1 % /min by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.. 10 K/h 5 .25 V / 80 mA 0.6 Technical data Table 28-2 Safety Protective class / Approvals Degree of protection according to EN 60529 (IEC 60529) Noise immunity ESD HF radio Burst (on USB cable) HF conducted ” Electrical data Supply volt. 5.04 Edition . 55 °C (to rear) max.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.5 m) 31 mm 20.

It is fitted with short-stroke keys. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 29-509 .5 m) and tension jacks for mounting. 29-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 310C Design Keys S Standard/US QWERTY layout S 75 mechanical keys  Siemens AG. The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified.CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29 Keyboard mechanical Order number 6FC5203-0AF21-0AA0 Validity The following description applies to the component: Designation CNC full keyboard KB 310C 29. i.e. the key caps cannot be transposed. 2004. Fig. It is supplied with a USB cable (1.1 Brief description The CNC full keyboard KB 310C is an operating component of the CNCs SINUMERIK 810D. 840Di and 840D.

04 Arrangement S Alpha keygroup with special characters S Numerical keygroup with special characters S Cursor keygroup S NC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of operating area Connections S USB 1.1 29. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2 Dimension drawings 310 Dimensions in mm 31 20 Mounting brackets 153 PE terminals Fig.04 Edition .29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29. side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 310C 29-510  Siemens AG.2 Dimension drawings 04. 29-2 175 X302 – USB-B Cable clamp for USB-cable Front. 2004.

A standard USB cable of max.5 m) is supported.1 Control elements and interfaces Control elements see Fig.04 29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29.3.3 29. 4-pin USB upstream port X 302 For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” chapter.3. As a result. 2004.3 Control elements and interfaces 29. the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of supplying a 500 mA current. Subsection “Secondary Electrical Conditions”  Siemens AG. 29-2) is designed as a “high powered interface” (5 V/500 mA). Connector designation: Connector type: X302 USB-B connector.04.04 Edition 29-511 .2 Interfaces The interface (see Fig. “Control elements” section Key assignments Keyboard codes 29. 29-1 see “CNC Full Keyboard 483C”. 5 m in length (recommended: 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

4 Mounting Note When mounting.4 Mounting 04.0 mm) 29-512  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Panel cutout 285+1 Fig.04 Edition . 29-3 155+1 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 310C (plate thickness 1. 2004.5 – 6. install and secure the USB connecting cable properly to ensure that it cannot chafe against the frame of the keyboard.29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29.04 29.

04.04 29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29.4 Mounting Dimension drawing for mounting Detail: Mounting of tension jacks Torque: 0. 29-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 310C Mounting position Mounting position max. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 60 _ to the vertical Front Fig. 29-5 Mounting position  Siemens AG.04 Edition 29-513 .8 Nm Dimensions in mm Fig. 2004.

5 Technical data 04.. 80 % AM..5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9. 45 °C (to front) 0 .. 0..75.5 m) 31 mm 20 mm 4. Pantone Yellow Light Basic 700.15 – 80 MHz Front: IP54 III. 80 % max. 95 % 29-514  Siemens AG.. 55 °C (to rear) max.29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29.04 Edition . 11 ms. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 10 K/h 5 .04 29. / urrent. 5 kHz 10 V.6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 150 m/s2. 5/50 ns.81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 150 m/s2.. 0. max.5 kV.. Medium Basic 701 Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.. 1 kHz / 0. 2004.9 kg 5 m (recommended: 1. distance from PCU Basic color of casing Key colors Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Anthracite 614 Pastel Turquoise RAL 6034. Power consumption. typ.5 Technical data Table 29-1 Safety Protective class / Approvals Degree of p g protection according to EN 60529 Noise immunity ESD HF radio Burst (on USB cable) HF conducted “ Electrical data Supply volt.015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19.1 % /min Shipping (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 .4 W ” Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV 10 V/m. 60 °C max. 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz ± 2. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 80% AM. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 .. PELV acc.. 11 ms.. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3. 18 K/h 5 . . 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: p Mounting depth: approx. Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Max.. 5..25 V / 80 mA 0. to EN 50178 / CE Rear side: IP00 Sealing to cabig net: IP65 Technical data for CNC full keyboard KB 310C Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.

04 Edition 29-515 .6 Spare parts and accessories Set of tension jacks Table 29-2 Set of tension jacks for CNC full keyboard KB 310C Number Set of 9 Description Tension jack set for supplementary components with 2. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 mm profile.6 Spare parts and accessories 29.04.04 29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29. length 20 mm Order number 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 J  Siemens AG. 2004.

04 Notes 29-516  Siemens AG.29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.6 Spare parts and accessories 04. 2004.04 Edition .

straight max. 2.1 Interfaces Connector designation: Connector type: Cable length to PCU: X111 Mini DIN connector 6-pin.5 m PS2 keyboard interface to PCU (X111)  Siemens AG. 30-1 Front view of CNC full keyboard OP 032S 30. 2004.CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30 Order No. 6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0 Validity The following description applies to the component: OP 032S CNC full keyboard Features S Standard/US QWERTY layout S 74 mechanical keys S Alpha keygroup with special characters S Numerical keygroup with special characters S Cursor keygroup S NC function keys Fig.04 Edition 30-517 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

5 7 (4 times) 0.7 6. 2004.5 0 5 136. dimension drawing and panel cutout 0 13. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.4 Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: W x H = 301.5 7. 30-2 Dimension drawing of CNC full keyboard OP 032S M4 (6 times) 1) 158 153 145.6 309.5 6 0 Fig.4 277.2 Mounting instructions.5 154.30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30.8 175 169 162.4 x 153 mm 1) Riveted. dimension drawing and panel cutout 04. press-fit nut M4 or threaded hole M4 Fig.04 30.7 295. 30-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard OP 032S (rear view) 30-518  Siemens AG.4 12.04 Edition .7 0 4.5 273 279.2 Mounting instructions.

. .3 Technical data 30. 1. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.04.25 V / 80 mA 0.4 W ” Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV 10 V/m. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . 80 % max.75.. 1 kHz / 0. 80% AM.04 Edition 30-519 .. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 11 ms.. 2004.5 kV. 11 ms. 10 K/h 5 .. 5.3 Technical data Table 30-1 Safety Protective class / approvals Degree of p g protection according to EN 60529 Noise immunity ESD HF radio Burst (on USB cable) HF conducted ” Electrical data Supply volt.1 % /min Shipping (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –25 . 55 °C (to rear) max.. typ. 80 % AM. 18 K/h 5 . Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Operation 10 – 58 Hz: 0.6 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3 150 m/s2.. 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3 Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm approx. PELV acc.81 m/s2 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 150 m/s2. 45 °C (to front) 0 .. Power consumption.. to EN 50178 / CE Front: IP54 Rear side: IP20 Technical data for CNC full keyboard OP 032S Shock stressing Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.. 5 kHz 10 V. 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz ± 2. 18 shocks 2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2 Depth: 24 mm 4. 5/50 ns. 0.3 kg Shipping (in packaging) 5 – 9 Hz: 3..015 mm 58 – 200 Hz: 19. / current.. 95 %  Siemens AG. 55 °C max. max.5 mm 9 – 200 Hz: 9.04 30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30..15 – 80 MHz III.

4 Spare parts and accessories 04.04 Edition .4 Spare parts and accessories Table 30-2 Designation Retaining screws Key covers Spare parts and accessories Remarks 100 jacks 1 set Order number 6FC3998-7BJ10 6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0 J 30-520  Siemens AG. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 30.30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30.

31-1 Front view 48. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.3. Dimension drawings 145 50 Fig. 31-2 Side view (right)  Siemens AG. 2004.6 185 Ribbon cable socket connector Fig.5” floppy disk drive including connecting cables for connection to the PCU 20/50/70 (length: max.5” Floppy Disk Drive 31 Validity The following description applies to the SINUMERIK 3.5” floppy disk drive (order number 6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1) Function The AT-compatible floppy disk drive with lockable front door is used to read and write data from/to 3. Function block 3. 0.5 m). It can be installed in a customer operator panel front.5” disks.04 Edition 31-521 .

31-3 Top view M3 fixing screw Max. 31-4 Rear view X121 (power supply interface) Power supply interface X121: Table 31-1 3-pin terminal block Pin assignments for power supply X1 Pin 1 2 3 Name P24 external M external PE Meaning +24 V DC Ground Protective conductor VI (Voltage Input) Type 31-522  Siemens AG.04 1 2 3 185 17 Fig. 2004.5” Floppy Disk Drive 04.31 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition . depth of engagement: 4 mm Ribbon cable socket connector (34-pin) Shield connection M4 Ground terminal X111 (not assigned) Fig.

5 31-523 .04. 31-2 and 31-3) + 20 mm clearance for cable outlet Fig.4+0.8 6 3.1 Ø5 8.04 31 3. 31-5 Dimension drawing for drive mounting Caution The disk drive can be mounted in any position except upside down. 31-6 Dimension drawing of blanking plate  Siemens AG.6 42 112 R3 25 32 38.6–0.5 144.1 SIEMENS 11) 5.1 Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 R1.2 44. Dimension drawing blanking plate A 49.5” Floppy Disk Drive Installation instructions Panel cutout 133.2 138.04 Edition ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ 0 5.5–0.5 B 139.B 7 10 degrees _______ 1) all around 5.5 2.5 3.9–0.5 3 0 0 3 Section A . depth of engagement: 4 mm 118 130 Mounting depth (calculated from surface of mounting panel): 185 mm depth dimension (see Figs.2 Ø2. 2004.7 M3 fixing screw Max.5–0.

5g 101 – 200 Hz: 1.. 0.5g Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Depth: 202 mm Mounting depth:185 mm approx.1 % /min Transportation/storage (in packaging) EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 . 10 K/h 5 . 18 K/h 5 . 0. 55 °C max.0g 201 – 600 Hz: 0. 95 % J 31-524  Siemens AG.5 m 24 V DC Max... 0...5” Floppy Disk Drive 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition ... 60 °C max. PELV acc. 80 % max.. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE Rear side IP00 Technical data for floppy disk drive Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation. 2004. 5 W III. dusts and oils Operation Relevant standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits Permissible change in the relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 0 . water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.31 3.8 kg max.04 Technical data Table 32-3 Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Distance from PCU Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing 10 – 100 Hz: 1.

04 Edition 32-525 .5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32 Validity This description applies to the following components: Component Order number 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 S Can be supplied in two variants to suit different operating conditions.5” floppy disk drive with 1 m long USB cable connected.3.  Siemens AG.5” 3 5” floppy disk drive with USB interface Cover (spare part) 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2 6FC5247-0AA20-0AA0 Features S The floppy disk drive is used for reading and writing data from/onto 3. 2004.5” floppy disks with 1.44 MB capacity S Can be mounted in front panels S System can be booted from floppy drive S Connection: USB 1. Scope of delivery 3.

32.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50s.03. The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions. they and the drive are not then protected against dust.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50s.1 Notes about operation 04.1 Notes about operation It is not permissible to use a longer USB cable.0 = V07.1.03.07 and PCU basic software WinNT4. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) A PCU 50 / 70 (566 MHz / 1.01 is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive (Order No.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to the software version V07. SINUMERIK PCU 50 and PCU 70 SIMATIC panels and panel PCs To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels S OP/TP 270 S MP 270B S MP 370 a separate driver is required.0). No separate driver is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive on SIMATIC panel PCs (except for Windows NT 4. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) A PCU operating with PCU basic software WinNT4. Service pack V07. Floppy disks should not be left in the drive for longer than necessary as 1.04 32.2 Floppy disk drive (Order No.03 by loading service pack V07.03. 2. The service pack V07.03.-1AA2). This driver can be downloaded from the Siemens website (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage Driver V1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. You can install this version by loading service pack V07.0 operating system).03. .03.03 (available from your local Siemens sales office).1. they must not therefore be operated on low-power USB outputs (up to 100 mA). the risk of data errors increases at temperatures higher than 45 _C.03. .0. SINUMERIK PCU 50 and PCU 70 32-526  Siemens AG.. 2004.03.0 V07.2 GHz) with Windows NT 4.02..03 or WinXP V07. The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s and PCU 70s with Windows XP without a separate driver.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32.32 3.03.03 is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive (Order No.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to the software version V07..-1AA1) on the SINUMERIK PCU 50 (566 MHz / 1.04 Edition . Longer USB cable Required power Leaving floppy disks in drive 32.1 Floppy disk drive (order no.03..03 (available from your local Siemens sales office). You can install the PCU basic software WinNT V07.2 GHz) with BIOS V02. The drives are high-power devices (power consumption up to 500 mA).

To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels S OP/TP 270 S MP 270B S MP 370 a separate driver is required. 2004.x or V02. the entry “FloppyDisk=” in file MMC. When the BIOS settings remain unchanged. SIMATIC panel PCs The USB floppy disk drive is approved for operating systems MS Windows 2000 and MS Windows XP.00 (available from your local Siemens sales office).04 32 3. Reading the emergency boot disks V02.03.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32.0).1 Notes about operation The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s and PCU 70s with Windows XP without a separate driver.05.04. We therefore recommend the use of the emergency boot disks V02.04. The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions. Only one floppy disk drive may be connected to each PCU 50 / 70. SIMATIC panels  Siemens AG. The appropriate drivers for the disk drive are supplied with the operating system software. the drive must be connected before the PCU is switched on. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemens website (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage Driver V1.x from the USB disk drive takes a very long time. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the USB floppy disk drive can be accessed as drive b: In operation with HMI Advanced.04 Edition 32-527 .INI must therefore be adapted.

32 3.2 32.1 Description Dimension drawings 145 50 Fig.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32. 32-1 Front view Fig.04 32. 32-2 Top view Fig. 32-3 Side view from right 32-528  Siemens AG.2 Description 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.2.04 Edition .

2.1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.USB standard 1. 2004.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32.2 Hardware interface Pin assignments Table 32-1 Contact No.04 32 3. 32-4 Strain relief of cable 32.2.04 Edition 32-529 .3 Software interface The drive complies with USB standard 1.  Siemens AG.1 Signal name Vcc – Data + Data Ground Description Power supply Data– Data + Ground Cable The cable is fitted with a standard USB-A connector at the device end Strain relief Fig.04. Note The driver software is not included in the scope of supply. 1 2 3 4 Connector assignments .2 Description 32.

4 Installation instructions 133. 32-5 Panel cutout Caution The mounting position of the disk drive is shown in Figs.30mm 42. 32-6 and 32-7. 38. The drive must not be installed upside down.80mm.32 3. +/– 20_ Fig.00mm.04 Edition .2 Description 04.00mm. 32.2.70mm. d 3.04 32.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32. d 6. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.00mm 112. 32-6 Side view of mounting position 32-530  Siemens AG.00mm.00mm. Fig. 118. 2004.

2 Description +/– 20_ Fig.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 32-531 .04.04 32 3. 2004. 32-7 Front view of mounting position Note The front cover must be closed to prevent ingress of dirt or damage.  Siemens AG.

18 K/h 5 .. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits (no condensation) Permissible change in relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 4 .5 W III.. 60 °C max.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32.3 Technical data 04.04 32.3 Technical data Order number . 11 ms EN 60721–3–2.1 % /min Operation 10 – 200 Hz: 0.04 Edition . water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases.. 10 K/h 20 .3 kg any (except upside down) max. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE Rear side IP00 32-532  Siemens AG. 3M4 Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Depth: Mounting depth: approx.. 2M2 161 mm 144 mm 5. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 0.-1AA1 Table 32-2 Technical data for the USB floppy disk drive (order number 6FC235-0AA05-1AA1) Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Orientation Distance from PCU Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Shock stressing Applicable Standards Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.. PELV acc..5 g 5 g. 50 °C max. 2004. 0.25 V DC Max. 80 % Transportation/storage EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –20 .. 90 % max..32 3. 30 ms EN 60721–3–3. 2. 5 m Transportation/Storage 10 – 200 Hz: 1 g 10 g...

1 % /min 5 .. dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limiting values Temperature rate of change Relative air humidity limits (no condensation) Permissible change in relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3 3K5 4 .... 65 °C max..... 11 ms EN 60721–3–2. 30 ms EN 60721–3–3. 60 °C –40 .5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32.3 Technical data Order number . 2M2 161 mm 144 mm 5.. 30 K/h 5 . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 52 °C Storage Transportation Operation 10 – 200 Hz: 0.. 50 °C max....04 Edition 32-533 . 2004.32 kg any (except upside down) max.5 g 5 g. 80 % at 4 . 3M4 Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Depth: Mounting depth: approx.. PELV acc. 0. water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet by natural convection not permissible without aggressive gases. 20 K/h 20 .. 0. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 CE Rear side IP00 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2 1K3 / 2K4 –22 ..04 32 3. 95 % at –40 ..5 W III.25 V DC Max. 90 % at –22 . 60 °C max. 5 m Transportation/storage 10 – 200 Hz: 1 g 10 g.-1AA2 Table 32-3 Technical data for the USB floppy disk drive (order number 6FC235-0AA05-1AA2) Safety Protective class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Orientation Distance from PCU Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Shock stressing Applicable standards Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Moisture condensation.. 2..04. 65 °C J  Siemens AG..

32 3.3 Technical data 04.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Notes 32-534  Siemens AG.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32. 2004.

degree of protection..04 Edition 33-535 ..” section for the individual component. Means of heat dissipation Heat dissipation can take place as follows: S Heat dissipation by natural convection S Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence S Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling S Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation  Siemens AG.).[ω] Convection surface area A [m2]: The surface areas of the front and bottom faces are not included in the convection surface area calculation.Heat Dissipation 33 For the technical data for the control components (e. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. etc. 2004. Total power lossPVtotal= Pv1 + Pv2 + Pv3 + ... please refer to the “Technical data . power loss. Note To calculate the heat dissipation. the total power loss PVtotal of all heat-generating components in a casing must be taken into account.g.

For hot spots and heat concentration in narrow casings. relative to a temperature difference T2 – T1 = DT  10 K.04 Heat dissipation by natural convection Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence Operator panel front Operator panel front Recommendation: The fan must be mounted in such a way to ensure optimum heat dissipation. 165 m3/h Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation The approximate air flow necessary for removing lost heat is calculated from: Operator panel front Operator panel front T1 T2 T1 T2 V [m3/h] = 3. “Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence” is recommended. T1 T2 T1 T2 The necessary free convection surface area A[m2] of the space to be enclosed (steel or aluminum sheet. then “Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence” or “Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling or ventilation” should be used.5 mm thick)..04 Edition . is calculated as an approximation from: A [m2] = PVtot[W] 5 * DT [K] A [m2] = PVtot[W] 10 * DT [K] Notes: Air filters must be provided to maintain the permissible environmental conditions stated in the “Technical data . Air flow through fan: 100.33 Heat Dissipation 04. 33-1 Means of heat dissipation Note If the convection surface area A [m2] is not large enough for “Heat dissipation by natural convection”..” section.. In addition. 100 mm must also be provided in front of the fan. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the ventilation slots must be kept clear. 2004. In the case of open-circuit cooling or ventilation. 1. ventilation clearance of min. For thermally critical applications. the total power loss PVtotal can also be determined as follows: – Current measurement at 24 V supply voltage – Power loss with PVtotal [W] = U (24 V) * I (measured value in amps) 33-536  Siemens AG.5 * PVtot [W] DT [K] Fig..

180 W) Operator panel front 3.5 * PVtotal [W] PCU V= DT [K] External temperature Internal temperature = 18. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 33-2 Calculating heat dissipation for PCU 50 with OP 012 J  Siemens AG.04 33 Heat Dissipation Calculating the thermal power loss PCU 50 The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit should be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The required volumetric flow V must be calculated for a temperature difference of T2 – T1 = ∆T  10 K. 2004. Example for heat dissipation with open-circuit ventilation: PCU 50 with OP 012 Calculating the thermal power loss (including internal power supply unit): OP 012 PCU 50 13 W 40 W ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PVtotal = 53 W T1 T2 (max.04.6 [m3/h] = T1 = 45 degrees = T2 = 55 degrees ––> ∆T = 10 K Fig.04 Edition 33-537 .

2004.04 Notes 33-538  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .33 Heat Dissipation 04.

04 Edition 34-539 . S original components and spare parts are used. The equipment may not commissioned until it has been clearly identified that the machine in which the controller is installed. Trouble-free operation is only ensured if: S these ambient conditions are maintained when storing.1 Secondary electrical conditions Compliance with the connection conditions The controller is tested for compliance with the ambient conditions specified below. Please contact your local Siemens office or representative for any assistance. is in full conformance with the specifications in EC Directive 98/37/EC.Connection Conditions 34 34.  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Additional information Assistance and support References: /EMV/. 2004. Planning Guide The connection conditions must be carefully maintained for the complete system. Note Please refer to the documentation for the respective operator components for information on deviations to the standard connection conditions. This applies in particular to the use of specified cables and plug connectors. transporting and operating the equipment. S the equipment has been correctly mounted/installed.

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) RI suppression Relevant standards: EN 50081–1 and –2. please contact your local Siemens office or representative. Please contact your local Siemens office or representative for assistance and support. –4. EN 61000–6–2. 2004. –8 and –11 EN 61800–3 Tested phenomena: S Static discharge S Radio frequency radiation S Cable-borne interference (burst) S Surge voltages S Cables subject to HF radiation S Magnetic fields with electrical power frequencies S Voltage dips and interruptions S Voltage fluctuations and flicker S Harmonic currents 34-540  Siemens AG. Noise immunity and low-frequency phenomena Relevant standards: EN 50178. Particular attention should be paid to cables.34 Connection Conditions 34. –6. radio interference suppression in industrial environments Limit value in accordance with Cable-borne interference suppression Radio interference Limit value class A Limit value class A If compliance with limit value class B (residential areas) is required. EN 61000–4–2.04 Edition . –3.04 34. –5.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04. EN 55022. EN 61800–3 Table 34-1 Limit values. EN 61000–3–2 and –3–3. EN 55011. Notice The user must consider radio interference suppression for the complete installation.

protective elements must be fitted at the device input in order to protect against lightning (surge voltage). S The DC supply voltage must be connected to the ground/shield of the NC for EMC and/or functional reasons. As a rule. the connection is provided as standard in the S7-300 I/Os. +10 % (184 V to 253 V) 50/60 Hz 10 % Any  10 %  3 ms S S Harmonic content Transient voltage dips Frequency Ramp-up time at power-on According to EN 50178 S S S Voltage interruptions at rated voltage and current Restoration time Events per hour  10 s  10 Requirements of DC power supplies ! Warning S The DC supply is always referenced to ground and may not be generated by an auto-transformer.3. the DC power supply must be implemented with protective separation according to EN 50178. S In the case of supply cables > 10 m. For EMC reasons.1 Secondary electrical conditions 34. also refer to /EMC/ EMC Design Guideline. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition 34-541 . 2004.04 34 Connection Conditions 34.04. this connection should only be made at one point. the ground connection should be made to the grounding rail of the NC cabinet.2 Power supply Requirements of AC power supply Table 34-2 Rated voltage The AC power supply is only required for external equipment and accessories and is not included in the standard scope of delivery. Requirements of AC power supply 230 V AC S Tolerance –20 %. S To ensure protective separation of the end user interface. If this is not the case in exceptional circumstances.  Siemens AG.1. Refer to Subsection 34.1.

S7-300 FM. The end user interfaces are implemented with protective separation in accordance with EN 50178. Warning Protective separation can only be achieved if the system configuration specified below is strictly adhered to.8 V DC 5 % (unfiltered 6-pulse rectification) S S S Harmonic content Non-periodic overvoltages Voltage range (average value) Voltage ripple at rated voltage and current peak-to-peak Ramp-up time at power-on Any  10 %  35 V  500 ms  50 s  10 According to EN 50178 S S S S S S S Value Duration of overvoltage Restoration time Events per hour Transient voltage dips Duration of voltage dips Restoration time Events per hour  5 ms  10 s  10 34. please make sure that the end user interface has a basic insulation for at least 230 V AC. You can buy these parts from your local dealer who will help you to make the proper choice. Interfaces for servicing.4 V DC to 28.04 Edition .e. to EN 50178 The complete system includes end user interfaces (EUI) and interfaces for servicing. 2004. startup and maintenance.g. If necessary.34 Connection Conditions 34. tools or other equipment is not required.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04. i. startup and maintenance ! Warning The interfaces for servicing/installation and start-up/maintenance purposes are provided without protective separation. ! 34-542  Siemens AG. These adapters are not included in the Siemens scope of delivery. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. IP) with an end user interface. When mounting additional components (e.1.04 Table 34-3 Rated voltage Requirements of the DC supply according to IEC 61131-2 24 V DC 20. these interfaces can be isolated safely using a supplementary adapter (insulation voltage 230 V AC).3 Protective separation acc. User interfaces (UI) End user interfaces are interfaces freely accessible to the machine operator.

5 V DC power supply with basic insulation. 9. Legend: 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 3 x 400 V AC MP Housing/shield MSTT/MCP 1 4 2 4 11 4 PCU 24 V 11 M (GND) 8 3 Distribution box 5 840D / 611 digital 4 HHU/ HT 6 6 7 9 10 M (GND) 5 Basic insulation Person Protective separation S7-300 I/Os 10 11 Terminal block Fig. Floating transistor triggers for the three-phase rectifier bridge with 230 V AC basic insulation 3. 24 V DC power supply unit for external devices and for the machine adaptation control according to applicable standards in the form of a PELV circuit (Protective Extra Low Voltage). Make sure that there is either protective separation with respect to the line supply voltage or that there are two basic insulation levels. Floating signal interfaces directly accessible to the end user (e. Isolated power supply to SIMODRIVE electronics with 230 V AC basic insulation 2. 10.24). Floating interfaces to the machine (not accessible to the end user). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. for 230 V AC each.  Siemens AG. 34-1 Protective separation acc. Floating transistor triggers for each axis of the three-phase inverter bridge with 230 V AC basic insulation 4.04. 8.g. 11.04 34 Connection Conditions 34. to EN 50178 Fig. 6. Non-floating end user interface with protective separation for 230 V AC through interfaces 1 to 4 and 7. 7. fed from a 24 V DC supply. Protective separation of 5 V DC power supply provided from a 24 V DC supply. V.04 Edition ÎÎÎ Machine 34-543 . 34-1 shows the various electrical potentials of the 840D/611D/S7-300 system. 5. Floating signal connections from the NC to the PCU or HHU with 230 V AC basic insulation. for these interfaces. 2004. Non-floating signal line between NC and I/O devices.

each of which must comply with EMC and the appropriate safety standards.04 Edition .34 Connection Conditions 34. 2004. The 840D system consists of a number of individual components. The ground and module ground M should be connected at the power supply terminal of the IM 361. The individual modules are attached to a metal cabinet panel by means of screws. The electronic grounding points of the modules are interconnected via the device and drive bus and at the same time conducted to the X131 terminal of the I/RF module. 34-544  Siemens AG. Make sure that near the screws a low-impedance contact of the NCU box with the cabinet wall can be made. for the EFP.1. Further.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04.4 Grounding concept The grounding concept is described below using a SINUMERIK 840D as an example. The individual system components are: S NCU box S Machine control panel MCP S Keyboard S Operator panels (operator panel front + PCU) S NCU terminal block S Distributor box and handheld unit S S7-300 I/O with IM 361 interface module S Single I/O module (EFP) The NCU box is a 50 mm wide cassette that is integrated into the infeed/regenerative feedback (I/RF) unit.04 34. “SHIELD” and “M24” must be connected in connector X1. Insulating paints at the contact point must be removed. FD and MSD. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

min. programming devices. S v 16 16 v S v 35 S w 35 S 16 S/2 Grounding concept Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines RI suppression measures In addition to the protective grounding of system components. For digital signal transmission.g. Exception: S Standard shielded cables grounded on only one side can be used for devices from other manufacturers (printers. special equipotential bonding and grounding conductors. if the system cannot be operated without them. 34-545 .5 Shielded signal cables  Siemens AG.1.1 Secondary electrical conditions Fig. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. the external device must be connected to the control via an equipotential bonding cable. Furthermore. then the cable shields must be connected at both ends. These measures include shielded signal cables. it is essential to use the cables specified in the individual diagrams. interference-free operation of the system. 2004. To ensure safe. special precautions must be taken to guarantee safe.).04. etc.04 Edition ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ PA/SL NCU Machine PCU control panel PA/SL MB S7-300 I/Os /EFP PA/SL PA PA MB Gating electronics Power electronics Distributor box PA/SL Operator panel front SL in the motor cable – Ground (frame) – G M (GND) Terminal block PA/SL Machine bed Grounding bar Ground terminal MB: Shielded signal cable with reference ground M: Motor G: Encoder PA: Equipotential bonding conductor S: Mains connection SL: Protective conductor Cross sections w10 mm2 S SL.04 34 Connection Conditions 34. not from Siemens) may not be connected to the control during normal operation. These external devices (e. interference-free operation of the installation. 34-2 34. However. the shield must have a conductive connection at both sides of the housing.

S The clearance (surface through which interference can be coupled-in) between the following cables must be kept to a minimum: – – – Signal cable and signal cable (twisted) Signal cable and associated equipotential bonding conductor Equipotential bonding conductor and PE conductor (routed together) Note For more information about interference suppression measures and connection of shielded cables.g. S If necessary. motors and transformers).04 Cable definitions Definition: S Signal cables (e.) – – – Data cables (MPI. but must never be laid close or parallel to one another.04 Edition .) Binary inputs and outputs Emergency Stop cables S Load cables (e. S Only cables offered by the NC manufacturer should be used as signal cables from and to the NC or PLC. the following EMC measures must be carefully observed: S Signal cables and load cables must be routed at the greatest possible distance from one another.g. +24 V DC etc. machine). All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. etc. see Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines 34-546  Siemens AG. S If signal cables cannot be routed a sufficient distance away from other cables. S Pulse-carrying HC/HV cables must always be laid completely separately from all other cables.g.) Supply cables to contactors (primary and secondary circuit) /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines Reference: Rules for routing cables In order to achieve the best possible noise immunity of the complete system (control. sensor cables.34 Connection Conditions 34.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04.) – – Low-voltage supply cables (230 V AC. power module. signal and load cables may cross one another (if possible. 2004. at an angle of 90°). S Signal cables may not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields (e. then they must be installed in grounded cable ducts (metal).

RI (M3) N. Signal type I: O: B: V: –: Input Output Bidirectional (inputs/outputs) Supply voltage Ground (reference potential) or N. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Secondary electrical conditions 34.04.. . 2004.C.04 Edition 34-547 .C.6 Pin assignment for interfaces The pins of the component interfaces are generally assigned as specified in the tables below.C. DTR (S1) N. Any deviations are indicated at the relevant point..04 34 Connection Conditions 34. 7 ACK (ACKNOWLEDGE) BUSY PE (PAPER END) SELECT AUTO FEED Error INIT SELECT IN GND O – Open Collector Ground (reference potential) O I Open Collector kΩ Pull Up I kΩ Pull Up O Type Remarks Open Collector TTL level Serial interface COM1 Serial interface on PCU 20/50/70/HT 6 Table 34-5 Male connector Assignment for the serial interface COM1 (PLC/RS-232-C/modem) Pin 1 2 1 14 3 4 5 6 7 8 9–19 20 13 25 21 22 23–25 Name – TxD (D1) RxD (D2) RTS (S2) CTS (M2) DSR (M1) GND (E2) DCD (M5) N.. I – I – O – I – Type – O I O Meaning Shield Serial transmitted data Serial received data Request To Send Clear To Send Data Set Ready Ground (reference potential) Receive signal level (carrier) Not assigned Data Terminal Ready Not assigned Incoming call Not assigned  Siemens AG. for example Table 34-4 Male connector Assignment for the parallel interface LPT1 Pin 1 1 14 2–9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 13 25 17 18–25 Name Strobe (CLK) Data bits 0.1. (not connected) Parallel interface LPT1 Parallel interface on the PCU 50/70 for connecting a printer.C.

04 Serial interface COM2 Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6 Table 34-6 Male connector Assignment for the serial interface COM2 (RS-232-C/mouse) Pin 1 2 3 5 9 4 5 1 6 6 7 8 9 Name DCD (M5) RxD (D2) TxD (D1) DTR (S1) GND (E2) DSR (M1) RTS (S2) CTS (M2) RI (M3) I O – I O I Type Meaning Receive signal level (carrier) Serial received data Serial transmitted data Data Terminal Ready Ground (reference potential) Data Set Ready Request To Send Clear To Send Incoming call PS/2 interfaces Table 34-7 Assignment for the PS/2 interfaces (keyboard/mouse interface) Pin 1 2 6 4 2 1 5 3 3 4 5 6 Name Keyboard_data Mouse_data GND P5V_fused Keyboard_CLK Mouse_CLK B V I Type Meaning Keyboard data cable Mouse data cable Ground (reference potential) +5 V (protected) Keyboard clock line Mouse clock line Connector (view of socket) USB-A interface Table 34-8 Assignment of the USB-A interface Pin 1 2 3 4 Name USB_P5V_ fused USB_D0M USB_D0P USB_GND B V Type V Meaning +5 V (protected) Data–. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04. USB channel 0 Data+. 2004.34 Connection Conditions 34. USB channel 0 Ground (reference potential) Connector (view of socket) 4 3 2 1 34-548  Siemens AG.04 Edition .

All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Secondary electrical conditions MPI/DP interface Table 34-9 Pin 1.2 3 4 Assignment for the MPI/DP interface Name N. 5 V supply (current load see M5EXT) Not assigned Signal line A of MPI module RTS signal from MPI module.C. connected between P5EXT and M5EXT. LTG_A RTS_PG O V – B O – Ethernet RJ45 interface Table 34-10 Pin 1 2 3 4. not required for data transmission) On connector housing Name TxD+ TxD– RxD+ GND RD– GND VGA interface Table 34-11 Pin 1 2 3 4 5–8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Assignments of VGA interface Type Meaning Red O Green Blue Not assigned – V – B O B System ground (reference potential) +5 V (protected) System ground (reference potential) Not assigned DDC data line Horizontal synchronization Vertical synchronization DDC clock line Name R G B N. 2004.5 6 7. GND 5V GND N. Signal is “1” if PG is sending On connector housing 5 6 7 8 9 Shield M5EXT P5EXT N. Return line (GND) of 5 V supply. Signal 1 active if directly connected interface module is sending.04 Edition 34-549 .8 Shield Assignment for the Ethernet RJ45 interface Type O I – I – Meaning Transmitted data Received data – (terminated internally with 75 Ω. DDC_DAT EXT_H EXT_V DDC_CLK  Siemens AG. Current load from a load of 90 mA max.C.C.04 34 Connection Conditions 34. LTG_B RTS_AS Type – B I Meaning Not assigned Signal line B of the MPI module Control signal for receive data stream.04. not required for data transmission) Received data – (terminated internally with 75 Ω.C.

34 Connection Conditions 34. cable length: 50cm.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04. Max. sync Red bit 0 (LSB) Red bit 1 Red bit 2 Name (DSTN) P5V_D_fused GND CLK GND LP FP – – UD6 GND UD7 UD2 UD3 GND UD1 UD0 LD3 GND LD2 LD1 LD0 GND UD5 UD4 LD7 GND LD6 LD5 LD4 VCON M (GND) DispOn Res. Table 34-12 Pin 1. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Assignment for the display interface (CMOS) Meaning (DSTN) + 5 V (fused) Display VCC – Shift clock – Horiz. sync Vert. 34-550  Siemens AG.04 Edition . Vert.04 CMOS display interface D-STN and TFT displays with 5V CMOS interface and VGA resolution (640x480 pixels) can be connected to this interface. sync – – Upper data bit 6 – Upper data bit 7 Upper data bit 2 Upper data bit 3 – Upper data bit 1 Upper data bit 0 Lower data bit 3 – Lower data bit 2 Lower data bit 1 Lower data bit 0 – Upper data bit 5 Upper data bit 4 Lower data bit 7 – Lower data bit 6 Lower data bit 5 Lower data bit 4 Contrast voltage Data enable Display ON Reserved Name (TFT) P5V_D_fused GND CLK GND HSYNC VSYNC R0 R1 R2 GND R3 R4 R5 GND G0 G1 G2 GND G3 G4 G5 GND B0 B1 B2 GND B3 B4 B5 – ENAB DispOn Res. – Data enable Display ON Reserved Signal g – Blue bit 3 Blue bit 4 Blue bit 5 (MSB) Signal g – Blue bit 0 (LSB) Blue bit 1 Blue bit 2 Signal – Green bit 3 Green bit 4 Green bit 5 (MSB) Signal Si l – Green bit 0 (LSB) Green bit 1 Green bit 2 Signal g – Red bit 3 Red bit 4 Red bit 5 (MSB) Signal g Meaning (TFT) +5 V (protected) VCC display – Shift clock – Horiz.

Associated interface cable: K1 Connector type: 2 x 13-pin plug connector Table 34-13 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 – 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20–23 24 25. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) or 1024x768 pixels (XGA). Associated interface cable: K2. length: 0. LVDS display interface Channel 1 Used to connect operator panel fronts with TFT displays with 640 x 480 pixels (VGA). with the exception of the display interface. are assigned to this interface.1 Secondary electrical conditions IO/USB interface All signals required for connecting operator panel fronts.C.04.3 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) Not assigned +5V VCC (fused in A&D PC) USB data– Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground 0 1 Display type select signal I 2 3 Reset signal (low active) – O – Not assigned LED temperature sensor.3 V display supply voltage (fused in A&D PC) Bit 1 (–) LVDS input signal System ground (reference potential) Bit 1 (+) Bit 0 (+) Name P5V_D_fused RXIN0– RXIN0+ P3V3_D_fused RXIN1– RXIN1– GND  Siemens AG. 2 3 4 5. P5V_fused USB_D1M USB_D1P GND LCD_SEL0 LCD_SEL1 LCD_SEL2 LCD_SEL3 RESET_N N.5 m Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector Table 34-14 Pin 1. anode with 1 kΩ in series on the board Not assigned Name GND P12V BL_ON P5V_fused GND P3V3_fused N.04 34 Connection Conditions 34. 26 Assignment for the IO/USB interface Type V O V – V – V B V Meaning Ground +power supply for backlight inverter Backlight ON +5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) Ground + 3.04 Edition 34-551 . 6 7 8 9. max. TEMP_ERR N. 2004.C.C. 10 Assignment of LVDS display interface Type Meaning V I V I – + 5 V display supply voltage (fused in A&D PC) Bit 0 (–) LVDS input signal + 3.

Associated interface cable: K3 Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector Table 34-15 Pin 1.C.C.04 Edition . Compact Flash interface Table 34-16 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface Type – Pin 30 31 32 I/O 33 34 35 Name IDE_D14 IDE_D15 IDE_XCS1 N. 2004. 10 11 12 13. 18 19. 6 7 8 9.04 Table 34-14 Pin 11 12 13. 2 3 4 5. 18 19.34 Connection Conditions 34. 20 Assignment of LVDS display interface Type Meaning Bit 2 (–) I – O LVDS input signal System ground (reference potential) (–) LVDS clock signal System ground (reference potential) Not assigned (+) Bit 2 (+) Name RXIN2– RXIN2+ GND RXCLKIN– RXCLKIN+ GND – N. 14 15 16 17. 14 15 16 17. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04. LVDS display interface Channel 2 Used for expanding the LVDS display interface channel 1 to control TFT displays with 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA).C. 20 Assignment of LVDS display interface Type Meaning V I V I – I – O Ground Bit 0 (–) LVDS input signal Ground Bit 1 (–) LVDS input signal System ground (reference potential) Bit 2 (–) LVDS input signal System ground (reference potential) LVDS cycle clock signal (–) LVDS cycle clock signal (+) System ground (reference potential) – Not assigned Bit 2 (+) Bit 1 (+) Bit 0 (+) Name GND RXIN10– RXIN10+ GND RXIN1– RXIN1– GND RXIN2– RXIN2+ GND RXCLKIN– RXCLKIN+ GND N. IDE_XIOR IDE_XIOW O I/O O – Type Name GND IDE_D3 IDE_D4 IDE_D5 IDE_D6 IDE_D7 34-552  Siemens AG.

04 Edition 34-553 . P3V3 IDE_XLED IDE_PDIAG IDE_D8 IDE_D9 IDE_D10 GND – I/O Type V O V O – O I – V Name IDE_XCS0 GND P3V3 GND IDE_A2 IDE_A1 IDE_A0 IDE_D0 IDE_D1 IDE_D2 IDE_XIOCS16 IDE_XCD2 IDE_XCD1 IDE_D11 IDE_D12 IDE_D13 Power supply interface Table 34-17 Pin 1 2 3 Assignments of the power supply interface Name SHIELD M24 V P24 24 V DC potential Type – Meaning Shield potential Ground 24 V  Siemens AG.C. 2004.04 34 Connection Conditions 34.1 Secondary electrical conditions Table 34-16 Pin 7 8 – 12 13 14 – 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface Type O – V – Pin 36 37 38 39 40 O 41 42 43 I/O 44 45 46 I 47 48 49 I/O 50 Name P3V3 IDE_XIRQ P3V3 XCSEL N. IDE_XRST IDE_XIORDY N.C. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04.

04 Edition .34 Connection Conditions 34. right).04 34. Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward. With the clamping frame in the upper position. 2. 34-3 Releasing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector Releasing a membrane connector 1. 34-554  Siemens AG. carefully plug the membrane connector into the socket. This should be done as follows: Clamping frame of socket Fig. Lock it in place by pushing down the clamping frame (see Figure 34-3. 34-3 left). Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pushing it up with the fingernails until it engages in its upper.7 Handling membrane connectors When replacing parts it can sometimes be necessary to disconnect membrane connectors from the boards and reconnect them again. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Connecting a membrane connector 1. unlocked position (Fig.1. 2004.1 Secondary electrical conditions 04. 2.

. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.2.1 Transport and storage conditions Components in original packaging The following specifications apply to components in transport packaging: Table 34-19 Climatic conditions for storage and transport See technical data of the relevant component Annual average Up to 30 days annually Temperature rate of change Atmospheric pressure Within one hour The specified values apply to a transportation altitude of up to 3000 m above sea level 10 .2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions Test standards Vibration stressing: Shock stressing: Climate: EN 60068–2–6 EN 60068–2–27 EN 60068–2–1/EN 60068–2–2/EN 60068–2–14 EN 60068–2–30/EN 60068–2–31/EN 60068–2–32/ EN 60068–2–33/EN 60068–2–34 Requirement standards Long-term storage: Transport: Stationary operation: EN 60721–3–1 EN 60721–3–2 EN 60721–3–3 Table 34-18 Mechanical ambient conditions Requirement criteria Values Vibration stressing Frequency range Constant deflection Acceleration amplitude See technical data of the relevant component Shock stressing Acceleration Duration of nominal shock Number of nominal shocks 34. 75% v 95% < 18 K 70 to 106 kPa Temperature range Relative atmospheric humidity  Siemens AG..2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 34.04.04 34 Connection Conditions 34.04 Edition 34-555 .

The lithium content is approximately 300 mg.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 04. The following regulations according to DIN EN 60086 must be adhered to: Backup batteries S may not be charged S may not be heated or thrown into fires S may not be pierced or crushed S must not be tampered with mechanically or electrically in any way! Rules for handling hard disks The PCU hard disk unit is provided with shock absorbers. explosion and combustion. However. 2004. Caution The hard disk unit S S S S should always be transported in its original packaging should not be thrown or dropped should not be dismantled from the mechanical components with which it was supplied should not be handled by its springs 34-556  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.34 Connection Conditions 34. the following rules must be observed when handling this unit. Relevant standards: DIN EN 60086 ! Rules for handling backup batteries Warning Incorrect handling of backup batteries can lead to a risk of ignition. Class 9 in accordance with the relevant air-freight transportation regulations. Note: The backup battery is classified as a hazardous substance.04 Edition .04 Transporting backup batteries Backup batteries must only be transported in the original packaging. No special approval is needed for transporting backup batteries.

a heat exchanger or an air conditioning unit must be provided.04. 2004. For higher altitudes. the upper limit temperature must be reduced by 3. water spray and the formation of ice Temperature rate of change Atmospheric pressure Not permissible Within one hour When operated at an altitude of 2. the control must be operated in a cabinet with a heat exchanger or in a cabinet with a suitable air intake. Table 34-20 Climatic ambient conditions See technical data of the relevant component Within 1 minute max.2 mg/m3 1. class 3K5 Moisture condensation. Maximum permissible dust contents in the air circulating in the cabinet: – – Suspended solids Deposits 0.2 Operating conditions If the specified values cannot be maintained. 10 K 820 kPa to 1060 kPa Function-impairing gases Table 34-21 Function-impairing gases Concentration Temperature Relative humidity 10 cm3/m3 25 °C "2 °C v 60 % 1 cm3/m3 25 °C "2 °C v 60 % Sulfur dioxide (SO2) Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) Severity Temperature Relative humidity Functionimpairing dust When working in areas where there is an unacceptably high dust hazard.2.000 m above sea level.04 34 Connection Conditions 34. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.5 mg/m2/h  Siemens AG.1 % Climatic ambient conditions Temperature range Permissible change in relative air humidity EN 60721–3–3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 34.04 Edition 34-557 . 0.5 °C/500 m. max.

5.3 MPI/OPI network rules Application The following devices can be interconnected across the MPI bus: S NCU/CCU S PCU S HT 6 S HHU S MSTT/MCP The MPI interconnecting cables are available in different lengths. For this. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. When disconnecting the MPI node. 2. enable the terminating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and last node and disable the remaining terminating resistors (see Fig. 3. S In the case of the HHU/HT 6. Note Drop cables that are not used should be removed. Note S Only two inserted terminating resistors are permitted. Each MPI node must first be connected and then enabled. then remove the connector. 4. A maximum of two of the HHU and HT 6 components can be connected for each bus segment. At least one terminator must be supplied with 5 V voltage. 34-4). The MPI connection can be routed from one user to the next by plugging the MPI connector of the outgoing cable onto the MPI connector of the incoming cable. Drop cables (feeder cable from bus segment to node) should be as short as possible. To do this.34 Connection Conditions 34. first deactivate the connection. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004. the MPI connector with inserted terminating resistor must be connected to a powered device. Network installations When installing a network. 34-558  Siemens AG.3 MPI/OPI network rules 04. Note The connection at the NC control system can be used for this purpose. bus terminating resistors are permanently integrated in the device.04 Edition . 6.04 34. observe the following basic rules: 1.

34-4 MPI connector References: /Z/. 46 OFF 46 ON O N O N 55 Terminating resistor Fig.5 kbaud): Max.04. No bus terminating resistors may be inserted at the distributor boxes of an HHU or HT 6 (refer to the note on item 2.04 Edition 34-559 . more than one HHU/HT 6 can be connected to a bus segment using intermediate repeaters. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.) If required. by adapting the address before commissioning (refer to Chapter “Handheld Terminal HT 6”). 2004.3 MPI/OPI network rules It is also possible to use two identical components provided they have different station addresses. 7. total cable length is 1000 m OPI (1. The following cables lengths for MPI or OPI for standard use without repeater may not be exceeded: MPI (187. Setting the addresses (see also the section on the corresponding components): – – HHU: Via DIP switch or display (see “Handheld unit” section). Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines J  Siemens AG. total cable length is 200 m. For HT 6.5 Mbaud): Max.04 34 Connection Conditions 34.

34 Connection Conditions 34.3 MPI/OPI network rules 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2004.04 Notes 34-560  Siemens AG.04 Edition .

Abbreviations

A

AS ASIC AT BIOS C Bus CDROM COM CPU CRT DIP DKM DRAM EFP EMC FB FBG FM GD GND HHU HID HMI HU I/O IC

Motor Drive Side Application Specific IC Advanced Technology Basic Input Output System Communications Bus Compact Disk ROM Communication Module Central Processing Unit Cathode Ray Tube Dual In–Line Package Direct Key Module Dynamic RAM Single I/O Module Electromagnetic Compatibility Function Block Function Unit Function Module Global Data Ground Handheld Unit Human Interface Device Human Machine Interface: Operator function of SINUMERIK for operation, programming and simulation. The meaning of HMI is identical with MMC. Height Unit Input/Output Integrated Circuit

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

A-561

A Abbreviations

04.04

IDE ISA LCD LED LPT MCP MCU MFII Modem MPI N.C. NC NCU NMI OP OPI P bus PBP PC PC/XT PCMCIA PCU PELV PER PG PG interface PLC PP PS/2 RAM ROM RS–232–C

Integrated Drive Electronics Industry Standard Architecture (AT standard) Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Line Print Terminal Machine Control Panel Motion Control Unit, digital single–axis/positioning control Multifunction Keyboard II Modulator–demodulator Multi–Point Interface Not Connected Numeric Control Numerical Control Unit Non Maskable Interrupt Operator Panel Front Operator Panel Interface Peripherals Bus Push Button Panel Personal Computer PC Extended Technology PC Memory Card International Association PC Unit Protective Extra Low Voltage I/Os Programming device Programming device interface Programmable Logic Control (component of the NC) Push Button Panel Personal System/2 Random Access Memory Read Only Memory Interface standard in accordance with CCITT RS–232–C

A-562

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

A Abbreviations

SCSI SIM SPC STN SVGA TFT UOP USB VGA WD XGA

Small Computer System Interface (parallel interface for up to 7 simultaneous devices) Single in Line Module Serial I/O controller, Siemens PROFIBUS Controller Super Twisted Nematic (flat screen technology) Super VGA (screen resolution 800 x 600, 16 million colors) Thin Film Transistor (flat screen technology) Unit Operator Panel Universal Serial Bus Video Graphics Adapter (screen resolution 640 x 480, 16 colors) Watch Dog Extended VGA (screen resolution 1024 x 768)

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

A-563

A Abbreviations

04.04

Notes

A-564

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

References

B
SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE, Automation Systems for Machine Tools Catalog NC 60 Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-B1-7600

General Documentation
/BU/

/IKPI/

Industrial Communication and Field Devices Catalog IK PI Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B2-7600

/ST7/

SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation Catalog ST 70 Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A8-7600

/Z/

MOTION-CONNECT Cable, Connectors & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK, Masterdrives and SIMOTION Catalog NC Z Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-B1-7600

Saftey Integrated Application Manual The saftey program for industries of the world Order No.: 6ZB5000-0AA02-0BA0

Electronic Documentation
/CD1/
The SINUMERIK System (03.04 Edition) DOC ON CD (includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802D/802SC and SIMODRIVE publications) Order No.: 6FC5298-7CA00-0BG0

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

B-565

B References

04.04

User Documentation
/AUK/
SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide AutoTurn Operation Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA30-0BP2 (09.99 Edition)

/AUP/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.02 Edition) Operator’s Guide AutoTurn Graphic Programming System Programming/Setup Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA40-0BP3

/BA/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator’s Guide MMC Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA00-0BP0

(10.00 Edition)

/BAD/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator’s Guide HMI Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF00-0BP3

(03.04 Edition)

/BAH/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator’s Guide HT 6 Order No.: 6FC5298-0AD60-0BP3

(03.04 Edition)

/BAK/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Short Guide Operation Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA10-0BP0

(02.01 Edition)

/BAM/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operation/Programming ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD00-0BP0

(08.02 Edition)

/BAS/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP2

(11.03 Edition)

/BAT/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

(06.03 Edition)

/BEM/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator’s Guide HMI Embedded Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP3

(03.04 Edition)

B-566

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

B References

/BNM/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D User’s Guide Measuring Cycles Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA70-0BP3

(03.04 Edition)

/BTDI/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Motion Control Information System (MCIS) User’s Guide Tool Data Information Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE01-0BP0

(04.03 Edition)

/CAD/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator’s Guide CAD Reader Order No.: (included in online help)

(03.02 Edition)

/DA/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Diagnostics Guide Order No.: 6FC5298-7AA20-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/KAM/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD40-0BP0

(04.01 Edition)

/KAS/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD30-0BP0

(04.01 Edition)

/KAT/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF20-0BP0

(07.01 Edition)

/PG/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Fundamentals Order No.: 6FC5298-7AB00-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/PGA/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-7AB10-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/PGA1/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D List Manual System Variables Order No.: 6FC5298-7AE10-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/PGK/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Short Guide Programming Order No.: 6FC5298-7AB30-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

B-567

B References

04.04

/PGM/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide ISO Milling Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC20-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

/PGT/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide ISO Turning Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC10-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

/PGZ/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles Order No.: 6FC5298-7AB40-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/PI/

PCIN 4.4 Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module Order No.: 6FX2060 4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German) Order from: WK Fürth

/SYI/

SINUMERIK 840Di System Overview Order No.: 6FC5298-6AE40-0BP0

(02.01 Edition)

Manufacturer/Service Documentation
a) Lists

/LIS/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611D Lists Order No.: 6FC5297-7AB70-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

b) Hardware

/ASAL/

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (10.03 Edition) Planning Guide General Information for Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC62-0BP0

/APH2/

SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide 1PH2 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC63-0BP0

(10.03 Edition)

/APH4/

SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide 1PH4 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC64-0BP0

(10.03 Edition)

B-568

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

B References

/APH7M/

MASTERDRIVES MC Planning Guide 1PH7 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC66-0BP0

(04.04 Edition)

/APH7S/

SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide 1PH7 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC65-0BP0

(01.04 Edition)

/APL6/

MASTERDRIVES VC/MC Planning Guide 1PL6 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC67-0BP0

(01.04 Edition)

/BH/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manual Order No.: 6FC5297-6AA50-0BP3

(11.03 Edition)

/BHA/

SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.03 Edition) User’s Guide (HW) Absolute Position Sensor with PROFIBUS DP Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP2

/EMV/

SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE Planning Guide (HW) EMC Installation Guide Order No.: 6FC5297-0AD30-0BP1

(06.99 Edition)

The current Declaration of Conformity is available under the following Internet address: http://www4.ad.siemens.de Please enter the ID No.: 15257461 in the ’Search’ field (top right) and click on ’go’.

/GHA/

SINUMERIK/SIMOTION ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes Manual Order No.: 6FC5297-0BA01-0BP1

(02.03 Edition)

/PFK6/

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC Planning Guide 1FK6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD05-0BP0

(05.03 Edition)

/PFK7/

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC Planning Guide 1FK7 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD06-0BP0

(01.03 Edition)

/PFS6/

MASTERDRIVES MC Planning Guide 1FS6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD08-0BP1

(04.04 Edition)

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

B-569

B References

04.04

/PFT5/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide 1FT5 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD01-0BP0

(05.03 Edition)

/PFT6/

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC Planning Guide 1FT6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD02-0BP0

(01.04 Edition)

/PFU/

SINAMICS, MASTERDRIVES MICROMASTER SIEMOSYN-MOTORS 1FU8 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC80-0BP0

(09.03 Edition)

/PHC/

SINUMERIK 810D Configuring Manual CCU (HW) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD10-0BP1

(11.02 Edition)

/PHD/

SINUMERIK 840D Configuring Manual NCU (HW) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC10-0BP3

(11.03 Edition)

/PJAL/

SIMODRIVE 611 / SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES MC Planning Guide Three-Phase AC Servomotors General Part Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD07-0BP1

(01.04 Edition)

/PJAS/

SIMODRIVE 611 ,MASTERDRIVES VC/MC Planning Guide Asynchronous Motors Content: General Part, 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7, 1PL6 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC61-0BP0

(06.04 Edition)

/PJFE/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC00-0BP5

(03.04 Edition)

/PJF1/

SIMODRIVE (12.02 Edition) Installation Guide 1FE1 051.–1FE1 147. Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 610.43000.02

B-570

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

04.04

B References

/PJLM/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors ALL General Information about Linear Motors 1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor 1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor CON Connections Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB70-0BP4

(06.02 Edition)

/PJM2/

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (06.04 Edition) Planning Guide Synchronous Servomotors Content: General Part, 1FT5, 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7, 1FS6 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC20-0BP0

/PJTM/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide 1FW6 Integrated Torque Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD00-0BP1

(05.03 Edition)

/PJU/

SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide Inverters Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA00-0BP6

(02.03 Edition)

/PKTM/

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Planning Guide 1FW3 Complete Torque Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC70-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/PMH/

SIMODRIVE Sensor Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1

(07.02 Edition)

/PMH2/

SIMODRIVE Sensor Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H2 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB31-0BP0

(03.04 Edition)

/PMHS/

SIMODRIVE (12.00 Edition) Installation Guide Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives SIZAG2 Toothed-Wheel Encoder Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3

/PMS/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD04-0BP1

(03.04 Edition)

 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

B-571

Program Operation Mode K2 Axes. External Zero Offset K4 Communication N2 EMERGENCY STOP P1 Transverse Axes P3 Basic PLC Program R1 Reference Point Approach S1 Spindles V1 Feeds W1 Tool Offset B-572  Siemens AG. Actual Value System for Workpiece.01 Edition) /PPM/ SIMODRIVE (11. Channel. Frames.: 6SN1197-0AC60-0BP0 (12. Exact Stop and Look Ahead B2 Acceleration D1 Diagnostic Tools D2 Interactive Programming F1 Travel to Fixed Stop G2 Velocities. Protection Zones B1 Continuous-Path Mode. Closed-Loop Control H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC K1 Mode Group.01 Edition) Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle Drives Order No. 2004.B References 04.: 6SN1197-0AD03-0BP0 c) Software /FB1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.: 6FC5297-7AC20-0BP0 A2 Various Interface Signals A3 Axis Monitoring. Coordinate Systems. 1PH4. 1PH7 Motors AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition .04 Edition) Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (the various sections are listed below) Order No. Setpoint/Actual Value Systems.04 /PPH/ SIMODRIVE Planning Guide 1PH2.

: 6FC5297-7AC30-0BP0 A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs B4 Operation via PG/PC F3 Remote Diagnostics H1 JOG with/without Handwheel K3 Compensations K5 Mode Groups. Channels. Axis Replacement L1 FM-NC Local Bus M1 Kinematic Transformation M5 Measurement N3 Software Cams.04 Edition) Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3) (the various sections are listed below) Order No.04 Edition B-573 .04.04 B References /FB2/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (03.04 Edition) Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2) including FM-NC: Turning.: 6FC5297-7AC80-0BP0 F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation G1 Gantry Axes G3 Cycle Times K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding S9 Setpoint Exchange (S9) T3 Tangential Control TE0 Installation and Activation of Compile Cycles TE1 Clearance Control TE2 Analog Axis TE3 Master-Slave for Drives TE4 Transformation Package Handling TE5 Setpoint Exchange TE6 MCS Coupling TE7 Retrace Support TE8 Path-Synchronous Switch Signal V2 Preprocessing W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation  Siemens AG. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. Stepper Motor (the various sections are listed below) Order No. 2004. Position Switching Signals N4 Punching and Nibbling P2 Positioning Axes P5 Oscillation R2 Rotary Axes S3 Synchronous Spindles S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3) S6 Stepper Motor Control S7 Memory Configuration T1 Indexing Axes W3 Tool Change W4 Grinding /FB3/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (03.

03 Edition) /FBDN/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 /FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition) B-574  Siemens AG.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP3 (11.: 6FC5297-1AE80-0BP0 DN1 DN2 DNC Plant / DNC Cell DNC IFC SINUMERIK. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.B References 04.04 Edition .03 Edition) Motion Control Information System (MCIS) Description of Functions DNC NC Program Management Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA80-1BP1 DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions DD1 Diagnostic Functions DD2 Speed Control Loop DE1 Extended Drive Functions DF1 Enable Commands DG1 Encoder Parameterization DL1 Linear Motor MD DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller Data DS1 Current Control Loop DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations /FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital Description of Functions ANA MODULE Order No.99 Edition) Description of Functions Digitizing Order No.: 6FC5297-4AC50-0BP0 DI1 Start-up DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan) DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser) DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill) /FBDM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Motion Control Information System (MCIS) DNC NC Program Management Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE81-0BP0 (09.: 6SN1197-0AB80-0BP0 (02. NC Data Transfer via Network /FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Order No.00 Edition) /FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D (07.: 6FC5297-0AF00-0BP3 FE1 Remote Diagnosis ReachOut FE3 Remote Diagnosis pcAnywhere (03. 2004.02 Edition) /FBFE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis Order No.04 Edition) Description of Functions Drive Functions (the various sections are listed below) Order No.

96 Edition) /FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions Computer Link (SinCOM) Order No.03 Edition) Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Order No.01 Edition) Description of Functions Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB60-0BP3 (10.: 6FC5297-6AD50-0BP0 (08.02 Edition) /FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.: 6FC5297-6AB80-0BP2  Siemens AG. 2004.: (supplied with the software) Part 1 Part 2 User’s Guide Description of Functions (11.04 Edition) /FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE (11.04 Edition B-575 .03 Edition) /FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ManualTurn Order No.: (supplied with the software) (03.03 Edition) /FBIC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Motion Control Information System (MCIS) Description of Functions TDI Ident Connection Order No.: 6FC5297-3AB60-0BP0 (03.04 B References /FBH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI Configuring Package Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD61-0BP0 NFL Host Computer Interface NPL PLC/NCK Interface (01.03 Edition) /FBHL/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital Description of Functions HLA Module Order No.04.02 Edition) /FBH1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI Configuring Package ProTool/Pro Option SINUMERIK Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE60-0BP0 (06. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.: 6FC5297-6AC40-0BP0 BA Operator’s Guide EU Development Environment (Configuring Package) PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface (IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration) /FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions C-PLC Programming Order No.

02 Edition) /FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Tool Management Order No.: 6FC5297-7AD40-0BP2 (03.01 Edition) IT Solutions Description of Functions Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help Order No.04 Edition) /FBT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC60-0BP1 (11.03 Edition) Motion Control Information System (MCIS) Description of Functions TPM Total Productive Maintenance Order No.01 Edition) /FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Order No. 2004.: 6SN1197-0AB20-0BP8 (07.04 Edition .02 Edition) IT Solutions Description of Functions Tool Data Communication SinTDC Order No.B References 04.02 Edition) B-576  Siemens AG.: 6FC5297-6AE00-0BP0 /FBTP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.: 6SN1197-0AA70-0YP4 (01.04 /FBSP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill Order No.03 Edition) /FBU2/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal Installation Guide (enclosed with SIMODRIVE 611 universal) (04.: 6FC5297-6AD70-0BP2 (03.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP2 (11.: 6FC5297-5AF30-0BP0 /FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.03 Edition) /FBST/ SIMATIC Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP Order No.: Document is supplied with the software /FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E Description of Functions Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning Order No.04 Edition) /FBTC/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (01.

04.04 B References /HBA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Manual @Event Order No.02 Edition)  Siemens AG.03 Edition) User’s Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP Order No. Configuration Installation Order No.02 Edition) /POS5/ SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO CD/CA) (04.03 Edition) /POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA User’s Guide Distributed Servo Drive Systems Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP0 /PS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.03 Edition) /INC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP6 /POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO A) (05.: 6FC5297-6AE60-0BP2 (09.01 Edition) Description of Functions Configuring Package HMI Embedded Software Update.02 Edition) /HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di Manual SINUMERIK 840DI Order No.03 Edition) System Description Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC Order No.03 Edition) /POS4/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO SI) (04.04 Edition B-577 .: 6FC5297-7AE10-0BP0 (03.: (an integral part of the online help for the start-up tool) /PGA1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D List Manual System Variables Order No.03 Edition) Planning Guide Configuring Syntax This publication is included with the software and available as a pdf file /POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (08. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition) /PJE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP5 (07.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0 (03.

97 Edition) /S7S/ SIMATIC S7–300 FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper Drive Order together with configuring package (04.02 Edition) /S7L/ SIMATIC S7–300 FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive Order together with configuring package (04. 3. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 3.04 /S7H/ SIMATIC S7–300 (2002 Edition) Manual: Technological Functions Order No.: 6SC6111-6PC00-0BAj Order from: WK Fürth B-578  Siemens AG.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BA0 (03. Fundamentals.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BR0 (03.B References 04.: 6ES7398-8AA03-8BA0 – Reference manual: CPU Data (Hardware) – Reference manual: Module data /S7HT/ SIMATIC S7–300 Manual STEP 7.1 Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives Order No.1 Order No. 2004. V.97 Edition) /S7HR/ SIMATIC S7–300 Manual STEP 7.02 Edition) /S7M/ SIMATIC S7–300 FM 357-2 Multimodule for Servo and Stepper Drives Order together with configuring package (01. Reference Manuals. V.03 Edition) /SP/ SIMODRIVE 611–A/611–D SimoPro 3.1 Order No.04 Edition .

04 Edition)  Siemens AG.04.00 Edition) /IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.20 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA60-0BP6 (10.04 Edition B-579 . 2004.: 6FC5297-6AE20-0BP3 AE1 Updates/Supplements BE1 Expanding the Operator Interface HE1 Online Help IM2 Starting up HMI Embedded IM4 Starting up HMI Advanced TX1 Creating Foreign Language Texts (03.: 6FC5297-6AD20-0BP1 /IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 (03.00 Edition) /IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition) Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl.: 6SN1197-0AA30-0BP1 (10.04 B References d) Installation and Start-Up /BS/ SIMODRIVE 611 analog Description Start-Up Software for Main Spindle and Asynchronous Motor Modules Version 3.04 Edition) Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software) Order No. description of SIMODRIVE 611 digital start-up software) Order No.: 6FC5297-7AB10-0BP0 /IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI Order No. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.

2004.04 Edition .B References 04. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Notes B-580  Siemens AG.

2-37. 13-212 Booting. 6-87. 2-34. 14-234 Anti-rotation element. 13-222. 1-28. 14-238 Rules. clamp. 13-207. 13-228 Boot manager. 1-29 Blank labels. 10-155 Description. 13-209 Settings. 9-140. 5-74. 8-104 Alt key. 10-178 Interface. 4-58 Cable set. 10-156 Description of Functions. 13-204. 13-221 Setup. 4-54. 10-153. System features. 13-211 Boot sequence. 10-169 Operator panel front. 34-557 B Backlight inverter. 13-209. 13-224 Area switchover. 1-23 Ambient conditions. 5-74. 1-23 Backup battery. 10-162 Mounting. 7-100. 13-207. 8-104 Alpha key group. 13-220 Casing screws. 6-79. 6-79. 13-217.Index C Backlighting. 6-87. 1-26. 10-164 Numbers 15” TFT. 1-25 Board retainer. 1-28. 13-222. 4-54. 13-211. 12-197. 10-154 Spare parts. 10-158 Mechanical design. 4-64. 4-64. 10-172 19” machine control panel. 9-120.04 Edition Index-581 . 8-104 Key. 13-221 BIOS Parameters. 9-152. 4-64. 13-221 Voltage. 34-556 Transportation. 6-83. 14-234 Climatic ambient conditions. 1-21 Clearance. 10-174 System features. 13-211 Device fan. 3-45. 1-22. 13-212 Blank film. 3-44. 9-114. 9-115. 2-40. 1-28. 13-221 BIOS settings. 15-245. 2004. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 2-40. 1-22 AT module. 4-55. 13-215 Casing cover screws. 8-111  Siemens AG. 3-44. 12-197. 13-221 Connector. 7-94. 23-406 Clamping elements. 5-72. 1-30 Cable connector. 9-117. 3-52. 3-50. 13-208. 5-74. 2-40. 7-100. 34-555. 4-55. 26-491 C Cable. 9-116 Function blocks. 8-111 Cardbus. 34-541 Actuation field. 34-557 Climatic conditions. 9-134. 9-148. 26-483 24 V power supply. 1-29. 13-226 AT/PCI specification. 8-111 Backspace key. 13-209 Boot Sequence. 20-345. 8-108. 7-100. 13-218 Chip extractor. 14-236 Symbols “Milling” MCP. 15-254 Changing the Battery. 13-220 Changing the power supply. 34-556 Battery Change. 8-111 A AC power supply. 1-30 Central operator panel front. 14-231. 10-156 Overview. 9-116 Heat dissipation. 10-155 Technical data. 13-221. 23-415 Cap for the USB port. 9-113. 9-115 15” TFT Communication. 9-115. 34-555 Closure cap. 1-30. 4-59. 6-79. 10-155. 6-87. 6-87. 13-221 Clip. 13-228 Plug. 9-147. 13-225 Atmospheric pressure.

24-438 Contact change. 17-293 Connection. 3-45. 8-106. 13-220. 1-29. 11-183. 10-178 Cover plate. 3-47. 13-204. for mounting TP 015A. 8-105. 8-103. 4-62 DIP switch S2. 5-67. 24-444 Control key group. 29-509 Color display. 8-104 Control parameters. 19-332 Traversing keys. 6-83 DIMM. 15-257 Distributed Installation. 6-77. 4-56. 8-106. 13-218 Index-582  Siemens AG. 13-224 Control cabinet. 7-95. 14-239 DIN-A4 film. module. 6-87. 1-28 Interface. 4-60. 13-208. 15-257 Cable. 26-491 Lead. 25-481 Digital I/Os. 14-231 Interface. 1-21. 11-186. 23-415 Dimension drawing. 13-212 Cursor left key. 25-479 MPI interface. 34-541 DC/DC converter. 13-204. handheld unit. 7-96. 3-47. 1-23 Cursor right key. 2-37. 6-82. 15-251 Support. 5-70. 34-544 Drive holder. 2-36.C Index 04. 34-547 COM1/RS-232. 25-476 Receipt cycle time. 14-231 Interface. 1-22. of interfaces. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 14-234. 3-45. 15-245 Distribution box. 4-53. 34-539 Mini HHU connection kit. 6-79. panel. 25-481 Transmission cycle time. 1-30 Direct control key submodule. 13-226 Control. 15-252. interface. 13-220 Connection. 1-23 Cursor down key. 11-180 Direction keys. 8-103. 5-69. 1-25. 34-548 Components. 11-180 Vertical. 6-79. 4-65. 26-485 Disconnecting the. 1-24. 20-340 D Data memory. 6-81. 12-191 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C/310. 4-53. 20-345 Conditions. 4-57.04 CMOS interface. 9-152. 1-30. 6-82. 34-552 Setting.04 Edition . 6-82. 8-104 Degree of. 13-204. 2-35. 4-64. 25-475. 34-550. 21-352 Customer operator panel Bus address. 6-82. 6-79. 13-222 Dial. 6-81. 4-54. 1-23 Cursor up key. 5-70. 3-44. 4-55. 15-253. 19-335 Mini HHU handwheel signals. 3-48. 15-256 Control elements. industrial use. 1-30. 6-87.. 13-209 Dismantling. 19-332 Rapid traverse button. 8-104 Cursor keys. 5-74 Connecting. 28-501. 25-477 Interfaces. 1-22. 7-95. 1-30 Support plate. 25-480 LEDs. 1-22. 5-75. 4-57. 8-105 Interface (LVDS). 13-228 Connecting the Handheld unit. 3-44. 6-83. 4-54. 7-93. 15-253 Direct control key. 1-23 Customer keys. 13-205. 5-69. 4-58. 14-235 Plate. 13-208. 15-251. 16-269 Description of control elements Axis selection switch. 26-483 DC supply. 15-256 Ctrl key. 13-204. 7-96. 13-208 Connecting the handheld programming unit. 2004. 34-551. 3-45. 12-198. 4-56. 11-188. 18-313 Distributor box. protection. 19-332 Design for. 6-77 COM1. 12-198. 12-193. 17-293 Disk A. 19-332 Enabling button. 20-340. 1-23 Description. 19-332 Handwheel. 14-235 Device fan. 4-55. 8-111 Direct control key connection. 18-310 Power supply. 2-35. 11-183 Switch S1. 15-255 Display Cable K2. 11-180 Direct control keys. 26-484 Decimal point. 19-335 Connection for handheld units. 3-43. 13-219. 14-231 COM2. 1-21. 6-87 Control cabinet. 11-183 Holder. 2-33. 4-55. 15-257 Type. 21-352. 25-476 Power supply interface. 1-26. 19-332 Function keys. 25-475 Jumpering. 1-24. 5-67. 14-231. 25-481 Customized keys. 6-89 Convection surface area. 24-469 Contact problems. 1-23 Cursor key group. 18-310 Disconnecting the handheld programming unit. 8-106 Delete key.

26-485 Override switch. 4-54. 17-290 Distribution box. 15-253. 17-283 Distribution box for 3-core enabling. 1-23 Escape key. 8-111. 4-56.04. 8-112 Embedded operating system. 31-523 Power supply interface. 13-205. 2-35. 31-521 Mounting. 2-33. 34-557 Ground terminal. 13-223. 14-231 Interface. 17-294 Interface signals. 31-522 Side view. 13-228. 15-256 Floppy check. 14-232. 6-87 Function-impairing dust. 7-100. 23-407. 31-523 Mounting dimension drawing. 14-232 Grounding concept. 31-521 Function. 13-228 H Handheld programming unit Cable interface. 17-280 Technical data. 34-540 EMC noise immunity. 13-212 Expanding. 14-229. 2-35. 23-405. 20-340. 3-47. 1-23 F12 key. 1-23 F2 key. 3-43. 17-283 Distribution box for 4-core enabling. 2004. 7-100. 13-225. 12-197. 17-275 Handheld unit. 21-352. 9-115. 13-204. 19-332. 1-23 Fan. 14-239 Expansion board. 5-69. 26-485. 12-197 Firmware. 14-232. 13-207. 1-29. 34-557 G Gases. 13-209  Siemens AG. 1-22. 3-47. 17-296 RS232 (V. 13-212 F9 key. 34-549 Exit menu. 13-205. 31-524 Top view. 1-24. 3-44. 1-23 Esc-key. 34-557 Function-impairing gases. 14-231 Floppy disk drive. 12-193. 14-238 External keyboard. 18-308 Control elements. Function-impairing. 9-136. Front view. 13-205. 18-323 Block diagram. 10-165 Panel cutout. 30-518 Plate. 23-415. 4-65. 18-321 F F10 key. 23-405 Film. 31-522 USB INT. 12-191. 4-53. 13-204. 7-95. 12-191. key. 17-276 Input signals. 1-26 Film labels. 1-28. 17-286 Function blocks. 24-423. 18-307 Changing labeling strip. 14-232 Connection. 20-340. 14-238 Extender. 1-31 Fire protection. 6-89. 14-231 Front panel. 4-56. 12-191. 17-279 Connecting and disconnecting during operation. 31-521 Technical data. 32-528 Front Panel. 14-238 Dust. 1-23 F11 key. 13-228. 5-74. 34-557 E EFP. 1-23 Enter key. 5-75. 8-105 External monitor. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 C Index Drive connection. 18-306 Connecting and disconnecting during operation. 13-204. 7-94. 17-297 Handheld terminal. 6-81. 13-223. 18-310. 13-204. 7-95. 23-406. 17-295 Parameterizing basic PLC program. 34-544 Electrical isolation. 17-294 Output signals. 12-191 EMC. 1-21. 13-227 External floppy disk drive. 13-222 Feed Control. 14-231. 13-212 Etc.24) interface. 13-227. 14-234 Function-impairing. 5-69. 6-79. 2-34. 2-40. 32-525 Floppy disk drive with USB interface. 31-523 Front view. 13-202. 34-544 Guide rail. 21-352. 34-540 Electrostatic discharge. 10-155. 4-62 Film for softkey labels. 18-312 Digital display. 8-104 Ethernet. 31-521 Dimension drawing of blanking plate. the memory. 8-105 EMERGENCY STOP. 4-64. 31-522 Rear view. 26-486 End key. 31-521 Dimension drawing. 6-81. 7-93. 1-24.04 Edition Index-583 . 26-483 Electromagnetic compatibility. 9-117. 11-180 Flat mounting. 18-305 ASCII code.

2-35. 14-233 IO/USB interface. 14-229 LVDS interface. 13-207. 1-23 Hotkey group. 6-81. 5-69. 11-183 I/O devices. 12-197. 13-224 Inclined position. 17-281 PS/2 keyboard interface. 3-47. 4-65. use. 13-205. 13-217 Use. 3-44 Housing cover. 13-208. 18-311 Output image. 8-106. 16-269.04 Edition . 6-81. 13-212 Insert key. 23-415 LVDS. 13-208 Lithium battery. 18-307 Enabling buttons. 4-58 L LAN. 12-195. 1-30. 6-81. 13-207. 8-105. 26-486 Line Cable. 13-204. 7-95. 1-28. 18-313. 13-221 Local area network. 19-337 Technical data. 20-340. 15-253. 13-202. 4-58. 13-224 Hollow rivet. 6-81. 8-105 LPT mode. 26-486 Knurled screws. 7-95. 6-87. 13-205. 13-224 Low current USB. 13-221 Hardware reset. 10-158 Assignments. 9-131. 6-82. 5-69. 13-207. 7-96. 13-204. 5-70. 6-89 Keyswitch. 2-35. 8-111 LED. 13-220 Home key. 13-209. 4-64. 13-208. 13-205. 18-329. 18-314 User interface. 6-87 LCD unit. 2-37. 13-217. 8-111 Keyboard connection. 4-56. 7-95. 9-118. 14-235 Interface. 7-95. module. 14-234 Industrial. 13-218 Holder.C Index 04. 6-81. 7-95. 17-279 User interface. 8-105. 23-406. 4-56. 7-100. 34-547 Lugs. 1-30. 14-230 HT 6 Connecting cable. 23-405 Key functions. 12-198. 18-317 Handwheel. 6-87. 14-232 Heat. 14-234 Heat dissipation. 18-306 Operating and display elements. 18-313 Input image. connection. 8-105 Key cap. 2-40. 13-202. 15-254 HMI Advanced. 18-306 Keyboard. 34-551 ISA. 15-249. 26-485. 4-57. 14-231. 18-322 Spare parts. 1-29. 33-535 Hinge bolts. 18-319 LED. 3-47. 5-69. 12-193 Keyboard controller. 4-64. 18-313 Magnetic clamp. 14-229. 18-319 Signal chart. 2004. 2-35. 8-105 I/RF module. 14-235. 12-197. 4-62 LCD. 1-22 Hotkeys. 11-180. 5-69. 24-457 Interfaces. 3-48. 18-319 Interface signals. 13-204. 2-40. 2-35. 15-252. 5-74. 12-193. 3-47. 4-56. 5-75. 4-56. 18-313 GD parameters. unit. 17-277 Humidity. 24-426 IO USB cable. 15-256 Connection. 13-203. 5-69. 9-120. 13-217 Drive. 18-316 Distribution box. 4-56. 5-69. 3-47. 21-352. 6-81. 13-208. 34-544 IAM. 4-56. 8-105 Initialization. 1-26. 14-235.04 DIP switch. 18-318 Hard disk. 24-462 Input key. 1-23 Key symbols. 2-35. 14-231 Locking. 14-235 Individual wiring. 12-198. 2-35. 12-191 LEDs. 1-23 Interconnecting cables. 1-21. 13-204. 7-100. 12-197. 7-95. 18-318 Rotary selector settings. 17-280 PC card interface. 7-95. 13-227 K K1. 6-81. 18-325 Distributor box. 1-30. 6-83. 14-235 I/O USB cable K1. 1-24. 14-230 Hardware clock. 12-193. 14-231 Interface. 18-320 Override switch. 5-69. 13-221 Switch. 10-156. 18-305 Operating more than one. 13-212 LPT1. 14-231 Laser printer. 3-47. 13-203. 18-318 Keyswitch. 12-191. 14-229. 26-484. 23-415. 24-443 Index-584  Siemens AG. 6-87. 1-24. 8-105 K2. 1-24. 26-484 Controller. 15-250 Interface. 3-47. 1-26. 20-340. 14-233 I I/O / USB cable K1. 1-28. 18-313 PLC module. 1-31 Lumotast. 4-56. 13-208. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 17-282 Threaded bushes.

13-204. 5-67. 13-209 MF2 keyboard. 16-270 Videolink receiver. 26-489 MPI connection. 12-195. 1-25. 8-103. 1-23 Main board. 4-55. 4-54. 14-238 Module. 4-64. 6-87. 13-218. 19-335 sample connection. 8-104 Machine control panel. 14-231 MPI Connection. 1-30. 13-208. 2-33. 20-343. 13-223. 19-331 Description of control elements. 15-252 Connection. 6-81. 19-335 Control elements. 13-225 Expansion. 34-544 Noise immunity. 19-331 Dimensions of flange socket. 12-193 N Natural convection. 26-494 Control elements. 19-333 Coding of axis selection switch. 2-40 Installation. 7-93. 34-544 NCU terminal block. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 8-103 Panel. 9-117 24 V power supply. 1-21. 12-197 Screw. 20-345. 8-111. 1-30. 26-493 Configuring. 1-25  Siemens AG. 3-44. 20-339. 5-67. 1-22. 34-558 Multi-Point-Interface. 26-491 Operator panel interface. 14-234 Bracket. 20-347 Technical data. 24-443 Module. 6-87. 19-333 Technical data. 19-334 Connection. 20-345. 26-488 Receipt cycle time. 25-475 MPI/DP. 6-79. 3-50. 26-483 Interface parameters. 13-226 MCP. 21-354. 12-195. 26-494 Interfaces. 34-544 Membrane connector. 1-26 Dimensions. 6-87 Cut-out. 15-255 Slot. 24-442 Depth.04 Edition Index-585 . 6-77. 4-53. 8-104 O OEM agreement. 13-209 Menu. 26-484 Bus address. 20-340. 20-343. 14-233. 4-54. 19-332 Dimensions. 3-43. 7-97. 6-82 Mounting slot. 19-336 Monitor. 2-33. 2-33. 15-257 TCU. 13-204. 13-221 Mains. 15-254 Bracket flat. 1-27 Front panel. 6-79. 12-191 MPI/OPI networking rules. 4-57 Mouse. 13-221 Mounting. 1-30 Mouse connector. 4-57. 22-389. 13-204. 13-212. 4-53. 21-362. 13-224. 8-108. 7-93. 1-31 Membrane keyboard. 9-117 Microcontroller. 15-253 Format. 13-201. 14-235.04. 14-229 Motherboard. 3-44. 3-43. 22-381 Machine control panel MCP 483C. 4-53. 26-489 Function blocks. 4-53. 34-549 MPI interface. 21-356. 12-193. 1-30. 13-225 OP 010 Assembly with PCU 50. 1-21. 3-49. 5-71. 1-22. 5-67. 20-346. 30-517 Mini handheld unit Axis selection switch. 4-55. 26-485 Machine area key. 26-493 Receive cycle time. 4-61. 13-202. 14-236 Malfunction. 19-334 Circuit diagram. 26-492 Machine control panel MCP 310. 3-45. 14-231 Interface. switch. 26-492 Mounting. 20-342. 7-93. 14-239 Memory Cache. 6-82. 26-487 Jumpering. 1-21. 34-546 Numerical key group. 2-34. 6-89. 9-135. 1-21. 12-193 Interface. 8-104. 7-94. 13-202. 9-152. 5-72. 8-103 Direction. 34-540 Noise immunity of the complete system. 3-43. 8-108. 21-351 Machine key. 26-483 Milling machine. 13-205. 26-486 Dimension drawing. 26-485 Mini DIN connector. 15-260 Mounting hole. 8-111. 26-485. 26-488 Power supply interface. 4-59. 19-334 Configuration. 34-549 MPI/L2-DP. 20-347. 12-197 PCU. 5-69. 14-229.04 C Index M M-version. 9-145. 4-54. 2004. 20-349. 15-253 Position. 26-491 Block diagram. 10-178 NCU box. 14-231. 13-223. 8-103 Memory Configuration. 26-495 Transmission cycle time. 7-93. 6-79.

12-192 PCU 50.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 12-199 Connections. 8-104 Mounting. 21-352 System. 2-40. 15-260. 14-231 PCU. 2-36 Panel cutout. 13-223 Assembly with OP 010C. 5-74. 5-69. 2-33 Spare part replacement. 2-37 PCU 20 Accessories. 7-95. 1-24 Mounting. 34-557 Modes. 5-71. 6-81. 8-106 Preparing for mounting. 7-100 Spare parts list. 1-26 Mounting hole. 34-544 Interface. 7-100. 2-35. 7-93. 4-56 Keyboard. 4-64. 14-229 PCI module. 1-28 Technical data. 2004. 26-483 Operator panel front. 2-40 Technical data. 3-52 Technical data. 1-25 Spare part replacement. 13-227 PCI slot. 7-94 OP 015A Assembly with PCU 50. 3-48 Index-586  Siemens AG. 23-406 Dimension drawing of machine control panel. 4-60 Softkey labeling. 8-109 Spare parts list. 1-26. 12-193 Interfaces. 1-24. 13-204. 23-407.C Index 04. 12-199 View. 2-36 Interfaces. 13-204. 3-49. 9-115. 12-197 Assembly with PCU 50. 23-408 Operating Conditions. 7-100 Spare parts. 14-231. 8-110 View. 1-23 Panel. 8-111 Spare parts. 1-25 Power consumption. 1-29 Spare parts. 1-28. 6-77. 3-52. 30-518 CNC keyboard panel cutout. 4-63 View. 7-95 Mounting. 2-33. 23-413 Panel cutout of machine control panel. 13-202 Operator panel. 14-238 Overall length. 8-106 Softkey labeling. 7-100 Technical data. 13-204. 1-23 Page up key. cut-out. 4-57 Installation. 2-36. 13-202. 2-40 Spare parts. 15-245. 23-405 Order number. 14-231 PC card. 1-27 Preparation for mounting. 6-82. 2-39 User interface. 3-48 Installation. 4-53. 13-203 Accessories. 3-44 OP 010S. 3-47. 8-104 OP 032S CNC keyboard dimension drawing. 1-21. 30-518 Control elements. 13-226. 23-415 Overtemperature. 8-105 Keyboard. standard. 3-43. 14-231 PCI/ISA slot. 12-197 Technical data. 6-82 Assembly with OP 010. 5-67. 3-45 Mounting. 12-193 Mounting. 4-57 Interfaces. 3-47 Keyboard. 14-229. 2-34 OP 012. 6-83. 4-64 Technical data. 7-95 Interfaces. 23-413 Power supply interface. 7-96 Preparation for mounting. 12-197. 4-65 Spare parts list. 1-27 OP 010C Assembly with PCU 50. 13-217. 3-48 Interfaces. 16-270 Installation. 8-106 Interfaces. 9-116. 8-108 Parallel interface. 3-49 Preparation for mounting. 14-236 PC card connector. 14-229. 1-21 P Page down key. 8-111. 7-99 User interface. 15-254 Assembly. 8-103. 7-96 Assignments. 4-64 Spare parts. 4-62. 4-61 Preparing for mounting. 4-61. 13-226 Override switch. 3-51 View. 4-62 Spare part replacement. 8-109. 6-87. 10-155. 13-215. 2-40 Spare parts list. 20-340. 6-85. 1-26 Assembly with OP 012. 12-193 PC keyboard. 2-35 Mounting. 13-204. 7-97. 13-202. 4-57 Connection. 8-105 Mounting. 7-96 Spare part replacement. 4-56. 8-111 Technical data. 1-21. 13-202. 4-55 Mounting. 3-48 Spare parts. 8-111. 4-54 OP 015 Assembly with PCU 50.04 Interfaces. 15-252 Optional user keys.

14-231 Processor. 14-229 Mouse. 24-451 Control elements. 24-456 Voltage supply. 6-82. 13-223. 7-96 Connections. 24-418 Communication parameters. 24-431. 13-223 Mounting preparation. 13-209 QWERTY Control elements. 14-238. 13-217. 24-447 PCB I/O. 24-448 PG interface. 13-217 Technical data. 24-418 Labeling. 13-209 Printer. 9-115. 14-229 Pushbutton panel. 13-202. 24-460 PLC output signals. 13-202. 13-219. 14-234 System information. 14-238 Startup. 23-408 Protective cap. 24-417 Q Quick Boot Mode. 24-470 Connecting the 24V supply. 4-54. 2004. 12-198. USB interface. 13-202. 13-209 Power Consumption. 2-34. 13-216 PCU 70. 12-193. 24-460 Plug connector. 13-201 Spare parts. 34-542. 13-222. 34-548 Keyboard.04. 14-238 Expansion boards. 1-30. 6-79. 7-94. 24-431 Panel cutout. 6-77. 6-90. 24-418 PLC input signals. 13-207 Overview. 14-231 Program. 24-464 Configuration. 14-235 Recall. 24-418 Interface operator panel. 24-419 Mounting. 2-37. 28-503. 8-105. 34-543 Plastic support. 14-231. 24-419 Interfaces. 24-473 Service information. 24-472 Rating plates. 2-34. memory. 24-418 Operator Panel Interface. 13-204. 1-23 Protective Cap. 13-201 PROFIBUS. 13-204. 8-104  Siemens AG. 9-117 R RAFI. 14-239 Rating plate. 3-48. 3-44. 24-468 System description. 13-205. 14-232 POST Errors. 24-444 Monitoring. 8-106. 13-203 Ready for Modes. 8-104 Power supply.04 C Index Assembly with OP 015. 12-191 Power supply cover. 26-483 Program key. 14-229. 13-208. 14-239 Interfaces and connections. 24-443 MPI/OPI interface. 30-518 Primary Master. 14-231 Keyboard interface. 4-57. 24-464 Inputs/outputs. 12-198. 4-54. 1-23 Program Manager key. 14-239 Technical data. 26-485 Operation. 5-67. 24-423 Programming device interface. 6-79. 14-231 Mouse interface. 13-204 Mounting bracket. 12-193 Interface. 14-231 Mounting. 1-21. 24-432 Expansion. 29-511 Interfaces. 14-237 PELV. 13-204. 14-229 Accessories. 29-511 QWERTY keyboard. Direct control key connection. 34-543 PS/2. 24-423 Design. 11-180 Pushbutton panel PP 012. 34-541 POWER LED. 10-155. 4-56. 7-96. 24-451 COM interface. 24-461 Power. 24-420 Global data table. 24-432 Project-specific components. 24-442 Emergency button. 5-68. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 13-209 Primary Slave. 1-25 Earth. 7-94. 24-418 Wiring. 14-235. 3-44. 13-206 Notes on installation. 13-204 Protective extra low voltage. 24-427 Euchner male connector. 23-415 RAM. 1-22. 12-193. 14-229 RAM bank. 24-443 Dimension drawing. 28-503. 12-191. 13-204. 13-203. 13-204 Interfaces. 14-230 PP 012 Circuits. 13-228 PLC interface. 11-180 Press-fit nut. 13-221 Supply. 34-543 Protective separation.04 Edition Index-587 . 13-202. 6-82 Protective cover. 13-204. 12-191. 24-446 Function blocks. 14-234 Spare parts. 24-443 Connections. 24-451 PP 031-MC. 24-417 Technical data.

labeling strips. 8-108. 15-253. 13-204. 6-83. 8-105 Spacebar. 21-369. 13-204. 6-77. 10-165 Hole. 4-54. 4-60. 3-43. 1-21. 13-212 Shipping lock. 2-37. 8-103. 1-25. 13-204. 7-93. 2-40. 13-208. 3-44. 13-220 Startup. 12-193. 7-100. 17-282 Resolution. 13-209 Select key. 1-28. 20-340. 26-485 Tab key. 26-485 Split rivet. 13-219. 4-64. hard disk. 1-26. 13-209 Settings. 4-62. selector switch. 6-83. 12-193 Rotary. 13-212 SETUP prompt. 7-97. cyclic.04 Key. 18-311 Replacing the. 4-60. 7-96. 1-24. 13-218 Soft key. 3-43. 4-61. 2-36. 3-43. 6-91. 5-68. 3-49. 1-25. 8-104 STN slimline screen. 13-209 Shared PCI/ISA slot. 1-25 Labeling. 14-231 S7-300. 24-424 Serial interface. 4-53. 14-233 Slimline screen. 7-93. 2-35. 6-81. 34-545 Shift key. 13-217 Reset. 26-484 Terminator. 15-252 Limiting values. 20-340. 4-61 Secondary conditions. 12-197. 6-81. 13-217. 1-29. 20-340. 13-226. 7-100. 5-67. 2-33. 14-232. 15-251 Retaining screws. 14-234 Switch S2. 6-79. 34-539 Secondary electrical conditions. 8-105. 7-96. 13-205. 14-239 Seal. 5-70. 8-108 Index-588  Siemens AG. 21-352. 7-95. 1-23 Spacer ring. 8-103. 6-82. 11-180 System Booting. 14-231 Summary screen. 4-56. 34-544 Safety. 8-109 RI suppression. 7-97. 2-39 Monitor. 13-209 Sunlight. 8-103. 17-282. 2-33. 34-540 RI suppression measures. 1-22. 2-37. 8-103. 4-53. 24-438 TFT Display. 15-257 Switching states. 1-28. 5-67. 13-208 T T version. 13-224 Status LED. 1-23 Technical data Videolink receiver. 13-203. 8-111 Spindle control. 6-87. 13-204. 4-57. 21-352. 13-228 SO-DIMM module. 7-94. 14-238. 12-199. 13-218 RJ45 socket. 4-64. 34-555 Sub D connector. 1-26. Machine control panel. 10-165 Spare parts. 14-231 Serial mouse. 5-70. 2-33. 26-483 Threshold. 7-94. 3-49. 14-231 RTS signal. 7-93. 6-87 Slot. 13-202 SDRAM. 7-93. 26-485 RESET button. 20-346. 13-223. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 1-22. 34-539 Secondary Master. 9-136. electrical. 13-209 Secondary Slave. 1-25. 3-49. 14-231 Sub-D socket. 13-224 Parameters. 2-36. 4-53. 34-545 Ribbon cable. 5-67. 1-21. 3-52. 8-103 Vertical. 34-549 S S7. 12-197. 26-486 RS 485. 34-557 Repeater.04 Edition .C Index 04. 3-43. 13-204. 1-21. 3-43. 3-48. 5-74. 1-22 Receive time frame. 8-106. 13-216. 34-547 SIMATIC Manager STEP 7. 4-53. 13-202. 12-193. 1-21. 3-43. 4-61. 34-555. 14-237 Screen resolution. 15-252 Tension. 1-21 Storage conditions. 30-518 Screws. 8-106 Softkeys. 5-71. 8-104 Temperature Change. 4-53. 14-229 Shielded signal cables. 11-183 Softkey Bar. 13-223. 8-111. 3-52. 3-47.. 6-85. 1-28. 15-262 TEMP LED. 6-82. 6-78. 17-280. 17-290. 8-106 Sealing area. 1-26. 8-103 Thermal power loss. 5-71. 13-218 Shock stressing. 22-394 Single I/O module. 1-28 Labeling strips. 26-491 Terminal block. 4-56. 13-224 Socket. 2-33. 24-427. jacks. 13-207. 18-314. 34-555 LED. 26-492 Setup menu. 4-54. 1-31. 1-25 Tension jacks. 7-95. 15-252 Monitoring. 15-263 Videolink transmitter. 1-25. 9-137 Relative humidity. 1-25. 2-34. 34-555 Signal type. 1-30. 12-195. 1-23. 4-53. 2004. 3-44. 6-79. 9-136. 13-205. 5-68. 6-82. 1-23 Selector switch. 33-537 Threaded Bolt. 2-34. 12-191. 13-204. 14-231 Service menu. 12-193. Guide. 5-69. 2-40. 6-90. 34-544 Slide-in labels. 14-239 Module.

26-485 Interface. 34-548 Interface X 102. 12-193 User keys. 1-21. 26-483 W Watch dog. 15-252 USB interface. 13-204. 6-89 USB socket. 6-77. 12-197 VGA. 4-56. 6-81. 13-202 Working memory. 13-202 Windows XP. 5-68 TP 015A Degree of protection. 8-111. 5-71. 15-253 Touch controller. 3-49. 6-79 Mounting. 13-226  Siemens AG. 12-193. 7-100. 1-26. 15-251. 12-191 Floppy disk drive. 15-256 Videolink receiver. 7-97. 15-242. 5-70 Spare part replacement. 5-70 Operation. 3-52. 6-86 Tension jacks. 6-79. 9-143. 24-430 X11. 9-139. 12-197. 15-253 Interface X 106. 8-111 Connector. 15-251. 32-525 USB module. 15-252. 8-109 V Vent slots. 6-87.04 Edition Index-589 . 1-28. 13-204. 13-209 User-specific functions. 6-77 Technical data. 15-245 Receiver. 6-87. 6-87. 4-56. 11-180 Keyboard. 8-111. 6-77 TP 012 Assembly with PCU 50. 6-87 Status LED. 6-83. 6-78 Shift key. 15-242. 5-74 Spare parts list. 6-89. 15-245. 6-77 Softkey labeling. 5-74. 6-77 Interfaces. 34-555 Turning. 8-105 X X1. 5-74 View. 8-105. 3-47. 13-207. 15-253 Mouse. 6-82 Operation. 15-257. 4-64. 1-31. 4-54. 5-67 Preparing for mounting. 12-193 Uppercase characters. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04. 6-85 Softkeys. 5-69. 14-234 Ventilation. 1-31. 24-428 X10 / X11. 6-79. 5-75 Spare parts. 6-77 Direct control keys. 15-242. 6-89 Touch screen. 6-77 View. 12-191 XT module. 13-202. 15-258 USB. 1-21 Upright mounting. 7-100. 15-253 Torque. 15-252 Floppy disk drive. 14-231 Interface. 8-104. machine. 1-21 Vibration stressing. 6-79 Trackball. 14-239 U Universal Serial Bus. 24-428 X4. 14-229. 24-428 X3. 1-26 Virtual memory. 2-35. 7-94. 34-549 Resolution. 24-429 XGA. 13-225 Voltage monitoring.04 C Index Tightening torque. 14-231 Connection. 5-68. 6-89 Scope of delivery. 26-485 User main menu. 6-90 Signal. 6-82. 1-25. 1-22. 9-137 Transport conditions. 6-85. 4-62. 2-34. 3-44. 11-180 X2. 7-95. 5-69 Mounting. 8-111 Sealing cap. 6-87. 6-78 Replacing spare parts. 13-223. 1-21. 26-483 Windows NT. 4-61. 15-253. 2-37. 1-24. 8-104 Transmit time frame. cyclic. 12-191. 14-229. 1-30. 2-40. 13-202. 15-245 Transmitter. 4-55. 34-555 Videolink Cable.04. 6-77 Spare parts list. 14-231 Tracker ball. 5-70 Interfaces. 8-108 Switch S1. 6-87. 6-81. 14-238 Front interface. 6-81. 3-47. 2004. 15-251.

2004.04 Edition . All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Notes Index-590  Siemens AG.C Index 04.

O. Phone: Fax: / / Suggestions and/or corrections . Box 3180 D-91050 Erlangen.siemens.: 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0 Edition: 04. please notify us on this sheet. Address Suggestions Corrections For Publication/Manual: SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manufacturer Documentation Manual Order No.docu@erlf. Germany (Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222 [Hotline] Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176 [Documentation] Email: motioncontrol.04 Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication.To SIEMENS AG A&D MC BMS P.de) From Name Company/Dept. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

.

SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D 611D SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D 611D MOTION CONTROL SYSTEMS SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Description of Functions Digitizing Installation & Start-Up Guide *) .Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (04.810D .Short Guide ManualTurn .ISO Turning/Milling - Operator’s Guide System Overview .HT 6 Diagnostics Guide *) Operator’s Guide *) .HMI - Description of Functions Linear Motor Description of Functions EMC .Hydraulics Module Guidelines .Tool Data Communication - Manufacturer/Service Documentation SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D/840Di 810D 611D .2004) General Documentation Safety Integrated Application Manual User Documentation SINUMERIK 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/ FM-NC SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D Brochure Catalog Ordering Info.Short Guide .810D .Lists *) .Short Guide .Special Functions - Description of Functions Tool Management Configuring Kit HMI Embedded Description of Functions Operator Interface OP 030 MCIS . Guide .HMI Advanced - User Documentation Manufacturer/Service Documentation SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840Di SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D Program. NC 60 *) Safety Integrated Application Manual AutoTurn .NC Data Transfer .Short Guide ShopTurn - Configuring (HW) *) .ShopMill .Cycles .ShopTurn Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Manufacturer/Service Documentation SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 611D 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Description of Functions Functions Drive Functions *) .ManualTurn .Advanced *) .Analog Module Manufacturer/Service Documentation Electronic Documentation SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D/840Di/ 810D 611.NC Data Management .Short Guide ShopMill .Tool Data Information System .ShopTurn . Motors SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D SINUMERIK 840Di SINUMERIK 840D/810D SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/ 810D DOC ON CD *) The SINUMERIK System Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Manual (HW + Installation and Start-Up) Manual Description of @ Event Functions Remote Diagnosis *) These documents are a minimum requirement .Measuring Cycles .HMI Embedded .840D - Operator Components (HW) *) Description of Functions . Var.Extended Functions .Programming/ Setup Operator’s Guide .Computer Link .Basic Machine *) .List Syst.Short Guide .ManualTurn .Fundamentals *) .840D/611D .ShopMill .

Siemens AG Automation & Drives Motion Control Systems P. Box 3180.siemens.: 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0 Printed in Germany .com/motioncontrol © Siemens AG. O. D – 91050 Erlangen Germany www. 2004 Subject to change without prior notice Order No.